SHARR
OPERATION GUIDE
Search based on
what you want to do
A
MAKE A COPY PRINT A DOCUMENT
SEND A FAX
SCAN AN IMAGE/ SAVE A JOB AND
SEND AN INTERNET FAX REUSE IT LATER
MAINTAIN
THE MACHINE
睐 About Operation Guide
MAKE A COPY
Conserve
Copy multiple pages on
one side of one sheet of
paper
Reduce copy mistakes
Print one set of copies for
proofing
Check the number of
scanned pages before
making copies
Make a copy of this type of original
Make a copy on this type of paper
Add the date or page numbers
Add a stamp
Add the page number
Add text
Assemble output into a pamphlet
Create a stapled pamphlet
Staple output
Create a blank margin for
punching
墨
Punch holes in output
Fold output in half
Other convenient functions
Functions used for specific purposes
• Make a copy of arranged photos
• Create a large poster
• Make a mirror-image copy
• Copy onto the center of the paper
• Make a negative copy
Convenient functions
• Use two machines simultaneously
• Give priority to a copy job
• Check the status of a reserved job
• Insert covers/inserts in copy output
• Copy a thin original
PRINT A DOCUMENT
Conserve
Print without a
computer
Print on this type
of paper
Add text or an
image
Other convenient functions
|i
Print attractive
output
Assemble output
into a pamphlet
Conserve
Print without a computer
Print attractive output
Print matching the size of
the paper
Bring out faint text and
lines
Adjust the brightness and
contrast
Assemble output into a pamphlet
Print on this type of paper
A.， Rotate the image 180
degrees
Add a watermark to print
data
Overlay a fixed form on the
print data
峰
Add text or
in image
Other convenient functions
Correct the size or orientation of the print data
• Enlarge or reduce the print image
• Print a mirror-image
Security is important
• Print confidentially
• Print an encrypted PDF file
Functions used for specific purposes
• Print an "invoice copy"
• Create a large poster
Convenient functions
• Give priority to a print job
• Use two machines simultaneously
• Store frequently used print settings
• Store a print job
• Print and fold the output
SEND A FAX
Conserve
Send when the rate is
lowest
Check received data before
printing
Send two original pages as
a single page
mM
_
IIP11
Relay a transmission
through a branch office
Send this type of document
令
丄 ^ Bulky original (shadows
appear at edges)
Bound original such as a
[KjBj book (one page at a time)
More original pages than
can be loaded at once
Original printed on both
sides
ID card or other card
Prevent transmission to the wrong destination
Send a clear document
Save trouble
Store frequently used
settings
曾 XXXX-9874
音 XXXX-4567
®XXXX-5432
窗 XXXX-9999
View the transmission log
Send to multiple
destinations
©XXXX-6789
©XXXX-9874
©XXXX-4567
@XXXX^5432]
曾 XXXX-9999
Easily specify an address
(search number)
Security is important
的… b / 1 Check the destination once
more before sending
Print protected reception
data
Send a document at the
other machine’s request
豪
Send confidentially
Initiate reception of a
document from a sending
machine
Other convenient functions
Convenient management functions
• Forward a received fax to a network address
• Print a list of addresses
Convenient functions
• Send a thin original
• Select a transmission destination from a global address book
• Give priority to a transmission
• Use an extension phone
SCAN AN IMAGE/ SEND AN INTERNET FAX
Send a clear image
Adjust the contrast or
image quality
Send without shadows at
the edges
Adjust the resolution
before sending
峰
Suppress the background of
a transmitted document
Send this type of document
令
Bulky original (shadows
appear at edges)
Bound original such as a
[a]BI book (one page at a time)
More original pages than
can be loaded at once
Mixed-size originals
■11
Original printed on both
k
---：
峰
A
sides
==:
Original with background
Prevent transmission to the wrong destination
Check the result of
transmission
Stamp scanned original
pages
Check the log of previous
transmissions
Send a smaller file
み •网
Send at low resolution
| Compress a file before
sending
^ Reduce an image before
sending
Send an image
in black &
Send two original pages as ID or other card
a single page
Save trouble
Store frequently used
settings
■讀 Q
滅^^、
Send to multiple
destinations
aaa@aa.aa.c<
bbb@ bb.bb.c
CCC@CC.CC.C(
ddd @ dd.dd.c
View the transmission log
eee @ee.ee.C'
aaa @ aa.aa.c
bbb @ bb.bb.
ccc @ cc.cc.c
♦ ddd @dd.dd. |
eee @ ee.ee. e
ノ
L _
Easily specify an address
(search number)
Send an Internet fax from a
computer
Bound original such as a
book (one page at a time)
Other convenient functions
Convenient management functions
• Forward a received fax to a network address
• Print a list of transmission destinations
Convenient functions
• Scan a thin original
• Select a transmission destination from a global address book
• Send at a specified time
• Give priority to a transmission
• Send in USB memory mode
SAVE A JOB AND REUSE IT LATER
Search for a file
Organize my files
MAINTAIN THE MACHINE
Clean the
machine
Replace a toner
cartridge
Replace the
staple cartridge
Replace the
stamp cartridge
0
r
Replace the toner
collection container
Dispose of punch
waste
Clean the machine
Clean the document glass and
automatic document feeder
Clean the bypass feed
roller
Clean the original feed
roller
ABOUT OPERATION GUIDE
There are two ways to search for a topic in this guide: you can use an "I want to..." menu, or you can use a regular table
of contents.
The following explanation assumes that Adobe Reader 8.0 is being used (Some buttons do not appear in the default
state.).
Body page
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Click a button below to move to the page that you wish to view.
4-1-i
け I 右， | M # # N H / 824 • 2 i © ® [62.8% > 1 |n| WlMI
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
e machine. F^bb&b read ihta chap tar belore using mo fnaEhina.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
EXTERIOR
lb iUtenraiiCiiy Indc mu soini 的 mfiJs， B
d%of 2-iudepd orlQinafe c^an bs auloiuiicdty fi^annet
» l=TJClNdi THt CM
(1) Aulw
Thlcij
■s aulaiuiicairy &
苷 d^JdHSUL Cpa 供 1-37J
¢3) Front cotpt
Open 1hi& «w«r 1o swilcti ih» mam pcwsf svittc^ki BOna
w TUT or Is reiplsce a lanef cartrkSgfi
议 tUHNIHQ tW POWER ON AND OFF tpatfe I- I6J
« REPLACING THE TONER
1 销
谢 Pop9F pmv Mi
TWi ovtpui lo iN> li_h«r dicM«r] #
例 Ex" truy 綱 H (rfghi
W 細 instiiM, OUi|
晴 }■
_ Can l>
Ou 料 1納
FbhliJm-
&ff Osllwvil Id EHI&
ki^i (cAfibBr bfay)
d9bi$r«d b> W ivaiy,
INER QARTRJDGES ¢№4
to_ 抑^ 0141 fet A pynch
punch hc*«in ouiput,
*»■ FFNlSHCR 4pag« 1 刪
«• mfiW1 2 3 4 *
_ ovtM
uMa Eb4di llnqfii
QfArfld«fi pdlWl
TMIft Uftftd to u4ect F4J
CQ04BS
保 oe ⑽ TIONP 細
tuncEifiim and mlar 她 fium&H af
tEL ipflgn 1-0)
■ Pefiptierd devH»
1-3
Contents
(1) Return to top page button
If an operation does not proceed as expected, click this
button to start over again.
(2) Back one page button
Displays the previous page.
(3) Forward one page button
Displays the next page.
(4) Return to previously displayed page button
Displays the page that was displayed before the current
page.
(5) Adobe Reader Help button
Opens Adobe Reader Help.
(6) Contents button
Displays the contents of each chapter.
For example, if the current page is a page in the body of
the printer chapter, this button shows the contents of the
printer chapter.
• If a button does not appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help to display the button.
• Caution when printing
If all pages are printed, the menu pages of the "I want to..." menu will also be printed. To print only the pages that contain
the explanation of a function, specify a page range.
II
MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE
Operation manuals in PDF format (this manual)
The manuals in PDF format provide detailed explanations of the procedures for using the machine in each mode. To
view the PDF manuals, download them from the hard drive in the machine. The procedure for downloading the manuals
is explained in "Downloading the Operation Guide" in the Quick Start Guide.
1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
This chapter provides information, such as basic operation procedures, how to load paper, and
machine maintenance.
j ^ ^
2. COPIER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.
3. PRINTER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the print function.
4. FACSIMILE
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.
5. SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and
the Internet fax function.
6_ DOCUMENT FILING
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing
function. The document filing function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job,
or the data of a print job, as a file on the machine's hard drive. The file can be called up as
needed.
7. SYSTEM SETTINGS
This chapter explains the "System Settings", which are used to configure a variety of parameters
to suit the aims and the needs of your workplace. Current settings can be displayed or printed out
from the "System Settings".
8. TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter explains how to remove paper misfeeds and provides answers to frequently asked
questions regarding the operation of the machine in each mode. Refer to this manual when you
have difficulty using the machine.
Printed manuals
Manual name
Contents
Safety Guide
This manual contains instructions for using the machine safely and lists the specifications of the machine
and its peripheral devices.
Software Setup
Guide
This manual explains how to install the software and configure settings to use the machine as a printer or
scanner.
Quick Start Guide
This manual provides easy-to-understand explanations of all the functions of the machine in a single
volume. Detailed explanations of each of the functions can be found in the manuals in PDF format.
■ ■ ■
III
ABOUT OPERATION MANUAL
This manual explains how to use the MX-M283N/MX-M363N/MX-M453N/MX-M503N digital multifunctional system.
Please note
• For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this manual, please refer to the Software Setup Guide.
• For information on your operating system, please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function.
• The explanations of screens and procedures in a Windows environment are primarily for Windows Vista®. The screens may
vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.
• The explanations of screens and procedures in a Macintosh environment are based on Mac OS X v10.4 in the case of Mac OS
X. The screens may vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.
• Wherever "MX-xxxx" appears in this manual, please substitute your model name for "xxxx".
• Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the manual, please
contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem
is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during the use of the product or its
options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for any damage that occurs due
to use of the product.
Warning
• Reproduction, adaptation or translation of the contents of the manual without prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under copyright laws.
• All information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Illustrations and the operation panel and touch panel shown in this manual
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.
The explanations in this manual assume that a right tray and stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer are installed on the MX-M503N.
For some functions and procedures, the explanations assume that devices other than the above are installed.
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine
due to product improvements and modifications.
Icons used in the manuals
The icons in the manuals indicate the following types of information:
/K Warning
This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of human death or injury.
A\ Caution
This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of human injury or property damage.
①
This alerts you to a situation where
there is a risk of machine damage or
failure.
This provides a supplemental
explanation of a function or procedure.
©
This explains how to cancel or correct
an operation.
This indicates the name of a system setting and provides a brief
explanation of the setting.
When "System Settings:11 appears:
A general setting is explained.
When "System Settings (Administrator):11 appears:
A setting that can only be configured by an administrator is
explained.
iv
CHAPTER 1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
This chapter provides information, such as basic operation procedures, how to load paper, and machine maintenance.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS . 1-3
• EXTERIOR . 1-3
• INTERIOR . 1-5
• AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND
DOCUMENT GLASS . 1-6
•SIDE AND BACK . 1-7
•OPERATION PANEL . 1-8
TOUCH PANEL . 1-10
• STATUS DISPLAY . 1-12
• SYSTEM BAR . 1-13
TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF . 1-15
• ENERGY SAVE FUNCTIONS . 1-16
• [POWER SAVE] KEY . 1-16
USER AUTHENTICATION . 1-17
•AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER . 1-17
• AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/
PASSWORD . 1-19
HOME SCREEN . 1-22
REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE . 1-23
ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG . 1-24
LOADING PAPER
IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER . 1-27
• NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS . 1-27
•THE MEANING OF "R" IN PAPER SIZES ■… 1-27
• USEABLE PAPER . 1-28
TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 . 1-30
• LOADING PAPER AND CHANGING THE
PAPER SIZE . 1-30
TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (LARGE
CAPACITY TRAY) . 1-32
• LOADING PAPER . 1-32
LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY . 1-34
• IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING THE
BYPASS TRAY . 1-35
ORIGINALS
PLACING THE ORIGINAL . 1-38
• PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER . 1-38
• PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE
DOCUMENT GLASS . 1-40
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
PERIPHERAL DEVICES . 1-42
FINISHER . 1-44
•PART NAMES . 1-44
•SUPPLIES . 1-44
• FINISHER MAINTENANCE . 1-45
FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) . 1-47
•PART NAMES . 1-47
•SUPPLIES . 1-47
• FINISHER (LARGE STACKER)
MAINTENANCE . 1-48
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER . 1-50
•PART NAMES . 1-50
•SUPPLIES . 1-50
• SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
MAINTENANCE . 1-51
PUNCH MODULE . 1-54
• DISCARDING PUNCH WASTE . 1-54
SHARP OSA . 1-57
• APPLICATION COMMUNICATION
MODULE . 1-57
• EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE
(MX-AMX3) . 1-58
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
MAINTENANCE
REGULAR MAINTENANCE . 1-60
• CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS
AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER . . . 1-60
• CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER … 1-62
• CLEANING THE ORIGINAL FEED
ROLLER . 1-62
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES . 1-63
REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION
CONTAINER . 1-66
REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE . 1-68
ENTERING TEXT
FUNCTIONS OF THE MAIN KEYS . 1-70
• ENTERING TEXT FROM A KEYBOARD . 1-71
1-2
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
This section provides basic information about the machine. Please read this chapter before using the machine.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
EXTERIOR
⑴
(2)
⑶
This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both
sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned.
隊 PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-38)
When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
(6) Output tray (center tray)
Output is delivered to this tray.
Front cover
Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On"
or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge.
隊 TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)
隊 REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES (page
1-63)
Paper pass unit*
This transfers output to the finisher (large stacker) or
(7) Finisher*
This can be used to staple output. A punch module can
also be installed to punch holes in output.
咳 FINISHER (page 1-44)
saddle stitch finisher.
(4) Operation panel
This is used to select functions and enter the number of
copies.
隊 OPERATION PANEL (page 1-8)
Peripheral device.
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
(8) Punch module*
This is used to punch holes in output.
Requires a finisher (large stacker).
瞭 PUNCH MODULE (page 1-54)
(9) USB connector (A type)
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB
memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
(10) Keyboard
This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine.
When not used, it can be stored under the operation
panel.
隊 ENTERING TEXT FROM A KEYBOARD (page 1-71)
(11) Saddle stitch finisher*
This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch
function for folding and stapling output and the fold function
for folding output in half are also available. A punch module
can also be installed to punch holes in output.
暖 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (page 1-50)
(12) Finisher (large stacker)
This can be used to staple output.
隊 FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) (page 1-47)
(13) Tray 1
This holds paper.
暖 TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 (page 1-30)
(14) Tray 2
This holds paper.
暖 TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 (page 1-30)
(15) Tray 3 (when a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer or a
stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed)*
This holds paper.
暖 TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 (page 1-30)
(16) Tray 4 (when a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is
installed)*
This holds paper.
隊 TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4 (page 1-30)
(17) Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is installed)*
This holds paper.
瞭 TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (LARGE CAPACITY
TRAY) (page 1 -32)
Peripheral device.
1-4
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
INTERIOR
(18) (19) (20) (21) (22)
(23)
(24) (25) (26) (27) (28)
(18) Toner cartridges
These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out
in the cartridge, replace the cartridge with a new
cartridge.
隊 REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES (page 1-63)
(19) Fusing unit
Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto
the paper.
/K Caution
The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn yourself
when removing a paper misfeed.
(20) Right side cover
Open this cover to remove a misfeed.
(21) Paper reversing section cover
This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open
this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
(22) Bypass tray
Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 1 1"R or A4R, be
sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.
隊 LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-34)
(23) Main power switch
This is used to power on the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this
switch in the "on" position.
隊 TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)
(24) Toner collection container
This collects excess toner that remains after printing.
^ REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION
CONTAINER (page 1-66)
Your service technician will collect the toner collection
container.
(25) Handle
Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine.
(26) Right cover of stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer
Right cover of stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer
(when a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer or a
stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed)
Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 3 or tray 4.
(27) Paper tray right side cover
Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 1 or tray 2.
(28) Right side cover release lever
To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to
open the right side cover.
1-5
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT
GLASS
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(1) Paper feed roller
This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
(2) Document feeding area cover
Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean
the paper feed roller.
(3) Original guides
These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly.
Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
暖 PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-38)
(4) Document feeder tray
Place originals in this tray. 1 -sided originals must be
placed face up.
隊 PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 1-38)
⑼ Original exit tray
Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
(6) Scanning area
Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned
here.
隊 REGULAR MAINTENANCE (page 1-60)
(7) Original size detector
This detects the size of an original placed on the
document glass.
^ PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT
GLASS (page 1-40)
(8) Document glass
Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot
be fed through the automatic document feeder.
^ PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT
GLASS (page 1-40)
1-6
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
(6) Extension phone socket
When the fax function of the machine is used, an
extension phone can be connected to this socket.
(7) Telephone line socket
When the fax function of the machine is used, the
telephone line is connected to this socket.
When the fax expansion kit is installed
SIDE AND BACK
(1) USB connector (A type)
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB
memory to the machine.
(2) LAN connector
Connect the し AN cable to this connector when the
machine is used on a network.
For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
(3) USB connector (B type )
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
A computer can be connected to this connector to use
the machine as a printer.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
(4) Service-only connector
/K Caution
This connector is for use only by service technicians.
Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the
machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians:
The cable connected to the service connector must be
less than 118" (3 m) in length.
(5) Power plug
\l7 \17 \—/
12 3 4
/V /V
i
1
1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
OPERATION PANEL
⑴ (2) (3) (4) (5) ⑹
(1) Touch panel
Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of
operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected
item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
perform an operation.
暖 TOUCH PANEL (page 1-10)
(2) [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
Press this key to display the system settings menu
screen. The system settings are used to configure paper
tray settings, store addresses for transmission
operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine
easier to use.
(3) [JOB STATUS] key
Press this key to display the job status screen. The job
status screen is used to check information on jobs and to
cancel jobs.
For details, see the chapters for each of the functions in
this manual.
(4) PRINT mode indicators
• READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
• DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights
steadily while printing is taking place.
(5) Numeric keys
These are used to enter the number of copies, fax
numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are
also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the
system settings).
⑹ [CLEAR] key (©)
Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
(7) [HOME] key
Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently
used settings can be registered in the my menu screen to
enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
瞭 HOME SCREEN (page 1-22)
(8) IMAGE SEND mode indicators
• LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax
or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of
an image in scan mode.
• DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot
be printed because of a problem such as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has
not been sent.
1 -8
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
⑼
(9) [START] key
Press this key to copy or scan an original. This key is also
used to send a fax in fax mode.
(10) [LOGOUT] key (©)
Press this key to log out after you have logged in and
used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial
line.
暖 USER AUTHENTICATION (page 1-17)
(11) [#/P] key (©)
When using the copy function, press this key to use a job
program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialing.
(12) [CLEAR ALL] key (@)
Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that
have been selected and start operation from the initial
state.
(13) [STOP] key ((§))
Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an
original.
(14) [POWER SAVE] key ((§))/ indicator
Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off
mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key ((§)) blinks when the machine
is in auto power shut-off mode.
隊 [POWER SAVE] KEY (page 1-16)
(15) [POWER] key (©)
Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
隊 TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)
(16) Main power indicator
This lights up when the machine's main power switch is
in the "on" position.
暖 TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 1-15)
1-9
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
TOUCH PANEL
This section explains how to use the touch panel.
• To enter text， see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-70).
• For information on the screens and procedures for using the system settings, see "Common Operation Methods"
(page 7-4) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
Using the touch panel
Example 1
(1)
⑶
(1) Mode select keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and document filing inodes.
(2) Settings for each function are easily selected and canceled by touching the keys on the screen with your finger.
When an item is selected, a beep will sound and the item will be highlighted to confirm the selection.
(3) Keys that are grayed out cannot be selected.
If you touch a key that cannot be selected, a double beep will sound.
Example 2
Example 3
(1) (2) (3) (4)
I L
Special Modes
1
Margin Shift
Cancel |[ OR
Right Left Down
, Side 1 哩 Side 2
kn isr 圍
ぬ) ね）
4a sl a a
(1) If the initial state of a key in a screen is highlighted,
the key is selected. To change the selection, touch
one of the other keys to highlight that key.
(2) The Q Q keys can be used to increase or
decrease a value. To make a value change quickly,
keep your finger on the key.
(3) Touch this key to cancel a setting.
(4) Touch the [OK] key to enter and save a setting.
⑴ (2)
(1) Some items in the special modes screen are selected
by simply touching the key of the item.
To cancel a selected item, touch the highlighted key
once again so that it is no longer highlighted.
(2) When settings extend over multiple screens, touch
the [H key or the 3 key to switch through the
screens.
1-10
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Enter value via the 10-key.
Cancel I OK
Touch a numeric value display key to directly enter a
value with the numeric keys.
Press the numeric keys to enter any numeric value
and then touch the [OK] key.
Example 4
When at least one special mode is selected, the 圍
key appears in the base screen.
Example 5
The [SlI key can be touched to display a list of the
selected special modes.
_ Exposure I
■
i Copy Ratio
Original 1 I Paper Select ]
Function Review
.. ■ • Shift :Rignt
3 1 " Front : 1/2 inch/Back： 1/2 inch
. Edge： 1/2 inch
" Center： 1/2 inch
. Front : 2 -yiaed/Back : Insert
' Insertion A: 10 Page/B：10 Page
(^\ The touch panel (screen) shown in this manual is a descriptive image. The actual screen is slightly different.
■11
Contents
100
100%
2 2 -TI j I- -- 命 j
a ED a a
i Q
一 a N
1 1 S 0
OK - - - -
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
STATUS DISPLAY
When the base screen of a mode appears, the right side of the touch panel shows the machine's status.
The information shown is explained below.
Example: Basic screen of copy mode
(1) Display selection key
The status display can be switched between "Job Status"
and "MFP Status11.
If the job status screen is displayed, the status display
automatically changes to "MFP Status".
(2) "Job Status" display
This shows the first 4 print jobs in the print queue (the job
in progress and jobs waiting to be printed). The type of
job, the set number of copies, the number of copies
completed, and the job status appear.
Jobs cannot be manipulated in this screen. Jobs can only
be manipulated in the job status screen.
For details, see the chapters for each of the functions in
this manual.
(3) "MFP Status" display
This shows machine system information.
"Maintenance Information"
This shows machine maintenance information by means
of codes.
1-12
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
SYSTEM BAR
The system bar appears at the bottom of the touch panel.
The items that appear in the system bar are explained below.
-p
. _
_ Exposure I
■
8 ■:譏 111
2.8V2xllRl=J
. 8V2xl4 1=1
11x17 巨!
%
Plain
8%xll
I Copy i
(1)
Original I I Paper Select I
MFP Status
020/015
Copying
020/015
Waiting
020/015
Waiting
020/015
(1) Job status display
The job in progress or reserved are indicated by icons.
The icons are as follows.
Print job
0
Copy job
eT
Scan to E-mail
job
Scan to FTP job
Scan to
Network Folder
job
■P
Scan to
Desktop job
V
Fax
transmission
job
Fax reception
job
¥
PC-Fax
transmission
job
ぼ
Internet fax
transmission
job
(Including
Direct SMTP)
Internet Fax
reception job
(Including
Direct SMTP)
PC-l-Fax
transmission
job
Broadcast job*
Inbound routing
job
圃
Scan to HDD
file print job
Tandem
copy/print job
J
Metadata send
job
This appears in a multi-mode broadcast job.
When a base screen other than that of image send mode
appears, the number of the tray being used to feed paper
appears during paper feeding. The color appearing in the
job status display depends on the job status as indicated
in the table below.
The job status display can be touched to show the job
status screen.
Job status
display
Machine Configuration
Green
A print, scan or other job is being
executed normally.
Yellow
The machine is warming up or on
standby, or a job is being canceled.
Red
A paper misfeed or other error
condition has occurred.
Gray
The machine has no jobs.
(2) Icon display
This icon appears when data is being sent or
received.
0
This icon appears when fax, scan, or
Internet fax data is stored in the machine's
memory. When data to be transmitted is
stored, 藝 appears. When received data is
stored, 0 appears. When both data to be
transmitted and received data are stored,
0 appears.
This appears when a service technician has
activated simulation mode.
This appears when a USB memory or other
USB device is connected to the machine.
1-13
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
©
This appears when the data security kit is
being used.
亡
This appears while the remote operation
function is used.
el
The icon appears when the machine is
communicating with an external application.
(3) Brightness adjustment key
Touch this key to adjust the brightness of the touch
panel.
When touched, the following screen appears next to the
key.
Touch the [+] key or the [■] key to adjust the brightness.
When finished, touch the brightness adjustment key
again to close the screen.
1-14
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF
The machine has two power switches. The main power switch is at the lower left after the front cover is opened. The
other power switch is the [POWER] key (©) on the operation panel at the top right.
Main power switch
When the main power switch is switched on, the main
power indicator on the operation panel lights up.
Turning on the power
(1) Switch the main power switch to the "on"
position.
(2) Press the [POWER] key (@) to turn on the
power.
[POWER] key
Main power indicator
旬
# —
©
勿 (0)
J
[POWER] key
Turning off the power
(1) Press the [POWER] key (@) to turn off the
power.
(2) Switch the main power switch to the "off"
position.
• Before switching off the main power switch, make sure that the DATA indicator for printing and the DATA and LINE
indicators for image send are not lit or blinking on the operation panel.
Switching off the main power switch or removing the power cord from the outlet while any of the indicators are lit or blinking
may damage the hard drive and cause data to be lost.
• Switch off both the [POWER] key (©) and the main power switch and unplug the power cord if you suspect a machine
failure, if there is a bad thunderstorm nearby, or when you are moving the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax function, always keep the main power switch in the "on" position.
Restarting the machine
In order for some settings to take effect, the machine must be restarted.
If a message in the touch panel prompts you to restart the machine, press the [POWER] key (©) to turn off the power
and then press the key again to turn the power back on.
In some states of the machine, pressing the [POWER] key (©) to restart will not make the settings take effect. In this case,
use the main power switch to switch the power off and then on.
1-15
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
ENERGY SAVE FUNCTIONS
This product has the following two energy save functions that conform to the Energy Star guidelines to help conserve
natural resources and reduce environmental pollution.
Preheat Mode (Low power mode)
Preheat mode automatically lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and thereby reduces power consumption if the
machine remains in the standby state for the interval of time set in "Preheat Mode Setting" in the system settings
(administrator).
This keeps the fusing unit at a lower temperature and reduces power consumption while the machine is on standby.
The machine automatically wakes up and returns to normal operation when a print job is received, a key is pressed on
the operation panel, or an original is placed.
Auto power shut-off mode (Sleep mode)
Auto power shut-off mode automatically shuts off power to the display and the fusing unit if the machine remains in the
standby state for the interval of time set in "Auto Power Shut-Off Timer" in the system settings (administrator). This
mode provides the lowest level of power consumption. Considerably more power is saved than in preheat mode,
however, the wakeup time is longer. This mode can be disabled in the system settings (administrator).
The machine automatically wakes up and resumes normal operation when a print job is received or when the blinking
[POWER SAVE] key ((©)) is pressed.
[POWER SAVE] KEY
Press the [POWER SAVE] key ((§)) to put the machine in auto power shut-off mode or wake it up from auto power
shut-off mode. The [POWER SAVE] key ((§)) has an indicator that indicates whether or not the machine is in auto power
shut-off mode.
When the [POWER SAVE]
key ((§)) indicator is off in the
standby state
The machine is ready to be used.
If the [POWER SAVE] key ((§)) is pressed when the indicator is off, the indicator will blink
and the machine will enter auto power shut-off mode after a brief interval.
When the [POWER SAVE]
key ((§)) indicator is blinking
The machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
If the [POWER SAVE] key ((§)) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will
turn off and the machine will return to the ready state after a brief interval.
[POWER SAVE]
key / indicator
1-16
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
USER AUTHENTICATION
User authentication restricts the use of the machine to users that have been registered. The functions that each user is
allowed to use can be specified, allowing the machine to be customized to meet the needs of your workplace.
When the administrator of the machine has enabled user authentication, each user must log in to use the machine.
There are different types of user authentication, and each type has a different login method.
For more information, see the explanations of the login methods.
隊 AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER (see below)
暖 AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/ PASSWORD (page 1-19)
AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER
The following procedure is used to log in using a user number received from the administrator of the machine.
When controlled by user number
[/
i
h / ®©@
/ ®@®
/ ⑦®®
■ / ®®@
Enter your user number (5 to 8 digits)
with the numeric keys.
Each entered digit will be displayed as ■■氺 ■■■
1-17
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
When you have finished using the
machine and are ready to log out, press
the [LOGOUT] key (® )■
However, note that the [LOGOUT] key (©) cannot be used to log out when a fax number is being entered in fax
mode, as the key is used for fax number entry.
If a preset duration of time elapses after the machine is last used, the Auto Clear function will activate. When Auto
Clear activates, logout takes place automatically. However, when PC Scan mode is used, logout does not take
place when the [LOGOUT] key (©) is pressed and Auto Clear does not operate. Change to a different mode on
the machine and then log out.
If an incorrect user number is entered 3 times in a row...
If "A Warning when Login Fails" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the machine will lock for 5 minutes if
an incorrect user number is entered 3 times in a row.
Verify the user number that you should use with the administrator of the machine.
The administrator can clear the locked state.
This is done from [User Control] and then [Default Settings] in the Web page menu.
1-18
Contents
User Authentication
t
Touch the [OK] key.
After the entered user number is authenticated, the user count
screen will appear briefly.
Usage status : used/remaining pages
Black-white : 87,654,321/12,345,678
When page limits have been set in "Pages Limit Group List" in
the system settings (administrator), the number of pages
remaining will appear. (The remaining number of pages that the
user can use in each mode (copy, scan, etc.) appears.) The
amount of time that this screen appears can be changed using
"Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
When the user number is an 8-digit number, this step is not necessary. (Login takes place automatically after the user
number is entered.)
④ ® ® @)
® ® ® @
@ ® ® ®l
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/ PASSWORD
The following procedure is used to log in using a login name and password received from the administrator of the
machine or the administrator of the LDAP server.
When controlled by login name and password
(Different items will appear in the screen when LDAP authentication is used.)
User Authentication
f Login Name j
七：
[ Password ]
[ Auth to： ] Login Locally
Touch the [Login Name] key or the 网
key.
If the [Login Name] key is touched, a screen for selecting the
user name appears. Go to the next step.
If the [^] key is touched, an area for entering a "Registration
No." appears [■■■]■
Use the numeric keys to enter your registration number that
has been stored in "User List" in the system settings
(administrator). After entering the registration number, go to
step 3.
(A)
Device Account
▲
User
(B)
.. ode User Selection
j User 0001
[user 0002
User 0003
fuser 0004
十
User 0005
fuser 0006
了. |
| User 0007
fuser 0008
H -
• User 0009
fuser 0010 ]
3
User 0011
fuser 0012
ABCD EFGH |l IJKL J|^ MNOP || PRSTU Jj/WXYZ Jb^Jl
II
(D)
Select the user name.
(A) [Direct Entry] key
Use this key if you have not been stored in "User List" in
the system settings (administrator) and are only using
LDAP authentication.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter your login name.
(B) User selection keys
Touch your user name that has been stored in "User List"
in the system settings (administrator).
(C) [Back] key
Touch this key to return to the login screen.
(D) Index tabs
All users appear on the [All] tab. Users are grouped on the
other tabs according to the search characters entered
when each user was stored.
LDAP authentication can be used when the administrator of the server provides LDAP service on the LAN (local area
network).
1-19
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
User Authentication
1. 0K 1
[ Login Name ] 氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺
E
User Name : User 0001
( Password j
y J Login Locally
… - . 飞 I - - .
Touch the [Password] key.
A text entry screen for entering the password will appear.
Enter your password that is stored in "User List" in the system
settings (administrator).
If you are logging in to an LDAP server, enter the password that
is stored with your LDAP server login name.
Each entered character will be displayed as ■■氺 ■■■ When you
have finished entering the password, touch the [OK] key.
When authentication is by LDAP server and you have different
passwords stored in "User List" in the system settings
(administrator) and in the LDAP server, use the password
stored in the LDAP server.
• When an LDAP server has been stored, [Auth to:] can be changed.
•If you are logging in using a user selection key...
The LDAP server was stored when your user information was stored, and thus the LDAP server will appear as the
authentication server when you select your login name. Go to step 4.
• When logging in using the [Direct Entry] key...
Touch the [Auth to:] key.
User Authentication
Login Name I 氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺
User Name : Direct Entry
Password 1 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺
Auth to: I Login Locally
f Auth to:
Select the LDAP server and touch the [OK] key.
1-20
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
When you have finished using the
machine and are ready to log out, press
the [LOGOUT] key (® )■
©
However, note that the [LOGOUT] key (©) cannot be used to log out when a fax number is being entered in fax
mode, as the key is used for fax number entry.
If a preset duration of time elapses after the machine is last used, the Auto Clear function will activate. When Auto
Clear activates, logout takes place automatically. However, when PC Scan mode is used, logout does not take
place when the [LOGOUT] key (©) is pressed and Auto Clear does not operate. Change to a different mode on
the machine and then log out.
If an incorrect login name or password is entered 3 times in a row...
If "A Warning when Login Fails" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the machine will lock for 5 minutes if
an incorrect login name or password is entered 3 times in a row.
Verify the login name and password that you should use with the administrator of the machine.
The administrator can clear the locked state.
This is done from [User Control] and then [Default Settings] in the Web page menu.
When LDAP authentication is used, the [E-mail Address] key may appear, depending on the authentication method. If the
[E-mail Address] key appears in step 3, touch the key.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter your e-mail address.
User Authentication
Login Name I 氺氺 氺氺氺 木氺氺
User Name : User 0002
E-mail Address!
Auth to： I I Server \
%
System Settings (Administrator): User List
This is used to store names of users of the machine. Detailed information such as the login name, user number, and password are
also stored. Ask the administrator of the machine for the information that you need to use the machine.
■21
Contents
User Authentication
( ^ ]
f Login Name
j 木木 木本 木 氺氺氺
せ
User Name
: User 0001
f Password
j 木木 木木 氺氺氺 本木 木木 本木 氺氺 木木 氺氺 木木 氺氺 木木 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 木
[ Auth to：
j Login Locally
(Different items will appear in the screen when LDAP
authentication is used.)
Touch the [OK] key.
After the entered login name and password are authenticated,
the user count screen will appear briefly.
Usage status : used/remaining pages
Black-white : 87,654,321/12,345,678
When page limits have been set in "Pages Limit Group List" in
the system settings (administrator), the number of pages
remaining will appear. (The remaining number of pages that the
user can use in each mode (copy, scan, etc.) appears.) The
amount of time that this screen appears can be changed using
"Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
® ® ® (§)
@® ® @
® @ © ®l
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
HOME SCREEN
When the [HOME] key is pressed on the operation panel, the home screen appears in the touch panel. Mode selection
keys appear in the home screen. These keys can be touched to open the base screen of each mode. The [My Menu]
key can be touched to display shortcuts to functions stored in "My Menu".
1st screen
(1)
(2) (3)
2nd screen
(1)
⑺
(1) Mode select keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send,
document filing, and Sharp OSA modes. Key names and
images can be changed. (1st screen only)
(2) Background Image
Background image of the home screen. The background
image can be changed.
(3) [My Menu] key
Touch to go to your my menu screen. Key names and
images can be changed.
(4) Application Keys
Up to four shortcuts to Sharp OSA applications can be
displayed.
(5) Title
This shows the title of the my menu screen.
(6) Shortcut key
A registered function appears as a shortcut key.
The key can be touched to select the registered function
(7) User name
This shows the name of the logged in user.
The user name appears when user authentication is
enabled on the machine.
Shortcuts to functions can be registered as keys in the my menu screen. When a shortcut key is touched, the screen for
that function appears. Register frequently used functions in the my menu screen to quickly and conveniently access
those functions. When user authentication is used, the my menu screen of "Favorite Operation Group" can be displayed.
Use the Web page to configure the following settings:
• Changing the name of the home screen key, changing the image, storing an application key
• Storing keys that appear in the my menu screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): My Menu Settings
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - [My Menu Settings] in the Web page menu.
• System Settings (Administrator): My Menu List
When user authentication is enabled, a my menu screen can be set for each "Favorite Operation Group List".
Registration is performed in "My Menu List" in [User Control] in the Web page menu.
1-22
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE
The remote operation function allows you to operate the machine from your computer.
When this function is added, the same screen as the operation panel screen appears on your computer. This allows you
to operate the machine from your computer in the same way as if you were standing in front of the machine.
The remote operation function can only be used on one computer at a time.
How to use the remote operation function
Before using this function, set "Operational Authority" to "Allowed" in "Remote Software Operation" of "Remote
Operation Settings" in the system settings (administrator).
^7. SYSTEM SETTINGS "Remote Operation Settings" (page 7-64)
To use the remote operation function, the machine must be connected to a network and a VNC application must be
installed on your computer (recommended VNC software: RealVNC).
The procedure for using this function is as follows:
Example: RealVNC
Connect from the computer to the
machine.
(1) Start the VNC viewer
(2) Enter the IP address of the machine in the
"Server" entry box.
(3) Click the [OK] button.
⑶
(2)
Follow the prompts on the operation panel of the machine to permit the
connection.
©
When the machine is connected to the remote software, appears on the system bar of the machine's touch panel.
If you wish to disconnect, exit the remote software or touch 」_ ■
Use the operation panel in the same way as you would on the machine. Note that a key cannot be held down to continuously
change a value being entered. For detailed procedures, see the chapters for each of the functions in this manual.
System Settings (Administrator): Remote Operation Settings
Set the operation authority for the remote operation function.
1-23
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG
The machine records the jobs that are performed in the job log.
The main information that is recorded in the job log is described below.
•To make it easy to total the usage counts of differently configured machines, the items recorded in the job log are fixed,
regardless of what peripheral devices are installed or the objective of the recording.
•In some cases, job information may not be correctly recorded, such as when a power failure occurs during a job.
No.
Item name
Description
1
Main items
Job ID
The job ID is recorded.
Job IDs appear in the log as consecutive numbers up to a maximum
of 99999 9, after which the count resets to 1 .
2
Job Mode
The job mode, such as copy or print.
3
Computer Name
The name of the computer that sent a print job.*
4
User Name
The user name when the user authentication function is used.
5
Login Name
The login name when the user authentication function is used.
6
Starting Date & Time
The date and time the job was started.
7
Completing Date &
Time
The date and time the job was completed.
8
Black & White Total
Count
For a print job, the total count is recorded.
For a send job, the number of transmitted black & white pages is
recorded. When a broadcast transmission is summarized, the total
number of pages is recorded.
For a scan to HDD job, the number of stored black & white pages is
recorded.
9
Full Color Total Count
For a send job, the total number of transmitted full color pages is
recorded. When a broadcast transmission is summarized, the total
number of pages is recorded.
For a scan to HDD job, the number of stored full color pages is
recorded.
10
Count according to size
Counts by original/paper size in color mode and black & white mode.
11
Number of sheets
according to size
Indicates the sheet count by paper type.
12
Invalid Paper
Count(Black & White)
Indicates the black & white invalid sheet count.
13
Number of Reserved
Sets
Number of specified sets or reserved destinations.
14
Number of Completed
Sets
Number of completed sets or number of destinations to which
transmission was successfully completed.
15
Number of Reserved
Pages
Number of reserved original pages of a copy, print, scan job, or other
job.
16
Number of Completed
Pages
Number of completed pages of a set.
17
Result
The result of a job.
18
Error Cause
When an error occurs during a job, the cause of the error.
1-24
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
No.
Item name
Description
19
Print Job Related Item
Output
The output mode of a printed job.
20
Staple
The status of stapling.
21
Staple Count
The staple count.
22
Punch Count
The punch count.
23
Fold
Recorded in a job that uses the fold function.
24
Fold Count
Number of folded pages.
25
Printer Tone
The tone used for a print job.
26
Image Send Related
Item
Direct Address
Address of an image send job.
27
Sender Name
Sender name of an image send job.
28
Sender Address
Sender address of an image send job.
29
Transmission Type
Transmission type of an image send job.
30
Administrative Serial
Number
Administrative serial number of an image send job.
31
Broadcast number
Broadcast number of an image send job.
32
Entry Order
Reservation order for broadcast transmission of an image send job.
For a serial polling job, this is used to correlate communication with
printing.
33
File Type
File format of an image send job.
34
Compression
Mode/Compression
Ratio
Compression mode and compression ratio of the file of an image
send job.
35
Communication Time
Indicates the communication time of image send jobs.
36
Fax No.
Indicates the stored sender's number.
37
Document Filing
Related Item
Document Filing
Status of document filing.
38
Storing Mode
Document filing storing mode.
39
File Name 2
File name of a file stored by document filing or retention print.*
40
Data Size [KB]
File size.
41
Common Functionality
Color Setting
Color mode selected by user.
42
Special Modes
Special modes selected when the job was executed.
43
File Name 2
Records the file names of print jobs.*
1-25
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
No.
Item name
Description
44
Detailed Items
Original Size
Size of scanned original.
For a document filing print job, the paper size of the file.
45
Original Type
Original type (text, printed photo, etc.) set in the exposure settings
screen.
46
Paper Size
For a print job, the paper size.
For a send job, the transmitted paper size.
For a Scan to HDD job, the paper size of the stored file.
47
Paper Type
The paper type used for printing.
48
Paper Property:
Disable Duplex
Indicates that duplex was disabled in "Paper Type".
49
Paper Property: Fixed
Paper Side
Indicates that fixed side was specified in "Paper Type".
50
Paper Property:
Disable Staple
Indicates that stapling was disabled in "Paper Type".
51
Paper Property:
Disable Punch
Indicates that punching was disabled in "Paper Type".
52
Duplex Setup
Indicates the duplex setting.
53
Resolution
Indicates the scanning resolution.
54
Machine Item
Model Name
Indicates the model name of the machine.
55
Unit Serial Number
Indicates the serial number of the machine.
56
Name
Indicates the name of the machine that is set in the Web pages.
57
Machine Location
Indicates the installation location of the machine that is set in the Web
pages.
*ln some environments this is not recorded.
1-26
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
LOADING PAPER
IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER
This section provides information that you should know before loading paper in the paper trays.
Be sure to read this section before loading paper.
NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS
The names of the trays are as follows.
paper drawer is installed)
Bypass tray
Tray 5 (when a large
capacity tray is installed)
THE MEANING OF "R" IN PAPER SIZES
Some original and paper sizes can be placed in either the vertical or the horizontal orientation. To differentiate between
vertical and horizontal orientations, paper sizes in the horizontal orientation will be followed by an "R" (for example,
8-1/2" x11"R， A4R).
Sizes that can be placed only in the horizontal orientation (12" x 18", 1 1 11 x 17", 8-1/2" x 14"， 8-1/2" x 13"， A3W, A3, B4)
do not include the "R" in their size indication.
SWx 11"R
S-V2n x 1 1 11
11"x 17"
(A4R)
(A4)
(A3)
Horizontal orientation
■■R" is appended.
Vertical orientation
11 RM is not appended.
Can be placed only in the
horizontal orientation
11 RM is not appended.
1-27
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
USEABLE PAPER
Various types of paper are sold. This section explains what plain paper and what special media can be used with the
machine. For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be loaded in each tray of the machine, see
the specifications in the Safety Guide and "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
Plain paper, special media
Plain paper that can be used
• SHARP standard plain paper (21 lbs. (80 g/m2)). For paper specifications, see the specifications in the Safety Guide.
• Pain paper other than SHARP standard paper (16 lbs. to 28 lbs. (60 g/m2 to 105 g/m2))
Recycled paper, colored paper and pre-punched paper must meet the same specifications as plain paper. Contact
your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department for advice on using these types of paper.
Types of paper that can be used in each tray
The following types of paper can be loaded in each tray.
Tray 1/Tray 2
Tray 3/T ray 4
Bypass tray
Tray 5 (large capacity
tray)
Plain paper
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Pre-printed
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Recycle Paper
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Letter head
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Pre-punched
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Color
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Heavy paper *1
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
一
Labels
一
一
Permitted
一
Transparency film
一
一
Permitted
一
Tab paper
一
一
Permitted
一
Envelopes
一
一
Permitted
一
Thin paper*2
一
一
Permitted
一
*1 Heavy paper up to 110 lbs. (209 g/m2) can be used.
*2 Thin paper from 15 lbs. to 16 lbs. (56 g/m2 to 59 g/m2) can be used.
1-28
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Print side face up or face down
Paper is loaded with the print side face up or face down depending on the paper type and tray.
Trays 1 to 4
l_oad the paper with the print side face up.
However, if the paper type is "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed", load the paper with the print side face down*.
Bypass tray and tray 5
Load the paper with the print side face down.
However, if the paper type is "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed", load the paper with the print side face up*.
* If "Disabling of Duplex" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), load the paper in the normal way (face up in
trays 1 to 4; face down in the bypass tray and tray 5).
Paper that cannot be used
• Special media for inkjet printers
(fine paper, glossy paper, glossy film, etc.)
• Carbon paper or thermal paper
• Pasted paper
• Paper with clips
• Paper with fold marks
•Torn paper
• Oil-feed transparency film
• Thin paper less than 15 lbs. (56 g/m2)
• Paper that is 80 lbs. (210 g/m2) or heavier
Non-recommended paper
• Iron-on transfer paper
• Japanese paper
• Perforated paper
• Irregularly shaped paper
• Stapled paper
• Damp paper
• Curled paper
• Paper on which either the print side or the reverse side
has been printed on by another printer or multifunction
device.
• Paper with a wave-like pattern due to moisture
absorption
• Various types of plain paper and special media are sold. Some types cannot be used with the machine. Contact your
dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department for advice on using these types of paper.
• The image quality and toner fusibility of paper may change due to ambient conditions, operating conditions, and paper
characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of SHARP standard paper. Contact your dealer or nearest SHARP
Service Department for advice on using these types of paper.
• The use of non-recommended or prohibited paper may result in skewed feeding, misfeeds, poor toner fusing (the toner
does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed off), or machine failure.
• The use of non-recommended paper may result in misfeeds or poor image quality. Before using non-recommended paper,
check if printing can be performed properly.
1-29
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 TO 4
LOADING PAPER AND CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE
A maximum of 500 sheets of paper from size 5-1/2" x 8_1/2"R to size 1 1 11 x 1 7" (A5R to A3) can be loaded in trays 1 and 2.
A maximum of 500 sheets of paper from size 7-1/4" x 10-1/2MR to size 1 1H x 17" (B5R to A3) can be loaded in trays 3 and 4.
Pull out the paper tray.
Gently pull the tray out until it stops.
To load paper, go to step 3. To load a different size of paper, go
to the next step.
Adjust the guide plates A and B by
squeezing their lock levers and sliding
them to match the vertical and
horizontal dimensions of the paper to be
loaded.
The guide plates A and B are slidable. Slide each guide plate
while squeezing its lock lever.
Fan the paper.
Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned,
multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.
Insert the paper into the tray.
Load the paper with the print side face up. The stack must not
be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 500 sheets).
1-30
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Gently push the paper tray into the
machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.
If you loaded a different type or size of paper than was loaded previously, be sure to change the "Paper Tray Settings"
in the system settings. If these settings are not configured correctly, automatic paper selection will not operate
correctly and printing may take place on the wrong size or type of paper, or a misfeed may occur.
Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.
System Settings: Paper Tray Settings (page 7-13)
Change these settings when you change the size or type of paper loaded in a tray.
1-31
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (LARGE
CAPACITY TRAY)
LOADING PAPER
The large capacity tray can hold up to 3500 sheets of 8-1/2" x 1 1 11 or A4 size paper (20 lbs. (80 g/m2)).
The paper size of tray 5 can only be changed by a SHARP service technician. If you need to change the paper size,
consult your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
Pull out the paper tray.
Gently pull the tray out until it stops.
Fan the paper.
Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned,
multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.
Place the paper in the center of the
paper table.
Load the paper with the print side face down. The stack must
not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 3500 sheets).
1-32
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Gently push the paper tray into the
machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.
If you loaded a different type of paper than was loaded previously, be sure to change the paper type setting in "Paper
Tray Settings" in the system settings.
① Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.
System Settings: Paper Tray Settings (page 7-13)
Change these settings if you have loaded a different type of paper in the tray.
1-33
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY
The bypass tray can be used to print on plain paper, envelopes, label sheets, tab paper, and other special media. Up to
100 sheets of paper can be loaded (up to 40 sheets of heavy paper) for continuous printing similar to the other trays.
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 1 1"R or A4R, be sure
to pull out the bypass tray extension. Pull the bypass tray
extension all the way out. If the bypass tray extension is not
pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded paper will not be
correctly displayed.
①
Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray.
Set the bypass tray guides to the width
of the paper.
Insert the paper along the bypass tray
guides all the way into the bypass tray
until it stops.
Load the paper with the print side face down.
• Do not force the paper in.
• If the bypass tray guides are set wider than the paper, move the bypass tray guides in until they correctly fit the
width of the paper. If the bypass guides are set too wide, the paper may skew or be creased.
Contents
1-34
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING THE BYPASS TRAY
• When using plain paper other than SHARP standard paper or special media other than SHARP-recommended
transparency film, or when printing on the reverse side of previously used paper, the paper must be loaded one sheet
at a time. Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause misfeeds.
• Before loading paper, straighten any curling in the paper.
• When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in the bypass tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and
reload as a single stack. If paper is added without removing the remaining paper, a misfeed may result.
Inserting paper
Place paper that is 7-1/4" x 10-1/2" (A5) or smaller in the horizontal
orientation.
Inserting tab paper
To print on tab paper, load tab paper in the bypass tray with the print side face down.
• Use only tab paper that is made of paper. Tab paper made of a material other than paper (film, etc.) cannot be used.
• To print on the tabs of tab paper...
In copy mode, use "Tab Copy" in the special modes. In print mode, use the tab print function.
Inserting transparency film
• Use SHARP-recommended transparency film. When inserting
transparency film in the bypass tray, the rounded corner
should be at the front left when the film is oriented horizontally,
or at the far left when the film is oriented vertically.
• When loading multiple sheets of transparency film in the
bypass tray, be sure to fan the sheets several times before
loading.
• When printing on transparency film, be sure to remove each
sheet as it exits the machine. Allowing sheets to stack in the
output tray may result in curling.
1-35
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Loading envelopes
When inserting envelopes in the bypass tray, place them aligned to the left side in the orientation shown below.
Only the front side of envelopes can be printed on. Be sure to place the front side face down.
①
• Do not print on both sides of an envelope. This may result in misfeeds or poor print quality.
• Some operating environments may cause creasing, smudging, misfeeds, poor toner fusing, or machine failure.
Restrictions apply to some types of envelopes. For more information, consult a qualified service technician.
Important points when using envelopes
• Do not use the following envelopes:
Envelopes with metal clasps, plastic hooks, or ribbon hooks; envelopes closed with string, envelopes with windows or
backing, envelopes with an uneven front surface due to embossing, double-layer envelopes, envelopes with an
adhesive for sealing, hand-made envelopes, envelopes with air inside, envelopes with creases or fold marks, torn or
damaged envelopes
• Envelopes with an incorrectly aligned corner gluing position on the back cannot be used as creasing may result.
• Print quality is not guaranteed in the area 1 3/32" (10 mm) around the edges of
the envelope.
• Print quality is not guaranteed on parts of envelopes where there is a large
step-like change of thickness, such as on four-layer parts or parts less than
three layers.
• Print quality is not guaranteed on envelopes having peel off flaps for sealing the
envelopes.
Contents
1-36
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers
In some cases damage to the envelopes or smudging may occur even if envelopes within the specifications are used.
This problem may be alleviated by shifting the fusing unit pressure adjusting levers from their "normal pressure position"
to the "lower pressure position". Follow the procedure on the this page.
Pull out the right side cover.
While pushing up the open/close lever on the right side cover,
gently open the cover.
Move the fusing unit pressure adjusting
levers (two) to the lower pressure
position as shown.
Return the lever to the normal position
when finished feeding envelopes.
/K Caution
The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn yourself when operating the fusing unit pressure adjusting levers.
®Be sure to return the levers to the "normal pressure position" before printing or copying on paper
other than envelopes. Otherwise, fusing problems, paper misfeeds, or equipment failure may occur.
1-37
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
ORIGINALS
This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder and on the document glass.
PLACING THE ORIGINAL
PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER
This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder.
Allowed original sizes
Minimum original size
Maximum original size
Standard sizes
Standard sizes
(Minimum size that can be automatically detected)
(Maximum size that can be automatically detected)
5-1/2" (height) x 8-1/2" (width)
11" (height) x 17" (width)
A5: 148 mm (height) x 210 mm (width)
A3: 297 mm (height) x 420 mm (width)
Non-standard sizes
12" x 18" size paper (A3W) cannot be used.
(Minimum size that can be specified manually)
Non-standard sizes
5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width)
(Maximum size that can be specified manually)
131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width)
Copy mode: 11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width)
297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width)
Image send mode: 11" (height) x 39-3/8" (width)
297 mm (height) x 1000 mm (width)
When the original is a non-standard size, see the appropriate explanation below for the mode you are using.
隊 2. COPIER "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE" (page 2-27)
暖 4. FACSIMILE "IMAGE SETTINGS" (page 4-45)
暖 5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX "IMAGE SETTINGS" (page 5-53)
Allowed original weights
MX-M363N/M453N/M503N
1 - sided copying: 9 lbs. to 34 lbs. (35 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)
2- sided copying: 15 lbs. to 34 lbs. (50 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)
MX-M283N
1 - sided copying: 9 lbs. to 34 lbs. (35 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)
2- sided copying: 15 lbs. to 28 lbs. (50 g/m2 to 105 g/m2)
To scan originals from 9 lbs. to 14 lbs. (35 g/m^ to 49 g/m2), use "Slow Scan Mode" in the special modes. Scanning
without using "Slow Scan Mode" may result in original misfeeds.
When "Slow Scan Mode" is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.
1-38
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Make sure an original does not remain
on the document glass.
Open the automatic document feeder, make sure that an
original is not on the document glass, and then gently close the
automatic document feeder.
Adjust the original guides to the size of
the originals.
Place the original.
Make sure the edges of the originals are even.
Insert the originals face up all the way into the document feeder
tray.
Insert a number of originals that does not exceed the indicator
line on the document feeder tray.
Up to 100 sheets can be inserted.
Be sure to remove originals that have been finished scanning
from the original exit tray.
• Originals of different sizes can be placed together in the automatic document feeder. In this case, select "Mixed Size
Original" in the special modes of the mode you are using.
• Before inserting originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.
•If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or pasteup glue, wait until the originals are dry before making
copies. Otherwise the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled.
• Do not use the following originals. Incorrect original size detection, original misfeeds, and smudges may result.
Transparency film， tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should
not be fed through the document feeder. 〇 riginals to be fed through the feeder should not be damaged, crumpled, folded,
loosely pasted together, or have cut-out holes. Originals with multiple punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole
punched paper may not feed correctly.
• When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that
the punched edge is at a position away from the feed slot of the
document feeder tray.
Feed slot
Hole
positions
Contents
1-39
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT GLASS
This section explains how to place the original on the document glass.
Allowed original sizes
Maximum original size
Standard sizes
11" (height) x 17" (width)
A3: 297 mm (height) x 420 mm (width)
Non-standard sizes
11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width)
297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width)
When the original is a non-standard size, see the
appropriate explanation below for the mode you are
using.
^2. COPIER "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE"
(page 2-27)
暖 4. FACSIMILE "IMAGE SETTINGS" (page 4-45)
隊 5. SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX "IMAGE
SETTINGS" (page 5-53)
Place the original.
Place the original face down in the far left corner of the
document glass.
Document glass scale Document glass scale
The original should always be placed in the far left corner,
regardless of its size.
Align the top left corner of the original with the tip of the M mark.
①
Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector and prevent
correct detection of the original size.
If you are placing a small non-standard size original on the document glass, it is convenient to place a blank sheet of
8-1/2" x 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A4 or B5) paper on top of the original to facilitate detection of the original size.
1-40
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Close the automatic document feeder.
After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.
Placing a thick book
When scanning a thick book or other thick original, follow the steps below to press the book down.
(1) Push up the far side of the automatic
document feeder.
The hinges supporting the automatic document feeder
will release and the rear side of the automatic document
feeder will rise.
(2) Slowly close the automatic document
feeder.
Do not press a book or other bulky document down too
hard on the glass with the automatic document feeder.
If shadows around the edges of the document are a
problem, use the erase function.
隊 Z COPIER "ERASING PERIPHERAL
SHADOWS (Erase)" (page 2-46)
/j\ Caution
• Close the automatic document feeder slowly. Abruptly closing the automatic document feeder may damage it.
• Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the automatic document feeder.
The automatic document feeder cannot be closed correctly in this state. To return the automatic document feeder to its
normal state, open it completely and then close it.
1-41
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
This section describes the peripheral devices that can be used with the machine and explains how to use the finisher and
saddle stitch finisher, as well as Sharp OSA (application communication module and external account module).
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Peripheral devices can be installed on the machine to increase its range of functionality.
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard
equipment.
(As of February, 2009)
Product name
Product number
Description
Stand/1 x500 sheet paper drawer
MX-DEX8
Additional tray. A maximum 500 sheets of paper can be loaded
in each tray.
Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer
MX-DEX9
Large capacity tray
MX-LCX1
Additional tray. A maximum of 3500 sheets of paper can be
loaded in the tray.
To install the tray, a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer or stand/2
x 500 sheet paper drawer is required.
Exit tray unit
(Right tray)
MX-TRX2
This can be added to the right side of the machine.
Finisher
MX-FNX9
Output device that enables the use of the staple function and
offset function.
Punch module
MX-PNX1B
Punches holes in copies and other output. Requires a finisher.
Finisher (large stacker)
MX-FN11
Output device that enables the use of the staple function and
offset function.
To install the finisher (large stacker), a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper
drawer or stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is required.
Punch module
MX-PNX6B
Punches holes in copies and other output. Requires a finisher
(large stacker).
Saddle stitch finisher
MX-FN10
Output device that enables use of the staple function, offset
function and pamphlet copy function.
To install the saddle stitch finisher, a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper
drawer or stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is required.
Paper pass unit
MX-RBX3
Required when a finisher (large stacker) / saddle stitch finisher is
installed.
Punch module
MX-PNX5B
Punches holes in copies and other output. Requires a saddle
stitch finisher.
Barcode font kit
AR-PF1
Adds barcode fonts to the machine.
PS3 expansion kit
MX-PKX1
Enables the machine to be used as a Postscript compatible
printer.
XPS expansion kit
MX-PUX1
The machine can be used as an XPS compatible printer. For
details, consult your dealer.
To install this kit, a 1 GB expansion memory board (MX-SMX3)
is required.
1-42
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Product name
Product number
Description
Expansion memory board
MX-SMX3
This expands the memory that can be used on the machine.
Internet fax expansion kit
MX-FWX1
Enables Internet Fax.
Facsimile expansion kit
MX-FXX2
Adds a fax function.
Application integration module
MX-AMX1
The application integration module can be combined with the
network scanner function to append a metadata file to a scanned
image file.
External account module
MX-AMX3
This is required to use an external account application on the
machine.
Enhanced compression kit
MX-EBX3
A scanned document can be saved in Compact PDF format.
Compact PDF results in a smaller size than regular PDF.
Sharpdesk 1 license kit
MX-USX1
This software enables integrated management of documents
and computer files.
Sharpdesk 5 license kit
MX-USX5
Sharpdesk 10 license kit
MX-US10
Sharpdesk 50 license kit
MX-US50
Sharpdesk 100 license kit
MX-USAO
Stamp unit
AR-SU1
This stamps each original page after it is scanned in image send
mode.
1-43
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
FINISHER
The finisher is equipped with the offset function, which offsets each set of output from the previous set.
In addition, each set of sorted output can be stapled.
An optional hole punching unit can also be installed to punch holes in output.
PART NAMES
The following parts can be accessed when the finisher is open.
(1) (2) ⑶
(1)
Output tray
Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray.
The tray is slidable. Extend the tray for large output
(12Mx 18M, 1 1n x 17"， 8-1 /2Mx 14"， 8-1 /2M x 13"，
8-1/2" x 13-1/2"， 8-1/2" x 13-2/5"， 8-1/2" x 11MR,
7-1/4" x 10-1/2MR, A3W, A3, A4R, B4, B5R, 8K and 16KR
sizes).
Lever
Use this to move the finisher in order to remove a paper
misfeed, replace staples, or remove a staple jam.
Punch waste box (when a punch module is installed)
This holds punch waste.
Front cover
Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed, replace
staples, remove a staple jam, or remove the punch waste
box.
Staple case
This holds the staple cartridge. Pull the case out to
replace the staple cartridge or remove a staple jam.
Staple case release lever
Use this to remove the staple case.
(g) :
A finisher cannot be installed simultaneously with a finisher (large stacker) or a saddle stitch finisher.
Use caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the tray may move up and down.
SUPPLIES
The finisher requires the following staple cartridge:
Staple cartridge
(approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x 3 cartridges)
MX-SCX1
1-44
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
FINISHER MAINTENANCE
When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the procedure below
to replace the staple cartridge.
Replacing the staple cartridge
1-45
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Replace the staple case.
Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
Slide the finisher back to the right.
Gently slide the finisher back to the right until it locks into its
original position.
Make a test print or copy in staple sort mode to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
1-46
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
FINISHER (LARGE STACKER)
The finisher (large stacker) is equipped with the offset function, which offsets each set of output from the previous set, and
the staple sort function, which staples each set of output.
A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
PART NAMES
(1) Stapler compiler
This temporarily stacks paper to be stapled.
(2) Output trays (upper tray, lower tray)
Stapled and offset output is delivered to these trays.
The trays are slidable. For large-size output (12" x 18"，
IT x 17M, 8-1/211 x 14M, 8-1/211 x 13", 8-1/2" x 13-1/2",
8-1/2" x 13-2/5", A3W, A3, B4 and 8K sizes), extend the
tray.
Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
Front cover
Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge or remove
a staple jam.
•A paper pass unit is required to install a finisher (large stacker).
• Do not place heavy objects on the finisher (large stacker) or press down on the finisher (large stacker).
• Use caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the output tray may move up and down.
•A finisher (large stacker) cannot be installed simultaneously with a saddle stitch finisher or a finisher.
SUPPLIES
The finisher (large stacker) require the following staple cartridge:
Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples x 3 cartridges)
1-47
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) MAINTENANCE
When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the procedure below
to replace the staple cartridge.
Replacing the cartridge
Open the front cover.
Squeeze the green parts of the staple
case and pull the case up and then out.
Remove the empty staple cartridge.
Press the lock button to release the staple case cover and then
remove the staple cartridge.
When staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be removed.
Insert a new staple cartridge into the
staple case.
Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.
Do not remove the seal from the cartridge before inserting the cartridge into the case.
1-48
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Pull the seal that holds the staples
straight out.
Push the staple case firmly back in.
Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
Close the front cover.
Make a test print or copy in staple sort mode to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
Contents
1-49
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
This includes the offset function that offsets each set of output from the previous set, the staple sort function that staples
each set of output, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples and folds output, and the fold function that folds
output in half. An optional hole punching unit can also be installed to punch holes in output.
PART NAMES
(1) Stapler compiler
This temporarily stacks paper to be stapled.
(2) Output tray
Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray.
The tray is slidable. Extend the tray for large output
(12Mx 18"， 1 1n x 17"， 8-1 /2Mx 14"， 8-1 /2M x 13"，
8-1 /2Mx 13-1/2"， 8-1/211 x 13-2/5", A3W, A3, B4 and 8K
sizes).
Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge or remove
a staple jam.
Saddle stitch tray
Stapled and folded output is delivered to this tray.
Top cover
Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
Front cover
Open this to replace the staple cartridge, remove
jammed staples, or remove misfed paper.
A paper pass unit is required to install a saddle stitch finisher.
Do not place heavy objects on the saddle stitch finisher or press down on the saddle stitch finisher.
Use caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the tray may move up and down.
A saddle stitch finisher cannot be installed simultaneously with a finisher (large stacker) or a finisher.
SUPPLIES
The saddle stitch finisher requires the following staple cartridge:
Finisher unit Saddle stitch unit
Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x 3 Staple cartridge (approx. 2000 staples per cartridge x 3
cartridges) MX-SCX1 cartridges) AR-SC3
1-50
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MAINTENANCE
When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the procedure below
to replace the staple cartridge.
Replacing the staple cartridge (finisher unit)
While pulling the lever， slide the saddle
stitch finisher to the left until it stops.
Lower the staple case release lever and
remove the staple case.
Pull the staple case out to the right.
Remove the empty staple cartridge from
the staple case.
Insert a new staple cartridge into the
staple case as shown.
Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.
1-51
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Replace the staple case.
Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
Make a test print or copy in staple sort mode to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
1-52
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Replacing the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit)
Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle stitch finisher. Do not replace
removed output in the output tray.
Load the new staple cartridge.
Remove the cover from the staple cartridge and install the
cartridge.
Close the side cover.
Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
1-53
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
PUNCH MODULE
A punch module can be installed to punch holes in output. To install a punch module, a finisher or saddle stitch finisher
is required.
DISCARDING PUNCH WASTE
Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box.
Follow the steps below to discard the punch waste.
Finisher
Open the cover.
Grasp the punch waste box handle,
gently pull out the box, and discard the
punch waste.
Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container,
taking care not to let the waste scatter.
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Finisher (large stacker)
Open the front cover of the punch
module.
Pull out the punch waste box and
discard the punch waste.
Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container,
taking care not to let the waste scatter.
Replace the punch waste box.
If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not
be possible using the punch function.
1-55
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Saddle stitch finisher
Pull out the punch waste box and
discard the punch waste.
Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container,
taking care not to let the waste scatter.
Return the punch waste box to its
original position.
Close the front cover.
1-56
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
SHARP OSA
Sharp OSA (Open Systems Architecture) is an architecture that enables external applications to be directly connected to
a digital multifunction machine over a network.
When a digital multifunction machine that supports Sharp OSA is used, the operation panel controls and functions of the
machine such as scan send can be linked to an external application.
There are two types of external applications: "standard application" and "external account application". An "external
account application" is used for centralized account management of a multifunction machine on a network. A "standard
application" refers to all other applications.
APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE
When a previously registered standard application is selected in the Web pages of the machine, the machine retrieves
the operation screen from the registered URL Control of the operation screen is performed by the standard application,
and Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, and HTTPS transmission can be executed.
Standard application setup
To enable a general application in the Web pages of the machine, click [Application Settings] in the administrator menu
frame, and then [External Applications Settings] and [Standard Applications]. Configure settings for the standard
application in the screen that appears.
Selecting a standard application
The procedure for selecting a general application that has been enabled in the Web pages of the machine is explained
below.
Touch the [Sharp OSA] key in the mode
select keys.
If no standard applications have been stored in the Web pages,
the key cannot be touched.
1-57
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Select the standard application.
If two or more standard applications have been stored in the
Web pages, the screen to select the standard application will
appear. Touch the standard application that you wish to use.
If only one standard application has been stored in the Web
pages, connection to the standard application will begin.
The machine connects to the standard application.
The message "Connecting to the external application." appears while the machine communicates with the standard
application.
The mode select key cannot be used during scanning.
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3)
The external account module is required to use a "external account application" on the machine.
An external account application can be used in "external authentication mode" or "external count mode". When external
authentication mode is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machine is started. When a job
ends, a job notification screen is sent to the application to enable counts to be kept for each authenticated user.
When "external count mode" is used, the login screen is not displayed when the machine is started. Only a job result
notification is sent to the application. User authentication by the external account application cannot be used, however,
the external account application can be used in combination with the internal account function.
External account application setup
To enable an external account application in the Web pages of the machine, click [Application Settings] in the
administrator menu frame, and then [External Applications Settings] and [External Accounting Application Settings].
Configure settings for the external account application in the screen that appears. The setting change will take effect
after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF" (page 1-15).
Operation in external account mode
The two modes for using an external account application operate as explained below.
External authentication mode
When the [Enable Authentication by External Server] checkbox is selected in "External Account Setting" of "Sharp 〇 SA
Settings" in the system settings (administrator), the machine enters external authentication mode. When the machine is
powered on in external authentication mode, the machine accesses the external account application and displays the
login screen. The login screen also appears when the [Call] key is touched to run a job in the job status complete screen.
(The login screen does not appear if the user has already logged in by the normal method.)
The [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the job status screen. To return to the
previous state, press the mode select key.
• The user control function of the machine cannot be used in external authentication mode.
However, "User Registration", "User Count Display", "User Count Reset", "User Information Print", and "The Number of
User Name Displayed Setting" can be used.
• The mode select key cannot be used while the login screen appears.
1-58
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
If login fails
If the login screen fails to appear or the application does not operate correctly, the machine may also stop operating
correctly. In this event, it is recommended that you quit external account mode from the Web pages of the machine. For
more information, see [Help] in the Web pages.
If it is necessary to forcibly terminate external account mode using the operation panel of the machine, follow the steps
below.
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key and change "External Account Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The
setting change will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING THE POWER ON
AND OFF" (page 1-15).
External count mode
When only the [External Account Control] setting is enabled in "External Account Setting" of "Sharp OSA Settings" in the
system settings (administrator), the machine enters external count mode.
Unlike external authentication mode, when the machine is started in "external count mode", the login screen of the
external account application is not displayed. Only the job result is sent to the external account application. External
count mode can be used together with the user control function of the machine. (External count mode can also be used
when the user control function is disabled.)
1-59
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
①
• Do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents to clean the machine,
housing.
• Use a soft cloth to gently wipe off dirt from the area on the operation panel with a
mirror-like finish (shown at right). If you use a stiff cloth or rub hard, the surface
may be damaged.
The area with a mirror-like finish is
the area that is ■■
CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC
DOCUMENT FEEDER
If the document glass or document backplate sheet becomes dirty, the dirt will appear in the scanned image. Always
keep these parts clean.
Wipe the parts with a clean, soft cloth.
If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. After wiping with the moistened cloth,
wipe the parts dry with a clean dry cloth.
Document glass Document backplate sheet
Scanning area
If black or white lines appear in images scanned using the
automatic document feeder, clean the scanning area (the
thin long glass next to the document glass).
To clean this area, use the glass cleaner that is stored in
the automatic document feeder. After using the glass
cleaner, be sure to return it to its storage position.
Examples of lines in the image
S A
Black lines White lines
1-60
Contents
MAINTENANCE
This section explains how to clean the machine and replace the toner cartridges and the toner collection container.
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
To ensure that the machine continues to provide top quality performance, periodically clean the machine.
△Warning
Do not use a flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical
components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Open the automatic document feeder
and remove the glass cleaner.
Clean the document scanning area on
the document glass with the glass
cleaner.
Clean the document scanning area in
the automatic document feeder with the
glass cleaner.
(1) Open the document feeder cover.
(2) Open the document feeder tray.
(3) Clean the scanning area in the automatic
document feeder.
(4) Close the document feeder tray.
(5) Close the document feeder cover.
Replace the glass cleaner.
1-61
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER
If paper misfeeds frequently occur when feeding envelopes or heavy paper through the bypass tray, wipe the surface of
the feed roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.
CLEANING THE ORIGINAL FEED ROLLER
If lines or other dirt appear on the scanned original when the automatic document feeder is used, wipe the surface of the
roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.
1-62
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES
Be sure to replace the toner cartridge when the message "Change the toner cartridge." appears.
In copy mode
: Ready to scan for copy.
: Ready to scan for copy.
(Prepare a new one.)
: Ready to scan for copy.
^ (Toner supply is low. )
When the message appears in the message display,
replace the toner cartridge.
◊
If you continue to use the machine without replacing
the cartridge, the following message will appear
when the toner runs out.
Change the toner cartridge .
1-63
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Pull the toner cartridge toward you.
Gently pull the toner cartridge horizontally toward you.
When pulling out the toner cartridge, pull it out gently. If the
cartridge is pulled out abruptly, toner may spill out.
Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown and pull it
out of the machine.
Remove the new toner cartridge from its
packaging and shake it 5 or 6 times as
shown.
Insert the new toner cartridge
horizontally.
Push the cartridge in until it locks
securely in place.
Push the cartridge firmly in until it clicks into place.
1-64
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Close the front cover.
After the toner cartridge is replaced, the machine automatically
enters image adjustment mode.
/?\ Caution
• Do not throw a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
• Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.
• If a toner cartridge is stored on end, the toner may harden and become unusable. Always store toner cartridges on their
side with the top side up.
• If a toner cartridge other than a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge is used, the machine may not attain full quality
and performance and there is a risk of damage to the machine. Be sure to use a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge.
• Keep the used toner cartridge in a plastic bag (do not discard it). Your service technician will collect the used toner
cartridge.
•To view the approximate amount of toner remaining, continually touch the [COPY] key during printing or when the machine
is idle. The percentage of toner remaining will appear in the display while the key is touched. When the percentage falls to
"25-0%", obtain a new toner cartridge and keep it ready for replacement.
• Depending on your conditions of use, the color may become faint or the image blurred.
1-65
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION
CONTAINER
The toner collection container collects excess toner that is produced during printing. When the toner collection container
becomes full, "Replace used toner container." will appear. Follow the procedure below to replace the toner collection
container.
Remove the toner collection container.
(1) Tilt the toner collection container forward.
Grasp the corners of the toner collection container with
both hands as shown and tilt it forward until it stops.
(2) Slowly lift the toner collection container up.
Place the box on a flat surface.
Place a sheet of newspaper on the surface before placing the
box.
Do not point the holes down as used toner will spill out.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Plug the hole in the toner collection
container with the cap.
Push the cap in firmly so that toner will not leak out.
Do not discard the toner collection container. Place it in a plastic bag and keep it until your service technician comes to
perform maintenance. Your service technician will collect the toner collection container.
Install the new toner collection
container.
Insert the box from above at a slant.
Push the toner collection container into
the machine.
Push the box in until it clicks into place.
/?\ Caution
• Do not throw the toner collection container into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
• Store the toner collection container out of the reach of small children.
When replacing the toner collection container, be aware that it may soil your clothes or the immediate surroundings.
1-67
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE
If a stamp unit (AR-SU1) is installed on the automatic document feeder and the stamp has become faint, replace the
stamp cartridge (AR-SV1).
Supplies
Stamp cartridge (2 in package) AR-SV1
Open the holders on the automatic
document feeder that hold the original
pressure sheet.
Open the holders (two) on the left and right sides.
Grasp the tab on the stamp unit and pull
the unit out.
1-68
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Push the stamp unit back in.
Push the stamp unit in until it clicks into place.
Replace the original pressure sheet.
Push the holders in until they click into place.
广
Contents
1-69
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
ENTERING TEXT
This section explains the text entry screen.
FUNCTIONS OF THE MAIN KEYS
Key
Description
1 Caps)
This changes the text entry screen from the lower case screen to the upper case screen. The upper case
screen will continue to appear until the [Caps] key is touched again so that it is no longer highlighted. The
[Caps] key is convenient when you wish to enter all capital letters.
fShi£tl
This key temporarily changes the keys in the text entry screen to upper case when lower case letters
appear, or to lower case when upper case letters appear.
Touch a letter key after touching the [Shift] key to enter that letter. After the letter is entered, the [Shift] key
will no longer be highlighted and the original text entry screen will appear.
The [Shift] key is convenient when you only need to enter one upper case letter or one lower case letter, or
when you need to enter one of the symbols assigned to the numeric keys.
To cancel selection of the [Shift] key, touch the [Shift] key again. The [Shift] key will no longer be highlighted.
Enter
Touch this key to enter a line break when entering the body text of an e-mail message.
El
Touch this key to delete the characters to the left of the cursor one character at a time.
[Other Language]
Touch this key to temporarily change the key layout of character entry mode to a different language. Select
the key layout that you wish to use.
Space
Touch this key to enter a space between letters.
[ AltGr ]
This temporarily changes the entry screen to the accented letter and symbol entry screen. Touch a letter
key after touching the [AltGr] key to enter that letter. After the letter is entered, the [AltGr] key will no longer
be highlighted and the original text entry screen will appear.
To cancel selection of the [AltGr] key, touch the [AltGr] key again. The [AltGr] key will no longer be
highlighted.
QQ
These keys move the cursor left and right.
QE)
These keys move the cursor to the line above or below the current line during entry of the body text of an
e-mail message.
Characters j
Touch this key to select character entry mode.
Symbols
Touch this key to select symbol entry mode. Symbol mode is used to enter symbols and accented letters.
Pre-Set Select]
Use this to retrieve a previously stored subject for e-mail or other pre-set text.
1-70
Contents
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Key
Description
f Help ]
Shows explanations of each key.
f . com j し net J し orq j
「 .biz ] [ . infoj 「http: |
Use this to enter a previously stored text string such as ".com".
Text strings are stored in the system settings.
隊 7. SYSTEM SETTINGS "Soft Keyboard Template Setting11 (page 7-64)
Cancel
Touch this key to return to the previous setting screen without entering text.
f OK )
Touch this key to enter the text that currently appears and return to the previous setting screen.
Search
Search results will appear based on the entered characters.
• in the text entry screen indicates how many characters can be entered. A number of characters greater than 11
cannot be entered.
• The key layouts that can be selected vary depending on the language selected in "MFP Display Language Setting" in the
system settings (administrator).
• The following symbols cannot be used when entering a file name or folder name.
\ ?/■■;:，<>!* | & #
Some computer environments may not allow the use of spaces and the symbols indicated below. For example, hyperlinks
will not operate correctly or nonsense characters may appear.
$ % ■ ( ) + - ■ = @ [ ] 八 ' { } — 〜
ENTERING TEXT FROM A KEYBOARD
A keyboard can only be used as a alternative for the text entry screen that appears in the machine's touch panel.
The layout of the keys in the text entry screen in the touch panel differs slightly from the layout of the keys on the
keyboard.
For details on using the keys, press the FI key to view an explanation of each key.
① Do not place heavy objects on the keyboard or press down on the keyboard.
1-71
Contents
CHAPTER 2
COPIER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
COPIER
BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODE . 2-3
COPYING SEQUENCE . 2-6
ORIGINALS . 2-9
• CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE . 2-9
PAPER TRAYS . 2-11
BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING
COPIES
MAKING COPIES . 2-12
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER TO MAKE COPIES . 2-12
• MAKING A COPY USING THE
DOCUMENT GLASS . 2-14
AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING . 2-16
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER TO MAKE 2-SIDED COPIES . 2-16
• AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING USING
THE DOCUMENT GLASS . 2-18
CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND
ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE . 2-21
• AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE
EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE . 2-21
• SELECTING THE ORIGINAL TYPE AND
MANUALLY ADJUSTING THE
EXPOSURE . 2-21
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM . 2-23
• AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION (Auto
Image) . 2-23
• MANUALLY SELECTING THE RATIO
(Preset ratios/Zoom) . 2-24
• ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH
AND WIDTH SEPARATELY (XY Zoom) . 2-26
ORIGINAL SIZES . 2-27
• SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE . 2-27
• STORING FREQUENTLY USED
ORIGINAL SIZES . 2-28
OUTPUT . 2-31
•OUTPUT MODES . 2-33
MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS
TRAY . 2-38
SPECIAL MODES
SPECIAL MODES . 2-41
ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift) . 2-44
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase) . 2-46
COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A
BOUND DOCUMENT (Dual Page Copy) . 2-48
MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT
(Pamphlet Copy) . 2-50
COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF
ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job Build) . 2-53
USING TWO MACHINES TO MAKE A LARGE
NUMBER OF COPIES (Tandem Copy) . 2-56
USING A DIFFERENT PAPER TYPE FOR
COVERS (Covers/Inserts) . 2-59
• INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (Cover
Settings) . 2-60
• INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN COPIES
(Insert Settings) . 2-63
• CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS
(Page Layout) . 2-67
ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency
Inserts) . 2-70
COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO
ONE SHEET (Multi Shot) . 2-72
COPYING A PAMPHLET (Book Copy) . 2-74
COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER
(Tab Copy) . 2-78
• RELATION BETWEEN THE ORIGINALS
AND THE TAB PAPER . 2-78
2-1
COPIER
COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE
SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot) . 2-81
PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON
COPIES (Stamp) . 2-84
• GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING
STAMP . 2-85
• ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date) . 2-88
• STAMPING COPIES (Stamp) . 2-90
• PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES
(Page Numbering) . 2-92
• PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text) . 2-96
• CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT
(Layout) . 2-100
• ADDING A WATERMARK TO A
COPY (Watermark) . 2-102
[Image Edit] KEY . 2-104
• REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY
(Photo Repeat) . 2-105
• CREATING A LARGE POSTER
(Multi-Page Enlargement) . 2-107
• REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) .. . 2-110
• COPYING 1 1 ■■ x 1 7" ORIGINALS WITH NO
EDGE CUT-OFF (11nx17n Full Bleed) . 2-111
• COPYING IN THE CENTER OF THE
PAPER (Centering) . 2-113
• REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A
COPY (B/W Reverse) . 2-115
ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN
IMAGE (Sharpness) . 2-117
CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING
(Proof Copy) . 2-118
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE COPYING
(Original Count) . 2-121
COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original) . 2-123
COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan
Mode) . 2-126
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN (Interrupt
copy) . 2-128
CHECKING A PREVIEW IMAGE OF A COPY
(Preview) . 2-130
•PREVIEW SCREEN . 2-132
JOB STATUS SCREEN . 2-133
• JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN . 2-134
• CANCELING A JOB THAT IS WAITING IN
THE QUEUE . 2-136
• GIVING PRIORITY TO A JOB IN THE
QUEUE . 2-137
• CHECKING INFORMATION ON A COPY
JOB WAITING IN THE QUEUE . 2-138
STORING COPY OPERATIONS (Job
Programs) . 2-139
• STORING (EDITING/DELETING) A JOB
PROGRAM . 2-140
APPENDIX . 2-142
2-2
COPIER
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
COPIER
This section provides information that you should know before using the machine as a copier.
BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODE
Touch the [COPY] key in the touch panel to open the base screen of copy mode.
The base screen shows messages and keys necessary for copying， and settings that have been selected.
(i) —
(2).
⑶.
(4) -
(5) .
⑹ ■
Ti&n
(7) (8)
叫^^ ■■画 r
I [ Special Modes
| 2 -Sided Copy
谭 l — -4|^ piain ( _ ,
_ T.- ■ ■ mril Qi/vi 1 I _
_ Plain
® 8Mxn
I 1 _u
I 2 離 hr ^ I
I 3. _14 ^)1
I 4. 11x17 I _
Copy Ratio J
Original 1 I Paper Select 1
[r i
I Quick File
⑼
■(10)
■(11)
■(12)
■(13)
■(14)
(1) Mode Select keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
If you wish to switch to copy mode, touch the [COPY]
key.
Output display
When one or more output functions such as sort, group,
staple sort, or saddle stitch have been selected, this
shows the icons of the selected functions.
^ OUTPUT (page 2-31)
(3) [Exposure] key
This shows the current copy exposure and original type
settings. Touch this key to change the exposure or
original type setting.
^ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE (page 2-21)
(4) [Copy Ratio] key
This shows the current copy ratio. Touch this key to
adjust the copy ratio.
^ REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM (page 2-23)
(5) [Original] key
Touch this key to enter the original size manually.
When an original is placed, the detected original size is
displayed. If the original size is set manually, the set size
appears.
隊 ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-27)
(6) [Paper Select] key
Touch this key to change the paper (tray) that is used.
The tray, paper size, and paper type will appear. Trays 1
to 5 can also be touched in the paper size display to open
the same screen.
隊 PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
(7) Original feed display
This appears when an original is inserted in the
automatic document feeder.
Contents
2-3
COPIER
(8) Paper select display
This shows the size of paper loaded in each tray.
For the bypass tray, the paper type appears above the
paper size.
The selected tray is highlighted.
The approximate amount of paper in each tray is
indicated by [=J . Trays 1 to 5 can be touched to open
the same screen as when the [Paper Select] key is
touched.
隊 PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
(9) Number of copies display
This shows the number of copies set.
(10) [Special Modes] key
Touch this key to select special modes such as Margin
Shift, Edge Erase, and Dual Page Copy.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
(11) [2-Sided Copy] key
Touch this key to select the 2-sided copying function.
暖 AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 2-16)
(12) [Output] key
Touch this to select an output function such as sort,
group, offset, staple sort, saddle stitch, punch, or fold.
^ OUTPUT (page 2-31)
(13) Customized keys
The keys that appear here can be changed to show
settings or functions that you prefer. The following keys
appear by factory default:
暖 Customizing displayed keys (page 2-5)
[File] key, [Quick File] key
Touch one of these keys to use the File function or Quick
File function of document filing mode. These are the
same [File] and [Quick File] keys that appear when the
[Special Modes] key is touched. For information on the
document filing function, see "6. DOCUMENT FILING".
(14) [Preview] key
Touch to view a preview image of a copy in the touch
panel before printing the copy.
瞭 CHECKING A PREVIEW IMAGE OF A COPY
(Preview) (page 2-130)
The screen explained in this section appears when a exit tray unit, saddle stitch nnisher, punch module, paper pass unit, and
large capacity tray are installed. The image will vary depending on the equipment installed.
Tray during paper feeding
Do not pull out a tray while paper is being fed from the tray. This will cause a paper misfeed.
Identifying the tray that is being used to feed paper
(1) While paper is feeding, the job status display of the system bar on the touch panel screen will show the number of
the tray that is being used to feed paper.
(2) The tray being used to feed paper also appears in green in the paper size display in the base screen on the touch
panel.
Base screen
(1)
(2)
Job status display on the system bar
Shows the number of the tray being used to feed paper.
Paper size display
Shows the tray being used to feed paper in green.
2-4
Contents
COPIER
Checking what special modes are selected
The JU key appears in the base screen when one or more special modes are selected.
The JU key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.
Function Review
Front : 1 / 2 inch /Back : 1 / 2 inch
Erase
. Edge： 1/2 inch
' Center ： 1/2 inch
: Covers /Inserts
. Front ： 2 -Sided/Back : Insert
' Insertion A: 10 Page/B： 10 Page
Exposure I
麵
i Copy Ratio 1 i Original
]m
Customizing displayed keys
Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. By assigning frequently used functions to these
keys, you can access the functions with a single touch. To change the function that is assigned to a key, use "Customize
Key Setting" in the Web pages.
When "Erase", "Margin Shift", and "Mirror Image" are assigned to the customized keys
長
I Exposure |
〆 Plain
0 SV2KII
2. 8y^riRj=j
•
3. 8^14 |=|
4. 11x17 |=|
Original I I Paper Select I
I Special Modes 1
[ 2-Sided Copy ]
Output
Erase
1 Margin Shift | 礞
Mirror 工 mage
Preview
These 3 keys can be changed
as desired.
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.
Auto
100%
Ills l. l> .l
2-5
Contents
COPIER
COPYING SEQUENCE
This section explains the basic procedure for copying. Select settings in the order shown below to ensure that the copy
operation takes place smoothly.
For detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this chapter.
Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic
document feeder, or on the document glass.
* Depending on the copy functions used, there are also cases
where functions are selected before the original is placed.
Basic copy settings
Select the basic copy settings.
The main settings are as follows:
• Exposure and original type 暖 CHANGING THE
EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 2-21)
• Copy ratio ^REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
(page 2-23)
• Original size ^ORIGINAL SIZES (page 2-27)
• Paper Settings 暖 PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
2-sided copy settings
Select settings as needed for 2-sided copying and 2-sided
scanning of the original.
隊 AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 2-16)
2-6
Contents
COPIER
Output settings
Select copy output settings.
The main settings are as follows:
• Sort mode ^Sort mode (page 2-33)
• Group mode 隊 Group mode (page 2-33)
• Offset mode ^Offset function (page 2-33)
• Staple sort mode
^Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page 2-34)
• Pamphlet staple function
^Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page 2-34)
• Punch function 隊 Punch function (page 2-37)
• Fold function 隊 Paper folding function (page 2-36)
Special mode settings
Special Modes
Select special modes such as "Margin Shift" and "Erase".
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
f Margin Shift
Erase
Dual Page
| 圓 Copy
~T-
\ Pamphlet Copy
1 •二 1
f Tandem
信き Copy
S
[ Covers/ Inserts
Transparency 1
Inserts
f Multi Shot j
a
1 Book Copy
1 Tab Copy
1 Card Shot
Number of copies (sets) setting
©@©
©@®
©®®
Start copying.
Start scanning the original(s) and making copies.
Press the [START] key.
2-7
Contents
COPIER
• When one or more special modes are selected, the \W\ key appears in the base screen. Touch the \W\ key to display a
list of the selected special modes. This lets you check what special modes are selected and the settings of each mode.
^ Checking what special modes are selected (page 2-5)
• To store a copy job using the document filing function, select copy settings and then touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
key.
@To cancel all settings, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ((§)).
When the [CLEAR ALL] key (@) is pressed, all settings selected to that point are cleared and you will return to the base
screen.
To stop scanning of the original and copying, press the [STOP] key ((§)).
When the [STOP] key ((§)) is pressed, a message will appear asking you if you want to cancel the job. Touch the [Yes] key
in the message screen.
2-8
Contents
COPIER
ORIGINALS
CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE
When [Auto] appears in the [Original] key, the size of the placed original is automatically detected. The machine automatically
detects the original size when an original is placed and displays the size in the [Original] key in the base screen.
Example of base screen
The original size is displayed.
"Auto" appears when the automatic original detection function is
operating.
The original size is displayed. An icon shows the orientation of
the original.
Standard sizes
Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in "Original Size
Detector Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The factory default setting is "Inch-111.
List of original size detector settings
Selections
Standard sizes (detected original sizes)
Document glass
Document feeder tray
(automatic document feeder)
lnch-1
1 r x 1 7", 8-1 /2Mx 14", 8-1 /2M x 1 1n, 8-1/211 x 1 1 MR,
5-1/2Mx8-1/2M
11n x 17"， 8-1/211 x 14"， 8-1 /2M x 11M, 8-1 /2M x 11MR,
5-1/211 x 8-1/2", A4, A3
Inch-2
1 1n x 1 7n, 8-1/2" x 1 3n (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1/2" x 1 1n, 8-1/2" x 11MR, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
1 1n x 17M, 8-1/2Mx13M (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1 /2M x 1 1 ", 8-1/2Mx11MR, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3
Inch-3
1 1n x 17"， 8-1/2Mx 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
8-1/2" x 1 1n, 8-1/2Mx 11MR, 5-1/2" x 8-1/211
1 1n x 17"， 8-1/211 x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
8-1/2" x 1 1 ■■， 8-1/2Mx11MR, 5-1 /2Mx 8-1/211, A3, A4
AB-1
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 1 T，
8-1/2Mx14M, 11"x17"
AB-2
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm
(8-1/2Mx 13M)
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
1 1n x 17"， 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1 /2Mx 13M)
AB-3
A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 8-1/2" x 11",
1 1n x 17M, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13M)
AB-4
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R,
216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 1 1",
1 r x 17"， 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1 /2Mx 13-2/5")
AB-5
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R,
216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 1 1",
1 r x 1711， 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1/2" x 13-1/2")
• When the automatic original detection function is operating and the original is a non-standard size (an AB size or special
size), the closest standard size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the
correct original size.
暖 SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE (page 2-27)
• When placing a non-standard size original on the document glass, you can make it easier for the size to be detected by
placing a blank sheet of 8-1/2" x 11 (A4), 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5), or other standard size of paper on top of the original.
2-9
Contents
COPIER
Standard original placement orientations
Place originals in the document feeder tray or on the document glass so that the top and bottom of the original are
oriented as shown in the illustration. If the original is not oriented correctly and a function such as stapling is selected,
the staple positions may not be correct. For more information on placing the original, see "ORIGINALS" (page 1-38) in
"1 . BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
[Example 1]
[Example 2]
Document glass
Place the originals
with the corners
aligned here.
Document feeder tray
Place the originals
with the corners
aligned here.
Document glass
Automatic copy image rotation (Rotation Copy)
If the orientation of the original and paper are different, the original image will be automatically rotated 90 degrees to
match the paper. (When an image is rotated, a message is displayed.)
[Example]
Orientation of
placed original
aK
The original seen
from behind
Orientation The image is rotated
of paper 90 degrees
QD
V
ダ
The paper seen
from behind
This function operates in both auto paper selection mode and auto image mode. Rotation can be disabled using
"Rotation Copy Setting" in the System Settings (Administrator).
2-10
Contents
COPIER
PAPER TRAYS
The machine is set to automatically select a tray that has the same size of paper as the size of the placed original
(automatic paper tray selection).
If the correct paper size is not selected or you wish to change the paper size, you can select the paper tray manually.
Touch the [Paper Select] key.
You can also touch the paper size display (A) to open the paper tray settings.
Select the tray that you want to use.
(1) Touch the key of the desired tray,
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen and the selected tray
will be highlighted.
If the selected tray runs out of paper during a copy job and there is another tray that has the same size and type of paper,
that tray will be automatically selected and the copy job will continue.
To return to automatic paper tray selection after selecting a tray manually, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ((§)).
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (Paper Tray)
Use this setting to change the tray that is selected by default.
2-11
Contents
COPIER
BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING
COPIES
This section explains the basic procedures for making copies, including selection of the copy ratio and other copy
settings.
MAKING COPIES
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO
MAKE COPIES
This section explains how to make copies (1 -sided copies of 1 -sided originals) using the automatic document feeder.
Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray with the edges
aligned evenly.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
Check the paper to be used.
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.
To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
隊 PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.
2-12
Contents
COPIER
@®® /
Special Modes
⑦®® /
®®@ /
2-Sided Copy
/Plain
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
©
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (© ) and then enter the correct number.
Press the [START] key.
@To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
2-13
Contents
COPIER
MAKING A COPY USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS
To make a copy of a book or other thick original that cannot be scanned with the automatic document feeder， open the
automatic document feeder and place the original on the document glass. This section explains how to make a copy
(1 -sided copy of a 1 -sided original) using the document glass.
Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale
Document glass scale
• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
M on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
• After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.
①
Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.
Check the paper to be used.
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.
To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
暖 PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.
2-14
Contents
COPIER
@®® /
Special Modes
⑦®® /
®®@ /
2-Sided Copy
/Plain
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
©
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (©) and then enter the correct number.
Press the [START] key.
Normally copying will start.
Depending on the copy settings (2-sided copying, etc.), copying may not begin until all originals have been scanned. In this
case, go to the next step.
Remove the original and place the next original, and then press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
Touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (®).
2-15
Contents
COPIER
AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO
MAKE 2-SIDED COPIES
Originals
Copies
Automatic 2-sided copying of 1 -sided Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-sided 1 -sided copying of 2-sided originals
originals originals
I Indicator
'ine
Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray with the edges
aligned evenly.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
(1)
(2)
2 -Sided Copy
1 ~ * ~~ )
二
卜 0
1 _ rs
Select the 2-sided copy mode.
(1) Touch the key of the desired mode.
: Automatic 2-sided copying of 1 -sided originals
: Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals
: 1 -sided copying of 2-sided originals
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
[QM
[SHD
[瞻 |
To make 2-sided copies of a 1 -sided portrait original placed horizontally, or to invert the reverse side with respect to
the front side when copying a 2-sided original, touch the [Binding Change] key.
隊 Using the [Binding Change] key (page 2-17)
2-16
Contents
COPIER
Check the paper to be used.
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.
To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
隊 PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.
®@®
@©®
©®®
/ Special Modes
/
/ 2-Sided Copy
/plain
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
©
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be made with the copy number display showing "0".
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (©) and then enter the correct number.
Press the [START] key.
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
Using the [Binding Change] key
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Originals
パ
2
Binding Change is used Binding Change is not used
The reverse side
is upside down.
The reverse side
is not upside
down.
A =
V
ハ t
3
Select this when
the pages will be
bound into a
tablet.
Select this when
the pages will be
bound into a
booklet.
2-17
Contents
AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING USING THE
DOCUMENT GLASS
COPIER
Automatic 2-sided copying of 1 -sided
originals
Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale
Document glass scale
• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
M on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
• After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.
①
Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.
2-18
Contents
COPIER
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
f Plain
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (© ) and then enter the correct number.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
Remove the original and place the next original, and then press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
2-19
Contents
(i)
Select the 2-sided copy mode.
(1) Touch the [1 -Sided to 2-Sided] key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
The [2-Sided to 2-Sided] key and [2-Sided to 1 -Sided] key cannot be used when copying from the document glass.
Exposure I
酬 BIT:
2. 8V2X11R m
3. 8紐14 _
4. 11x17 |s|
Output
I Copy b
Original I Paper Select I
■
Check the paper to be used.
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) is selected.
To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
暖 PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
0)
Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.
® ® ® ©
④ © ® ④
@ ® @®
COPIER
Touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (2-Sided Copy)
The default 2-sided copy mode can be changed.
Contents
2-20
COPIER
CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE
The exposure and original image type can be selected to obtain a clear copy.
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE EXPOSURE AND
ORIGINAL TYPE
Automatic exposure adjustment operates by default to automatically adjust the exposure level and original type as
appropriate for the original being copied. ("Auto" is displayed.)
Automatic adjustment takes place to enable optimum copying.
SELECTING THE ORIGINAL TYPE AND MANUALLY
ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE
If you wish to select the original type or manually adjust the exposure, touch the [Exposure] key in the base screen of
copy mode and follow the steps below.
Select the original image type.
Touch the appropriate original image type key for the original.
• Original image type select keys
Mode
Description
Text
Use this mode for regular text documents.
Text/P rtd. Photo
This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and
printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.
Text/Photo
This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and
photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.
Printed photo
This mode is best for copying printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or catalogue.
Photo
Use this mode to copy photos.
Map
This mode is best for copying the light color shading and fine text found on most maps.
2-21
Contents
COPIER
Exposure
1 ok 1
Auto
Original Image Type
Ml fd |
圍 Text/ Photo
醒^™^ f 1 0 photo 1
_ Map
|QD [JJ|
Scan
Resolution
Adjust the exposure level.
Touch the f I ) key to make the copy darker.
Touch the 0 ) key to make the copy lighter.
Guidelines for the exposure level when [Text] is selected:
1 to 2: Dark originals such as a newspaper
3: Normal density originals
4 to 5: Originals written in pencil or light colored text
口」 ■■ I a^rPhotol 叵 れ 讀 一
|i P^fl 旧嘛 | |1 |
QD CD
Scan
Resolution
Touch the [OK] key.
• If [Auto] is selected but the darkness or lightness of the image does not seem quite right...
If the image seems too light or too dark when [Auto] is selected, the exposure level can be adjusted using "Copy Exposure
Adjustment" in the system settings (administrator).
• To change the resolution...
When making a full-size copy, you can press the [Scan Resolution] key to select the scanning resolution. On the
MX-M283N, numbers that can be selected for the document glass are different from numbers that can be selected for the
automatic document feeder.
• System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (Exposure Type)
This is used to change the default original image type.
• System Settings (Administrator): Copy Exposure Adjustment
The exposure level used for automatic exposure adjustment can be adjusted.
• System Settings (Administrator): 600dpiX600dpi Scanning Mode for Document Feeder/Quick Scan from
Document Glass
The default resolution setting can be changed.
2-22
Contents
COPIER
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION (Auto Image)
This section explains the automatic ratio selection function (Auto Image), which automatically selects the ratio to match
the paper size.
When the paper tray is manually changed, the [Auto Image] key appears in the base screen of copy mode. Touch the
[Auto Image] key to have the reduction or enlargement ratio automatically selected based on the original size and the
selected paper size.
First place the original and select the paper tray, and then touch the [Auto Image] key.
Special Modes i
2 -Sided Copy j
Output
Quick File |
The selected ratio will appear in the ratio display.
•If the message "Rotate original from _ to 画" is displayed, change the orientation of the original as indicated in the
message.
• For a non-standard size original, the size must be entered in order to use Auto Image.
• To cancel automatic ratio selection...
Touch the [Auto Image] key so that it is no longer highlighted.
•To return the ratio to 100%...
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Status Settings (Copy Ratio)
This is used to change the default copy ratio.
2-23
Contents
COPIER
MANUALLY SELECTING THE RATIO (Preset
ratios/Zoom)
Touch the [Copy Ratio] key in the base screen of copy mode to select one of five preset enlargement ratios or four
preset reduction ratios (maximum 400%， minimum 25%).
In addition, the zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400 % in increments of 1%.
Set the ratio.
Touch a preset ratio key and/or the zoom keys to set the ratio.
There are two setting screens. Use the \±j [jJ keys to switch
between the screens.
Copy Ratio
11x17 增 11
8 你 114 5 脚幺 1. 1
[121% 彳 8 你 14 + 11x17
11x17 4 8 你 14 丨 爪]
8你14 岭败 11 V 1
i z°°m i
n^i _岭_ 2
5 你 8 你 11
100%
a
a
[ Auto Image j XY Zoom
• 1st screen
• Enlargement keys (2 ratios): 121% and 1 29%
• Reduction keys (2 ratios): 64% and 77%
• [100%] key
2nd screen
(A)
Copy E
tio | OK 1
Q
H
|biJ
|Q
猶
丨分 j Zoom 〔备 j
s 2
「40。%】 ^
网 {V}
(,35〇%) g
100%
f Auto Image ] [ XY Zoom
Enlargement keys (2 to 4 ratios)
200%， 400%， any ratio (max. of two)
Reduction keys (2 to 4 ratios)
25%, 50%, any ratio (max. of two)
[100%] key
(A) keys
The keys marked (A) can be set to show any ratio using "Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios" in the system settings
(administrator).
To quickly select a ratio, touch a reduction or enlargement key to select a ratio close to the desired ratio and then
use the zoom keys for fine adjustment.
The zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
Touch the Q key to increase the ratio, or the Q key to decrease the ratio. (If you continue to touch the ^1/^1
key, the ratio will change automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will change rapidly.)
As an alternative to touching the Q ヒ J Keys, you can also directly touch the numeric value display key and
change the value with the numeric keys.
If the message "Image is larger than the copy paper." appears when an enlargement ratio is selected, the image
may not fit on the paper.
2-24
Contents
COPIER
Copy Ratio f OK
11x17 — _
8 你 11 岭 5 你 8M L 1
國赛
|^121% | 8^x14 11x17
11x17 - ►8^x14 [ 77%1
8你1448 你 11 1. J
1 分） Zoom 〔森 オ
顧 他 i7 丁
V 1 5Mx8M4 8Mxll
100%
a
Q
| Auto Image | XY Zoom
Touch the [OK] key.
After touching the [OK] key, make sure that a paper size
suitable for the ratio is selected.
When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both 25% to 200%.
@To return the ratio to 100%...
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key.
System Settings (Administrator): Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios
Two enlargement preset ratios (101% to 400%) and two reduction preset ratios (25% to 99%) can be added. An added
preset ratio can also be changed.
2-25
Contents
COPIER
ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH
SEPARATELY (XY Zoom)
The XY Zoom feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed separately.
Both the horizontal and vertical ratios can be set from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
Touch the [Copy Ratio] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.
When 50% is selected for the horizontal ratio and 70% is selected for the vertical ratio
Original Copy
Touch the [XY Zoom] key.
(2) (1)，（3) (4)
Set the horizontal and vertical ratios.
(1) Touch the [X] key,
The [X] key will be highlighted and the horizontal ratio can
be set.
(2) Touch one of the preset ratio keys (A) and the
zoom keys (B) to set the X (horizontal) ratio.
(A) A touched preset ratio key will not be highlighted.
(B) The zoom keys can be touched to set the ratio from
25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
(3) Touch the [Y] key and set the Y (vertical)
ratio in the same way as the [X] key.
(4) Touch the [OK] key,
After touching the [OK] key, make sure that a paper size
suitable for the ratio is selected.
• To quickly select a ratio, touch a preset ratio key (A) to select a ratio close to the desired ratio and then use the
zoom keys (B) for fine adjustment.
• As an alternative to touching the Q Q keys， you can also directly touch the numeric value display key and
change the value with the numeric keys.
©
When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both 25% to 200%.
To cancel an XY zoom setting...
To cancel an XY Zoom setting, touch the [XY Zoom] key or the [Cancel] key.
2-26
Contents
COPIER
ORIGINAL SIZES
SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE
When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size.
Touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.
Specifying an inch original size
⑴ (2)
1 —
Original
f ~ OK ^ I
Auto
^Manual
5^x8^ 丨丨 8MxllR | [ 11x17
AB
5Mx8MR 8 ぬ; 13 8 你 132〆
麵 ，11 |
[ Size Input | [ Custom Size |
Specifying an AB original size
(2) (1) (3)
(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
(1) Touch the [AB^Inch] key,
(2) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
Specifying a non-standard original size
2-27
Contents
COPIER
⑴， （2) (3)
Enter the original size.
(1) Enter the X (horizontal) dimension of the
original.
With the [X] key highlighted, enter the X (horizontal)
dimension of the original with the keys. When the
document glass is used, a number from 1" to 17" (25 mm
to 432 mm) can be entered.
When the automatic document feeder is used, a number
from 5-1/2" to 17" (140 mm to 432 mm) can be entered.
If the horizontal dimension of the original is less than
5-1/2" (140 mm), use the document glass.
(2) Enter the Y (vertical) dimension of the
original.
Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical) dimension of
the original with the keys. When the document
glass is used, a number from 1 11 to 1 1 -5/8" (25 mm to 297
mm) can be entered.
When the automatic document feeder is used, a number
from 5-1/8" to 11-5/8" (131 mm to 297 mm) can be
entered.
If the vertical dimension of the original is less than 5-1/8"
(131 mm), use the document glass.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen.
Make sure that the entered dimensions appear in the
[Original] key.
STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES
You can save special original sizes that you frequently use. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and
delete special original sizes.
Storing original sizes (editing/clearing)
Up to 12 special original sizes can be stored.
Touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.
2-28
Contents
COPIER
Original
f. °k i
Custom Size
丨 X15M Y 8M | I [ j
(. 1 (. ) ( I (. )
Recall
^Store/Delete J
J
P) ⑴
Store the original size.
(1) Touch the [Store/Delete] tab.
(2) Touch a key for storing a custom original
size.
Touch a key that does not show a size ([ J).
If you wish to edit or clear a previously stored key...
Touch the key that you want to edit or clear. The following screen will appear.
A custom size has already been stored
in this location.
Cancel j f Delete j f Modify
~u ~ ;
•To edit the key, touch the [Modify] key and go to the next step.
• To clear the key, touch the [Delete] key. Make sure that the original size has been cleared and touch the [OK] key.
Enter the original size.
(1) Enter the X (horizontal) dimension of the
original.
With the [X] key highlighted, enter the X (horizontal)
dimension of the original with the Q keys. A
dimension from 1 11 to 17" (25 mm to 432 mm) can be
entered.
(2) Enter the Y (vertical) dimension of the
original.
Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical) dimension of
the original with the Q Q keys. A dimension from 1 11 to
1 1-5/8" (25 mm to 297 mm) can be entered.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off.
@To cancel the operation...
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key ((§))■
2-29
Contents
COPIER
Retrieving a stored original size
To retrieve a stored original size, touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and perform the steps below.
(2) (1) (3)
Original
「基]
Custom Size
|Ti^
1
f Recal
1 OK 1
.1 ^ J Store/Delete
Retrieve the desired stored original size.
(1) Touch the [Recall] tab,
(2) Touch the key of the original size that you
wish to retrieve,
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
@To cancel the operation...
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key (㉘) ■
2-30
Contents
]
COPIER
OUTPUT
To select output functions and the output tray, touch the [Output] key in the base screen of copy mode. Output functions
that can be selected are sort, group, offset, staple sort, saddle stitch, and punch. All explanations of the settings below
assume that a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
(3) —i( Sort
⑶
(4)
(5)
⑼
0
□
(1) [Offset Tray] key ([Center Tray] key*)
Output is delivered to the offset tray. The [Offset Tray]
key is automatically selected when the [Staple Sort] key
is selected.
* When a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is not installed,
this key is the [Center Tray] key.
(2) [Offset] key
This is used to offset each set of output from the previous
set.
The offset function operates when the checkbox is
selected ど J and does not operate when the checkbox is
not selected _ J. (The offset checkmark is automatically
cleared when the staple sort function is selected.)
^ Offset function (page 2-33)
(3) [Sort] key
This is used to sort (collate) output into sets.
隊 Sort mode (page 2-33)
(4) [Staple Sort] key
This is used to sort output into sets, staple each set, and
deliver the sets to the tray. (Note that the sets will not be
offset in the output tray.) When this function is selected,
three keys will appear for selecting the staple position.
隊 Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page
2-34)
(5) [Group] key
This is used to group copies by page.
暖 Group mode (page 2-33)
(6) Output display
An icon will appear to indicate the output mode.
(7) [Right Tray] key
Select this key to have output delivered to the right tray.
When the right tray is selected, offset, staple sort, saddle
stitch, punch, and fold cannot be selected.
(8) [OK] key
Touch this key to close the output screen and return to
the base screen.
(9) [Saddle Stitch] key
This is used to staple and fold each set of copies at the
centerline.
隊 Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page
2-34)
When this key is touched, the saddle stitch setting screen
appears. (Only when "Automatic Saddle Stitch" is
enabled in the system settings (administrator).)
(10) [Punch] key
This is used to punch holes in the output.
瞭 Punch function (page 2-37)
(11) [Fold] key
This folds printed output in half. You can choose whether
the output is folded inward or outward.
隊 Paper folding function (page 2-36)
2-31
Contents
COPIER
The above screen shows the keys that appear when a saddle stitch finisher is installed. The keys that appear will vary
depending on what peripheral devices are installed.
In addition, it may not be possible to select some keys depending what peripheral devices are installed. If your screen is
different from the screen of previous page, see the screens that follow.
Example
The screen when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is not installed.
2-32
Contents
COPIER
Set the number of copies (5).
Group mode
This function groups copies by page.
Example: Groups of 5 copies of each page
Originals Output
OUTPUT MODES
This section explains the output modes.
Sort mode
This is used to sort (collate) output into sets.
Example: Sorting the output into 5 sets
Originals Output
I i
Set the number of copies (5).
Output
Touch the [Output] key.
Touch the [Sort] key.
Press the [START] key.
The sort function is automatically selected when
originals are placed in the automatic document feeder.
When the Quick File Folder for document filing is
full, copying of a large number of originals using the
sort function will be impeded. Delete unneeded files
from the Quick File Folder.
f outPut 1 Touch the [Output] key.
巧
普
Touch the [Group] key.
Press the [START] key.
The group function is automatically selected when an
original is placed on the document glass.
Offset function
This function offsets each set of copies from the previous set in the output tray, making it easy to separate sets of copies.
Offset function "ON"
Offset function "OFF"
The offset function cannot be used in the right tray.
The offset function cannot be selected when the staple sort function is selected.
2-33
Contents
® ® ^ @
® @ ® ®
® ® ^ @
® ® ©^ ®
COPIER
Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function
The staple sort function sorts output into sets, staples each set, and delivers the sets to the tray.
The saddle stitch function staples each set in 2 places at the centerline and folds the stapled set.
The relations between the stapling positions, paper orientation, permitted paper sizes for stapling, and number of sheets
that can be stapled are shown below.
For original placement orientations, see "Original placement orientation (for the staple sort and punch functions)11 (page 2-37).
Staple sort
Stapling positions
1 staple at top left
corner*1
0®
Vertically-oriented paper
1 staple at bottom left
corner*1
因
Applicable paper sizes
8-1/2" x11n，A4, B5, 16K
Number of sheets that can
2 staples at left edge
r - I
0® ^
be stapled:
Max. 50 sheets*2
Horizontally-oriented paper
• Saddle stitch finisher
Applicable paper sizes
11" x 17n, 8-1 /2M x 14", 8-1/2Mx 13-1/2",
8-1/2nx 13-2/5", 8-1/2Mx13M,
8-1/2" x 11"R, A3, B4, A4R, B5R, 8K,
16KR
Number of sheets that can be stapled
11n x 17"， 8-1 /2Mx 14"， 8-1/2" x 13-1/2",
8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/211 x 13M, A3, B4,
8K:
Max. 25 sheets*2
8-1/2Mx11MR, A4R, B5R, 16KR:
Max. 50 sheets*2
• Finisher
Applicable paper sizes
11n x 17"， 8-1 /2Mx 14"， 8-1/2Mx 13-1/2",
8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 8-1/2" x 13"，
8-1/2" x11nR， A3, B4, A4R，8K， 16KR
Number of sheets that can be stapled
11" x 17M, 8-1 /2M x 14"， 8-1 /2Mx 13-1/2",
8-1 /2M x 13-2/5", 8-1/211 x 13M, A3, B4,
8K:
Max. 30 sheets*2
8-1/2" x11nR,A4R， 16KR:
Max. 50 sheets*2
• Finisher (large stacker)
Applicable paper sizes
11" x 17n, 8-1 /2M x 14", 8-1/2Mx 13-1/2",
8-1 /2M x 1 3-2/5" , 8-1/2Mx13M,
8-1/2Mx11MR, A3, B4, A4R, 8K
Number of sheets that can be stapled
Max. 30 sheets*2
Saddle stitch (only with
saddle stitch finisher)
Saddle stitch cannot be used
when the paper is oriented
vertically
Applicable paper sizes
11n x 17", 8-1/2Mx 14", 8-1/211 x 11MR, A3,
B4, A4R, 8K, 16KR
Number of sheets that can be stapled:
Max. 15 sheets*2
*1 When the top left corner or the bottom left corner of the paper is stapled in one place by the finisher (large stacker), the staple is
placed diagonally. (Diagonal stapling)
*2 Two sheets (one sheet when pamphlet stapling is performed) of paper up to 68 lbs. (256 g/m2) can be stapled as covers. When this
is done, the number of sheets that can be used is two less (one less for saddle stitch) than the stated maximum.
2-34
Contents
COPIER
• The number of sheets that can be stapled at once includes any covers and/or inserts that are inserted.
• When Mixed Size Original in the special modes is used with the "Same Width" setting, the maximum number of sheets that
can be stapled is 25 for a saddle stitch finisher or 30 for a finisher regardless of the paper size.
• The saddle stitch function can only be used when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
2-35
Contents
COPIER
Paper folding function
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the fold function can be used to fold printed output in half.
Paper sizes that can be folded using the paper folding function are 8-1/2" x 1 1"R, 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17", A4R, B4, A3,
16KR, and 8K. For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be folded, see the specifications in the
Safety Guide.
Fold inside
Touch the [Fold] key to open the fold settings screen. To fold inward (printed side inside), touch the [Fold Inside] key. To
fold outward (printed side outside), touch the [Fold Outside] key.
• Special media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used.
• When the paper folding function is selected, the staple or hole punch function cannot be used.
• When two-sided printing is disabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), the paper folding function cannot be
used.
2-36
Contents
COPIER
Punch function
If an optional punch module is installed, holes can be punched in output.
Paper size that can be punched is 7-1/4" x 10-1/2" to 11" x 17" (B5R to A3). However, 12" x 18" (A3W) sized paper and
special media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used.
[Examples] [Original 1] [Punch positions]
A - A
[Original 2] [Punch positions]
The hole punch function cannot be used with the saddle stitch or paper folding function together.
Original placement orientation (for the staple sort and punch functions)
When using the staple sort function or the punch function, the original must be placed as shown below to enable stapling
or punching in the desired position on the paper.
2-37
Contents
COPIER
MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY
In addition to plain paper， the bypass tray allows you to make copies on transparency film, envelopes, tab paper, and
other special media.
For detailed information on paper that can be loaded in the bypass tray, see "IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER"
(page 1-27) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE". For precautions when loading paper in the bypass tray, see
"LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-34) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
When placing the originals on the document glass...
After placing the original, be sure to close the automatic
document feeder. If left open, parts outside of the original will
be copied black, causing excessive use of toner.
Place paper in the bypass tray.
Insert the paper with print side face down.
However, if the paper type is "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed",
load the paper with the print side face up*.
* If "Disabling of Duplex" is enabled in the system settings
(administrator), load the paper in the normal way (face up in
trays 1 to 5; face down in the bypass tray).
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 1 1"R or A4R, be sure
to pull out the bypass tray extension. Pull the bypass tray
extension all the way out. If the bypass tray extension is not
pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded paper will not be
correctly displayed.
Touch the [Paper Select] key.
2-38
Contents
COPIER
Check the paper type setting for the
bypass tray. If you need to change the
setting, touch the paper type key.
If you do not need to change the paper size and type that
appear under "Bypass Tray", go to step 7.
Select the type of paper used in the
bypass tray.
Select the paper type that you will use.
Set the paper size.
(1) Select the paper size.
[Auto-Inch] key
When the paper placed in the bypass tray is an inch size
(8-1/2" x 11", etc.), the paper size will be detected
automatically and an appropriate size set.
[Auto-AB] key
When the paper inserted in the bypass tray is an AB size
(A4, etc.), the paper size will be detected automatically
and an appropriate size set.
[Custom Size] key
Touch this key if you wish to enter numeric values for the
size of the loaded paper.
暖 Enter the paper size of the bypass tray (page 2-40)
[Manual] key
This key can be touched to display the [16K], [16KR], and
[8K] keys. Touch one of these keys if you loaded the
corresponding size of paper.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• When [Envelope] is selected, specify the size of the envelope. When finished, touch the [OK] key.
• If tab paper is selected, check the size. Touch the [Auto-Inch] key or the [Auto-AB] key. When you have finished
checking/changing the setting, touch the [OK] key.
2-39
Contents
COPIER
Select the bypass tray.
(1) Touch the paper size key of the bypass tray.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If the originals were placed in the document feeder tray, the originals are copied.
• If you placed the originals on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When using sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
press the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
Enter the paper size of the bypass tray
When the [Custom Size] key is touched, the paper size entry screen appears.
Touch the [X] key and enter the horizontal dimension of
the paper with the Q Q keys, and then touch the [Y]
key and enter the vertical dimension. When finished,
touch the [OK] key.
Stored custom paper sizes appear in the keys on the left side of the screen. Custom paper sizes are stored in the system
settings. For details, see "Paper Tray Settings" (page 7-13) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS". If the key for the size that you wish
to enter appears, touch that key.
2-40
Contents
COPIER
SPECIAL MODES
This chapter explains Margin Shift, Erase， Dual Page Copy, and other special modes.
SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is pressed in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. The special
modes menu consists of two screens. Touch the [ヨ keys to move between the screens. After selecting special
mode settings, touch the [OK] key in the special modes menu screen to complete the settings and return to the base
screen of copy mode.
Special modes menu (1st screen)
(1) [Margin Shift] key
暖 ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift) (page 2-44)
(2) [Erase] key
隊 ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase) (page
2-46)
(3) [Dual Page Copy] key
^ COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND
DOCUMENT (Dual Page Copy) (page 2-48)
(4) [Pamphlet Copy] key
^ MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT
(Pamphlet Copy) (page 2-50)
(5) [Job Build] key
^ COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS AT
ONCE (Job Build) (page 2-53)
⑹ [Tandem Copy] key
^ USING TWO MACHINES TO MAKE A LARGE
NUMBER OF COPIES (Tandem Copy) (page 2-56)
(7) [Covers/Inserts] key
^ USING A DIFFERENT PAPER TYPE FOR COVERS
(Covers/Inserts) (page 2-59)
(8) [Transparency Inserts] key
^ ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency Inserts)
(page 2-70)
(9) [Multi Shot] key
^ COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO ONE
SHEET (Multi Shot) (page 2-72)
(10) [Book Copy] key
暖 COPYING A PAMPHLET (Book Copy) (page 2-74)
(11) [Tab Copy] key
^ COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (Tab
Copy) (page 2-78)
(12) [Card Shot] key
^ COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE
SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot) (page 2-81)
2-41
Contents
COPIER
Special modes menu (2nd screen)
Special Modes
m —— -
Image Edit
Quick File
Sharpness
2
Q
a
(1) [Stamp] key
^ PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON COPIES
(Stamp) (page 2-84)
(2) [Image Edit] key
隊 [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-104)
(3) [Sharpness] key
隊 ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE
(Sharpness) (page 2-117)
(4) [File] key
This saves a job in a folder of the document filing
function.
(5) [Quick File] key
This saves a job in the Quick File folder of the document
filing function.
(6) [Proof Copy] key
^ CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING (Proof
Copy) (page 2-118)
⑺ [Original Count] key
暖 CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE COPYING (Original
Count) (page 2-121)
(8) [Mixed Size Original] key
^ COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
(Mixed Size Original) (page 2-123)
(9) [Slow Scan Mode] key
瞭 COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)
(page 2-126)
Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. In this case, a message indicating that the combination is not possible will be displayed.
2-42
Contents
COPIER
[OK] key and [Cancel] key
In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:
(A) Enter the selected special mode settings and return to the base screen of copy mode.
(B) Enter the selected special mode settings and return to the special modes menu screen. Touch this key when you
wish to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special modes menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special modes menu
screen.
Contents
2-43
COPIER
ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift)
This function is used to shift the copy image right, left or down to adjust the margin.
This is convenient when you wish to bind the copies with a string or in a binder.
Shifting the image to the right so the copies can be bound at the left edge with a string
Not using margin shift
三 □
The punch holes cut off
part of the image
Using margin shift
o
The image is moved to
allow space for the string
holes so the image is not
cut off.
Margin shift positions
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Margin Shift] key.
隊 Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
(1) (2) (3)
1— ,
Special Modes
圓
[ 一 OK 一 )
Margin Shift
Cancel Jf OK
Right Le:
m i
ft Down
Ll
i
仙
1
Side 1 _ Side 2
(0~1) (o-l)
inch inch
LzJ W
Set the margin shift.
(1) Touch the margin shift position.
Select one of the three positions.
(2) Set the amount of the margin shift with
aa-
0" to 1 11 (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
2-44
Contents
COPIER
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)). ^
Rotation copy cannot be used in combination with margin shift.
@To cancel the margin shift setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Margin Shift Setting
The default margin shift setting can be set from 0" to 1 11 (0 mm to 20 mm). The factory default setting is 1/2" (10 mm).
2-45
Contents
COPIER
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase)
The erase function is used to erase shadows around the edges of copies that occur when copying thick originals or
books.
When a thick book is copied
Erase modes
Not using the erase
function
Using the erase
function
三 □
i 三 □
_
i
_ 1
I !
l |
_
i !
! !
Shadows appear on the
copy.
Shadows do not appear on
the copy.
Edge Erase
三 □
Center Erase
Edge + Center Erase
三 □ iED：
Side Erase
兰 □)
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Erase] key.
隊 Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
2-46
Contents
COPIER
Special Modes
Erase
Edge
Erase
[>
(1)
Center
Erase
Edge+Center
Erase
Ell
Side Erase
(2) (3)
^^5
3 0 3 3
Select the erase settings.
(1) Touch the desired erase mode.
Select one of the four positions.
Touch the [Side Erase] key to open the following screen.
Erase
Side Erase
_
Cancel
□ up
Erase position
for Side 2
&
VO
Left 口
Right
i
な
□ D。
wn
^Different Side
| from Side 1
Touch the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase
and make sure that a checkmark appears.
When performing 1 -sided to 2-sided copying or 2-sided to
2-sided copying, set the erase edge on the reverse side.
• If you touch the [Same Side as Side 1] key, the edge in
the same position as on the front side will be erased.
• If you touch the [Different Side from Side 1], the edge in
the position opposite to the erased edge on the front
side will be erased.
When you have completed the erase edge settings, touch
the [OK] key.
(2) Set the erasure width with QS-
0" to 1 " (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (®).
©
If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio.
For example, if the erase width setting is 1 11 (20 mm) and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 1/2" (10 mm).
To cancel the erase setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment
The default erase width can be set from 0" to 1 11 (0 mm to 20 mm). The factory default setting is 1/2" (10 mm).
2-47
Contents
COPIER
COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A
BOUND DOCUMENT (Dual Page Copy)
The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two document pages that are placed side by side on the
document glass. This function is useful when making copies of the facing pages of a book or other bound document.
Copying the facing pages of a book or bound document
Book or bound document
5 ] [ 6
The facing pages are copied
onto 2 separate pages.
Place the original on the document glass.
Align the center of the original with the appropriate size mark T .
Size mark
圔
▼ ▼
1
Centerline of
n
Centerline of
A3 original
11" x 17" original
Select 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size paper.
Select the paper as explained in "PAPER TRAYS" (page 2-11).
2-48
Contents
COPIER
Select Dual Page Copy.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
(2) Touch the [Dual Page Copy] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
I Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
• When using dual page copy, the original must be placed on the document glass.
•To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function.
However, note that [Center Erase] and [Edge + Center Erase] cannot be used.
@To cancel dual page copy...
Touch the [Dual Page Copy] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
2-49
Contents
COPIER
MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT
(Pamphlet Copy)
This function copies 2 original pages onto the front side and 2 original pages onto the reverse side of each sheet of
paper so that the copies can be folded at the centerline to form a pamphlet.
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
Pamphlet copy using 8 original pages
Originals
1st page 2nd page
厄
5
5th page 6th page
1
~|
三 □
3
4
3rd page 4th page
k
7
7th page 8th page
Binding side
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
If the originals are 2-sided, place them in the document feeder tray.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Pamphlet Copy] key.
隊 Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
2-50
Contents
COPIER
(1) (2) (3)
Select pamphlet copy settings.
(1) If the original is 1 -sided, touch the [1 -Sided]
key. If the original is 2-sided, touch the
[2-Sided] key,
(2) Select the binding edge ([Left Binding] or
[Right Binding]).
(3) To insert a cover, touch the [Cover Setting]
key.
If you do not want to add a cover, go to step 5.
(1)
Pamphlet Copy
: Cover Setting
Bypass
Tray
•i
11x17
Plain
(A)
(B)
Cancel
Print on Cover (2 -Sided)
□
Select cover settings.
(1) If the cover sheet will be copied on, touch
the [Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No]
key.
(2) Select paper settings for the cover.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the cover is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the "Paper
T ray 11 key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the paper tray for the cover in the
tray selection screen and touch the [OK] key.
Pamphlet Copy
Cover Setting
Paper Tray
|l. 8你11
l=J
Plain
[2. 8V2X11R
l=J
Plain
卜 8 紐 14
l=J
Plain
卜 11x17
1=)
Plain
Bypass Tray
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.
@To cancel cover settings...
Touch the [Cancel] key.
2-51
Contents
COPIER
n [^i [W\ i—
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
and then touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
•To make pamphlet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function.
• When the pamphlet copy function is selected, 2-sided copying mode is automatically selected. When settings are selected
that prevent 2-sided copying, the pamphlet copy function cannot be used.
• Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the
machine. Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically produced at the
end if the number of original pages is not a multiple of four.
• When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the saddle stitch function can be used.
When pamphlet copy is used in combination with the saddle stitch function and the number of originals is greater than the
number of sheets that can be stapled, a message will appear showing the [Cancel] key, the [Continue] key, and the
[Divide] key.
To cancel the job, touch the [Cancel] key. To make pamphlet copies without stapling, touch the [Continue] key. To divide
the pages into sets that can be stapled, touch the [Divide] key.
If you selected cover insertion settings, it will not be possible to select "Divide". You can either continue pamphlet copying
without stapling, or cancel the job.
@To cancel pamphlet copy...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Automatic Saddle Stitch
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, this setting can be enabled to have saddle stitch take place automatically when the
pamphlet copy function is selected.
2-52
Contents
COPIER
Special Modes
l Marqin Shift j
l Pamphlet Copy j
[ E 職 I gDUaCopPyage|
r# xt i
[Covers/lnsertsj I ^ t ^ I I Multi Shot j
f Book Copy
Tab Copy
Card Shot
Select Job Build.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key,
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
(2) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key to scan the first set of originals.
Scanning begins.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
2-53
Contents
COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF
ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job Build)
When copying a very large number of originals, this function allows you to divide the originals into sets and feed each
set through the automatic document feeder one set at a time.
Use this function when you wish to copy all of the originals as a single job but the number of originals exceeds the
maximum number that can be inserted.
This function is convenient when you wish to sort copies of a large number of originals into multiple sets. Because all
originals are copied as a single job, you are saved the trouble of sorting the copies that would be required if the originals
were divided into separate copy jobs.
When scanning originals in sets, divide the sheets so that no set has more than the number of paper that can be loaded,
and then scan from the set with the first page. The settings that you select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.
Sorting the copies of a large number of originals into 2 sets
Originals are
Originals scanned in
separate sets
门
门
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
a a
COPIER
Insert the next set of originals and press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
©
The copy settings (Exposure, Paper Select, and Copy Ratio only) can be changed for each set of originals. If you need
to change the copy setting, follow the steps in "Changing the copy settings for each set of originals".
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)). All scanned data will be cleared.
Place next original and press [Start] .
to change copy settings,
press [Change] .
Change
Touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
If the Quick File Folder of document filing mode is full, copying in job build mode will be impeded. Delete unneeded files from
the Quick File Folder.
@To cancel job build mode....
Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.
2-54
Contents
COPIER
Changing the copy settings for each set of originals
The copy settings (Exposure, Paper Select, and Copy Ratio only) can be changed for each set of originals.
Perform the step below before pressing the [Start] key to scan the originals in step 4 above.
Touch the [Change] key.
Change the desired copy settings in the
screen that appears and press the [Start]
key.
Scanning of the originals will begin using the changed copy
settings.
To cancel the copy setting changes and begin copying without
scanning the new originals, touch the [Read-End] key.
• The original size cannot be changed manually with the [Original] key. If the automatic original detection function is
operating, the original size will be detected for each set of originals placed.
• When the bypass tray is selected, it is not possible to change the paper type.
•If "XY Zoom" was set for the ratio when the previous original was scanned, it will not be possible to change the ratio.
• When "Job Build" is used in combination with the functions below, the [Change] key will not appear in the screen of step 1
above.
Pamphlet copy, tandem copy, covers/inserts, transparency inserts, multi-shot, book copy, tab copy, staple sort, saddle
stitch
2-55
Contents
COPIER
#
_ ュ I
] raxpri
Covers/Inserts
Transparency
Inserts
Select tandem copy.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
暖 SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
(2) Touch the [Tandem Copy] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
USING TWO MACHINES TO MAKE A LARGE
NUMBER OF COPIES (Tandem Copy)
Two machines connected to the same network can be used to run a large copy job in parallel.
Each machine prints half of the copies, reducing the time required to complete the job.
Master machine and slave machine
In the following explanation, the master machine is the machine that is used to scan the originals. The slave machine is
another machine specified in the master machine that only helps print the copies; it is not used to scan the originals.
Masfer machine
4 sets of copies are
made
2 sets of
copies
2 sets of
copies
Slave machine
_ '
Network environment
Before using tandem copy
• To use this function, two machines must be connected to your network. Even if more machines are connected to the
network, this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job.
• To use the tandem copy function, "Tandem Connection Setting" must be configured in the system settings
(administrator).
• When configuring the system settings in the master machine, the IP address of the slave machine is required. For the
port number, it is best to use the initial setting (50001). Unless you experience difficulty with this setting, do not
change the port number. The tandem settings should be configured by your network administrator. If the master
machine and slave machine will switch roles, configure the IP address of the master machine in the slave machine.
The same port number can be used for both machines.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
B E
2-56
Contents
COPIER
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set. When the [START] key is
pressed, the copies will automatically be divided between the
master and slave machines.
If an odd number of copies is set, the master machine will print
the extra set.
©
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key {©) and then enter the correct number.
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
and then touch the [Read-End] key.
The following screen appears when the [START] key is pressed.
After the message appears, tandem copying begins.
If tandem copying is not possible, the following screen appears.
A
Tandem output is not allowed.
Output all sets using master machine?
(Cancel will delete the job. )
Cancel
To have the master machine make all copies, touch the [OK] key. To cancel the job, touch the [Cancel] key.
©
• To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
• To cancel tandem copying...
Touch the [STOP] keys (®) on both the master machine and the slave machine.
2-57
Contents
® ® ® @
® ® ® @
® @ ⑦ ©
COPIER
In this situation...
A punch module is installed on the master machine but not on the slave machine.
•Copying without punching: tandem copy is possible.
•Copying with punching: tandem copy is not possible.
In this way, if tandem copying is executed using a function that the slave machine does not have, a message will appear. To
have the master machine make all copies, touch the [OK] key. To cancel the job, touch the [Cancel] key.
If a machine runs out of paper
If either the master machine or the slave machine run out of paper, the machine that ran out of paper will hold the job while
the machine that still has paper continues the job. When paper is added to the machine that ran out, the job resumes.
When user authentication is enabled
User authentication is enabled in the master machine: tandem copying is possible.
User authentication is enabled in the slave machine but not in the master machine: tandem copying is not possible.
If tandem copying is performed without setting the number of copies
A message will appear and the master machine and slave machine will each make one set of copies (total of two sets).
@To cancel tandem copy...
Touch the [Tandem Copy] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Tandem Connection Setting
This must be configured to use the tandem function. This can also be used to disable the tandem function.
2-58
Contents
COPIER
USING A DIFFERENT PAPER TYPE FOR
COVERS (Covers/Inserts)
A different type of paper can be inserted in positions corresponding to front and back covers of a copy job when the
automatic document feeder is used. A different type of paper can also be automatically added as an insert at specified
pages.
Example of adding covers
Example of adding inserts
Example of adding covers/inserts
About the explanations of covers and
inserts
There are various ways of using covers and inserts. To
keep the explanations simple, covers and inserts are
explained separately. For specific examples, see
"Examples of covers and inserts" (page 2-142).
Preparations for using covers and inserts
• Load the cover/insert paper in the tray before using the cover/insert function.
• Before selecting the cover/insert function, place the originals in the document feeder tray, select 1 -sided or 2-sided
copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings. When these settings have been
completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts.
• The originals must be scanned using the automatic document feeder. The document glass cannot be used.
• For covers, only one sheet can be inserted for the front cover and only one sheet can be inserted for the back cover.
For inserts, up to 100 sheets can be inserted. Note that two insert sheets cannot be inserted between the same two
pages.
• When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insert cannot be inserted between the front and reverse
sides of an original.
2-59
Contents
COPIER
INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (Cover Settings)
A different type of paper can be inserted at the positions corresponding to the front and back covers of a copy job.
This is useful for arranging documents in an attractive format and for using a different type of paper as a cover on an
estimate sheet or similar document.
Covers can be used in combination with inserts.
Copying on a front cover and inserting together with a back cover
AAA - - - -
1 2 3 4 5
Front cover paper Back cover paper
The document glass cannot be used.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Covers/Inserts] key.
隊 Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
Touch the [Front Cover] key.
2-60
Contents
COPIER
(3) (2) (1) (4)
Select cover settings.
(1) If the cover sheet will be copied on, touch
the [Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No]
key.
If the [No] key is touched, only cover insertion will be
performed.
In this case, go to step (3).
(2) To copy on one side of the cover, touch the
[1 -Sided] key. To copy on both sides of the
cover, touch the [2-Sided] key.
(3) Select paper settings for the cover.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the cover is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the "Paper
T ray 11 key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the paper tray for the cover in the
tray selection screen and touch the [OK] key.
Covers /Inserts
Front Covei
: [ OK 1
1
1
1
1
Paper Tray
Bypass Tray
1. 8%xll (=) Plain
Plaia
2 . SViKllR l=J Plain
3 • 81Acl4 l=j Plain
4 . 11x17 |=j Plain
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
©
If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied on, tab
paper can be inserted.
To cancel cover settings...
Touch the [Cancel] key.
Special Modes
f 0K 1
Covers/ Inserts
( " Cancel ]| OK |
Cover Setting
I
1
Inserts
Setting
IHBI
Insertion
Type A
_ Insertion 1
\ Settings J
Back
Cover
Insertion
Type B
|
i Tray Settings | Page Layout
If you wish to insert a back cover, touch
the [Back Cover] key.
The screen of step 4 appears. The procedures are the same as
for the front cover. Follow the procedures in step 4.
When following the procedures, substitute "Back Cover" for
"Front Cover".
2-61
Contents
COPIER
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
You can touch the [Insertion Type A] key or the [Insertion Type
B] key to select insert settings.
隊 INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN COPIES (Insert
Settings) (page 2-63)
To check your settings, touch the [Page Layout] key.
隊 CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS (Page Layout)
(page 2-67)
Press the [START] key.
Copying of the originals in the document feeder tray begins.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (®).
• This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function.
• The document glass cannot be used.
• Cover settings cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).
@To cancel cover sheet insertion...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
2-62
Contents
COPIER
INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN COPIES
(Insert Settings)
You can have different paper automatically inserted as inserts at specified pages of copies. Two types of paper can be
used as inserts, and the insertion positions can be specified separately for each.
Covers can be used in combination with inserts.
Example: Insert A after page 3 and insert B after page 5.
The document glass cannot be used.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Covers/Inserts] key,
隊 Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
Touch the [Insertion Type A] key.
2-63
Contents
COPIER
(3) (2) (1) (4) Select insert settings.
(1) If the insert will be copied on, touch the
[Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No] key.
If the [No] key is touched, only insert sheet insertion will
be performed.
In this case, go to step (3).
(2) To copy on one side of the insert, touch the
[1 -Sided] key. To copy on both sides, touch
the [2-Sided] key,
(3) Select insert paper settings.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the insert is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
To change the paper tray for the inserts, touch the "Paper
T ray" key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the desired paper tray in the tray
selection screen and touch the [OK] key.
Covers/Inserts
Insertion Type A Settings
Paper Tray
Bypass A A\
Tray 1 ~
8^x11 —i
Plain — I - (B)
Cancel j f OK
^ Print on Insert Sheets
nE]
1-Sided 2-Sided
-r 画，
Covers /Inserts
Insertion Type A
Paper Tray
Bypass Tray-
Plain
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
If both sides of the insert will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied
on, tab paper can be inserted.
If you wish to insert a different type of
insert sheet, touch the [Insertion Type B]
key.
The screen of step 4 appears. Settings are selected in the
same way as for insert type A. Follow the procedures in step 4.
When following the procedures, substitute "Insert Type B" for
"Insert Type A".
Contents
2-64
COPIER
Special Modes
_ i. 0K 1
Cancel J 丨 OK
Cover Setting
Front
Cover
Back
Cover
Touch the [Insertion Settings] key.
(1) (2) (5)
(A) (B) ⑶ (C)
Specify the pages where inserts A and B
will be inserted.
(1) Touch the [Insertion Type A] key or the
[Insertion Type B] key,
Specify the page where the highlighted insert will be
inserted.
(A) This shows the tray selected for insert type A and the
paper size and type.
(B) This shows the tray selected for insert type B and the
paper size and type.
When the [Insertion Type A] key is highlighted, the insert
sheet insertion settings are applied to [Insertion Type A].
When the [Insertion Type B] key is highlighted, the insert
settings are applied to [Insertion Type B].
(2) Enter the page number where the insert
sheet will be inserted with the numeric
keys,
For more information, see "Inserts (copying of 1 -sided
originals)11 (page 2-147) and "Inserts (copying of 2-sided
originals)11 (page 2-147).
The [CLEAR] key (© ) can be pressed to return the
setting of the selected item to the default value. If you
make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (©) and then
enter the correct number.
(3) Touch the [Enter] key.
(C) This shows the total number of inserts. Up to 100
insert sheets can be inserted. To insert multiple
inserts, touch the [Enter] key after entering each
insertion page number (insertion position) with the
numeric keys.
(4) To insert another insert sheet, repeat steps
(1)to ⑶.
(5) Touch the [OK] key,
If both sides of the insert will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied
on, tab paper can be inserted.
Contents
2-65
COPIER
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
To select cover settings, touch the [Front Cover] key or the
[Back Cover] key.
隊 INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (Cover Settings) (page
2-60)
To check your settings, touch the [Page Layout] key.
隊 CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS (Page Layout)
(page 2-67)
Press the [START] key.
Copying of the originals in the document feeder tray begins.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
• Use the same size of paper for the inserts as for the copies.
• Up to 100 insert sheets can be added. Note that two insert sheets cannot be inserted between the same two pages.
• When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insert cannot be added between the front and reverse sides of
an original page.
• This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function.
• Cover/insert settings cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).
@To cancel cover sheet insertion...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
2-66
Contents
COPIER
CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS (Page Layout)
Cover settings and insert settings can be combined.
This section explains how to check completed cover and insert insertion page settings, and change or delete insertion
pages.
Changing insert A from page 4 to page 5
4th page, insert A
7th page, insert B
9th page, insert B
12th page, insert A
5th page, insert A
7th page, insert B
9th page, insert B
12th page, insert A
I Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Covers/Inserts] key,
隊 Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
Touch the [Page Layout] key.
2-67
Contents
COPIER
Example: Touch insert A at page 4
Touch the key of the page that you wish
to delete or change.
If you do not need to change the setting, touch the [OK] key
and go to step 6.
• Each key shows a print image icon and the insertion page.
• If there are multiple screens, touch the [_^J Q keys to move
through the screens.
To edit a cover, touch the [Front Cover] key or the [Back Cover]
key and go to step 4.
Touch the key of the insertion page that you want to edit or
clear. The following screen will appear.
Modify the insertion?
Cancel j i Delete レ Modi tv
•To delete the page, touch the [Delete] key. After deleting the
key, touch the [OK] key and go to step 6.
•To edit the page, touch the [Modify] key.
To edit an insert, touch the [Insertion Type A] key or the
[Insertion Type B] key and go to step 5.
•To cancel, touch the [Cancel] key.
lcons
^ / P： Copy on front side only
P： Copy on reverse side only
P： 2-sided copy
P： Do not copy
For inserts, the insertion page also appears.
* represents a page number.
*/-: Copy only on front side at page *
*/*: 2-sided copy at page 7*
<*: Insert without copying at page *
Covers /Inserts
Front Cover Setting [ Cancel ]f OK
Paper Tray
Print on Front Cover
nE]
1-Sided 2-Sided
Bypass
Tray
8V2X11
Plain
Change the front/back cover settings.
The settings are changed in the same way as they are initially
configured. See step 4 of "INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES
(Cover Settings)" (page 2-60) to change the cover settings.
After changing the settings, touch the [OK] key and return to
step 3.
@To cancel cover settings...
Touch the [Cancel] key.
2-68
Contents
COPIER
Covers /Inserts
Insertion Modify
鼸 OK 1
Insertion Page
11 [Ml
: f [~1 Insertion
U7 Type B
Tray 1
syixii
Plain
Bypass
Tray
8V2X11
Plain
, - Total: 4
Enter
Change the settings for insert type A/B.
The settings are changed in the same way as they are initially
configured. See step 7 of "INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN
COPIES (Insert Settings)11 (page 2-63) to change the insert
settings.
After changing the settings, touch the [OK] key and return to
step 3.
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
2-69
Contents
COPIER
ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM
(Transparency Inserts)
When copying on transparency film, the sheets may stick together due to static electricity. The transparency inserts
function can be used to automatically insert a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film, making the
sheets easy to handle.
It is also possible to copy on the inserts.
Place the transparency film in the
bypass tray.
• Transparency film can only be placed in the bypass tray.
• Place the transparency film face down on the bypass tray.
When placing the transparency film, the rounded corner of
the film should be:
- At the front and left if the film is oriented horizontally.
-At the back and left if the film is oriented vertically.
• After loading the transparency film, configure the bypass tray
settings as explained in "MAKING COPIES USING THE
BYPASS TRAY11 (page 2-38).
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Transparency Inserts] key.
隊 Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
2-70
Contents
COPIER
Select insert settings.
(1) Select whether or not the insert paper will
be copied on ([Yes] or [No]).
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Explanation of (A)
When transparency inserts is selected, paper suitable for
the inserts is automatically selected. The automatically
selected paper tray, paper size, and paper type are
indicated here.
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
• The number of copies cannot be selected in this mode.
• When performing 2-sided copying, only "2-sided to 1 -sided" mode can be used.
@To cancel the transparency inserts setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
2-71
Contents
COPIER
COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO
ONE SHEET (Multi Shot)
Multiple original pages can be copied onto a single sheet of paper in a uniform layout. Select 2in1 to copy two original
pages onto one sheet, or 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet. This function is convenient when you wish to
present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.
2in1 copying 4in1 copying
A
B
C
D
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Multi Shot] key.
隊 Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
2-72
Contents
COPIER
(1) (3) (2) (4)
Special Modes
回
[ 一 基 一 )
Multi :
Shot
Cancel
OK
Layout
2 ini
4 ini
1 圔回
m
，田
!
Border
Select the number of originals to be
copied onto one sheet of paper, the
layout, and the border.
(1) Touch the [2in1] key or the [4in1] key,
If needed, the images will be rotated.
(2) Select the layout.
Select the order in which the originals will be arranged on
the copy.
Number
of pages
2in1
4in1
Layout
/
:
舟
4F
i O \
(
i f
:- . ■ . :
; ^
凰
ぐ
⑶
(4)
The arrows in the above diagram indicate how the images
are arranged.
Select the border.
Solid lines, broken lines, or no lines can be selected.
Touch the [OK] key,
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
I Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned
and then touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
When using the multi shot function, the appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set based on the original size, paper size,
and the number of originals to be copied onto one sheet. The minimum possible reduction ratio is 25%. The original size,
paper size, and selected number of original pages may require that the ratio be less than 25%. As copying will take place at
25% in this case, part of the original images may be cut off.
@To cancel a multi shot setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
2-73
Contents
COPIER
The copies are in the same
layout as the original.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Book Copy] key.
隊 Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
2-74
Contents
COPYING A PAMPHLET (Book Copy)
This function is used to make a copy of the two facing pages of an open book or other bound document.
Copies made with this function can be folded at the center to create a booklet.
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
How to place the original
Originals
Back cover Cover
Place the original
©
Inside of 1st page
cover
2nd page 3rd page
4th page Inside of
back cover
III
III
III
COPIER
(1) (2)
Select book copy settings.
(1) Select the binding position ([Left Binding]
or [Right Binding]).
(2) To insert a cover, touch the [Cover Setting]
key.
If a cover will not be added, go to step 4.
Cover settings cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).
(1)
Select cover settings.
(1) If the cover sheet will be copied on, touch
the [Yes] key. Otherwise， touch the [No]
key.
(2) Select paper settings for the cover.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the cover is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
In the example screen, 11 11 x 1 7" (A3) size plain paper is
loaded in the bypass tray.
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the "Paper
T ray 11 key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the desired paper tray in the tray
selection screen and touch the [OK] key.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.
@To cancel cover settings...
Touch the [Cancel] key.
2-75
Contents
COPIER
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
Place the opened front cover and back cover face down.
Press the [START] key to scan the first original.
Scanning begins.
Scan the remaining original pages in the following order:
Opened inside of front cover and 1st page
Opened 2nd and 3rd page
Opened last page and inside of back cover
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
Place the next pair of opened pages and press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all original pages have been scanned.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
2-76
Contents
COPIER
Place next original . Press [Start] .
When finished, press [Read-End] .
零
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (®).
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Copying will begin.
• Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically added at the end if the total
number of original pages is not a multiple of four.
• If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the book copy function can be used in combination with the saddle stitch or paper
folding function.
• When book copy is selected, 2-sided copying is automatically selected. When settings are selected that prevent 2-sided
copying, the book copy function cannot be used.
@To cancel book copy...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
2-77
Contents
COPIER
COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER
(Tab Copy)
Captions can be copied onto the tabs of tab paper. Prepare appropriate originals for the tab captions.
Tab copy is possible from the bypass tray.
Prepare originals that The image is shifted
match the tab positions. by the width of the tab
RELATION BETWEEN THE ORIGINALS AND THE TAB
PAPER
Tab copying with a left binding
2-78
Contents
COPIER
Tab copying with a right binding
Originals
Placing the originals
• Document feeder tray
Loading tab paper
Originals
Final image
Insert the originals so that the side with
no
tab text enters first.
• Document glass
Place so that the side with the tab text is
on the left.
Load the tab paper so that the tab on the
first sheet is away from you.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Tab Copy] key.
隊 Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
(1)
Set the tab width.
(1) Set the image shift width (tab width) with
the QS keys.
0" to 5/8" (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Contents
2-79
COPIER
Load the tab paper.
When using the bypass tray, place the paper with the print side
down.
Place the paper so that the sides with the tabs enter the
machine last.
After loading the tab paper, configure the bypass tray settings
as explained in "MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS
TRAY11 (page 2-38).
The width of the tab paper can be as wide as 8-1/2" x 1 1" paper (8-1/2") plus 5/8" (or A4 width (210 mm) plus 20 mm).
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
@To cancel tab copy...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Tab Copy Setting
The default image shift width can be set from 0" to 5/8" (0 mm to 20 mm). The factory default setting is "1/2" (10 mm)11.
2-80
Contents
COPIER
COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE
SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot)
When copying a card, this function allows you to copy the front and reverse sides together onto a single sheet of paper.
This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes and helps save paper.
Originals
Front
Back
Copies
J Example of an 8-1/2" x 1 1
Example of an 8-1/2" x 1 1" (A4) size landscape copy
(A4) size portrait copy
Select the paper to be used for card
shot.
Select the paper as explained in "PAPER TRAYS" (page 2-11).
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Card Shot] key.
隊 Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 2-41)
2-81
Contents
COPIER
Select card shot settings.
(1) Enter the original size.
With the [X] key highlighted, enter the X (horizontal)
dimension of the original with the Q Q keys.
Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical) dimension of
the original with the Q keys.
(A) To enlarge or reduce the images to fit the paper
based on the entered original size, touch the [Fit to
Page] key.
(B) The [Size Reset] key can be pressed to return the
horizontal and vertical dimensions to the values set in
"Card Shot Settings" in the system settings
(administrator).
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode. Make
sure that the entered dimensions appear in the [Original]
key.
Press the [START] key to scan the front side of the card.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
Turn the card over and press the [START] key to scan the reverse side of the
card.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key (®).
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Copying will begin.
2-82
Contents
COPIER
• The original must be placed on the document glass.
• Copying is only possible on standard size paper.
• XY Zoom cannot be used when using this function.
• The image cannot be rotated when using this function.
@To cancel card shot...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
System Settings (Administrator): Card Shot Settings
This is used to set the values to which the size returns when the [Size Reset] key is pressed. 1 11 to 8-1/2" (25 mm to 210 mm)
can be entered for both the horizontal and vertical dimensions.
The factory default settings are 3-3/8" (86 mm) for X (the width) and 2-1/8" (54 mm) for Y (the height).
2-83
Contents
COPIER
PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON
COPIES (Stamp)
Use this function to print the date, a stamp, the page number, and text on copies. In addition, specific text can be added
to a copy as a watermark (Watermark).
Six printing positions are available: top left, top center, top right, bottom left, bottom center, and bottom right.
The printing positions are separated into areas that are used for the date, page number and text (A below), and areas
that are used for a stamp (B below).The watermark is printed at the center of the paper.
Stamp
Print area
Maximum number
of positions
Date
A
1 position only
Stamp
B
6 positions
Page
Numbering
A
1 position only
Text
A
6 positions
Watermark
Center of
paper
一
• If the selected stamp content of one position overlaps the stamp content of another position, priority will be given in the
following order: watermark, right side, left side, center. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.
• Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting.
• Text will be printed at the preset exposure regardless of the exposure setting.
• Depending on the size of the paper, some printed content may be cut off or shifted out of position.
When used in combination with other special modes
When Stamp is used in combination with the following special modes, the special modes are reflected in the stamp
content.
Special Modes
Printing
Margin Shift
Together with the image, the stamp content is shifted the amount of the margin width.
Tab Copy
Centering
Unlike a copy image that moves, the image will be printed in the position set in the stamp.
Dual Page Copy
Card Shot
The stamp is printed on each copy sheet.
Multi Shot
The print content is printed on each original page.
Pamphlet Copy
Book Copy
The stamp is printed on each page of the resulting pamphlet or book.
Covers/Inserts
Use the stamp settings to select whether or not the item is printed on inserted covers and
inserts.
2-84
Contents
COPIER
Select the print position.
Select from 6 positions: top left, top center, top right, bottom
left, bottom center, bottom right.
You can also skip this step and go directly to the next step. In
this case, the stamp items will be printed in the following
positions:
Date: Top right Stamp: Top left
Page number: Bottom center Text: Top left
The position of a watermark cannot be selected. Proceed to the
next step.
Print positions
The keys that show the print positions will appear as follows
depending on the state of the settings.
Not selected, stamp setting has not
been selected.
Selected during selection of the stamp
setting.
Not available, stamp setting has already
been selected.
The above key is the top left key. The appearance of each key
varies depending on the position of the key.
"Date" and "Page Numbering" cannot be selected in multiple positions. If the [Date] key or [Page Numbering] key is
touched when "Date" or "Page Numbering" has already been selected for a position, a message will appear asking
you if you wish to move that item to the selected position. To move the item, touch the [Yes] key. Otherwise, press
the [No] key.
If you attempt to set "Date", "Text", or "Page Numbering" in a position where one of these items is already set, a
message will appear. To change the previously selected item to the new item, touch the [Yes] key. To keep the
previous item, touch the [No] key.
2-85
Contents
GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP
To select stamp settings, follow the steps below.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Stamp] key.
瞭 Special modes menu (2nd screen) (page 2-42)
COPIER
Select settings for the original and
covers/inserts.
(1) Touch the [Original Orientation] key and
specify the orientation of the placed
original.
If 2-sided originals have been placed, touch the 「_H I
key and specify the binding position (booklet binding or
tablet binding) of the originals.
(2) Select stamp settings for covers/inserts,
If you do not want to print the stamp items on
covers/inserts, touch the checkbox to remove the
checkmark [ |.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
To edit a stamp position or delete a stamp item, touch the
[Layout] key.
隊 CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT (Layout) (page
2-100)
• When copying on covers/inserts is not selected, printing will not take place even if a checkmark appears.
v ^ ノ • This setting cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).
2-86
Contents
Select Stamp.
For detailed information on each of the stamp items, see the
following sections:
Date: ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date)
(page 2-88)
Stamp: STAMPING COPIES (Stamp) (page 2-90)
Page numbering: PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES
(Page Numbering) (page 2-92)
Text: PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text) (page
2-96)
Watermark: ADDING A WATERMARK TO A
COPY (Watermark) (page 2-102)
~w
\ OK I
Date
Stamp
Page
| Numbering
Text
I 1. .す. 1 [
へ i
〕 r^j〔
When you have finished selecting stamp
settings, touch the \±] key.
COPIER
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
@To cancel Stamp …
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
2-87
Contents
COPIER
ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date)
The date can be printed on copies. The position of the date, format, and page (first page only or all pages) can be
selected.
Example: Printing APRIL 4, 2010 in the top right corner of the paper.
1 1
1 . - . J
APR/04/2010
J
Touch the [Date] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP11 (page 2-85).
Cancel I OK
YYYY/MM/DD
醒
□
DD/MM/YYYY
1]
MM DD, YYYY
□
1
(1)
1
(2)
APR/04/2010
First Page
Cancel
YYYY/MM/DD
圓
□
APR/04/2010
Date Change
DD/MM/YYYY
□
l
MM DD, YYYY
□
i^l
Set the date format.
(1) Touch the key that shows the desired date
format,
(2) If you selected [YYYY/MM/DD],
[MM/DD/YYYY], or [DD/MM/YYYY], touch the
[/]，[■]， [■]， or [ ] key to select the separator.
Check the displayed date. If you need to
change the date, touch the [Date
Change] key.
Set the date that you wish to use and touch the [OK] key.
Stamp
Date Change
l °K 1
Year Month Day
0| | 04 | [ 04
aa
As an alternative to touching the Q keys, you can also
directly touch the numeric value display key and change the
value with the numeric keys.
• If you select a date that does not exist (such as Feb. 30)， the [OK] key will be grayed out to prevent entry.
• Changing the date here will not change the date that is set in the machine using "Clock" in the system settings.
2-88
Contents
COPIER
Select the pages that the date will be
printed on and touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-85) to complete
the copy procedure.
@To cancel the date print setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
2-89
Contents
COPIER
STAMPING COPIES (Stamp)
Text such as "CONFIDENTIAL" can be printed in white on a dark background as a "stamp" on copies.
The position, size, density, and pages (first page only or all pages) can be selected for a stamp.
Printing "CONFIDENTIAL" in the top left corner of a copy
The following 12 selections are available for the stamp text.
CONFIDENTIAL
PRIORITY
PRELIMINARY
FINAL
FOR YOUR INFO.
DO NOT COPY
IMPORTANT
COPY
URGENT
DRAFT
TOP SECRET
PLEASE REPLY
Three levels can be selected for the density of the stamp background.
Two stamp sizes can be selected.
D Touch the [Stamp] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP11 (page 2-85).
Touch the key of the stamp that you
wish to use.
2-90
Contents
COPIER
Touch the [Exposure] key and set the
density.
If you wish to darken, touch the [ I I key. If you wish to
lighten, touch the [ 0 ) key.
When you have finished selecting the settings, touch the [OK]
key.
Touch the [Larger 令 Smaller] key to
select the size of the stamp.
Select the pages that the date will be
printed on and touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-85) to complete
the copy procedure.
©
The stamp text cannot be edited.
To cancel a stamp setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
2-91
Contents
COPIER
PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES
(Page Numbering)
Page numbers can be printed on copies.
The position, format, and page number can be selected for page numbering.
Printing the page number at the bottom center of the paper.
Touch the [Page Numbering] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP11 (page 2-85).
Select a format for the page number.
If the [1/5, 2/5, 3/5] key is selected,
"Page number /total pages" will be printed. "Auto" is initially
selected for the total pages, which means that the number of
scanned original pages is automatically set as the total pages,
If you need to set the total pages manually, such as when a
large number of originals are divided into sets for scanning,
touch the [Manual] key to display the total pages entry screen.
Enter the total pages (1 to 999) with the numeric keys and
touch the [OK] key.
The [CLEAR] key (© ) can be pressed to return the setting of
the selected item to the default value. If you make a mistake,
press the [CLEAR] key (© ) and then enter the correct
number.
• When 2-sided copying is performed, the total pages is the total number of sides of the paper. If the final page is
blank, it is not counted. However, if a back cover will be added and the [Count Back Cover] checkbox is selected
V|, the final page is counted. (See step 7.)
• When used in combination with "Dual Page Copy", "Multi Shot", or "Card Shot", the number of sides of the paper
copied on is the total pages.
• When used in combination with "Pamphlet Copy" or "Book Copy", the total number of pages in the resulting
pamphlet or booklet is the total pages.
2-92
Contents
COPIER
To configure page number settings,
touch the [Page Number] key.
If you do not need to configure page number settings, go to
step 8.
(1) (2)
Select page number settings.
(1) Touch the [Manual] key.
(2) Set the first number, the last number, and
the "Printing Starts from Page" number.
Touch each key and enter a number with the numeric
keys (1 to 999).
The [CLEAR] key (© ) can be pressed to return the
setting of the selected item to the default value. If you
make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (©) and then
enter the correct number.
A "Last Number" smaller than the "First Number" cannot be set.
The "Last Number" is initially set to "Auto", which means that page numbers are automatically printed through the
last page based on the "First Number" and "Printing Start from Page" settings.
•If the "Last Number" is set to a number smaller than the "Total Pages", page numbers are not printed on pages after
the page set as the "Last Number".
• "Printing Starts from Page" is used to set the page number from which you want to begin printing page numbers.
For example, if "3" is set and 1 -sided copying is being performed, page numbers will be printed beginning from the
3rd copy sheet (the 3rd original page). If 2-sided copying is being performed, page numbers will be printed
beginning from the front side of the 2nd copy sheet (the 3rd original page).
If covers/inserts will be inserted, touch
the [Covers/Inserts Counting] key if you
want to include the covers/inserts in the
page number count and want page
numbers printed on the covers/inserts.
2-93
Contents
COPIER
Touch each item that you want counted
in the page numbers 土〇 that a
checkmark appears '^)5 and then touch
the [OK] key.
Items with a checkmark ( vj will be reflected in the print image
on the right side of the screen.
(A) : Front cover image
(B) : Insert image
(C) : Back cover image
(A) (B) (C)
©
When the checkboxes are selected ノ 1， each inserted sheet of paper (front cover, insert, or back cover) will be
counted as one page in the case of 1 -sided copying, or two pages in the case of 2-sided copying. However, when
the body sheets are 1 -sided copies and the inserted sheets are 2-sided copies, each body sheet is counted as one
page and each inserted sheet is counted as two pages.
Page numbers are printed on covers/inserts if the covers/inserts are counted and if they are copied on.
Touch the [OK] key.
Page Numbering
Page Numbering I
Jl), (2),(3)..」
. . i rp.i,p.2,p.3. .j
f<l>,<2>,<3>. .1 I 1/5,2/5,375. . J
Touch the [OK] key.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP11 (page 2-85) to complete
the copy procedure.
2-94
Contents
COPIER
• When Page Numbering is selected, copying in group mode is not possible. The mode automatically changes to sort mode.
• When the page number printing position is set to the right side or left side and pamphlet copy or book copy is used, the
print position is changed so that the page numbers always appear on the outer side of each opened page (the left and right
sides of the opened pages). If a stamp is set in the area where page numbering is set, the position of the stamp changes in
the same way as the page number.
If another stamp item is set in this changing position, the page numbers will alternate sides with this stamp item.
A stamp item that is in a position not affected by the changing page number position will be printed in its original set
position.
Example: When four pages are copied using pamphlet copy and the page number format is "1 ， 2, 3…"， the result is as
follows:
In this example, the page number is set at the bottom of the page and the date is set at the top, and thus the
date does not move.
Print settings
Sidel
Side 2
Date
Stamp
No.
Text
APR/04/201 0 APR/04/2010
CONFIDENTIAL
4 AAA
CONFIDENTIAL
AAA i
APR/04/2010 APR/04/2010
CONFIDENTIAL
2 AAA
CONFIDENTIAL
AAA 3
@To cancel the page numbering setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
2-95
Contents
COPIER
PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text)
Entered text can be printed on copies. Up to 30 frequently used text strings can be stored.
Example: Printing "April 2010 Planning Meeting" in the top left corner of the paper
ぐ
\
, > — 1
V _
April 2010 Planning Meeting
J
Touch the [Text] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP11 (page 2-85).
Stamp
Text [ Cancel
First Page
圆 1
All Pages
I
Pre-Set
Recall j | Store/Delete |
\ Direct Entry
Touch the [Recall] key.
The [Direct Entry] key can be touched to display the text entry
screen. When all characters have been entered, touch the [OK]
key.
To store or delete a text string, touch the [Store/Delete] key.
隊 Storing, editing, and deleting text strings (page 2-98)
(1)
I
I —
Stamp
Text
Cancel j [ OK
f 5 <>MM\
U |no.02 BBB BBB _
1
[no. 03 CCC CCC
[No .04 DDD DDD
3
s
[no. 07
[no. 08
[no. 09
(no. 10 | | + j
Specify the text to be printed.
(1) Touch the text string that you wish to
select.
You can touch the [5 4^ 10] key to switch the number of
keys displayed in the screen between 5 and 10. When
5-key display is selected, the entire text string appears in
each key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
2-96
Contents
COPIER
Select the pages to be printed on and
touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-85) to complete
the copy procedure.
Text settings can also be configured in the Web pages. Click [Application Settings], [Copy settings] and then [Text Settings
(Stamp)] in the Web page menu.
@To cancel a text setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
2-97
Contents
COPIER
Storing, editing, and deleting text strings
Touch the [Text] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP11 (page 2-85).
Stamp
Text 1" Cancel
First Page
画
All Pages
Pre-Set
Recall j 丨 Store/Delete |
| Direct Entry |
Touch the [Store/Delete] key.
Stamp
Text
| ♦ Back ]
1 5 仆 BB I
Store/Delete
1
||No.01 AAA AAA
| |no.02 BBB BBB
3
f|No.03 CCC CCC
I [No . 04 DDD DDD
s
3
卜〇.05
I
f|No.07
1 卜。. 08
[^0.09
| 卜 10 )
Store a text string, or edit/delete a stored
text string.
•To store a text string, touch a key with no text stored.
A text entry screen will appear. A maximum of 50 characters
can be entered. When you have finished entering the text,
touch the [OK] key. The text entry screen will close.
•To edit or delete a text string, follow the instructions below.
To edit or delete a text string...
• When the key with the text string is touched, the following screen appears.
When the [Modify] key is touched, a text entry screen appears. The stored text string appears in the text entry
screen. Edit the text. When you have finished entering the text, touch the [OK] key. The text entry screen will close.
• When the [Delete] key is touched, the stored text is deleted.
A text has been already stored to this
location. Change the text?
コロ
永
• Text settings can also be configured in the Web pages. Click [Application Settings], [Copy settings] and then [Text
Settings (Stamp)] in the Web page menu.
2-98
Contents
COPIER
Stamp
Text
^ Back ]
l 5 仆 ai
Store/Delete
[No. 01 AAA AAA
] |no.02 BBB BBB
~ ) 3
(no. 03 CCC CCC
1 [No .04
) m
| 扉, 05
] |no.06
」 二 #
| [no.08
1 s
|no.09
j [no.10
_
Touch the [Back] key.
You will return to the screen of step 2.
To copy using a stored text string, continue from step 2 of
"PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text)11 (page 2-96).
2-99
Contents
COPIER
Touch the [Layout] key.
The [Layout] key can only be touched when stamp items have been selected.
If the layout is correct, touch the [OK]
key.
Touch the key of the stamp item that you want to delete or
whose position you want to change.
A maximum of 14 characters appear in each key.
Do you want to move or delete the
selected item?
Cancel 1 f Delete
§
To change the position of the item,
touch the [Move] key. To delete the item,
touch the [Delete] key.
• If the [Move] key is touched, a screen for selecting the
destination position appears.
• If the [Delete] key is touched, the item is deleted. (Go to step
6-)
2-100
Contents
CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT (Layout)
After stamp items have been selected, you can check the print layout, change the print position, and delete stamp items.
s s
501
等
COPIER
Touch the key of the desired destination
position.
The touched position key is highlighted and the print position
changes.
The keys that show the print positions will appear as follows
depending on the state of the settings.
!
Not selected, stamp setting has not
been selected.
Selected during selection of the stamp
setting.
j
Not available, stamp setting has already
been selected.
The above key is the top left key. The appearance of each key
varies depending on the position of the key.
If you wish to swap the position of the selected stamp item with the position of another stamp item, temporarily move
either one of the items to an unoccupied position and then switch the print positions.
Touch the [OK] key.
If you attempt to move the stamp item to a position that is
already occupied by another stamp item, a message will
appear asking you if you wish to overwrite the other stamp
item. To overwrite the other stamp item, touch the [Yes] key. To
cancel the move, touch the [No] key.
An item has been already selected to
this location. Overwrite the item?
No | I Yes
Touch the [OK] key.
2-101
Contents
COPIER
ADDING A WATERMARK TO A COPY (Watermark)
When making a copy, specific text can be added to the copy as a watermark. The density, angle, and pages (first page
only or all pages) can be selected for a watermark. The watermark is printed at the center of the paper.
Printing "CONFIDENTIAL11 on the paper
The following 12 selections are available for the stamp text.
CONFIDENTIAL
PRIORITY
PRELIMINARY
FINAL
FOR YOUR INFO.
DO NOT COPY
IMPORTANT
COPY
URGENT
DRAFT
TOP SECRET
PLEASE REPLY
Three levels can be selected for the density of the watermark.
The angle of a watermark can be selected in the range +90 degrees to -90 degrees in increments of 45 degrees.
D Touch the [Watermark] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP11 (page 2-85).
Touch the key of the watermark that you
wish to use.
2-102
Contents
COPIER
Touch the [Exposure] key and set the
density.
If you wish to darken, touch the [ I I key. If you wish to
lighten, touch the [ 0 ) key.
When you have finished selecting the settings, touch the [OK]
key.
Touch the こ 0 keys to set the angle of
the watermark.
An angle from +90 degrees to -90 degrees in increments of 45
degrees can be selected.
Select the pages that the watermark will
be printed on and touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 2-85) to complete
the copy procedure.
The watermark text cannot be edited.
@To cancel a watermark setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
2-103
Contents
COPIER
(1) [Photo Repeat] key
暖 REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY (Photo Repeat)
(page 2-105)
(2) [Multi-Page Enlargement] key
暖 CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Multi-Page
Enlargement) (page 2-107)
(3) [Mirror Image] key
隊 REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) (page
2-110)
(4) [11x17 Full Bleed] key
^COPYING 11Mx 17M ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE
CUT-OFF (11Mx 17M Full Bleed) (page 2-111)
(5) [Centering] key
^ COPYING IN THE CENTER OF THE PAPER
(Centering) (page 2-113)
(6) [B/W Reverse] key
瞭 REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W
Reverse) (page 2-115)
Contents
[Image Edit] KEY
When the [Image Edit] key is touched in the 2nd special modes menu screen, the image edit menu screen opens.
Image edit menu screen
Special Modes
2-104
COPIER
REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY (Photo Repeat)
Photo Repeat is used to create repeated images of a photo-size original (3" x 5" size, 5" x 7" size, 2-1/2" x 4" size,
2-1/2" x 2-1/2" size or 2-1/8" x 3-5/8" size (130 mm x 90 mm size, 100 mm x 150 mm size, 70 mm x 100 mm size,
65 mm x 70 mm size or 57 mm x 100 mm size)) on a single sheet of copy paper as shown below. Up to 24 images
(when the image is 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" size (65 mm x 70 mm size)) can be repeated on a single sheet of paper.
• Original sizes up to 3" x 5" (130 mm x 90 mm)
Original sizes up to 5" x 7" (100 mm x 150 mm)
i! 191
ぶ
關關
Copying on 11" x 17"
(A3) size paper
8 copies are made.
[
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper
J^K:K
4 copies are made.
糸
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper
2 copies are made.
J^K:K
J^K:K
J^K:K
糸：
糸：
Copying on
11" x17" (A3) size
paper
4 copies are made.
• Original sizes up to 2-1/2" x 4" (70 mm x 100 mm)
み
ゞ
国 S
国民
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper
8 copies are made.
ssss
国国 s 国
同 〇 S [3
Copying on 11" x 17"
(A3) size paper
16 copies are made.
• Original sizes up to 2-1/8" x 3-5/8"
(57 mm x 100 mm)
SH
so
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper (Ratio 95%)
10 copies are made.
Original sizes up to 2-1/2" x 2-1/2"
(65 mm x 70 mm)
1
為
1
1
じ
_
1!
IS
M
I
1：
i
i
園
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper
12 copies are made.
國
I
I
s
m
1
£
m
m
E
鼸
s
E
£
n
£
Copying on 11" x 17"
(A3) size paper
24 copies are made.
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
• When placing a 3n x 5"， 5" x 7"， 2-1/2" x 4"， 2-1/2" x 2-1 /2M or
2-1/8" x 3-5/8" (130 mm x 90 mm, 100 mm x 150 mm,
70 mm x 100 mm, 65 mm x 70 mm or 57 mm x 100 mm)
photo size original, place the original with the long side
aligned against the left side of the document glass.
• When placing a business card size original, place the original
with the long side aligned against the far side of the
document glass.
2-105
Contents
COPIER
-130x 90mm
- 3x 5"
A4/ 8^x11 A3/11X17
(1)
Image Edit
[dd|
|mm|
Cancel
Select Photo Repeat settings.
(1) Touch the key showing the original type
and paper size combination that you want
to use.
Touch the [_fj _tj keys to switch through the screens and
touch the desired repeat type key (8-1/2" x 11" or
11nx17"(A4 or A3)).
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
When making repeat copies of a business card size original (up to 2-1/8" x 3-5/8" (57 mm x 100 mm)), only 8-1/2" x
11" (A4) can be selected for the paper size.
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (®).
® :
©
The original must be placed on the document glass.
Only 8-1/2" x 1 1" (A4) or 1 1" x 1 7" (A3) size paper can be used.
The copy ratio is 100 % when this function is used. (The ratio cannot be changed.) However, for a business card size
original (up to 2-1/8" x 3-5/8" (57 mm x 100 mm)), the images are reduced to 95%.
To cancel the photo repeat setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
Contents
I Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the 0 S keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
(4) Touch the [Photo Repeat] key.
隊 [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-104)
1 5 S S
2-106
COPIER
CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Multi-Page
Enlargement)
This function is used to enlarge an image of an original and print it as a composite image using multiple sheets of paper.
Original
(8-1/2" x11M (A4) size)
m
m
■
H
H
Copy (enlarged image on 8
sheets of 1 T x 1 7" (A3) paper)
I Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the 0 S keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
(4) Touch the [Multi-Page Enlargement] key.
隊 [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-104)
2-107
Contents
COPIER
(2) (3) (A) (1)
Enlargement size ► Original size
O
22"x17"
◄- ►IV'x 17M, 8-1/2" x 14M, 8-1/2Mx11M
(/)
22" x 34M
◄- ►IV'x 17M, 8-1/211 x 1 4", 8-1 /2M x 1 1"
»<
%
34" x 44" ◄- ►11" x 17", 8-1/211 x 14M, 8-1 /2M x 1 1 ■
<D
3
44M x68M ◄- ►IV'x 17"
>
A2
料 A3, A4, A5
U)
A1
► A3, A4, A5
(/)
(D
AO
料 A3,A4
3
A0x2*
► A3
CD
B3
► B4, B5
(/)
B2
— ► B4, B5
(J)
O
B1
► B4, B5
3
BO
► B4
Set the enlargement size and the original
size.
(1) Select the size system that you wish to use
for multi-page enlargement.
Touch the ヨ keys to display the screen that shows
the desired group of sizes.
• 1st screen: Inch system
• 2nd screen: A system
• 3rd screen: B system
(2) Select the enlargement size.
(3) Select the size of the original to be used.
A suitable original placement orientation (A) and the
number of sheets of paper required for the enlarged
image (B) are displayed based on the selected original
size and enlargement size.
Check the placement orientation and number of sheets.
The combinations of original sizes and enlargement sizes
shown in the table at left are possible for multi-page
enlargement.
The size that is twice AO size.
• An A size original cannot be enlarged to a B size, and a B size original cannot be enlarged to an A size.
•To print a borderline around the copy image, touch the [Border Print] key so that it is highlighted.
Place the original face down on the
document glass in the orientation
indicated in the screen.
2-108
Contents
〕
COPIER
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the [OK] key
to return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (®).
• The original must be placed on the document glass.
• Overlap of sections of image
- There will be a margin around the edges of each copy.
- Areas for overlapping the copies will be created at the leading and trailing edges of each copy.
• If an original size is selected first, a message will appear indicating the enlargement sizes that can be selected. If an
enlargement size is selected first, a message will appear indicating the original sizes that can be selected.
• If a combination of settings is selected for which multi-page enlargement is not possible, invalid selection beeps will sound.
• The paper size, number of sheets required for the enlarged image, and the ratio are automatically selected based on the
selected original size and enlargement size.
(The paper size and ratio cannot be selected manually.)
• If no paper trays have the size of paper that was automatically selected, "Load XXX paper" will appear. Change the paper
in one of the trays or the bypass tray to the indicated size of paper.
©
• To cancel the multi-page enlargement setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
Although the multi-page enlargement setting is canceled, the ratio selected automatically is kept valid.
•To return the ratio to 100%...
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key.
2-109
Contents
COPIER
REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image)
This feature is used to make a copy that is a mirror image of the original.
/t
Original
Mirror image copy
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the jj S keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
隊 [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-104)
(1) (2)
Special Modes
i 弧 i
Image Edit
OK j
(
1 — -p-t |
ilpullBYeed] こ e
Select Mirror Image.
(1) Touch the [Mirror Image] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you have
selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the
[Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
@To cancel a mirror image setting...
Touch the [Mirror Image] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
2-110
Contents
COPIER
COPYING 11" x 17" ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE
CUT-OFF (11" x 17" Full Bleed)
This feature lets you copy an entire 11" x 17" (A3) size original at full size with no image cut-off at the edges.
12" x 18" (A3W) size paper is used, which is slightly larger than 11" x 17" (A3) size.
11" x 17" (A3) size original 12" x 18" (A3W) full bleed copy
■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■ i
■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■a
■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■a ii
■ ■ ■ I
■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■a ■ i
WSSSSSSSftWS
離
級
■■■国
■■■国
s
■ ■
w 八
■ ■国
%wwwwww^
: ベ:::
SSSSSSSSSSSSH
■ ■
s
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
■ ■
■ ■ ■
SS
■ ■ ■ ■ ■■■■■
:
m Mmm ■■■■■■■■ mm
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
隊 [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-104)
Select 11x17 Full Bleed.
(1) Touch the [11x17 Full Bleed] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
2-111
Contents
COPIER
Place 12" x 18" (A3W) paper in the
bypass tray.
Pull out the extension tray, adjust the guides to the width of
12" x 18" (A3W) paper, and place the paper in the bypass tray.
After loading the paper, configure the bypass tray settings as
explained in "MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY"
(page 2-38).
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
•To use this function, one of the following output devices must be installed;
Exit tray unit, Finisher, Finisher (large stacker), Saddle stitch finisher
• The original must be placed on the document glass.
• The copy ratio is 1 00% when this function is used. The ratio cannot be changed.
• The staple, paper folding, and punch function cannot be used.
@To cancel 11x17 Full Bleed...
Touch the [11x17 Full Bleed] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
2-112
Contents
COPIER
COPYING IN THE CENTER OF THE PAPER (Centering)
This is used to center the copied image on the paper.
This lets you place the image in the center of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the
image is reduced.
Not using the centering function
Using the centering function
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
隊 [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-104)
(1) (2)
Special Modes
|Image Edit
し 。K |
| Photo Repeat
f Multi -Page
| Enlargement
1C
岡 11x17
|l-±-lFull Bleed
b/w
| 1 -泌 Reverse
Select Centering.
(1) Touch the [Centering] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
2-113
Contents
COPIER
©
• The image can be reduced when using the centering function, but not enlarged.
• When the original size or the paper size is displayed as a special size, this function cannot be used.
To cancel centering...
Touch the [Centering] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
2-114
Contents
COPIER
REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W Reverse)
This is used to reverse black and white in a copy to create a negative image.
Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be copied using Black/White Reverse to reduce
toner consumption.
Originals
B/W Reverse copy
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the jj S keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
隊 [Image Edit] KEY (page 2-104)
(1) (2)
Special Modes
i °k i
(Image Edit
一一 OK |
j Photo Repeat
[ Multi -Page
| Enlargement
11x17
ICijFull Bleed
| Centering
Select B/W Reverse.
(1) Touch the [B/W Reverse] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then
touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
2-115
Contents
COPIER
When this function is selected, the "Original Image Type" setting for exposure adjustment automatically changes to "Text".
@To cancel B/W reverse...
Touch the [B/W Reverse] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
2-116
Contents
j
COPIER
ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN
IMAGE (Sharpness)
This is used to sharpen an image or make it softer.
Sharp
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Sharpness] key,
(1) (2)
Adjust the image.
(1) Touch the [Soft] key or the [Sharp] key so
that it is highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you have selected
sort mode, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key (®).
When this function is selected, the exposure adjustment setting automatically changes to manual adjustment.
Automatic exposure adjustment cannot be selected.
@To cancel the sharpness setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
Contents
2-117
COPIER
CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING
(Proof Copy)
This feature prints only one set of copies, regardless of how many sets have been specified. After the first set is checked
for errors, the remaining sets can be printed. Previously it was necessary to re-scan the original each time changes to
settings were required. However, this feature makes it possible to change settings for the scanned original without
scanning it again, allowing you perform copying more efficiently.
■■Proof Copy11 is
selected and 5 sets of
copies are executed
1 set of copies is
printed for you to
check
If OK
The remaining 4
sets are printed
Adjust the
settings
If OK
After adjustments are
made, 1 set is printed
for you to check
The remaining 4 sets
are printed
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Select copy settings in the base screen.
Select Proof Copy.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
(2) Touch the 33 keys to switch through the
screens.
(3) Touch the [Proof Copy] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
(2) (4)
2-118
Contents
COPIER
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
If you will copy multiple originals using the document glass,
switch to sort mode after this step.
隊 Sort mode (page 2-33)
@
Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key (© ) and then enter the correct number.
Press the [START] key.
One set of copies is printed.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple originals, change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all
pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key. One set of copies will be printed.
@To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
Press [End] to continue.
To make a proof copy again, press
[Start] .
Change
Check the printed set of copies. If the
copies are acceptable, touch the [End]
key. If you need to change the settings,
touch the [Change] key.
When the [End] key is touched, the remaining sets are printed.
If you touched the [Change] key, go to the next step.
©
To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key (©).
2-119
Contents
④ ® ® ©
® ® ® ®
® ® ® ®
COPIER
(1) (2)
Change the settings.
(1) Touch the key of the setting that you want
to change.
The setting screen of the touched key opens. Change the
settings and touch the [OK] key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
•To change the number of sets printed, set the desired number of copies (sets) with the numeric keys. After changing
the number of sets, touch the [End] key in the touch panel (not the [START] key) to print the sets.
• Special modes that can be adjusted are Margin Shift, Pamphlet Copy, Tandem Copy, Covers/Inserts, Transparency
Inserts, Multi-Shot, and Stamp.
• For Pamphlet Copy, Covers/Inserts, and Multi Shot, only changes to the settings of the functions can be made; the
functions cannot be newly added or deleted.
• When transparency film is used, the settings can be changed, new settings can be added, and the function can be
canceled. However, this is not possible when pamphlet copying is enabled.
B Press the [START] key.
One set of copies is printed again using the adjusted settings. Check the results. If further adjustments are needed, repeat
steps 6 through 8. (Repeating Proof Copy does not decrease the remaining number of sets to be printed.)
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
Touch the [End] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the
remaining sets will be printed.
If Proof Copy is executed while the machine is printing another job, the other job is interrupted and the proof copies are
printed. The previous job will resume after the proof copies are printed.
However, if proof copy is executed during output of a job for which both two-sided printing and stapling are enabled, the proof
copy will be output after the job in progress is finished.
If the [End] key is touched to execute printing of the remaining sets while the machine is printing another job, the remaining
sets will be printed after all previously reserved jobs are completed.
2-120
Contents
COPIER
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE COPYING
(Original Count)
The number of scanned original sheets can be counted and displayed before copying is executed. By allowing you to check
the number of original sheets that were scanned, this helps reduce the occurrence of copy mistakes.
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
(3) (2) (4)
Select Original Count.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
瞭 SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
(2) Touch the \±] 3 keys to switch through the
screens.
(3) Touch the [Original Count] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
2-121
Contents
COPIER
After scanning is finished, check the
number of sheets that were scanned and
touch the [OK] key.
Copying will begin.
• When job build mode is used, the number of scanned sheets
appears when the [Read-End] key is touched.
• The number that is displayed is the number of scanned
original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages.
For example, when two-sided copying is performed using
one original, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one
original sheet was scanned, not "2" to indicate the front-side
page and the reverse side page.
If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of original sheets...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
@To cancel the original count mode setting...
Touch the [Original Count] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.
2-122
Contents
COPIER
COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
(Mixed Size Original)
Even when 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) originals are mixed in with 1 1" x 17" (A3) originals, all originals can be copied at once. When
scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original and uses paper appropriate for that size.
When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection, the ratio is adjusted individually for each original according
to the selected paper size, enabling output on a uniform paper size.
Originals
Copies
When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection
(Auto ratio selection and 1 1" x 1 7" (A3) are selected)
Originals Copies
An 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) size original will be
enlarged to 11" x 17" (A3) size.
There are two settings for mixed size originals.
Same Width
Use this setting for originals that are different sizes but have sides that are the same length. The originals
are inserted in the document feeder tray with the sides that are the same length aligned together on the left.
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 11" • 8-1/2" x 14" and 8-1/2" x 11"R • 8-1/2" x 14" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
• 8-1/2" x 13" and 8-1/2" x 11"R • 8-1/2" x 13" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" • 8-1/2" x 11"R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
• A3 and A4 • B4 and B5 • A4R and A5
Different Width
Use this setting when the originals are different sizes and do not have sides that are the same length. This
setting can only be used for the following combinations of sizes:
• 1 1 ■■ x 1 7" and 8-1/2" x 1 4" • 1 1" x 1 7" and 8-1/2" x 1 3" • 1 1" x 1 7" and 5-1/2 x 8-1/2"
• A3 and B4 • A3 and B5 • B4 and A4 • A4 and B5 • B4 and A4R • B4 and A5
• B5 and A4R • B5 and A5
2-123
Contents
COPIER
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
• When "Same Width" is used
Place the originals with the sides that are the same length
aligned on the left.
• When "Different Width" is used
8-1/2" x 14"
(B4)
Place the originals
aligned to the far left
corner.
/8-1/2"x 14" gi
° |§§§°〇0 of"
O J 0000 |
^=^=1 - -
17" (A3) -
Place the originals with the corners aligned in the far left corner
of the document feeder tray.
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the 3 S keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key.
隊 Special modes menu (2nd screen) (page 2-42)
Select Mixed Size Original settings.
(1) Touch the [Same Width] key or the
[Different Width] key as appropriate for the
originals.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
2-124
Contents
COPIER
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
• When [Different Width] is selected on the MX-M283N, the "2-Sided to 2-Sided" and "2-Sided to 1 -Sided" settings of
automatic 2-Sided copying cannot be used.
• When [Different Width] is selected, the staple function cannot be used.
• The mixed size original function cannot be used to copy originals that are the same size but are placed in different
orientations (8-1/2" x 1 1" and 8-1/2" x 1 1"R (A4 and A4R), etc.).
@To cancel the mixed size original setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
The original feeding mode can be set to always scan mixed size originals.
2-125
Contents
COPIER
COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan
Mode)
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.
Select Slow Scan Mode.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
暖 SPECIAL MODES (page 2-41)
(2) Touch the [±] 3 keys to switch through the
screens.
(3) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Press the [START] key.
Copying will begin.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
2-126
Contents
COPIER
The "2-Sided to 2-Sided" and "2-Sided to 1 -Sided" modes of automatic 2-sided copying cannot be used.
@To cancel the slow scan mode setting...
Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
This is used to have scanning always take place in slow scan mode.
2-127
Contents
COPIER
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
This section explains convenient copy functions such as interrupting a copy run, changing the order of reserved copy
jobs, and storing copy settings in a program.
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN
(Interrupt copy)
When you need to make an urgent copy and the machine is busy with a long copy run or other job, use interrupt copy.
Interrupt copy temporarily stops the job in progress and lets you perform the interrupt copy job first.
Touch the [Interrupt] key.
The [Interrupt] key does not appear while an original is being
scanned.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
Select copy settings and press the [START] key.
The interrupt copy job begins.
When the interrupt copy job is completed, the interrupted job resumes.
@To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
2-128
Contents
COPIER
• If user authentication is enabled, the login screen will appear when the [Interrupt] key is pressed. Enter your user name
and password to log in. The number of copies made will be added to the count of the user that logged in.
• Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Interrupt] key may not appear.
• Interrupt copy cannot be used in combination with the following special modes:
Job Build, Tandem Copy, Book Copy, Card Shot, Multi-Page Enlargement, Original Count
•If the document glass is used for an interrupt copy job, 2-sided copying, sort copying, and staple sort copying cannot be
selected. If any of these functions are necessary, use the automatic document feeder.
2-129
Contents
COPIER
CHECKING A PREVIEW IMAGE OF A COPY
(Preview)
You can touch the [Preview] key so that it is highlighted in the base screen and then scan the original to check a preview
image of the copy in the touch panel before printing the copy.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Touch the [Preview] key so that it is
highlighted.
Select copy settings and press the [START] key.
After the original is scanned, a preview image of the copy appears in the touch panel. The copy is not printed until the [Start
Copy] key is touched in the preview screen.
IDi splay Output]
I Function Rev.】
Display Rotation
I 这 陶 1
Check the preview image and then touch
the [Start Copy] key.
Copy printing begins.
For details on the preview screen, see "PREVIEW SCREEN"
(page 2-132).
- : •••••V : n ; a:
』 *x« - ft • . .
- | •，钃 w 二*，
— - . •' —— - -
I M J i I 1 000 ij /ooio | ► I |^)
If you need to change the copy settings, touch the [Reset] key.
@To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
2-130
Contents
COPIER
@To cancel the operation...
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key ((g)).
System Settings (Administrator): Default Preview
You can set the default state of the [Preview] key to always selected (highlighted). Enable this setting if you wish to check a
preview image each time you make a copy.
Contents
2-131
COPIER
PREVIEW SCREEN
The preview screen is explained below.
⑶
(4)
⑼
⑹
⑺
⑻
(1) Preview image
A preview image of the scanned original is displayed.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the ▼ ▲ keys to
scroll.)
(2) Change page keys
When there are multiple pages of images, use these keys
to change pages.
• M 1 W I keys: Go to the first or the last page.
• I ◄ 1 1 ► i keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.
(3) [Reset] key
Touch to change the copy settings after checking the
preview image. After changing the settings, touch the
[Preview Again] key to update the preview image with the
new settings.
Preview/Reset
[
Cancel 丨 [ Preview Again ]
I
1 (
1 1
1
2-Sided Copy j
Special Modes j
Output
(4) [Display Output] key
Touch to show the selected modes and settings as icons.
Functions that are displayed are as follows:
• 2-sided copying • Pamphlet copy
• Book copy
• Staple (including saddle stitch) function
• Punch function • Stamp menu
• Covers/Inserts • Transparency inserts
This key can only be touched when the entire preview
image is displayed in the preview screen.
(5) [Function Rev.] key
Touch to check special mode items, 2-sided copying, and
output settings.
(6) Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order Tull Page", "Twice V4
Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in the
file, not just the displayed page.
(7) "Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
(8) [Start Copy] key
Touch to start printing the copy.
•A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.
• The preview image reflects certain copy settings and special mode settings. Settings that are reflected in the preview
image are as follows:
Copy settings: ratio, paper size
Special modes: margin shift, edge erase, dual page copy, pamphlet copy, covers/inserts, transparency film, 2 in 1/4 in 1,
book copy, card shot, image edit menu, Sharpness
• Fine lines (such as borderlines printed by the 2in1/4in1 function) may not appear correctly at some zoom ratios.
2-132
Contents
COPIER
JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Example: Pressing the key in copy mode
The job status display (A) is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the
job status screen. The first four jobs in the print queue (the job in progress and reserved jobs) can be checked in the job
status display (B).
2-133
Contents
COPIER
⑺
Use these tabs to select the mode that is shown in the
job status screen.
The status of copy jobs can be checked by touching the
[Print Job] tab. (8)
(2) Job list (job queue screen)
Jobs waiting to be printed appear in the job queue as
keys. The jobs are printed in order from the top of the
queue. Each job key shows information on the job and
the current status of the job. '
(3) Job status screen selector key
Touch this key to switch through the job queue screen,
the completed jobs screen, and the spool screen.
(4) [Detail] key (job queue screen)
Touch this key to display detailed information on a job.
(5) [Priority] key
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.
(6) [Stop/Delete] key
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.
JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of the job queue screen that shows copy and print jobs waiting to be printed and the job
currently in progress, the completed job screen that shows jobs that have been completed, and the spool screen that
shows print jobs that have been spooled and encrypted PDF jobs that are waiting for a password to be entered. This
section explains the job queue screen and the completed jobs screen, which are related to copy mode. The job status
screen switches between the job queue screen and the completed jobs screen each time the job status screen selector
2-134
i あ
: nternet Fax I
& Print Job [
1
Computer02
11；
:00
04/01
001/001
IOK
2
Computer 03
10;
:33
04/01
010/010
IOK
3
暫
Computer 04
10:
:31
04/01
013/013
IOK
[4
%
file-01
10：
:30
04/01
010/010
IOK
卜
%
Copy
10：
:13
04/01
001/001
IOK
6
Copy
10:
:03
04/01
001/001
IOK
7
Computer 05
10:
:01
04/01
003/003
IOK
8
Copy
10:
:00
04/01
010/010
IOK
■⑺
■⑻
a
a | 二
L
—⑼
Job list (completed jobs screen)
This shows up to 99 completed jobs. The result (status)
of each completed job is shown. Copy jobs that used the
document filing function are indicated as keys.
[Detail] key (completed jobs screen)
When a job is shown as a key in the job list, the [Detail]
key can be touched to show detailed information on the
job.
[Call] key
Touch this key to retrieve and use a copy job stored
using the document filing function.
Contents
key is touched.
(1 ) で a Print Job | —Scan to ^ | — Fax ^ Job | 设 Interne
TrxK A” ハ” ハ
一—〜
|2 CD
Copy
002 /
' 000
Waiting
|3 ^
Computer 01
002 y
' 000
Waiting
[4 钇.
0312345678
001 ノ
' 000
Waiting
⑴ Mode select tabs
Spool
▼
Job Queue
^ 1-1 s s
COPIER
Job key display
Each job key shows the position of the job in the job queue and the current status of the job.
oo^[oooj
(1) (2)
| copy
Waiting
(4) (5)
(1) Indicates the number (position) of the job in the job
queue.
When the job currently being printed is finished, the job
moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.
(2) Mode icon
The (Q icon appears when the job is a copy job.
(3) Job name
"Copy" appears for a copy job.
When user authentication is enabled, the name of the
user that performed the job appears.
(4) Number of copies (sets) entered
This shows the number of copies (sets) specified.
(5) Number of completed copies
This shows the number of copies (sets) completed. "0001
appears while the job is waiting in the job queue.
(6) Status
Shows the job status.
Message
Status
"Copying"
Copying is in progress.
"Waiting11
The job is waiting to be executed.
"Toner
Empty"
The toner cartridge is out of toner.
Replace the toner cartridge with a
new cartridge.
"Paper
Empty"
The paper used for the job has run
out. Add paper or change to a
different paper tray.
■■Limit"
The copy page limit has been
exceeded. Check with the
administrator of the machine.
"Error11
An error occurred while the job was
being executed. Clear the error
condition.
2-135
Contents
COPIER
CANCELING A JOB THAT IS WAITING IN THE QUEUE
A copy job that is waiting to be printed can be canceled.
JOB STATUS
f N
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
(3) (4)
Cancel the job.
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab,
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Queue].
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
(3) Touch the key of the copy job that you wish
to cancel.
(4) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
(5) A message appears to confirm the
cancelation. Touch the [Yes] key.
A Delete the job?
吃) Copy
The selected job key is deleted and printing is canceled.
If the job in progress is a copy job, you can also press the [STOP] key (®) to display the above screen.
To cancel, touch the [Yes] key.
@lf you do not want to cancel the selected print job...
Touch the [No] key in step (5).
2-136
Contents
COPIER
GIVING PRIORITY TO A JOB IN THE QUEUE
If a copy job is begun when there are already multiple jobs in the queue, the copy job will appear at the end of the queue.
However, if you have an urgent copy job, you can give priority to the job and have it executed first.
JOB STATUS
ご \
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
Give the desired job priority.
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab,
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Queue].
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
(3) Touch the key of the copy job to which you
want to give priority.
(4) Touch the [Priority] key.
The job being printed stops and the job selected in (3) is
printed.
2-137
Contents
COPIER
CHECKING INFORMATION ON A COPY JOB WAITING
IN THE QUEUE
Detailed information can be displayed on a copy job waiting in the queue.
r
JOB STATUS
v ノ
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
(2)
Checking job details
tint Jot) 1 Scan to ( tP Fax Job internet Fax j ^
Job Queue
Sets /
Progress
Status
1
2
©
Copy
002
/ 000
) Waiting
皆
Computer 01
002
/ 000
Waiting
4
0312345678
001
/ 000
Waiting
Spool
▼
▼
Complete
S'
Stop/DeleteJ
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Queue].
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
(3) Touch the key of the job that you wish to
check.
(4) Touch the [Detail] key.
The job check screen of the job selected in (3) appears.
[Paper Select] key
If a copy job is stopped because the paper ran out, the [Paper Select] key can be pressed to change to a
different paper tray.
When the [Paper Select] key is pressed, the paper tray selection screen appears.
隊 PAPER TRAYS (page 2-11)
Touch the key of the tray that has the size of paper that you wish to use and then touch the [OK] key. The
stopped copy job will resume.
2-138
Contents
COPIER
Set 1 r x 1 7n (A3) to 8-1/2" x 11M (A4) reduction
Change the exposure setting
Select 2-sided copying
Select margin shift
Select punch hole settings
Press the [START] key.
© _
Press the [#/P] key (© ).
Touch the stored program key.
Press the [START] key.
Considerable time is required to copy the drawings each
month because the above settings must be selected.
In addition, mistakes are occasionally made when selecting
the settings, so some copies must be redone.
The settings are stored in a job program, so they can be
selected by the touch of a key. This is simple and takes no time.
In addition, the settings are all stored so there are no chances
for mistakes, and thus no need to redo copies due to setting
mistakes.
® :
Up to 48 job programs can be stored. The job programs are retained even if an interruption occurs in the power supply.
Job programs can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Job program] and then [Copy] in the Web page menu to store a
job program.
2-139
Contents
STORING COPY OPERATIONS (Job Programs)
A job program is a group of copy settings stored together. When copy settings are stored in a job program, the settings
can be retrieved and used for a copy job by means of a simple operation.
For example, suppose 1 1 11 x 1 7" (A3) size CAD drawings are copied once a month for archive purposes using the
following settings:
11" x 17" (A3) size CAD drawings
Copies
□I
(1 ) The 1 1" x 17" (A3) size CAD drawings are
reduced to 8-1/2" x 11 11 (A4) size.
(2) The drawings have fine lines that do not
show clearly, and thus a dark exposure
setting (level 4) is used.
(3) To reduce paper use by half, 2-sided
copying is used.
(4) Margin shift is used so that holes can be
punched for filing.
When a job program is not stored
When a job program is stored
Ex 丄 4 | ♦= | l JM
COPIER
Press program number.
1 _ ^ _ I
1 _ ^ _ I
[. 10 1 (. 11 1
Store/Delete
Touch a numeric key.
Numeric keys in which job programs are already stored are
highlighted.
• To store a job program, touch a numeric key that is not
highlighted.
• To edit or delete a job program, touch the key in which the
job program is stored (highlighted key).
STORING (EDITING/DELETING) A JOB PROGRAM
The procedures for storing copy settings in a job program and deleting a job program are explained below.
®@©
@©©
©®®
®®(&)
Press the [#/P] key (©).
Job Programs
Press program number.
Touch the [Store/Delete] tab.
©
Editing or deleting a job program...
When a highlighted numeric key is touched, the following screen appears.
The [Store] key can be touched to delete the stored settings and store new settings. Go to the next step.
When the [Delete] key is touched, the stored settings are deleted. After the deletion is finished, touch the [Exit] key to
return to the base screen.
A job program has been already stored
in this location.
Cancel j f Delete I I Store
When "Disabling Deletion of Job Programs" is enabled in the system settings, a stored job program cannot be edited
or deleted.
2-140
Contents
1 4 〔今- j rrl l
s s
TJ ^ ^ ^ f — ^
V f 】 , ) ^ J
COPIER
Select the copy settings that you wish to
store in the job program and touch the
[OK] key.
To assign a name to the program, touch the [Program Name]
key. A text entry screen will appear.
Up to 10 characters can be entered for the name.
When you have finished, touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen with the stored information
reflected in the screen.
The number of copies cannot be stored.
2-141
Contents
COPIER
Back cover when a 1 -sided
original is copied on one
side of the back cover.
rx
Back cover when a 2-sided
original is copied on one
side of the back cover.
(One page is not copied.)
Front cover when one side
is copied on.
Front cover when a 2-sided
original is copied on one
side of the cover. (One
page is not copied.)
2-sided original or output
page of regular 2-sided
copying.
1 -sided original or output
page of regular 1 -sided
copying.
Insert when one side is
copied on.
Insert when a 2-sided
original is copied on one
side of the insert. (One
page is not copied.)
P
Back cover when both
sides are copied on.
w
Output page of 2-sided
copying when only 1 side is
copied on due to lack of
originals.
2-142
Contents
Front cover when both
sides are copied on.
w
Insert when both sides are
copied on.
P
Back cover when not
copied on.
1 -sided original or output
page of regular 1 -sided
copying.
APPENDIX
Examples of covers and inserts
The relations between the originals and finished copies when covers or inserts are inserted are shown on the following
pages.
Covers
1 -sided copying of 1 -sided originals
1 -sided copying of 2-sided originals
， 2-sided copying of 1 -sided originals
， 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals
Inserts
• 1 -sided copying of 1 -sided originals • 2-sided copying of 1 -sided originals
• 1 -sided copying of 2-sided originals • 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals
Symbols used for covers and inserts
The following symbols are used to make the explanations easier to understand.
The numbers that appear indicate what original a copy corresponds to, and will vary depending on the settings.
さ
Symbol
Meaning
Icon
appearing
in display
Symbol
Meaning
Icon
appearing
in display
Front cover when not
copied on.
Insert when not copied on.
£
sloqulAS J CD LUO
^
s r CD (o ul
Ili Q/
J a) > o o luoJ LI.
J a) >o o >l o (Q g
COPIER
Covers (1 -sided copying of 1 -sided originals)
1 -sided copies are made of the following 1 -sided originals.
1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page
1 2 3 4 5 6
Cover copying condition
Front cover Back cover
No copying
No copying
1 -sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
1 -sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2
3
2
2
3
3
Resulting copies
2 3 4 5
3 4 5 6
2 3 4 5
4 ~~ [5 ~~
6
2-143
Contents
COPIER
Covers (2-sided copying of 1 -sided originals)
2-sided copies are made of the following 1 -sided originals.
1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page
1 2 3 4 5 6
Cover copying condition
Front cover Back cover
No copying
No copying
1 -sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
1 -sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
Resulting copies
Tlkl Rk
TT^I FIX R\
six fsi\
2-144
Contents
COPIER
Covers (1 -sided copying of 2-sided originals)
1 -sided copies are made of the following 2-sided originals.
1st page
2nd page
3rd page
plk
Cover copying condition
Front cover Back cover
No copying
No copying
1 -sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
1 -sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2
3
2
2
3
3
Resulting copies
2 3 4 5
3 4 5 6
2 3 4 5
4 ~~ [5 ~~
6
2-145
Contents
COPIER
Covers (2-sided copying of 2-sided originals)
2-sided copies are made of the following 2-sided originals.
1st page
2nd page
3rd page
plk
Cover copying condition
Front cover Back cover
Resulting copies
No copying
No copying
Tlk1
1 -sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
1 -sided
copying
S N
W/A
s s
V X X x x xS
No copying
2-sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
rx
1 -sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1 -sided
copying
_
鍾
v ' \ \ 、 '、
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-146
Contents
COPIER
Inserts (copying of 1 -sided originals)
1 -sided and 2-sided copying of the following 1 -sided originals. The example of adding an insert at the 3rd sheet is
shown, (when "Insertion Page" is set to "3" in the insertion settings of the insert settings in the special modes)
Insert
copying
condition
Resulting copies (1 -sided copying)
Resulting copies
(2-sided copying)
No copying
i
2
3
4
5
6
1 -sided
copying
i
2
4
5
6
2-sided
copying
i
2
5
6
slk
Inserts (copying of 2-sided originals)
1 -sided and 2-sided copying of the following 2-sided originals. The example of adding an insert at the 3rd sheet is
shown, (when "Insertion Page" is set to "3" in the insertion settings of the insert settings in the special modes)
1st page
2nd page
3rd page
plk
Insert
copying
condition
Resulting copies (1 -sided copying)
Resulting copies
(2-sided copying)
No copying
i
2
3
4
5
6
plk
1 -sided
copying
i
2
4
5
6
5~[k
2-sided
copying
i
2
5
6
slX
2-147
Contents
CHAPTER 3
PRINTER
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the printer function.
PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE . 3-3
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE . 3-4
• SELECTING THE PAPER . 3-6
• PRINTING ON ENVELOPES . 3-7
PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED _ 3-8
VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELP . 3-10
SAVING FREQUENTLY USED PRINT
SETTINGS . 3-11
• SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF
PRINTING . 3-11
• USING SAVED SETTINGS . 3-13
CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER
DEFAULT SETTINGS . 3-14
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE . 3-16
• SELECTING PAPER SETTINGS . 3-16
• PRINTING . 3-17
• SELECTING THE PAPER . 3-19
• PRINTING ON ENVELOPES . 3-20
PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED … 3-21
FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS
SELECTING A PRINT MODE SETTING . 3-23
TWO-SIDED PRINTING . 3-25
FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER … 3-27
PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE
PAGE . 3-28
STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN
OUTPUT . 3-30
CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS
CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS . 3-32
• CREATING A PAMPHLET
(Pamphlet/Pamphlet Staple) . 3-32
• INCREASING THE MARGIN (Margin Shift) ■… 3-34
• CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Poster
Printing) . 3-35
FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND
ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE . 3-36
• ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180
DEGREES (Rotate 180 degrees) . 3-36
• ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT
IMAGE (Zoom/XY-Zoom) . 3-37
• ADJUSTING LINE WIDTHS WHEN
PRINTING (Line Width Settings) . 3-38
• REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) . . . . 3-39
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION . 3-40
• ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS AND
CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE (Image
Adjustment) . 3-40
• PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN
BLACK (Text To Black/Vector To Black) . 3-41
FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND
IMAGES . 3-42
• ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED
PAGES (Watermark) . 3-42
• PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT
DATA (Image Stamp) . 3-43
• CREATING OVERLAYS FOR PRINT
DATA (Overlays) . 3-44
3-1
PRINTER
PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL
PURPOSES . 3-45
• PRINTING SPECIFIED PAGES ON
DIFFERENT PAPER (Different Paper) . 3-45
• ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency
Inserts) . 3-47
• PRINTING A CARBON COPY (Carbon
Copy) . 3-48
• PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB
PAPER (Tab Paper Print/Tab Paper
Settings) . 3-49
•TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC
PAGES PRINTED ON THE FRONT SIDE
(Chapter Inserts) . 3-52
• FOLDING PRINTED PAPER IN HALF
(Fold) . 3-53
CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS . 3-54
• USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A
LARGE PRINT JOB (Tandem Print) . 3-54
• SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES
(Retention/Document Filing) . 3-55
PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER
DRIVER
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE _ 3-57
• DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP
SERVER . 3-58
• DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB
MEMORY . 3-59
• DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A
NETWORK FOLDER . 3-61
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER .... 3-64
•SUBMIT PRINT JOB . 3-64
• FTP PRINT . 3-64
CHECKING THE PRINT STATUS
JOB STATUS SCREEN . 3-66
• SPOOL SCREEN/JOB QUEUE
SCREEN/COMPLETED JOB SCREEN . 3-67
PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE . 3-69
GIVING A PRINT JOB
PRIORITY/CANCELING A PRINT JOB . 3-70
• GIVING A PRINT JOB PRIORITY . 3-70
• CANCELING A PRINT JOB . 3-71
CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND
PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT . 3-72
APPENDIX
PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATION LIST . 3-73
• E-MAIL PRINT . 3-65
3-2
PRINTER
PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE
The machine is equipped standard with a printing function. To enable printing from your computer, a printer driver must
be installed.
See the table below to determine which printer driver to use in your environment.
Environment
Printer driver type
Remarks
Windows
PCL6, PCL5e
The machine supports the Hewlett-Packard PCL6 and PCL5e printer
control languages. It is recommended that you use the PCL6 printer
driver. If you have a problem printing from older software using the PCL6
printer driver, use the PCL5e printer driver.
Can be used in the
standard machine
configuration.
PS
This printer driver supports the PostScript 3 page description language
developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated, and enables the machine to
be used as a PostScript 3 compatible printer.
(A PPD file is available if it is desired to use the Windows standard PS
printer driver.)
The PS3 expansion kit
must be installed.
Macintosh
Installing the printer driver in a Windows environment
To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Windows environment, see "2. SETUP IN A WINDOWS
ENVIRONMENT" in the Software Setup Guide.
The explanations in this manual of printing in a Windows environment generally use the screens of the PCL6 printer driver.
The printer driver screens may differ slightly depending on the printer driver that you are using.
Installing the printer driver in a Macintosh environment
In a Macintosh environment, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed to use the machine as a network printer.
To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Macintosh environment, see "3. SETUP IN A MACINTOSH
ENVIRONMENT" in the Software Setup Guide.
3-3
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE
The following example explains how to print a document from "WordPad"， which is a standard accessory program in
Windows.
Document - WordPad
| File] Edit View Insert
Format 卜
New...
Ctrl+N .
Open...
Ctrl+O
Save
Ctrl+S
Save As …
2
Print...
Ctrl+P
rrmi rreview...
Page Setup …
Recent File
Send...
Exit
%
Western
T
▼ b / u 濟 [F|i
• i • • • 4 • • • i • • • f
Select [Print] from the [File] menu of
WordPad.
The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.
Open the printer driver properties
window.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
• If the printer drivers appear as icons, click the icon
of the printer driver to be used.
• If the printer drivers appear as a list, select the
name of the printer driver to be used from the list.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
• If you are using Windows 2000, the [Preferences]
button does not appear. Click a tab on the "Print"
dialog box to adjust the settings on that tab.
• In Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0, click the [Properties]
button.
⑴ (2)
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
3-4
Contents
PRINTER
(2)
⑴
⑶
Select print settings.
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select the paper size.
To select settings on other tabs, click the desired tab
and then select the settings.
(3) Click the [OK] button.
• Make sure the paper size is the same as the paper size set in the software application.
• Up to eight custom paper sizes can be stored. Storing a custom paper size makes it easy to specify that size each
time you need to use it.
To store a paper size, select [Custom Paper] or one of [Userl] to [User7] from the pull-down menu and click the
[Custom] button.
)n C Current Page
145535
■a single page number or a single
:. For example, 5-12
Number of copies:
M
0 Collate
Click the [Print] button.
Printing begins.
In Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0, click the [OK] button.
Cancel | | Apply
Contents
3-5
PRINTER
SELECTING THE PAPER
This section explains how to configure the "Paper Selection" setting on the [Paper] tab of
the printer driver properties window.
Before printing, check the paper sizes, paper types, and paper remaining in the machine's
trays. To view the most recent tray information, click the [Tray Status] button.
Paper Selection
Paper Source:
Auto Select
▼
Paper Type:
Auto Select
Tray Status...
• When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Source"
The tray that has the size and type of paper selected in "Paper Size" and "Paper Type" on the [Paper] tab is
automatically selected.
• When other than [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Source"
The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Paper Size" setting.
When [Bypass Tray] is selected
The "Paper Type" must also be selected. Check the bypass tray and make sure that the desired type of paper is
loaded, and then select the appropriate "Paper Type" setting.
• Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray. For the procedure for loading paper and other
\^) media in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY11 (page 1 -34) in M1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE11.
• When "Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass T ray 11 (disabled by factory default) or "Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass T ray 11 (enabled by factory default) is enabled in the system settings (administrator), printing will not take place if the
paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the paper size or paper type specified in the settings
of the bypass tray.
• When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Type"
A tray with plain paper or recycled paper of the size specified in "Paper Size" is automatically selected. (The factory
default setting is plain paper only.)
• When other than [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Type"
A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Paper Size" is used for printing.
System Settings (Administrator): Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Selection", specify whether or not the paper in the bypass tray will be excluded from
the paper that can be selected. This setting is disabled by factory default, and thus paper in the bypass tray is included in the
paper that can be automatically selected. If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray, it is recommended that
this setting be enabled.
3-6
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING ON ENVELOPES
The bypass tray can be used to print on special media such as envelopes. The procedure for printing on an envelope
from the printer driver properties screen is described below.
For the types of paper that can be used in the bypass tray, see "IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER" (page 1-27) in
"BEFORE USING THE MACHINE11. For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN
THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-34) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
Select the envelope size in the appropriate settings of the application ("Page Settings" in many applications) and then
perform the following steps.
⑴ (2) (3)
(4)
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select the envelope size from the "Paper
Size" menu.
(3) Select [Bypass Tray] from the "Paper
Source" menu of "Paper Selection".
(4) Select [Envelope] from the "Paper Type"
menu.
Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Envelope] and
make sure the envelope is loaded in the bypass tray.
• It is recommended that you do a test print to check the print result before using an envelope.
• In the case of media that can only be loaded in a certain orientation such as an envelope, you can rotate the image 180
degrees if needed. For more information, see "ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (Rotate 180 degrees)11
(page 3-36).
• For more information on "Paper Selection", see "SELECTING THE PAPER" (page 3-6).
3-7
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED
When the user authentication function is enabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), your user information
(login name, password, etc.) must be entered in the printer driver properties window before you can print. The
information that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used， so check with the
administrator of the machine before printing.
⑴
(2)
Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
3-8
Contents
PRINTER
⑴ (2)
Enter your login name and password.
(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab.
(2) Enter your user information.
• When authentication is by login name/password
Select the [Login Name] and [Password]
checkboxes so that checkmarks appear, and
enter your login name and password. Enter 1 to 32
characters for the password.
• When authentication is by user number
Click the [User Number] checkbox and enter a
user number (5 to 8 digits).
(3) Enter the user name and job name as
necessary.
• User Name
Click the [User Name] checkbox and enter your
user name (maximum of 32 characters). Your
entered user name will appear at the top of the
operation panel. If you do not enter a user name,
your computer login name will appear.
• Job Name
Click the [Job Name] checkbox and enter a job
name (maximum of 30 characters). The entered job
name will appear at the top of the operation panel
as a file name. If you do not enter a job name, the
file name set in the software application will appear.
(4) Click the [OK] button.
To have a confirmation window appear before printing starts, select the [Auto Job Control Review] checkbox so that a
checkmark appears.
Number of copies: 1
)n 01 Current Page
1-65535 [7] Collate
■a single page number or a single
:. For example, 5-12
Start printing.
Cancel | | Apply
• Even when user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator), normally printing is possible without
entering user information. The number of pages printed is added to the "Other User" count. In this case, other print
functions may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.
• The machine's user authentication function cannot be used when the PPD file* is installed and the Windows standard PS
printer driver is used. For this reason, printing will not be possible if printing by invalid users is prohibited in the system
settings (administrator).
* The PPD file enables the machine to print using the standard PS printer driver of the operating system.
System Settings (Administrator): Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
This is used to prohibit printing of print jobs by users whose user information is not stored in the machine. When this function
is enabled, printing is not allowed when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.
Contents
3-9
PRINTER
VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELP
When selecting settings in the printer driver, you can display Help to view explanations of the settings.
⑴
(2)
Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
にク may vary depending on the software application.
Click the [Help] button.
The Help window will open to let you view explanations of
the settings on the tab.
To view Help for settings in a dialog box, click the
underlined text at the top of the Help window.
Pop-up help
Help can be displayed for a setting by clicking the setting and pressing the [FI] key.
* To view Help for a setting in Windows 98/Me/NT 4 . 0/2000/X P/Se rve r 2003, click the Q button in the upper right-hand
corner of the printer driver properties window and then click the setting.
You can also view the same Help by right-clicking the setting and clicking the [Help] box that appears.
Information icon
Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver properties window.
When a restriction exists on a selected setting, an information icon ((|/*) will appear next to the setting. Click the icon to
view an explanation of the restriction.
3-10
Contents
PRINTER
SAVING FREQUENTLY USED PRINT
SETTINGS
Settings configured on each of the tabs at the time of printing can be saved as user settings. Saving frequently used
settings or complex settings under an assigned name makes it easy to select those settings the next time you need to
use them.
SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING
Settings can be saved from any tab of the printer driver properties window. Settings configured on each tab are listed at
the time of saving, allowing you to check the settings as you save them.
Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
⑴
(2)
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
每 Printing Preferences
(1) (2)
Save the print settings.
(1) Configure print settings on each tab.
(2) Click the [Save] button.
3-11
Contents
PRINTER
(i)
User Settings
G
Setting Name:
Userl
Current Settings:
Main
Copies
Document Style
N-Up Printing
N-Up Border
N-Up Order
Binding Edge
Staple
Punch
No Offset
Margin Shift
Image Orientation
Rotate 180 degrees
Paper
Paper Size
Zoom Settings
Poster Printing
Dash Border
Overlap
Check and save the settings.
(1) Check the displayed settings.
(2) Enter a name for the settings (maximum
of 20 characters).
(3) Click the [OK] button.
Image Orientation
Portrait
C1 Landscape
B Rotate 180 degrees
OK | Cancel ] | Help j
Click the [OK] button.
)n Current Page
1-65535
■a single page number or a single
:. For example. E-1 2
Number of copies: 1
0 Collate
Cancel | | Apply
Start printing.
Up to 30 sets of user settings can be saved.
The following items cannot be saved in user settings.
- A watermark that you created
- Paper insertion settings
- Overlay file
- [Tab Paper Print] settings on the [Special Modes] tab (PCL6 only)
- The login name, password, user name, and job name entered in the [Job Handling] tab
Contents
1 1-sid f S l Lefl r s 1 1 s Lette J r s I
Hi
3-12
PRINTER
USING SAVED SETTINGS
⑴ (2)
Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
(1)
Select the print settings.
(1) Select the user settings that you wish to
use.
(2) Click the [OK] button.
■a single page number or a single
:. For example, 5-12：
1
1
Print
Cancel | 丨 Apply
Start printing.
Deleting saved settings
Select the user settings that you want to delete in (1) of step 2 above, and click the [Delete] button.
3-13
Contents
PRINTER
CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER
DEFAULT SETTINGS
The default settings of the printer driver can be changed using the procedure below. The settings selected using this
procedure are saved and become the default settings when printing from a software application. (Settings selected in
the printer driver properties window when printing from an application remain in effect only while the application is in
use.)
Click the [Start] button (n) and select [Control Panel] and then [Printer].
• In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [start] button and then click [Printers and Faxes].
• In Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then select [Printers].
In Windows XP, if [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [start] menu, select [Control Panel], select [Printers and
Other Hardware], and then select [Printers and Faxes].
(2) (1)
倫 一，
Cut
Copy
Paste
Undo
Redo
Status
Select All
|H| し ay out
Folder and Search Options
Delete
Rename
Properties.
Close
⑶
Open the printer properties window.
(1) Click the icon of the printer driver of the
machine.
(2) Click the [Organize] menu.
In Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 200 3, click
the [File] menu.
(3) Select [Properties],
In Windows NT 4.0, select [Document Defaults] from
the [File] menu to open the printer driver properties
window. Go to step 4.
General [ Sharing 丄 Ports ] Advanced I Color Management^ Security ] Lontiauration^
SHARP MX-xxxx
Location:
Comment:
Model: SHARP MX-xxxx
Features
| Paper available:
Custom Paper
I Printina Preferences... 1 1 Pnrrt Test Paae I
Click the [Printing Preferences] button
on the [General] tab.
In Windows 98/Me, click the [Setup] tab.
3-14
Contents
PRINTER
Configure the settings and click the
[OK] button.
For explanations of the settings, see printer driver Help.
Contents
3-15
PRINTER
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE
The following example explains how to print a document from the standard accessory program "TextEdit" in Mac OS X
("SimpleText" in Mac OS 9).
To use the machine as a printer for the Macintosh, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed in the machine and the machine
must be connected to a network. To install the PPD file and configure printer driver settings, see "3. SETUP IN A
MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT11 in the Software Setup Guide.
SELECTING PAPER SETTINGS
Select paper settings in the printer driver before selecting the print command.
Fffe
Edit
Format Windc
New
Open...
其〇
Open Recent
►
Close
謂
Save
Save As ■■■
Save All
Revert to Saved
Show Properties
Page Setup …
⑽ p
tb im …
dbr
Select [Page Setup] from the [File]
menu of TextEdit.
In Mac OS 9, select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of
SimpleText.
(1)
Paper Size
Page Attributes
T)
I SCxxxxxx
^1
SHARP MX-xxxx PPD
US Letter
T'
8.50 in x 11.00 in
關 _ 匠
100%
⑦
i Cancel OK
Select paper settings.
(1) Make sure that the correct printer is
selected.
(2) Select paper settings.
The paper size, paper orientation, and enlarge/reduce
can be selected.
(3) Click the [OK] button.
The machine name that appears in the "Format for" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of
characters that varies depending on your machine model.)
3-16
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING
a Edit Format
Windc
New
Open...
筅〇
Open Recent
►
Close
其 W
Save
Save As...
Save All
Revert to Saved
Show Properties
Paae Setuo
O 拭 P
Prints.
詫 p
Select [Print] from the [File] menu of
TextEdit.
In Mac OS 9, select [Print] from the [File] menu of
SimpleText.
The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.
Printer ■ Slxxxxxx
Presets: Standard
Copies & Pages
Copies: 1 ^Collated
Pages: ©All
◦ From: 1 to: 1
⑦ （ PDF， 〉 r Preview )
( Cancel J ^ Print )
Make sure that the correct printer is
selected.
The machine name that appears in the "Printer" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters
that varies depending on the machine model.)
Printer: SCxxxxxx
Presets: Standard
「 Layout
Copies
Pages
⑦ （ pdft ) (Tt
out
Scheduler
Paper Handling
ColorSync
Cover Page
Error Handling
Paper Feed
Job Handling
Watermarks
Cancel • ( Print )
Select print settings.
• In Mac OS X, dick 丄 next to [Copies & Pages] and
select the settings that you wish to configure from the
pull-down menu. The corresponding setting screen will
appear. If the settings do not appear in Mac OS X v10.5
to 10.5.5, click "Q" next to the printer name.
• In Mac OS 9, click 拿 I next to [General] and select the
settings that you wish to configure from the pull-down
menu. The corresponding setting screen will appear.
3-17
Contents
〕
PRINTER
Presets: Standard
Copies & Pages
Copies: 1 0 Collated
Pages: ©All _
O From: 1 to:
⑦ （ PDFv ) ( Preview )
、' Cane ^Ll ( prin 卜^
Click the [Print] button.
Printing begins.
3-18
Contents
PRINTER
SELECTING THE PAPER
This section explains the [Paper Feed] settings ("Paper Source" setting in [General] in Mac OS 9) in the print settings
window.
• When [Auto Select] is selected
A tray with plain paper or recycled paper (the factory default setting is plain paper only) of the size specified in "Paper
Size" in the page settings window is automatically selected.
• When a paper tray is selected
The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Paper Size" setting in the page settings window.
For the bypass tray, a paper type can also be specified. Make sure that the paper type setting for the bypass tray is
correct and that the set type of paper is actually loaded in the bypass tray, and then select the appropriate bypass tray
(paper type).
• Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray. For the procedure for loading paper and other
media in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY11 (page 1 -34) in M1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE11.
• When "Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass T ray 11 (disabled by factory default) or "Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass T ray 11 (enabled by factory default) is enabled in the system settings (administrator), printing will not take place if the
paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the paper size or paper type specified in the settings
of the bypass tray.
• When a paper type is selected
A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Paper Size" in the page settings window is used for
printing.
System Settings (Administrator): Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
When [Auto Select] is used for printing, this setting determines whether or not the paper in the bypass tray will be excluded
from the paper that can be selected. This setting is disabled by factory default, and thus paper in the bypass tray is included
in the paper that can be automatically selected. If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray, it is recommended
that this setting be enabled.
3-19
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING ON ENVELOPES
The bypass tray can be used to print on special media such as envelopes. The procedure for printing on an envelope
from the printer driver properties screen is described below.
For the types of paper that can be used in the bypass tray, see "IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER" (page 1-27) in
"BEFORE USING THE MACHINE11. For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN
THE BYPASS TRAY" (page 1-34) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
Select the envelope size in the appropriate settings of the application ("Page Settings" in many applications) and then
perform the following steps.
Settings: Page Attributes
Format for: SCxxxxxx
SHARP MX XXXX PPD
Paper Size ! #10 Envelope
4.12 in x 9-50 in
Orientation:
t ど 攸
⑴
Scale: 100 %
Select the paper size.
(1) Select the envelope size from the "Paper
Size" menu on the page setup screen.
In Mac OS 9, select the envelope size from the
"Paper" menu on the page setup screen.
(2) Click the [OK] button.
⑦
Cancel
: 1
(2)
In the case of media that can only be loaded in a certain orientation such as an envelope, you can rotate the image
180 degrees if needed. For more information, see "ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (Rotate 180
degrees)11 (page 3-36).
(1)
Select the bypass tray.
(1) Select [Paper Feed] on the print screen.
In Mac OS 9, select [General].
(2) Select [Bypass Tray(Envelope)] from the
"All pages from" menu.
• In Mac OS 9, select [Bypass Tray(Envelope)] from
the "All pages from" menu of "Paper Source".
• Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Envelope]
and make sure the envelope is loaded in the bypass
tray.
For more information on "Paper Feed", see "SELECTING THE PAPER" (page 3-19).
PRINTER
PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED
When the user authentication function is enabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), you must enter your
user information (login name, password, etc.) in order to print. The information that must be entered varies depending on
the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing.
Fffe
Edit
Format Wirdc
New
Open...
SO
Open Recent
►
Close
Save
Save As...
Save All
Revert to Saved
Show Properties
x 其 p
Priap Sftur>
Print … 詫 P
Select [Print] from the application's
[File] menu.
The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.
(1)
Printer: I SCxxxxxx
Presets: Standard
Copies:
Pages:
I ✓ Copies & Pages
Layout
Scheduler
Paper Handling
' ColorSync
Cover Page
Error Handling
⑦ (PDF
1
Display the job handling screen.
(1) Make sure that the machine's printer
name is selected.
(2) Select [Job Handling].
• In Mac OS X v10.5 to 1 0.5.5, select [Job Handling]
and then click the [Authentication] tab in the screen
that appears.
• In Mac OS 9, select [User Authentication].
The machine name that appears in the "Printer" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters
that varies depending on the machine model.)
3-21
Contents
PRINTER
Printer:
Presets:
SCxxxxxx
T)
Standard
3
Job Handling
Start printing.
(1) Enter your user information.
• When authentication is by login name/password
Enter your login name in "Login Name" and your
password in "Password" (1 to 32 characters).
• When authentication is by user number
Enter your user number (5 to 8 digits) in "User
Number".
(2) Enter the user name and job name as
necessary.
• User Name
Enter your user name (maximum of 32 characters).
Your entered user name will appear at the top of the
operation panel. If you do not enter a user name,
your computer login name will appear.
• Job Name
Enter a job name (maximum of 30 characters). The
entered job name will appear at the top of the
operation panel as a file name. If you do not enter a
job name, the file name set in the software
application will appear.
(3) Click the [Print] button.
In Mac OS X, you can click the ^ (lock) button after entering your login name and password, or user number, to
simplify operation the next time you wish to print based on the same user authentication.
Even when user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator), normally printing is possible without
entering user information. The number of pages printed is added to the "Other User" count. In this case, other print functions
may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.
System Settings (Administrator): Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
This is used to prohibit printing of print jobs by users whose user information is not stored in the machine. When this function
is enabled, printing is not allowed when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.
3-22
Contents
PRINTER
FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS
This section explains frequently used functions.
• SELECTING A PRINT MODE SETTING
•TWO-SIDED PRINTING (page 3-25)
• FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER (page
3-27)
• PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE (page
3-28)
• STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN
OUTPUT (page 3-30)
The explanations assume that the paper size and other basic settings have already been selected. For the basic
procedure for printing and the steps for opening the printer driver properties window, see the following section:
暖 Windows: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-4)
暖 Macintosh: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-16)
In Windows, view printer driver Help for details on printer driver settings for each printing function.
SELECTING A PRINT MODE SETTING
This section explains the procedure for selecting a print mode setting. The "Print Mode Settings" consist of the following
three items:
Normal: This mode is suitable for printing data such as regular text or a table.
Fine: Select this when you want to print a photo with greater clarity or print graphics with gradations, etc.
Windows
(This function is not available when using the PCL5e printer driver.)
(1) (2)
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Select the "Print Mode".
3-23
Contents
PRINTER
Macintosh
(i)
Printer: SCxxxxxx
Presets: Standard
Printer Features
Feature Sets:l Advanced
□ Toner Save
□ No Offset
Print Model Normal
_ Document Control
(2) (3)
13J
Ti
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select [Advanced].
(3) Select the "Print Mode".
3-24
Contents
PRINTER
TWO-SIDED PRINTING
The machine can print on both sides of the paper. This function is useful for many purposes, and is particularly
convenient when you want to create a simple pamphlet. Two-sided printing also helps conserve paper.
Windows
(i)
ド
aper Advanced Special Modes Job Handling
User Settings: [Untitled
Save...
Defaults
Watermarks
Finishing
Binding Edge:
[Left
ONo Offset
Margin Shift:
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select [2-Sided(Book)] or [2-Sided(Tablet)].
3-25
Contents
PRINTER
Macintosh
(i)
Printer: SCxxxxxx
Presets: Standard
D
Pages per Sheet: 、上
Layout Direction:
國圓圓
Border: None
〇 Off
© Long-edged binding ^
O Short-edged binding I
(1) Select [Layout].
(2) Select [Long-edged binding] or
[Short-edged binding].
• In Mac OS X vl 0.2.8, select the settings in
\^) [Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select [Output/Document Style] and
then select [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short
edge].
3-26
Contents
PRINTER
FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER
This function is used to automatically enlarge or reduce the printed image to match the size of the paper loaded in the
machine.
This is convenient for such purposes as enlarging a letter or A4 size document to ledger or A3 size to make it easier to
view, and to print when the same size of paper as the document image is not loaded in the machine.
The following example explains how to print a letter size document on ledger size paper.
Windows
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select the size of the print image (for
example: Letter).
(3) Select [Fit To Paper Size].
(4) Select the actual paper size to be used for
printing (for example: Ledger).
Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS X vl 0.4.1 1 and v10.5 to 10.5.5.)
(1) (2)
Printer: ' Stxxxxxx
Presets: こ Standard t '
I Paper Handling
Page Order: © Automatic
0 Normal
〇 Reverse
Print: ©All Pages
〇 Odd numbered pages
〇 Even numbered pages
Destination Paper Size:
C Use documents DaDer siz<
t _
[® Scale to fit paper size: |
1 Ledger
一 bcaie aovTi omy
I
(3)
■
(4)
(1) Select [Paper Handling].
(2) Check the size of the print image (for
example: Letter).
To change the print image size, use the "Paper Size"
menu that appears when [Page Setup] is selected.
(3) Select [Scale to fit paper size].
(4) Select the actual paper size to be used for
printing (for example: Ledger).
3-27
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE
This function can be used to reduce the print image and print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
This is convenient when you want to print multiple images such as photos on a single sheet of paper, and when you
want to conserve paper. This function can also be used in combination with two-sided printing for maximum
conservation of paper.
For example, when [2-Up] (2 pages per sheet) and [4-Up] (4 pages per sheet) are selected, the following print results will
be obtained, depending on the order selected.
N-Up
(Pages per
sheet)
Right, and Down Down, and Right
Left, and Down
Down, and Left
4-Up
(4 pages per
sheet)
12
34
13
24
21
43
31
42
• The page orders for 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, and 16-Up are the same as for 4-Up.
• In a Windows environment, the page order can be viewed in the print image in the printer driver properties window.
In a Macintosh environment, the page orders are displayed as selections.
• In a Macintosh environment, the number of pages that can be printed on a single sheet is 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16.
3-28
Contents
PRINTER
Windows
(i)
厂 Main
I Special Modes Job Handling Watermarks
User Settings:! Untitled
二 II:
]匚
\
0
m
Copies:
1
0 Collate
Document Style
(參 1 -Sided
C' 2-Sided (Book)
© 2-Sided (Tablet)
^ Pamphlet Style
「Tiled Pamphlet
Finishing
Binding Edge:
iLeft
I Staple:
I None
I □ Punch
□ No Offset
Margin Shift:
会
I N-Up Printing
1f2-uP ▼ |
Border |
|None
Image Orientation
(#• Portrait
<£ Landscape
n Rotate 180 dearees
⑵⑶
(4)
Macintosh
(1) (2)
Presets: Standard
Pages per Sheet
Layout Direction
Border
2 t!
J
Single Thin Line : |
Two-Sided:
0Off
0 Long-ed
0 Short-ed
sd binding
ed binding
(4) (3)
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the number of pages per sheet.
(3) If you wish to print borderlines, click the
[Border] checkbox so that a checkmark j
appears.
(4) Select the order of the pages.
(1) Select [Layout].
(2) Select the number of pages per sheet.
(3) Select the order of the pages.
(4) If you wish to print borderlines, select the
desired type of borderline.
Contents
3-29
PRINTER
STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN
OUTPUT
Staple function
The staple function can be used to staple output.
This function saves considerable time when preparing handouts for a meeting or other stapled materials. The staple
function can also be used in combination with two-sided printing to create materials with a more sophisticated
appearance.
Stapling positions and the number of staples can be selected to obtain the following stapling results.
* The staple orientation (■■■■■ or ■■■ ■■) varies depending on the size and orientation of the paper.
Punch function
The punch function can be selected to punch holes in printed output. Punch hole positions can be set by selecting the
binding edge.
Left
Right
Top
o o
• To use the staple function, a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is required.
• To use the punch function, a punch module must be installed on the finisher or saddle stitch finisher.
• For the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in the Safety Guide.
The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled at once includes any covers and/or inserts that are inserted.
• The staple function cannot be used in combination with the offset function, which offsets the position of each output job
from the previous job.
• When the finisher is disabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), the staple function and punch function
cannot be used.
• When the staple function or the punch function is disabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), stapling or
punching is not possible.
• For information on the saddle stitch function, see "CREATING A PAMPHLET (Pamphlet/Pamphlet Staple)11 (page 3-32).
3-30
Contents
PRINTER
Windows
⑴ (3) (2)
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the staple function or the punch
function.
• For the staple function, select the number of staples in
the "Staple" menu.
• For the punch function, click the [Punch] checkbox so
that a checkmark » appears.
Macintosh
(i)
Presets: Standard
Printer Features
Feature Sets: Output
Output: Finisher Upper Tray
Binding Edge| Left
Staple: 2 Staples
Punch
Margin Shift: None _
Pamphlet Style: Off
m
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the staple function or the punch
function.
• For the staple function, select the number of staples in
the "Staple" menu.
• For the punch function, click the [Punch] checkbox so
that a checkmark ^ appears.
• In Mac OS X vl 0.2.8, select the settings in
[Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select the settings in
[Output/Document Style].
3-31
Contents
PRINTER
CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS
This section explains convenient functions for specific printing objectives.
• CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS
• FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND
ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE (page 3-36)
• IMAGE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION (page 3-40)
• FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND IMAGES
(page 3-42)
• PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES
(page 3-45)
• CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS (page 3-54)
The explanations assume that the paper size and other basic settings have already been selected. For the basic
procedure for printing and the steps for opening the printer driver properties window, see the following section:
暖 Windows: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-4)
隊 Macintosh: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 3-16)
In Windows, view printer driver Help for details on printer driver settings for each printing function.
CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS
CREATING A PAMPHLET (Pamphlet/Pamphlet Staple)
The pamphlet function prints on the front and back of
each sheet of paper so that the sheets can be folded and
bound to create a pamphlet. This is convenient when
you wish to compile printed output into a pamphlet.
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed and saddle
stitch printing and the staple function are selected, the
output is automatically folded and stapled at the center.
This allows you to conveniently use the output as a
handout or pamphlet without the need for any further
work.
Windows
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select [Pamphlet Style]
The pamphlet printing method can be selected from the
pull-down menu.
(3) Select the "Binding Edge".
[2 Staples] can be selected for "Staple" when a saddle
stitch finisher is installed.
3-32
Contents
PRINTER
Macintosh
(i)
Printer: SCxxxxxx
Presets: Standard
Printer Features
Feature Sets: Output
了 I
了 I
了，
Output: Saddle Stitch T ray
Binding Edgc| Left
Staple I 2 Staples
C Punch
Margin Shift: None
Pamphlet Style I Tiled Pamphlet
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
[2 Staples] can be selected in the "Staple" menu when a
saddle stitch finisher is installed.
(3) Select [Tiled Pamphlet] or [2-Up Pamphlet],
• In Mac OS X vl 0.2.8, select from the "2-Side
Printing" and "Binding Edge" menus in [Advanced].
•In Mac OS 9, select the settings in
[Output/Document Style].
3-33
Contents
PRINTER
INCREASING THE MARGIN (Margin Shift)
This function is used to shift the print image to increase
the margin at the left, right, or top of the paper. This is
convenient when you wish to staple or punch the output
but the binding area overlaps the text. When a finisher or
saddle stitch finisher is installed, the staple function or
the punch function can be used with this function.
Windows
⑴ (2)
Macintosh
⑴
Printer: SCxxxxxx
Presets: Standard
I Printer heatures
Feature Sets: Output
Output: Finisher Upper Tray
Binding Edge! Left
Staple: Off _
□ Punch
Margin Shifl 0.4 in. _
Pamphlet Style: Off
⑶
m
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the "Margin Shift".
Select from the "Margin Shift" menu. If you wish to
configure another numeric setting, select the setting from
the pull-down menu and click the [Settings] button. Click
the :: button or directly enter the number.
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge"
(3) Select the "Margin Shift".
• In Mac OS X vl 0.2.8, select from the "Binding
Edge" and "Margin Shift" menus in [Advanced].
•In Mac OS 9, select [Advanced] and then select the
binding edge and margin shift from the margin shift
menu.
Contents
3-34
PRINTER
CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Poster Printing)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
One page of print data can be enlarged and printed
using multiple sheets of paper (4 sheets (2x2), 9 sheets
(3 x 3) or 16 sheets (4 x 4)). The sheets can then be
attached together to create a large poster. To enable
precise alignment of the edges of the sheets during
attachment, borderlines can be printed and overlapping
edges can be created (overlap function).
A 岭
Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.)
(1)
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select the [Poster Printing] checkbox [7]
and click the [Poster Settings] button.
(3) Select poster settings.
Select the number of sheets of paper to be used from the
pull-down menu. If you wish to print borderlines and/or
use the overlap function, select the corresponding
checkboxes
3-35
Contents
PRINTER
FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND
ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE
ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES
(Rotate 180 degrees)
This feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can
be printed correctly on paper that can only be loaded in
one orientation (such as envelopes or paper with punch
holes). (In Mac 〇 S X， a portrait image cannot be rotated
180 degrees.)
aoav abcd
Windows
⑴ (2)
(1) Select the setting on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the [Rotate 180 degrees] checkbox
軋
Macintosh
Settings: Page Attributes
Format for: SCxxxxxx
SHARP MX-xxxx PPD
Paper Size: US Letter t '
8.50 in x 11.00 in
Orientation: “ t |[T •
Scale: 100 96
3
⑦
Cancel J( OK )|
(1) (2)
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and click the u button.
In Mac OS 9, select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and select [PostScript Options]. Then select the [Flip
Horizontal] and [Flip Vertical] checkbox [v] .
(2) Click the [OK] button.
3-36
Contents
PRINTER
ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE
(Zoom/XY-Zoom)
This function is used to enlarge or reduce the image to a
selected percentage. This allows you to enlarge a small
image or add margins to the paper by slightly reducing
an image.
When using the PS printer driver (Windows), you can set
the width and length percentages separately to change
the proportions of the image. (XY-Zoom)
Windows
⑴
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select [Zoom] and click the [Settings]
button.
The actual paper size to be used for printing can be
selected from the pull-down menu.
(3) Select the zoom ratio.
Directly enter a number (%) or click the : button to
change the ratio in increments of 1%. You can also select
[Upper し eft] or [Center] for the base point on the paper.
Macintosh
⑦
Settings:
Page Attributes
レ
Format for:
SCxxxxxx
SHARP MX-xxxx PPD
Paper Size:
US Letter
8.50 in x 11.00 in
Orientation:
t •.
t
Scale
100 96
(1)
、 Cancel y| ( OK
(2)
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and enter the ratio (%)■
In Mac OS 9, select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and enter the ratio (%).
(2) Click the [OK] button.
Contents
3-37
PRINTER
ADJUSTING LINE WIDTHS WHEN PRINTING
(Line Width Settings)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
When lines in special applications such as CAD cannot
be printed correctly, this setting can be used to adjust
line widths, such as making overall line widths wider.
(This setting is only effective for vector data; raster data
such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted.) When the
data includes lines of varying widths, you can also print
all lines at the minimum width.
Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.)
⑴
Main ^ Pape I Advanced |)edal Modes [ Job Handling ] Watermarks
;:| Untitled
▼]l
Save... ] [ Defaults
Print Mode:
Overlays
[ Normal
| No Overlay ▼
Graphics Mode:
Edit …
[Vector
Bitmap Compression:
Font...
[ Very High Quality
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Adjust the line width.
Select a number from the pull-down menu.
• The units of line-width adjustment can be set to
\^) "Fixed Width11 or "Ratio11. Click the [Compatibility]
button and select the units from the "Line Width
Unit" menu.
• To print all lines in the data at the minimum line
width, click the [Compatibility] button and select the
[Minimum Line Width] checkbox ( ).
3-38
Contents
PRINTER
REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image)
The image can be reversed to create a mirror image.
This function can be used to conveniently print a design
for a woodblock print or other printing medium.
Windows
(This function can be used when the PS printer driver is used.)
Main J^Pape
(1)
I .Advanced |)ec “
: ial Modes |」j
Handling Watermarks
User Settings :| Untitled
H[
Save... | | Defaults
inwgg
へ
Print Mode:
Overiays
| Normal
| No Overlay ▼]
1
Minor Image:
Edit …
| Vertical
rosi^cnpi upiions
|y] PS Error Information
0 PS Pass-Through
Image Adjustment...
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Select a mirror image setting.
If you wish to reverse the image horizontally, select
[Horizontal]. If you wish to reverse the image vertically,
select [Vertical].
Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS 9.)
(1)
LaserWriter 8 Page Setuj
L
1 | PostScript™ Options
制
Visual Effects:
□ Flip Horizontal
□ Flip Vertical
□ Invert Image
Image &Text:
0 Substitute Fonts
0 Smooth Text
0 Smooth Graphics
□ Precision Bitmap Alignment
□ Unlimited Downloadable Fonts
Cancel ]
|_^J
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and select [PostScript Options].
(2) Select "Visual Effects'
To reverse the image horizontally, select [Flip Horizontal].
To reverse the image vertically, select [Flip Vertical].
(3) Click the [OK] button.
3-39
Contents
PRINTER
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION
ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF
THE IMAGE (Image Adjustment)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
The brightness and contrast can be adjusted in the print settings when printing a photo or other image. These settings
can be used for simple corrections when you do not have image editing software installed on your computer.
Windows
(This function is not available when using the PCL5e printer driver.)
(1)
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Click the [Image Adjustment] button.
(3) Adjust the image settings.
To adjust a setting, drag the slide bar or click the
4 or 卜 button.
3-40
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK
(Text To Black/Vector To Black)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
When printing a color image, color text and lines that are
faint can be printed in black. (Raster data such as bitmap
images cannot be adjusted.) This allows you to bring out
color text and lines that are faint and difficult to see.
• [Text To Black] can be selected to print all text other
than white text in black.
• [Vector To Black] can be selected to print all vector
graphics other than white lines and areas in black.
ABCD
ABCD
u
峥
B
Windows
⑴
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Select the [Text To Black] checkbox [7]
and/or the [Vector To Black] checkbox
3-41
Contents
PRINTER
■ ^
Font:
Helvetica
G Outline Text
□ On First Page Only
FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND
IMAGES
ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES
(Watermark)
Faint shadow-like text can be added to the background
of the printed image as a watermark. The size, density,
and angle of the watermark text can be adjusted. The
text can be selected from a pre-stored list, or entered to
create an original watermark.
⑴ (2)
(2) (1)
Printer: SCxxxxxx
Presets: Standard
(^Watermark
Text:
[top secret M
TOP SECRET
Size: 48 Angle: 45
(1) Click the [Watermarks] tab.
(2) Select the watermark settings.
Select a stored water mark from the pull-down menu. You
can click the [Edit] button to edit the font and select other
detailed settings.
If you wish to create a new watermark...
Enter the text of the watermark in the "Text" box and
click the [Add] button.
(1) Select [Watermarks].
(2) Click the [Watermark] checkbox and
configure watermark settings.
Detailed watermark settings can be configured such as
selection of the text and editing of the font. Adjust the size
and angle of the text by dragging the slide bar ' 、 ■
In Mac OS 9, select [Watermark] and configure the
settings.
三 @
Macintosh
Windows
s
nt
e
nt
o
c
V.
2
3-
PRINTER
PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA
(Image Stamp)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
A bitmap or JPEG image stored on your computer can
be printed over the print data. The size, position, and
angle of the image can be adjusted. This feature can be
used to "stamp" the print data with a frequently used
image or an icon of your own creation.
Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.)
(1)
(1) Click the [Watermarks] tab.
(2) Select the image stamp setting.
If an image stamp has already been stored, it can be
selected from the pull-down menu.
If you have not stored an image stamp, click the [Image
File], select the file you wish to use for the image stamp,
and click the [Add] button.
3-43
Contents
PRINTER
CREATING OVERLAYS FOR PRINT DATA (Overlays)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
The print data can be printed in a previously created
overlay. By creating table rulings or a decorative frame
in an application different from that of the text file and
registering the data as an overlay file, an attractive print
result can be easily obtained without the need for
complex manipulations.
xxxx
XXX 1 100
XXXX 10 150
XXX 0 120
XXXX 10 250
XXXX
XXX
1
100
xxxx
10
150
XXX
0
120
xxxx
10
250
し aaabbbccc 1-2-3
■
■
■
Overlay file
Windows
Create an overlay file.
⑴
⑵
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
Configure the printer driver settings from the software
application that you wish to use to create the overlay file.
(2) Click the [Edit] button.
(3) Create an overlay file.
Click the [Create Overlay] button and specify the name
and folder to be used for the overlay file that you wish to
create. The file will be created when the settings are
completed and printing is started.
• When printing is started, a confirmation message
will appear. The overlay file will not be created until
the [Yes] button is clicked.
•To register a previously existing overlay file, click
the [Load Overlay] button.
Printing with an overlay file
Main ] Pape
(1)
| .Advanced I
pecial Modes | Job Handling I Watermarks
User Settings: I Factory Defaults
[ Noimal
▼1
■ 1 No Overlay
H|
Graphics Mode:
Edit …
ill
[Vector
▼1
—
Bitmap Compression:
L
Font …
1
[ Veiy High Quality
▼1
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
Configure the printer driver settings from the application
from which you wish to print using the overlay file.
(2) Select the overlay file.
A previously created or stored overlay file can be selected
from the pull-down menu.
3-44
Contents
PRINTER
PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL
PURPOSES
PRINTING SPECIFIED PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER
(Different Paper)
• Using this function in a Windows environment
The front and back cover and specified pages of a
document can be printed on paper that is different
from the other pages. Use this function when you wish
to print the front and back cover on heavy paper， or
insert colored paper or a different paper type at
specified pages. You can also insert paper as an
insert without printing on it.
• Using this function in a Macintosh environment
The front cover and last page can be printed using
paper that is different from the other pages. This
function can be used, for example, when you want to
print only the front cover and last page on thick paper.
ク
Windows
(i)
か Difrerart P 併
Paper Selection
Paper Source:
I Bypass Tray
Paper Ty
I Plain
o Cover Page
〇 Last Page
Enter page numbers separated by commas.
Enter page ranges separated by hyphen.
For example : 3.5-10
However, inserts cannot be
[l-Sided
Information
Page
Paper Type
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(2) Select [Different Paper] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select paper insertion settings.
Select the insertion position, paper source, and printing
method from the corresponding menus. Click the [Add]
button to show the selected settings in "Information".
When you have completed the settings, click the [Save]
button in "User Settings" to save the settings.
When [Bypass T ray] is selected in "Paper Source",
be sure to select the "Paper Type" and load that
type of paper in the bypass tray.
• About paper insertion settings
When [Other Page] is selected for "Insert Position",
the insert position can be specified by directly
entering a page number. However, inserts cannot
be successively inserted at the same page. When
"Printing Method" is set to [2-Sided], the specified
page and the next page after it will be printed on the
front and reverse side of the paper, and thus an
insert setting at a page printed on the reverse side
will not be effective.
3-45
Contents
PRINTER
Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS 9, Mac OS X vl 0.4.1 1 and v10.5 to 10.5 .5.)
(1) (2)(3)
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select [Different Paper],
(3) Select cover insertion settings.
Select the print setting, paper tray, and paper type for the
cover page and last page.
In Mac OS 9, select [Different Paper] and then select
the settings for the cover page and last page.
3-46
Contents
PRINTER
ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency Inserts)
When printing on transparency film, this function helps
prevent the sheets of transparency film from sticking
together by inserting a sheet of paper between each
sheet of film. It is also possible to print the same content
on each inserted sheet of paper as is printed on the
corresponding sheet of transparency film.
Windows
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(2) Select [Transparency Inserts] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select transparency insert settings.
To print the same content on the insert as is printed on
the sheet of transparency film, select the [Printed]
checkbox . Select the paper source and type if
needed.
Set [Transparency] for the "Paper Type" of the bypass
tray.
Macintosh
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select [Transparency Inserts],
(3) Select transparency insert settings.
To print the same content on the insert as is printed on the
sheet of transparency film, select [Print] in "Transparency
Inserts". Select the paper source and type if needed.
• Set [Transparency] for the "Paper Type" of the
bypass tray.
• In Mac OS X vl 0.2.8, select the [Transparency
Inserts] checkbox ダ in [Advanced].
• In Mac OS 9, select [Transparency Inserts] and
select from the "Transparency Inserts" menu. Select
the paper source and type if needed.
3-47
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING A CARBON COPY (Carbon Copy)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
This function is used to print an additional copy of the
print image on paper that is the same size but from a
different paper tray.
For example, if carbon copy print is selected when
standard paper is loaded in tray 1 and colored paper is
loaded in tray 2, a print result similar to a carbon copy
slip can be obtained with a single selection of the print
command. As another example, if standard paper is
loaded in tray 1 and recycled paper is loaded in tray 2,
Carbon Copy can simultaneously print one copy for
presentation and one copy as a duplicate.
Windows
(i)
Main Paper
| Advance I Special Modes job Handling
I Watermarks |
User Settings: | Untitled
▼|| Save... | ( _ Defaults 一
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(2) Select [Carbon Copy] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select the carbon copy settings.
Select the tray for the "Top Copy" and then select the tray
for the carbon copy (or copies) in "Carbon Copy".
When the bypass tray is selected, be sure to select
the "Paper Type11.
3-48
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPER
(Tab Paper Print/Tab Paper Settings)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
This function is used to print text on the tabs of tab paper.
Tab Paper Print (PCL6 only)
You can print on each sheet of tab paper that you insert
in the desired page position.
Text to be printed on tabs can be entered in [Tab Paper
Print] on the [Special Modes] tab of the printer driver
properties window, and detailed settings can be
configured such as the size of the tabs, the starting
position, the distance between tabs, and the page
numbers where tab sheets will be inserted.
Tab Paper Settings
Text to be printed on tab papers can be created in a
software application, and then [Tab Paper Settings] on
the [Advanced] tab of the printer driver properties
window can be used to specify how far the text needs to
be shifted for tab printing.
Original image Printed on the tab paper
- -1
3-49
Contents
PRINTER
Windows
Tab Paper Print (PCL6 only)
Open the data that you wish to print on the tab paper and then select the settings.
(1) (2)
Paper Advance f Special Modes J >b Handling
User Settings:! Untitled
o
Watermarks
Save...
M
Defaults
Special Option
if) Normal
^ 1 Different Paper
^ • Transparency Inse
Carbon Copy
(d1 Tab Paper Print
^ Chapter Inserts
yt
Settings...
i>
Position of the First Tab:
0.24 ^ in. [0.00 .. 10.00]
Defaults
Interval:
0.24 :
Tab Width:
0.500 t
Tab Length:
2.05 4 -
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(2) Select [Tab Paper Print] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select the tab position settings.
For commercially available tab paper, you can use the
existing settings in "User Settings" such as [A4-5tab-D].
For other types of tab paper, the position of the first tab,
the distance between tabs, and the horizontal and vertical
dimensions of the tab can be directly entered or changed
using the ! button. In addition, the size of the tab paper
can be selected in "Paper Size".
(4) Select the page settings.
Specify the pages where you wish to insert tab paper and
enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs. You can
also select the font and adjust the layout.
I Letter
□ Use tab papers by sets
Text Settings
Text Alignment:
(Center
▼1
1
Font …
Page:
Text:
[〇 Rotate 180 degrees
Information
Page
• Set [Tab Paper] for the "Paper Type" of the bypass
tray.
• The tab paper settings can be stored and a stored
file opened in "User Settings".
3-50
Contents
PRINTER
Tab Paper Settings
When you have finished preparing the data to be printed on the tabs in the software application, select the following
settings:
(4) (1)
Image Shift
Width:
[0.000 .. 0.62 5]
0.000 圏 in.
millimeters
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Click the [Tab Paper Settings] button.
(3) Select the tab paper settings.
To shift the image, directly enter a number or click the
令 | button.
(4) Select the paper source and type.
Click the [Paper] tab, and select [Bypass Tray] for "Paper
Source" and [Tab Paper] for "Paper Type".
Set [Tab Paper] for the "Paper Type" of the bypass
tray.
Contents
3-51
PRINTER
TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC PAGES PRINTED
ON THE FRONT SIDE (Chapter Inserts)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
You can have specific pages printed on the front side of
the paper.
When a page (such as the first page of a chapter) is
specified as a front side page, the page will be printed on
the front side of the paper even if would normally be
printed on the reverse side (the reverse side will be left
blank and the page will be printed on the front side of the
next sheet of paper).
Example:
When pages 4 and 8 are specified as page settings.
1
2
Si
3
14
\6
8
Back is blank
Windows
(This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.)
Main Paper Advance
(1)
>b Handling ] Watermarks
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(2) Select [Chapter Inserts] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select the chapter settings.
Enter the page numbers that are to begin chapters in
"Page Settings". Click the [Add] button and your settings
will appear in "Information". When you have finished
selecting settings, click the [Save] button in "User
Settings" to save the settings.
3-52
Contents
PRINTER
FOLDING PRINTED PAPER IN HALF (Fold)
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the fold
function can be used to fold printed output in half. You
can select whether the paper is folded with the printed
side on the inside or the outside.
When printing data that is in a pamphlet layout, the
"Mult-Sheet Fold - Staple" function can be used to
conveniently fold and staple the printed output to create
a pamphlet. The "Mult-Sheet Fold - Staple" function is
available in the PCL6 printer driver.
Half Fold - Inside Half Fold - Outside Mult-Sheet Fold - Staple
(PCL6 only)
When two-sided printing is disabled in the machine's
system settings (administrator), the paper folding
function cannot be used.
Windows
(1) Click the [Special Modes] tab.
(2) Select "Fold".
Select the desired folding method from the pull-down
menu.
Macintosh
(3) (1) (2)
Printer: SCxxxxxx
Presets: Standard
Feature Set;l Paper Folding Settings
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select [Paper Folding Settings].
(3) Select the paper folding settings.
In Mac OS 9, select [Paper Folding Settings] and then
select the settings.
3-53
Contents
PRINTER
CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS
USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT
JOB (Tandem Print)
Two machines are required to use this function.
Tandem Print allows you to divide a large print job
between two machines connected to your network.
The machines simultaneously print each half of the job,
making it possible to shorten the printing time when
printing a large number of sets.
To use Tandem Print, the IP address of the slave
machine configured in "Tandem Connection Setting" in
the machine's system settings (administrator) must be
configured in the printer driver. In a Windows
environment, this can be accomplished automatically by
clicking the [Auto Configuration] button on the
[Configuration] tab of the printer driver. In a Macintosh
environment, this can be accomplished automatically by
clicking the [Tandem Settings] button.
Example: Printing 4 sets of copies
Windows
(i)
|l pedal Modes | Job Handling |
Watermarks
:[ Untitled ▼ ||
Save... ] [ Defaults
Print Mode:
Overlays
| Normal
| No Overiay ▼
Graphics Mode:
, | Edit …
[Vector
3 -
Bitmap Compression:
、 [ Font …
[Very High Quality
3 -
Image Adjustment...
Tab Paper Settings...
Compatibility
[7] Tandem Print 1
d ILJ lexr io twacK
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Select the [Tandem Print] checkbox
Tandem Print function can only be used when the
printer driver is installed using a "Standard
installation", or a "Custom installation" with "LPR
Direct Print (Specify Address/Auto Search)11 selected.
Macintosh
(This function can only be used in Mac OS X.)
(2) (1)
SCxxxxxx
Standard
| Tandem Print *|
This feature is available when LPD/LPR or Socket/HP Jet Direct is used.
| @ Tandem Print I ~ Tandem Settings.
(1) Select [Tandem Print],
(2) Select the [Tandem Print] checkbox M .
To use the tandem print function, the protocol to be
used must be selected in accordance with the
message that appears in the left screen when adding
the printer driver with the "Printer Setup Utility" ("Print
Center" in Mac OS X vl 0.2.8).
3-54
Contents
PRINTER
SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES
(Retention/Document Filing)
This function is used to store a print job as a file on the
machine's hard drive, allowing the job to be printed from
the operation panel when needed. The location for
storing a file can be selected to prevent the file from
being mixed together with files of other users.
When printing from a computer, a password (5 to 8
digits) can be set to maintain the secrecy of information
in a stored file.
When a password is set, the password must be entered
to print a stored file from the machine.
Hold Only
This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's hard drive without printing it.
Hold After Print
This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's hard drive after it is printed.
Sample Print
When a print job is sent to the machine, only the first set of copies is printed. After checking the contents of the first set
of copies, you can print the remaining sets from the operation panel of the machine. This prevents the occurrence of
excessive misprints.
To print files stored on the machine's hard drive, see "PRINTING A STORED FILE" (page 6-31) in "6. DOCUMENT
FILING".
ク
Windows
(1) (2)
User Settings : | Untitled ▼ | [
Save... ] [ Defaults
Main | Paper | Advanced | Special Mode
|「 Job Handlina 十
® Retention
Retention Settings
% Hold Only
〇 Hold /tfter Print
〇 Sample Print
® Password
Document Filing Settings
© Quick File
% Main Folder
0 Custom Folder
Stored to...
Notify Job
0 Auto Job (
Brmarks 1
User Authentication
〇 10 gin Name
□ Password
〇 User Number
〇 Job Name
nd
ntrol Review
⑶
(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab.
(2) Select the retention setting.
Click the [Retention] checkbox . Select the retention
method in "Retention Settings". To enter a password (5 to
8 digit number), click the [Password] checkbox 0.
(3) Select document filing settings.
Select the folder for storing the file in "Document Filing
Settings". If you selected [Custom Folder], click the
[Stored to] button to select the folder.
• When [Quick File] is selected, "Retention Settings"
will be set to [Hold After Print] only.
• When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered
in "Retention Settings" is cleared and cannot be used.
• To store a file in a custom folder, the custom folder
must first be created using "Document Filing Control"
in the system settings (administrator). If a password
has been established for a custom folder, enter the
"Folder Password" in the folder selection screen.
• In an IPV6 environment, files can only be stored in
the main folder.
3-55
Contents
PRINTER
Macintosh
(2) (1)
⑶
(1) Select [Job Handling].
(2) Select the retention setting.
Click the [Retention] checkbox . Select the retention
method in "Retention Settings". To simplify operation the
next time the same password is set, click the (lock)
button after entering the password (5 to 8 digit number).
(3) Select document filing settings.
Select the folder for storing the file in "Document Filing
Settings". If you selected [Custom Folder], click the
[Stored to] button to select the folder.
/^v • When [Quick File] is selected, "Retention Settings"
will be set to [Hold After Print] only.
• When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered
in "Retention Settings" is cleared and cannot be
used.
• To store a file in a custom folder, the custom folder
must first be created using "Document Filing
Control" in the system settings (administrator). If a
password has been established for a custom folder,
enter the "Folder Password" in the folder selection
screen.
• In Mac OS X vl 0.5 to 1 0.5.5, if you wish to store
document filing settings in a custom folder, click the
[Custom Folder] tab.
• In Mac OS 9, select [Job Handling] and then select
the retention setting. (The document filing function
cannot be used.)
Automatically print all stored data
When user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator), all retained (stored) print jobs of a user who
logs in can be printed automatically after log in.
After all jobs are printed, the files are deleted.
To use the print all function, the following steps are necessary:
• "Automatically print stored jobs after login" must be enabled in the system settings (administrator) of the machine.
• At the time of retention print, in addition to user authentication information, the user name stored in the machine
must be entered in "User Name" of the job ID in the printer driver.
隊 Windows: PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED (page 3-8)
暖 Macintosh: PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED (page 3-21)
(1) Log into the machine.
Enter your user number or login name and password in the user authentication screen of the machine.
(2) Perform print all.
A confirmation prompt will appear. Touch the [OK] key. The print files stored in the quick file folder, main folder, and custom
folder will be printed automatically and then deleted.
Files with a password and files that are protected by the document filing function of the machine will not be printed. Files in a
folder (excluding My Folder) that has a password will also not be printed.
@lf you do not wish to "print all"...
Touch the [Cancel] key in step (2).
3-56
Contents
PRINTER
PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER
DRIVER
When you do not have the printer driver installed on your computer, or when the software application used to open a file
that you wish to print is not available, you can print directly to the machine without using the printer driver.
The file types (and corresponding extensions) that can be printed directly are shown below.
File Type
TIFF
JPEG
PCL
PDF/
Encrypted
PDF
PS
XPS
Extension
tiff, tif
jpeg, jpg,
jpe, jfif
pel
pdf
ps
xps
•To print PDF and PS files, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed.
• To print XPS files, the XPS expansion kit must be installed.
• Depending on the file type, it may not be possible to print some files in the above table.
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE
A file on an FTP server, in a network folder or in a USB memory device connected to the machine can be selected and
printed from the operation panel of the machine without using the printer driver.
Contents
3-57
PRINTER
Touch the key of the FTP server that you
wish to access.
Server 1
[File or Folder Name
4|
[ g | File-01. tiff ハ
f CD | FolderOl ^ ^
丄
1 • l
〇 File-02. tiff
- 1 1
[ 0 | File-03. tiff
IS
[ □ | Folder02
( |E) | File-04. tiff
1 L±J
( File-05. tiff
Touch the key of the file that you wish to
print.
• The 0 icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
printed.
• The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders on the
FTP server. To display the files and folders in a folder, touch
the key of the folder.
A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
Touch the t 1 key to move up one folder level.
When you move down a folder level by touching a folder key, the 1 1 key appears in the top right corner of the
screen. Touch this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.
Touch the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
3-58
Contents
DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP SERVER
When an FTP server is configured in the machine's Web pages, you can specify and print a file on the FTP server from
the operation panel of the machine. This saves you the trouble of downloading the file and printing it from a computer.
For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the Quick Start Guide.
To configure FTP server settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Setting for Print from the MFP(FTP)] in the Web page
menu. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 20 FTP servers can be configured.
(1) (2)
1
| €) CQ£I_ J IP imGE SEND |@
H
External Data Access
Access the FTP server.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
(3) Touch the [FTP] key.
The [FTP] key cannot be touched when any FTP server
has not been configured.
It
1 l> 二 l> ] 一
PRINTER
Print [ Cancel
File-01. tiff
Paper Select
1 2 -Sided j
[ Quick File ]
Number of Prints
(1-999)
QQ
1
- T ― !
v/j 'Fit To Page
Print
—— I —— J
(1) (2)
Print the selected file.
(1) Select print conditions.
If you selected a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) in step 3 that
includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
(2) Touch the [Print] key.
Printing begins. When the message appears in the touch
panel, touch the [OK] key.
When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
隊 PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-69)
DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORY
A file in a USB memory device connected to the machine can be printed from the operation panel of the machine without
using the printer driver. When the printer driver of the machine is not installed on your computer, you can copy a file into
a commercially available USB memory device and connect the device to the machine to print the file directly.
3-59
Contents
PRINTER
Access the USB memory device.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
(3) Touch the [USB Memory] key.
System Settings(Administrator) : Disabling of USB Memory Direct Print
This setting is used to disable printing of files in a USB memory.
When this setting is enabled, [USB Memory] key cannot be touched.
Touch the key of the file that you wish to
print.
• The 0 icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
printed.
• The i i icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the
USB memory. To display the files and folders in a folder,
touch the key of the folder.
•A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
• Touch the t 1 key to move up one folder level.
• When you move down a folder level by touching a folder key, the | ^ I key appears in the top right corner of the
screen. Touch this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.
• Touch the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
Print
Cancel
: File-01. tiff
Paper Select
( 2-Sided J
Number of Prints
(1-999)
aa
1
T
ゾ | 'Fit To Page
f Quick File ]
Print
—— I —— j
(1) (2)
Print the selected file.
(1) Select print conditions.
If you selected a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) in step 3 that
includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
(2) Touch the [Print] key-
printing begins after the selected file is transferred. When
the message appears in the touch panel, touch the [OK]
key.
@To cancel printing...
To cancel printing while the file is being transferred, touch the [Cancel] key in the message screen that appears in the
touch panel.
3-60
Contents
PRINTER
Remove the USB memory device from
the machine.
When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
隊 PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-69)
DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A NETWORK FOLDER
You can use the machine's operation panel to select and print a file on a server or in a shared folder of an individual's
computer on the same network as the machine.
Access the network.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
(3) Touch the [Network Folder] key.
System Settings(Administrator) : Disabling of Network Folder Direct Print
This setting is used to disable printing of files in a network folder.
When this setting is enabled, [Network Folder] key cannot be touched.
3-61
Contents
PRINTER
Access the network folder.
(1) Touch the key of the workgroup that you
wish to access.
(2) Touch the key of the server or computer
that you wish to access.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name
and password, check with your server administrator and
enter the appropriate user name and password.
(3) Touch the key of the network folder.
• You can touch the [Search] key and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup, server, or network folder. For the
procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT11 (page 1-70) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
• Up to 100 workgroups, 100 servers, and 100 network folders can be displayed.
• Touch the ft ) key to move up one folder level.
•To return to the workgroup selection screen, touch the ^ J key.
•To change the sorting order of the displayed keys, touch the key that shows Ao f in each screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
• To go to a particular page, touch the Q key that shows the current page number and enter the desired page
number.
3-62
Contents
PRINTER
Touch the key of the file that you wish to
print.
• The 0 icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
printed.
• The □ icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the
network folder. To display the files and folders in a folder,
touch the key of the folder.
•A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
• Touch the ft ) key to move up one folder level.
•To return to the network folder selection screen, touch the ^ j key.
• Touch the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
Print the selected file.
(1) Select print conditions.
If you selected a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) in step 3 that
includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
(2) Touch the [Print] key.
Printing begins after the selected file is transferred. When
the message appears in the touch panel, touch the [OK]
key.
When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
隊 PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-69)
3-63
Contents
]
PRINTER
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER
Settings can be configured in the Web pages of the machine to enable direct printing from a computer without using the
printer driver. For the procedure for accessing the Web pages， see the Quick Start Guide.
SUBMIT PRINT JOB
You can specify a file to be printed directly without using the printer driver.
In addition to a file on your computer, this procedure can be used to print any file that can be accessed from your
computer, such as a file on another computer connected to the same network.
To directly print a file on a computer, click [Document Operations] and then [Submit Print Job] in the Web page menu.
FTP PRINT
You can print a file from your computer by simply dragging and dropping the file onto the FTP server of the machine.
• Configuring settings
To enable FTP Print, click [Application Settings] and then [Setting for Print from the PC] in the Web page menu, and
configure the port number. (Administrator rights are required.)
• Performing FTP Print
Type "ftp://11 and then the IP address of the machine in the address bar of your computer's Web browser as shown
below.
(Example)
ftp:// 192.168 .1.28
Drag and drop the file that you wish to print onto the "Ip" folder that appears in your Web browser. The file will
automatically begin printing.
•If you printed a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) that includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
• When user authentication is enabled in the system settings (administrator) of the machine, the print function may be
restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.
3-64
Contents
PRINTER
E-MAIL PRINT
An e-mail account can be configured in the machine to have the machine periodically check your mail server and
automatically print received e-mail attachments without using the printer driver.
• Configuring settings
To use E-mail Print, you must first configure an e-mail account in the machine. To configure an account, click
[Application Settings] and then [E-mail Print Settings] in the Web page menu. (Administrator rights are required.) For
the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the Quick Start Guide.
• Using E-mail Print
To print a file using E-mail Print, use your e-mail program on your computer to send the file as an attachment to the
machine's e-mail address.
Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print format.
Commands are entered in the format "command name = value".
As an example, the control commands include the following:
*1 Only effective when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed.
*2 Only effective when a punch module is installed on a finisher or saddle stitch finisher.
*3 Can be omitted except when authentication is by user number.
Example
COPIES=2
DUPLEX 二 LEFT
ACCOUNTNUMBER 二 11111
PAPER 二 LETTER
Function
Command name
Values
Copies
COPIES
1-999
Staples*1
STAPLEOPTION
NONE, ONE, TWO, SADDLE
Punch*2
PUNCH
OFF, ON
Output
COLLATE
OFF, ON
2-sided print
DUPLEX
OFF, TOP, LEFT, RIGHT
Account
number*3
ACCOUNTNUMBER
Number (5 to 8 digits)
File type
LANGUAGE
PCL, PCLXL, POSTSCRIPT, PDF, TIFF,
JPG, XPS
Paper
PAPER
Name of available paper (LETTER, A4, etc.)
Document Filing
FILE
OFF, ON
FOLDERNAME
Maximum of 28 characters
Quick File
QUICKFILE
OFF, ON
Output tray
OUTTRAY
CENTER, RIGHT, FINISHER
Fit to page
FITIMAGET 〇 PAGE
OFF, ON
• Enter the commands in Plain Text format. If entered in Rich Text format (HTML), the commands will have no effect.
•To receive a list of the control commands, enter the command "Config" in the e-mail message.
•If nothing is entered in the body text (message) of the e-mail, printing will take place according to the "Printer Default
Settings" in the system settings. If you printed a file (PCL, PS, or XPS) that includes print settings, the settings will be
applied.
• Only enter a "File type" when you are specifying a page-description language. Normally there is no need to enter a file
type.
3-65
Contents
PRINTER
CHECKING THE PRINT STATUS
JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
JOB STATUS
昼 Print Job | Scan to [ Pax Job J" 培 Internet Fax J
Job Queue
Sets /
Progress
Status
1
2 (〇
copy
002
/ 000
Waiting
3 ru
ICopy
020
/ 000
Waiting
、な
0312345678
001
/ 000
Waiting
S'
f Stop/Delete l
The job status display (A) is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the
job status screen. You can check the first four print jobs in the print queue (the job in progress and reserved jobs) in the job
status display (B).
Contents
3-66
PRINTER
Use these tabs to select the mode that is shown in the
job status screen.
The status of print jobs can be checked by touching the
[Print Job] tab.
(2) Job status screen selector key
Touch this key to switch through the job queue screen,
the completed jobs screen, and the spool screen.
(3) Job list (spool screen)
Spooled print jobs and encrypted PDF print jobs that
require a password to be entered are displayed.
(4) Job list (job queue screen)
Jobs waiting to be printed appear in the job queue as
keys. The jobs are printed in order from the top of the
queue. Each job key shows information on the job and
the current status of the job.
(5) [Detail] key (job queue screen)
Touch this key to display detailed information on a job.
1
Computer02
11
00
04/01
001/001
OK
2
Computer 03
10
33
04/01
010/010
OK
3
皆
Computer 04
10
31
04/01
013/013
OK
I4
%
file-01
10
30
04/01
010/010
OK
L
%
copy
10
13
04/01
001/001
OK
6
m
Copy
10
03
04/01
001/001
OK
7
安
Computer 05
10
01
04/01
003/003
OK
8
%
Copy
10
00
04/01
010/010
OK
a
ai:=
(8)
(9)
卜 (10)
(6) [Priority] key
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.
(7) [Stop/Delete] key
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.
(8) Job list (completed jobs screen)
This shows up to 99 completed jobs. The result (status)
of each completed job is shown.
(9) [Detail] key (completed jobs screen)
When a job is shown as a key in the job list, the [Detail]
key can be touched to show detailed information on the
job.
(10) [Call] key
Touch this key to retrieve and use a print job stored using
the document filing function.
Contents
Mode select tabs
SPOOL SCREEN/JOB QUEUE SCREEN/COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of the job queue screen that shows copy and print jobs waiting to be printed and the job
currently in progress, the completed job screen that shows jobs that have been completed, and the spool screen that
shows print jobs that have been spooled and encrypted PDF jobs that are waiting for a password to be entered.
⑴ f Print Job Scan to ] Fax Job ] 贷 Internet PajcjJ
2 S1
Computer02
020 /
Spooling
3
Computer 03
Spooling
• 4 ^
Computer 04
— /
Spooling
卜
Computer 05
002 / ―
Encrypt PDF
Job Queue
1 Complete • ■ (2)
3
a
rr
^Internet Fax I
j 益 Print Jo bl Q1 Scan to | tP Fax Job j internet Fax|
Spool
Job Queue
\17 \—/
5 6 7
/V /V Av
1 l> ls
3-67
PRINTER
Job key display
Each job key shows the position of the job in the job queue and the current status of the job.
W
(1) (2)
IcomputerOl
]^〇 2，1000"
Waiting
(4) (5)
(1) Indicates the number (position) of the job in the job
queue.
When the job currently being printed is finished, the job
moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.
(2) Mode icon
The ^ icon appears when the job is a print job.
(3) User name
The computer login name of the user will appear in the
print job.
A "User Name" can be entered in the printer driver to
display the name of the user who executed the job.
(4) Number of sets entered
This shows the number of sets specified.
(5) Number of completed sets
This shows the number of sets completed. "000" appears
while the job is waiting in the job queue.
(6) Status
Shows the job status.
Message
Status
"Printing11
Printing is in progress.
"Waiting11
The job is waiting to be executed.
"Toner
Empty"
The toner cartridge is out of toner.
Replace the toner cartridge with a
new cartridge.
"Paper
Empty"
The paper used for the job has run
out. Add paper or change to a
different paper tray.
■■Limit"
The printing page limit has been
exceeded. Check with the
administrator of the machine.
"Error11
An error occurred while the job was
being executed. Clear the error
condition.
"Rendering"
Analyzing print data.
"Spooling"
Print data is being received or a job is
waiting for analysis after being
spooled.
"Encrypt
PDF11
Upon analysis, if a spooled job is
found to be an encrypted PDF, it
changes to the password entry wait
state.
3-68
Contents
PRINTER
(i)
J ^ Print Job J
Scan to T fP Fax Job Inte
Job Queue
Sets / Progress
Status
[ 2 ^ Computer 02
020 / ---
Spooling
f 3 ^ Computer 03
— / 一
Spooling
[ 4 1^ Computer04
一./ 一
Spooling
f 5 Computer 05
002 /
Encrypt PDF
J
Enter the password?
][
Touch the [Yes] key.
A text entry screen appears. Enter the password (32 characters
or less) and touch the [OK] key. The print job is released and
moved to the [Job Queue].
When both a master password and a user password (which is used to open the file) have been set, enter the master
password.
^ :
To print an encrypted PDF file using the printer driver, enter the password when opening the file on your computer.
Printing is not possible if you do not know the password for an encrypted PDF file. To delete a spooled print job, touch the
[No] key in the screen of step 3 and touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
Encrypted PDF versions that can be directly printed are 1 .6 (Adobe® Acrobat® 7.0) and earlier.
3-69
Contents
Select the encrypted PDF print job.
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab,
(2) Change the print job status mode to
[Spool].
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
(3) Touch the print job key of the PDF file that
has the password.
PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE
Encrypted PDF is used to protect a PDF file by requiring the entry of a password to print or edit the file. To directly print
an encrypted PDF file on an FTP server or in a USB memory device, etc. connected to the machine, follow the steps
below to enter the password and begin printing.
The PS3 expansion kit is required to use this function.
JOB STATUS
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
PRINTER
(3) (4)
Give the desired job priority.
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Queue].
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
(3) Touch the key of the print job to which you
want to give priority,
(4) Touch the [Priority] key.
The job being printed stops and the job selected in (3) is
printed.
(1)
Print Job I Scan Fax Job ]^Int e:
Sets / Progress Status
M
Computer 01
020 / 001
Printing
)
m
(3 な.
0312345678
002/000
Waiting
□
[4 ¢1
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
j
[5 の
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
j
( 6
Copy
002/000
Waiting
□
|7 CD
Copy
002/000
Waiting
j
(8 ¢1
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
j
J
To check print information on the selected job, touch the [Detail] key.
3-70
Contents
GIVING A PRINT JOB
PRIORITY/CANCELING A PRINT JOB
GIVING A PRINT JOB PRIORITY
When the machine is busy copying or printing a received fax or other job, you can give priority to a print job that is
waiting to be printed and print it ahead of the other jobs.
JOB STATUS
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
t Fax]
1 Co
l ョ
Spool
mplete
1
a
rrii d
etail |
L±J ' —
Pr
1 (stoi
iority j
^/Delete j
PRINTER
Cancel the job.
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab,
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Spool]
or [Job Queue].
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
(3) Touch the key of the print job that you wish
to cancel.
(4) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
(5) A message appears to confirm the
cancelation. Touch the [Yes] key.
A Delete the job?
療 Computer02
No 卜 Yes
-
The selected job key is deleted and printing is canceled.
©
It is also possible to cancel printing with the [STOP] key ((§)) on the operation panel. When the [STOP] key ((§)) is
pressed, a message will appear asking you if you want to cancel the job.
If you do not want to cancel the selected print job...
Touch the [No] key in step (5).
3-71
Contents
CANCELING A PRINT JOB
A job being printed, a job waiting to be printed, or a spooled job can be canceled.
JOB STATUS
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
「1 ^1
1 &
s a
onn a nn
(4)
(3)
PRINTER
CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND
PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT
If printing stops because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded
in the machine, a message will appear in the touch panel. Printing will begin automatically when the [OK] key is touched
and paper is loaded in the machine. If you wish to print on paper in another tray because the desired size of paper is not
immediately available, follow the steps below.
JOB STATUS
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
Display details on the print job for which
there is no paper.
(1) Touch the key of the job for which "Paper
Empty" appeared.
(2) Touch the [Detail] key.
Touch the [Paper Select] key.
Detail i OK
^Computer 01 020 / 001 Paper Empty
Touch the key of the tray that has the
paper you wish to use.
Printing begins.
If you changed to a different paper size, printing may not take place correctly; for example part of the text or image may run
off the paper.
3-72
Contents
PRINTER
APPENDIX
PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATION LIST
Function
PCL6
PCL5e
PS
Windows
PPD*1
Macintosh
PPD*1
Frequently used
functions
Copies
1-999
1-999
1-999
1-999
1-999
Orientation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N-Up
Numberof
pages
2,4,6,8,9,16
2,4,6,8,9,16
2,4, 6, 8, 9,16
2,4,6,9,16*2.3
2,4,6,9,16
Order
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
Border
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
Yes
Selectable
2-Sided Print
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fit To Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes*4
Binding Edge
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
No
Yes
Staple*5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Punch*5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Paper
Paper Size
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Custom Paper
8 size
8 size
8 size
Yes*2
Yes
Paper Selection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Output tray
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Convenient
printer functions
Pamphlet/Pamphlet
Staple^
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Margin Shift
0 inch to
1.2 inch
0 inch to
1.2 inch
0 inch to
1.2 inch
Yes
Yes
Poster Printing
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Rotate 180 degrees
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Zoom/XY-Zoom
Yes*7
Yes*7
Yes
Yes*7
Yes*7
Line Width Settings
Yes
No
No
No
No
Mirror Image
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes*8
Special
functions
Different Paper
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes*9, 10
Transparency Inserts
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Carbon Copy
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Tab Printing
Yes
Yes
Yes*11
No
No
Chapter Inserts
Yes
No
No
No
No
Fold*6
Half Fold/
Mult-Sheet Fold
Half Fold
Half Fold
Half Fold
Half Fold
Tandem Print
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes” 2
Retention
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Document Filing
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes” 2
3-73
Contents
PRINTER
Function
PCL6
PCL5e
PS
Windows
PPD*i
Macintosh
PPD*i
Image adjusting
function
Image Adjustment
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Text To Black/
Vector To Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Functions to
combine text
and images
Watermark
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Image Stamp
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Overlay
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Image Quality
Print Mode
Normal/Fine
No
Normal/Fine
Normal/Fine
Normal/Fine
Graphics Mode
Selection
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Toner Save*13
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Font
Resident font
80 fonts
80 fonts
136 fonts
136 fonts*14
35 fonts
Selectable download
font
bitmap,
TrueType,
Graphics
bitmap,
TrueType,
Graphics
bitmap,
TrueType,
Typel
bitmap,
TrueType,
Typel
No*i5
Other functions
Auto Configuration
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes*16
User Authentication
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
*1 The specifications of each function in Windows PPD and Macintosh PPD vary depending on the operating system
version and the software application.
*2 Cannot be used in Windows NT 4.0.
*3 Only 2-Up and 4-Up printing can be used in Windows 98.
*4 Only Mac OS X vl 0.4.1 1 and v10.5 to 10.5.5 can be used.
*5 Can be used when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed. (To use the punch function, a punch module must
be also installed.)
*6 Can be used when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
*7 The horizontal and vertical proportion cannot be set separately.
*8 Only Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2 can be used.
*9 Only covers can be inserted.
*10 Cannot be used in Mac OS X vl 0.2.8 or vl 0.3.9.
*11 Only the amount of the shift of the text string data created in the software application can be set.
*12 Cannot be used in Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2.
*13 This setting may not operate in some software applications and operating systems.
*14 The number of available resident fonts is 35 in Windows NT 4.0.
*15 True Type and Typel can be selected in some versions of LaserWriter.
*16 Cannot be used in Mac OS X vl 0.2.8.
3-74
Contents
CHAPTER 4
FACSIMILE
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX
PREPARATIONS FOR FAX . 4-4
• CONNECTION TO THE TELEPHONE
LINE . 4-4
• SETTING THE TELEPHONE LINE TYPE . 4-5
• MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH
IS IN THE "ON" POSITION . 4-5
• CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME . 4-6
• STORING THE SENDER FAX NUMBER . 4-6
BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE . 4-7
• BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE . 4-8
• ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN . 4-10
• CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF
ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN THE ADDRESS
BOOK SCREEN . 4-11
FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE . 4-13
ENTERING DESTINATIONS
ENTERING A FAX NUMBER WITH THE
NUMERIC KEYS . 4-16
RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK . 4-17
• RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION ■… 4-18
• CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED
DESTINATIONS . 4-19
USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION . 4-20
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK . 4-21
USING THE RESEND FUNCTION . 4-23
CHAIN DIALING . 4-24
BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS
TRANSMISSION METHODS . 4-25
• PLACEMENT ORIENTATION OF THE
ORIGINAL . 4-27
• AUTOMATIC REDUCTION OF THE
TRANSMITTED IMAGE . 4-27
• TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES . 4-28
• THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL . 4-28
• WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY . 4-29
• WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR
OCCURS . 4-29
• FAX DESTINATION CONFIRMATION
MODE . 4-30
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION . 4-31
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT
TRANSMISSION MODE . 4-32
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR
TRANSMISSION . 4-34
• USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO
SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION
MODE . 4-36
TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER . 4-38
SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission) _ 4-39
SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-Fax) . 4-44
IMAGE SETTINGS . 4-45
• AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH
SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided
Original) . 4-46
• SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) . 4-47
• CHANGING THE EXPOSURE . 4-54
• CHANGING THE RESOLUTION . 4-55
CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE
TRANSMITTED (Preview) . 4-56
• PREVIEW CHECK SCREEN . 4-57
4-1
FACSIMILE
FAX RECEPTION
RECEIVING FAXES . 4-58
• RECEIVING A FAX . 4-59
• RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY . 4-60
PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print) . 4-61
CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING … 4-62
•IMAGE CHECK SCREEN . 4-63
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES (Fax Data
Forward) . 4-64
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A
NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing
Settings) . 4-65
• CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING
SETTINGS . 4-65
SPECIAL MODES
SPECIAL MODES . 4-69
STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program) . 4-71
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase) . 4-73
TRANSMITTING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO
SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan) . 4-75
SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer) . 4-77
SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE
(2in1) . 4-79
SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A
SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) . 4-82
SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES
(Job Build) . 4-85
TRANSMITTING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original) . 4-87
FAXING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode). ■ . 4-89
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE
TRANSMISSION (Original Count) . 4-91
STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (Verif.
Stamp) . 4-93
CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction
Report) . 4-95
ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO
FAXES (Own number sending) . 4-97
• TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE
SENDER INFORMATION (Own Name
Select) . 4-98
CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING
RECEPTION (Polling) . 4-99
• INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION
MANUALLY . 4-101
SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER
MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE (Polling
Memory) . 4-102
• RESTRICTING POLLING ACCESS
(Polling security) . 4-102
• SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO
POLLING MEMORY . 4-103
• CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE
PUBLIC BOX . 4-105
• DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE
PUBLIC BOX . 4-106
PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION
F-CODE COMMUNICATION . 4-107
• HOW F-CODES WORK . 4-107
• CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE
MACHINE FOR F-CODE
COMMUNICATION . 4-108
• F-CODE DIALING . 4-108
CONFIDENTIAL COMMUNICATION USING
F-CODES . 4-109
• F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL
TRANSMISSION . 4-110
• CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION .... 4-111
POLLING RECEPTION USING F-CODES . 4-113
POLLING MEMORY TRANSMISSION USING
F-CODES . 4-115
• SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A
MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE POLLING
TRANSMISSION . 4-115
• CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE
F-CODE MEMORY POLLING BOX . 4-118
• DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR
F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION . 4-119
RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING
F-CODES . 4-120
RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION
USING F-CODES . 4-122
4-2
USING AN EXTENSION PHONE
CONNECTING AND USING AN EXISTING
PHONE (Extension Phone Connection) . 4-123
• RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING
A CALL ON THE EXTENSION PHONE
(Remote Reception) . 4-124
• MAKING AND RECEIVING PHONE
CALLS . 4-124
CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS
JOB STATUS SCREEN . 4-125
• JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN . 4-126
• OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB
QUEUE IS COMPLETED . 4-129
• CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE
JOB IN PROGRESS . 4-130
• CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS . 4-131
CANCELING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A
RESERVED FAX . 4-132
GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX
JOB . 4-133
CHECKING THE ACTIVITY LOG (Image
Sending Activity Report) . 4-134
• IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT . 4-134
• INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE
RESULT COLUMN . 4-135
4-3
FACSIMILE
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
FAX
This section provides information that you should know before using the machine as a fax machine.
PREPARATIONS FOR FAX
To use the machine as a fax, the telephone line must be connected and the type of line set.
CONNECTION TO THE TELEPHONE LINE
Be sure to use the provided telephone line cord to connect the machine to the wall telephone jack. Connect the end of
the line cord that has the core to the "LINE" jack on the machine. Insert the other end (the end without the core) into a
telephone line jack.
"LINE" jack
Insert the end of the cord with the
core into the "LINE" jack.
4-4
Contents
FACSIMILE
Main power indicator
@
击
⑩
©
Main power switch
[POWER SAVE] key/indicator
4-5
Contents
SETTING THE TELEPHONE LINE TYPE
The machine's dial mode setting must be set to the type of telephone line you are using.
If the setting is not correct, dialing will not be possible.
Touch the [Auto Select] key in "Dial Mode Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The machine will automatically
set the dial mode to the type of line you are using.
You can also set the "Dial Mode Setting" manually.
\^\ After setting the dial mode, do not change the setting unless you have a specific reason for changing it.
MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH IS IN THE
"ON" POSITION
When the main power indicator on the operation panel is lit, the main power is on.
If the main power indicator light is not lit, the main power is "off". Switch the main power switch to the "on" position and
press the [POWER] key (©) on the operation panel.
If the fax function will be used, and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, always keep the
main power switch in the "on" position.
When the [POWER SAVE] key ((§)) indicator light is blinking, the machine is in auto power shut-off mode. If the [POWER
SAVE] key ((§)) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will turn off and the machine will return to the ready
state after a brief interval.
© @
^ J ^ M s j ( 0 j
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME
Verify that the correct date and time are set in the machine.
The date and time are set in the system settings of the machine. When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the
system settings menu screen appears on the touch panel. Select [Default Settings], [Clock], and [Clock Adjust], and set
the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
If "Disabling of Clock Adjustment" has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the date and time cannot be set.
STORING THE SENDER FAX NUMBER
Store the user name and fax number in "Sender Data Registration".
Be sure to configure this information, as it is required for communication.
System Settings (Administrator): Sender Data Registration
Use this setting to program the sender name and sender fax number.
4-6
Contents
FACSIMILE
BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE
To use the fax function, select settings and operations in the base screen of fax mode. To display the base screen of fax
mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key and then touch the [Fax] tab.
This screen only appears
when the fax function and
Internet fax function have
been installed.
The contents of the screen
will vary depending on the
devices that are installed.
Each of the other modes that can be displayed by touching the [IMAGE SEND] key (scan, Internet fax, USB memory,
PC scan and data entry modes) also have base screens.
Transmission destinations can be stored in one-touch keys in the address book and retrieved from the address book
screen when you need to use them. The address book is shared by fax mode, scan mode, Internet fax mode and data
entry mode.
To display the address book screen, touch the [Address Book] key in the base screen. To display the base screen, touch
the [Condition Settings] key in the address book screen. This chapter refers to the base screen of fax mode as the "base
screen".
Base screen of fax mode
Address book screen
1
(
I
1
(
1
5 ► EE ► 15 )
[eTto 1W (Sec )
^ Condition
tings
[AAA AAA 印] fBBB BBB □ 1 1
AddqJ '^iew
，む〒:^^ 變 [DDD DDD Z
Address Entry
[eEE EEE [FFF FFF ^) | ^ |
Global
Address Search
fGGG GGG fHHH HHH f |
Sub Address j
L _ J
[hi. hi Kt\ fjjj jjj %]
Sort Address
Freq. j| ABCD J| EFGH J| IJKL J| MNOP J| QRSTU J| VWXYZ J| etc .
Preview
1^3^ 女' Auto Reception
Fax Memory： 100%
The procedures in this chapter begin from the base screen of fax mode.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
• Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
• Address book screen
4-7
Contents
FACSIMILE
(14) (15) (16)
(1) Mode select keys (7)
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
To switch to fax mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key.
(2) This shows various messages and the destinations (8)
that have been entered.
The 聞 icon on the left indicates fax mode.
(3) Send mode tabs
Use these keys to change the mode of the image send
function. ⑼
Tabs of modes that cannot be used because the
appropriate options are not installed do not appear.
If the [Fax] tab does not appear, touch the 国 ♦ •• • 1
tab to move the screen.
隊 BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE (page 4-7)
(4) [Address Book] key
Touch this key to dial using a one-touch key or group
key. When the key is touched, the address book screen
appears.
瞭 RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK (page 4-17)
(5) [Direct TX] key
Touch this key to send a fax by direct transmission.
When the [Direct TX] key is not highlighted, normal
transmission (memory TX mode) is selected.
隊 To fax a large number of sheet originals, use the
automatic document feeder, (page 4-25)
隊 If you wish to send a fax ahead of other previously
reserved fax transmissions, use direct transmission
mode, (page 4-26)
(6) [Sub Address] key
Touch this key to enter a sub-address and passcode for
F-code transmission.
隊 F-CODE DIALING (page 4-108)
Customized keys
The keys that appear here can be changed to show
settings or functions that you prefer.
隊 Customizing displayed keys (page 4-9)
[Preview] key
Touch to check the image that will be sent in the touch
panel before transmission.
隊 CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED
(Preview) (page 4-56)
[Speaker] key / [Pause] key / [Space] key
Touch this key to dial using the speaker.
When entering a fax number to be dialed, the key
changes to the [Pause] key. When entering a
sub-address, the key changes to the [Space] key.
瞭 TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER (page 4-38)
(10) [Resend] key / [Next Address] key
Touch this key to redial a fax number. When entering a fax
number to be dialed, this key changes to the [Next Address] key.
暖 USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 4-23)
(11) Image settings
Image settings (original size, exposure, resolution) can
be selected.
暖 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
(12) 回 key
This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided scanning is
selected. Touch the key to display the selected special modes.
瞭 Checking what special modes are selected (page 4-9)
(13) [Special Modes] key
Touch this key to use a special mode.
暖 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
(14) 团 key
Touch this key to dial a fax destination using a search
number.
隊 USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 4-20)
Contents
BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE
This screen is used to select settings and operations in fax mode.
4-8
FACSIMILE
(15) \W\ / \j^_ / ^ key (16) This shows the currently selected fax reception
When "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" or mode and the amount of free memory remaining.
"Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the 暖 RECEIVING FAXES (page 4-58)
system settings (administrator), this will appear when a
fax is received.
[W\ : Only "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" is enabled
£1 ' : Only "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled
a3.. : Both settings are enabled
隊 PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold
Setting For Received Data Print) (page 4-61)
暖 CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING (page
4-62)
Customizing displayed keys
Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. You can assign frequently used functions to these
keys to access the functions with a single touch. To change the function that is assigned to a key, use "Customize Key
Setting" in the Web pages. The following keys appear by factory default:
• [Address Review] key
Touch this to view a list of the destinations that have been selected in the address book and the numbers that have been
directly entered with the numeric keys. This is the same key as the [Address Review] key in the address book screen.
• [File] key, [Quick File] key
Touch either key to use Quick File or File in document filing mode.
Example: When "Dual Page Scan", "Job Build", and "Mixed Size Original" are assigned to the customized keys.
Checking what special modes are selected
The key appears in the base screen when a special mode or 2-sided scanning is selected.
The \W\ key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.
Function Review
纏 « 1
Erase
. Edge : V2inch
* Center: Winch
Timer
. Day of the Week： Monday
' Time: 21:30
1
Mixed Size
Original
: On
B
E
The special mode settings cannot be changed from the function review screen. To change a setting, touch the [OK] key to
close the function review screen and then touch the [Special Modes] key and select the setting that you wish to change.
4-9
Contents
FACSIMILE
ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
This screen is used to select a destination from the list of stored destinations.
(10) (11)
(1)^— ?—
[qto ) [Sec j
1 1 ^ Condition
\^i) I | r Settings
, 1 i
[AAA AAA 餐] BBB BBB 衫,
2
s
a
1 r
[DDD DDD ^
[eEE EEE tt\ |fff FFF
/ハ\ 1 L Global
l り） 1 ,Address Search
[ggg ggg |hhh hhh ^
fill III fjjj 細 t
Freq. J| ABCD J| EFGH J| IJKL j MN0P J| QRSTU J| VWXYZ j| etc.J<
な ’Auto Reception
Fax Memory： 100%
■(12)
■(13)
(14)
(1) This shows the destination that has been selected.
(2) Number of displayed items selector key
Touch to change the number of destinations (one-touch
keys) displayed in the address book screen. Select 5, 10,
or 15 destinations.
(3) [Condition Settings] key
Touch this key to select transmission settings and
operations. When the key is touched, the base screen
appears.
隊 BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE (page 4-8)
(4) [Address Review] key
Touch this key to view a list of the selected destinations.
The selected destinations can be changed.
瞭 CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED
DESTINATIONS (page 4-19)
(5) [Address Entry] key
Not used in fax mode.
(6) [Global Address Search] key
When the use of an LDAP server has been enabled in
the machine's Web page, a fax number can be obtained
from a global address book.
^ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL
ADDRESS BOOK (page 4-21)
(7) [Sub Address] key
Touch this key to enter a sub-address and passcode for
F-code transmission.
暖 F-CODE DIALING (page 4-108)
(8) [Sort Address] key
Touch this key to change the index tabs to custom
indexes or to display one-touch keys by send mode.
^ CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS
IN THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN (page 4-11)
(9) [Preview] key
Touch to check the image that will be sent in the touch
panel before transmission.
隊 CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED
(Preview) (page 4-56)
(10) [To] key
Touch this key to enter a selected destination (one-touch
key).
^ RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION (page
4-18)
(11) [Cc] key
Not used in fax mode.
(12) One-touch key display
This shows the one-touch keys of the destinations that
have been stored in the address book. This chapter
refers to keys in which single destinations and groups are
stored as one touch keys. Keys that have fax numbers
stored are indicated by .
^ RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION (page
4-18)
(13) Index tabs
Touch this to change indexes.
^ RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION (page
4-18)
(14) 团 key
Touch this key to retrieve a destination using a search
number.
瞭 USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 4-20)
4-10
Contents
FACSIMILE
Touch the [Sort Address] key.
(i)
Change the display mode.
(1) Touch the key of the mode or tab that you
wish to display.
• To show only the one-touch keys of a particular send
mode, touch the desired mode key under "Address
Type11.
• To change the index tabs to the custom indexes, touch
the [User] key under "Tab Switch".
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
4-11
Contents
When using the network scanner function or the Internet fax function, a different icon will appear in the one-touch key display
(^) if a non-fax destination (address) is stored.
^ RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK (page 4-17)
©
System Settings: Address Book (page 7-16)
This is used to store fax numbers in one-touch keys.
System Settings (Administrator): The Number of Direct Address Keys Displayed Setting
This is used to change the default setting for the number of one-touch keys displayed in the address book screen.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
- Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
- Address book screen
System Settings (Administrator): Address Book Default Selection
The following settings are available for the method of sorting the addresses that appear in the address book.
- Index type (alphabetical, custom)
- Address type (all, group, E-mail, FTP/Desktop, Network Folder, Internet fax, fax)
CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN
THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
You can show only destinations of a specific transmission mode in the address book screen, or change the displayed
index tabs from the alphabetical tabs to the custom tabs. The procedure for selecting destinations does not change.
匿
1 3 0
luii
巨
7 一
i
FACSIMILE
Index display
Indexes make it easy to search for a destination (one-touch key). The destinations are displayed separately using
alphabetical search characters and index numbers. To display a stored destination, touch the appropriate index tab. It is
convenient to store frequently used destinations in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in the [Freq.]
index when you store the destination.
f 5 ► EQ ► 15 1 (eTto ] (S Cc ]
[ ^ Condition
^ Settings
r
[AAA AAA 糾 [BBB BBB 】 1
Address Review
fcttf ccc %J |ddd DDD 2
\ Address Entry
EEE EEE ^ FFF FFF 1 令 1
Global
| Address Search
[ggg ggg |hhh hhh [ = )
[ill lit fjjj JJJ
| Sort Address 1
1 Freq. J ABCD j EFGH 』 IJKL J MNOP J QRSTU 』 VWXYZ J etc.jl
Preview 1 1 ^Auto Receftion
Index tabs
The destinations can be displayed in alphabetical order by their initials.
Each time the displayed index tab is touched, the display order changes in the following order: search numbers (page
4-20), ascending names, descending names, search numbers... When the display order is changed, the display order of
the other index tabs also changes.
Ordered by search number (default) Ascending names Descending names
Index names can be changed using "Custom Index" in the system settings, allowing you to create groups of one-touch
keys that can be easily recognized.
System Settings: Custom Index (page 7-18)
This is used to store custom index names. The custom index where a one-touch key appears is specified when the
transmission destination is stored in the key.
Narrowing the search letter range
An alphabet tab on an index tab can be touched to display keys to further narrow the search range. For example, when
the [ABCD] tab is touched, keys from "A" to "D" appear. If the [B] key is touched, only destinations starting with the letter
"B" will appear. To cancel, touch the key again. Note that the search letter range cannot be narrowed on the [Freq.] tab,
the [etc.] tab, or on a user index tab.
| 5 ► EB ► 15 I (eTto ) (Sec ]
[ ^ Condition
| ^ Settings
[
[BBB AAA ^|l] f BBB BBB 1
Address Review
(BBB CCC [BBB DDD
f Address Entry
(BBB EEE (BBB FFF ^
[ Global |
| Address Search]
[BBB GGG %J 1 BBB HHH [ B |
lil
[bbb hi |bbb JJJ tj
1 Sort Address
Freq. j ABCD || EFGH || IJKL || MNOP || QRSTU J| VWXYZ J| etc . |
Preview
iHl ||一1圔—]一||
4-12
Contents
FACSIMILE
• [Address Book] key: Select a destination that is stored in
the address book or look up a
destination in a global address book.
暖 RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER
FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK
(page 4-17)
• [^} key: Use a search number to specify a destination
stored in the address book.
隊 USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION (page 4-20)
• [Resend] key: Select a fax number from the last eight
destinations used for transmission.
隊 USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page
4-23)
• Numeric keys: Enter a fax number.
瞭 ENTERING A FAX NUMBER WITH THE
NUMERIC KEYS (page 4-16)
Speaker |[ Resend
Scan
Internet Fax 1 Fax 1 USB Mem. Scan 1 PC Scan
| ►Address Book
[ Original ] Scan： J j8y2xll Send:
| Direct TX ]
[ Exposure j
\ Sub Address j
[ Resolution ] Standard
f Address Review
f Special Modes ] |
file
f Quick File
Preview j
1 r 1 1 な 1 副 :〇 Reception
■1 關 「■届 Fax Memory： 100%
Enter the destination fax number
FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
This section explains the basic procedure for sending a fax.
Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic
document feeder, or on the document glass.
♦
4-13
Contents
® ® ® @
or © ® ® ®
0 ® ® ®
FACSIMILE
Select image settings.
Select settings for the original to be faxed.
• [Original] key: Use this key to select the original size, the
original send size, and 2-sided original
scanning.
暖 SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page
4-47)， AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING
BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL
(2-Sided Original) (page 4-46)
• [Exposure] key: Use this key to adjust the exposure of the
image.
隊 CHANGING THE EXPOSURE (page
4-54)
• [Resolution] key: Use this key to adjust the resolution of the
image.
^ CHANGING THE RESOLUTION
(page 4-55)
Special mode settings
Touch the [Special Modes] key to select special modes such
as timer transmission and the erase function.
4-14
Contents
FACSIMILE
Begin transmission
Scan the original and send the fax.
If the original is placed on the document glass, follow these steps to start scanning and transmission:
When sending a fax normally (memory transmission)
(1) Press the [START] key.
(2) When scanning is finished, replace the original with the next original.
(3) Press the [START] key.
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) until all originals have been scanned.
(5) Touch the [Read-End] key.
When sending a fax in direct transmission mode
Multiple originals cannot be scanned in direct transmission mode.
Press the [START] key to start transmission.
When transmission ends, image settings and convenient special mode settings are cleared.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
The settings can be kept in effect a fixed period of time after scanning is completed.
4-15
Contents
FACSIMILE
ENTERING DESTINATIONS
This section explains how to enter destination fax numbers.
Destination fax numbers can be entered using the numeric keys, or by retrieving a previously stored fax number using
the address book or a search number.
ENTERING A FAX NUMBER WITH THE
NUMERIC KEYS
®@©
@©®
⑦®®
Enter the destination fax number with
the numeric keys.
Take care to enter the correct number.
@lf an incorrect number is entered...
Press the [CLEAR] key (©) to clear the number and then enter the correct number.
Entering a pause between digits of the number
Enter a pause after the number used to dial out from a PBX (for example, after "O"), or after the country code when
dialing an international number.
iSS |
Address Reviewl
Next Address
IE
Exposure j
Resolution I Standard
[Special Modes ^
5^1
な _ Auto Reception
Fax Memory： 100%
Touch the [Pause] key.
A hyphen is entered when the [Pause] key is touched once.
System Settings (Administrator): Pause Time Setting
This is used to set the length of pauses. The default setting is 2 seconds.
Contents
4-16
FACSIMILE
RETRIEVING A FAX NUMBER FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK
The address book screen shows stored destinations as one-touch keys.
A destination fax number is retrieved by simply touching the one-touch key of that destination. This is called "one-touch
dialing". It is also possible to store multiple fax numbers in a one-touch key， allowing you to retrieve all the numbers by
simply touching the key. This is called "group dialing". This dialing method is convenient when you wish to send a fax to
(or poll) multiple fax destinations.
When destinations of other scan modes are stored in addition to fax destinations, an icon indicating the mode appears
together with the name of the destination in each one-touch key.
Icon
Mode
Fax
Scan to E-mail
珍
Internet fax (Direct SMTP)
Scan to FTP
£
Scan to Network Folder
Scan to Desktop
Group key with multiple destinations
System Settings: Address Book (page 7-16)
This is used to store destinations (names and fax numbers) in the address book.
4-17
Contents
FACSIMILE
RETRIEVING A STORED DESTINATION
A destination fax number is retrieved by simply touching the one-touch key of that destination.
Touch the [Address Book] key.
(2)
Pause
厘 Next Address ■
(
5 ► ffil ► 15 )
(eTto
fecc ]
i_
^ Condition
1
1
I
Settings
(AAA AAA
秘] (bbb bbb
¢1 i
i.
Address Review
[DDD DDD
i.
_ , r~r~]
1
Address Entry
|fff fff
i
Global
Address Search
|ggg ggg
[hhh hhh
— ^13
1
Sub Address j
(hi lit：
fjjj jjj
1
Sort Address |
Freq. J| ABCD J| EFGH J| IJKL J| MNOP J| QRSTuJ|vWXYzJ| etc.
Preview
公 • Auto Rece|:ion
1. 旧 i Fax Memory： 1C ll
(1)
Select the destination.
(1) Touch the index tab where the destination
is stored.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
If you select an incorrect destination, touch the key again
to cancel the selection.
• Frequently used destinations can be displayed in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in the
[Freq.] index when you store the destination.
• To continue specifying other destinations...
Touch the [Next Address] key and repeat (1) and (2) of this step.
• System Settings (Administrator): Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
This setting determines whether or not the [Next Address] key can be omitted before specifying the next destination.
Factory default setting: The [Next Address] key can be omitted.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Switching of Display Order
This is used to disable switching of the order of display of the one-touch keys in the address book screen. The currently
selected display order will be the order that is used after this setting is enabled.
Contents
4-18
FACSIMILE
CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED DESTINATIONS
When multiple destinations have been entered, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a
destination (cancel selection of the destination).
[ 5 ► EE ► 15 ) IEITo I |©Cc
Preview
《Auto Reception
Fax Memory： 100%
Touch the [Address Review] key.
: Address Review
巧
10011 .ccc ccc
002 [kKK KKK
1003 [：LLL LLL
oo4 [mmm mmm
1
1005 f,NNN NNN
O 006 [000 000
] 2
10071 Wp PPP
008 1 姻 QQQ
^)0
1009 f^RR RRR
010 fsss sss
- ^ m
1011 (；TTT TTT
012 fouu UUU
El To
a cc
Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key.
©
To delete a destination...
Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to delete. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key. Touch the [Detail] key to check the specified destination type and name.
Contents
4-19
FACSIMILE
USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION
A destination stored in the address book can be retrieved using the 团 key. This can be done in the base screen of any
of the modes or in the address book screen.
Touch the Jn) key.
Scan
Internet Fax 1 Fax | USB Mem. Scan J PC Scan
\ ►Address Book
f Original j scan： Send:
[ Direct TX ]
[ Exposure j
[ Sub Address ]
[| Resolution ] Standard
f Address Review
f Special Modes ]
File
1 Quick File |
[ j な. Auto Reception
Fax Memory： 100%
Preview J
怒
Enter the 4-digit search number of the
@©®
address with the numeric keys.
⑦®®
When the 4-digit search number is entered, the stored address
is retrieved and specified as a destination.
©
• The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book.
•If you do not know the search number, print the one-touch address list using "Sending Address List" in the system
settings.
• When entering search numbers such as "0001 ■■ and "0011", "0" can be omitted. For example, to enter "0001 ", enter
"I" and touch the [^j key or the [Next Address] key.
If an incorrect search number is entered...
Press the [CLEAR] key (©) to clear the number and enter the correct number.
Contents
4-20
FACSIMILE
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK
If an LDAP server is stored in the Web pages, you can look up a destination fax number in a global address book.
(2)
[ 5 ► EE ► 15 J
Q'To ] (^Cc )
I ^ Condition
| r Settings
[aAA AAA [BBB BBB 1
Address Review
fccc ccc [ddd DDD
f Address Entry
[eee eee [fff fff 1 令 1
Global L
| Address Search 厂
[ggg ggg %] |hhh hhh f = ]
r
fill III [jjj JJJ t>)
Sort Address
Freq. J ABCD J| EFGH 』 IJKL J| MNOP J| QRSTU J| VWXYZ Jetc.
Preview
[ ^Auto Reception
1. ^ Fax Memory： 100%
Open the global address search screen.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the [Global Address Search] key.
(1) (2)
Search for the destination.
If only one LDAP server has been stored, (1) and (2) are not
necessary. Go directly to (3). If an authentication screen for the
し DAP server appears, enter your user name and password.
(1) Touch the key of the LDAP server that you
wish to use.
If an authentication screen for the し DAP server appears,
enter your user name and password.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
(3) Search for the destination in the search
screen.
Enter search characters for the destination and touch the
[Search] key. The search results will appear after a brief
interval.
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING
TEXT" (page 1-70) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE11.
How to search
Enter a maximum of 64 characters for the search characters. The system will look for names starting with the entered
letters.
An asterisk 氺 can be used as follows:
XXX 氺： Names beginning with MXXXM.
木 XXX: Names that end with MXXXM.
木 XXX 木： Names that include nXXX__.
AA 氺 XX: Names that start with MAAM and end with MXXM.
Contents
4-21
FACSIMILE
(i)
Select the destination.
(1) Touch the key of the desired destination.
If no names are found that match the search letters, a
message will appear. Touch the [OK] key to close the
message and touch the [Search Again] key to search
again.
(2) Touch the [To] key.
This enters the selected destination.
If you wish to select another destination, repeat steps (1)
and (2) above.
• If 30 or more matches are found, a message will appear in the screen. Touch the [OK] key to close the message. A
maximum of 300 search results are displayed. If the desired destination was not found, touch the [Search Again]
key to add more search letters.
• To check the information stored in a destination...
Touch the key of the destination and then touch the [Detail] key. The information stored for the selected destination
will appear. Check the information and then touch the [OK] key to return to the search results screen.
• If a screen for selecting the item to be used appears...
If the selected destination includes an E-mail address or other address in addition to the fax number or telephone
number, you will need to select which item you wish to use. Touch the [Fax] key to retrieve the fax number.
Storing a destination from a global address book in the machine's
address book
A destination from a global address book can be stored in the machine's address book as a one-touch key.
Touch the [Detail] key in the search results screen of the global address book (the screen of step 3 above) to display
information on the selected destination. Touch the [Register] key in the detailed information screen and then touch the
item to be used (the [Fax] key in this case). The following screen will appear.
Direct Address / Individual
J E-mail
□
Internet
| ノ j Fax
f Search Number
j 0001
Name ] ] AAA AAA
Initial
(
Index
j User 1
Fax No.
1 0123456789
f Key Name j AAA AAA
Mode
1 33.6 kbps/None
The information stored in the global address book is automatically entered. (The settings can be changed if needed. For
detailed information on each item, see "Address Control" (page 7-16) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS11.) However, configure
the items below manually. To complete the storing procedure, touch the [Exit] key.
• [Initial] key: Touch this key to enter the initials that determine where the destination will appear in the alphabetical
index and the order of one-touch key display. Enter up to 10 characters for the initials.
• [Index] key: Touch this key to select the custom index in which the address will appear. You can also select whether
or not the destination will be included on the [Freq.] tab of the address book.
• [Mode] key: Touch this key to configure the "Transmission Speed" and "International Correspondence Mode"
settings. These settings have already been configured, however, if the destination is an international
destination, or if you find that communication errors frequently occur when communicating with that
destination, you can try changing the settings.
4-22
Contents
FACSIMILE
USING THE RESEND FUNCTION
The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by fax, Scan to E-mail, and/or Internet fax are stored. One of these
can be selected to resend to that destination.
Touch the [Resend] key.
Resend
Cancel
fwo.01 ^AAA AAA
| |no.02 t>BBB BBB
[No.03 ^CCC CCC p.
1 |no.04 %DDD DDD
[no. 05 VEEE EE3^ * ^
| (no.06 t^FFF FFF
[no. 07 ^GGG GGG
] [no. 08 ^HHH HHH
Touch the key of the fax destination that
you wish to redial.
The last 8 transmission destinations appear.
• If numeric keys were pressed during the previous transmission, the [Resend] key may not dial the correct number.
• The fax addresses below are not stored as addresses for which resend is possible.
- A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key).
- Broadcast destinations
- Destinations transmitted to using a program
System Settings (Administrator): Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Send Mode
This prohibits use of the resend function. When this setting is enabled, the [Resend] key cannot be used in the base screen
of image send mode.
Contents
4-23
FACSIMILE
CHAIN DIALING
Number sequences entered with the numeric keys and/or one-touch keys can be linked together with pauses and dialed
as a single number.
Use chain dialing to dial a long number (such as an international number) when the country code and/or area code are
stored separately in one-touch keys.
Example: Using chain dialing to dial an international number
Number to be dialed
Entry
XXX
Using the
numeric keys
XXX
Number to access
international telephone
service
010
Country
code
Area code
Number of other
party
010
1 _
00
XX
xxxx
Using a
key
one-touch
fccc ccc
4
System Settings (Administrator): Pause Time Setting
This is used to set the length of pauses. The default setting is 2 seconds.
4-24
Contents
FACSIMILE
BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS
This section explains the basic procedures for sending a fax.
TRANSMISSION METHODS
The methods that can be used to send a fax from the machine are explained below. Select the method that best suits
your needs.
To fax a large number of sheet originals， use the automatic document feeder.
The originals will be scanned into memory and then transmitted (memory transmission).
When memory transmission is selected and multiple originals are placed in the automatic document feeder (and the line
is free), transmission will begin as soon as the first page is scanned and will take place while the remaining pages are
being scanned (Quick Online transmission).
If transmission cannot begin immediately because the line is in use, all pages will be scanned into memory and the
transmission will be reserved.
瞭 USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION (page 4-31)
When a fax transmission or reception is already in progress, the following procedure can be performed to reserve a
transmission job. To check reserved transmission jobs, display the job status screen.
暖 CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS (page 4-125)
• If memory becomes full while the first original page is being scanned, transmission will stop.
•In the following situations, the transmission will be automatically reserved (memory transmission)
- When the line is busy or a communication error occurs and automatic resending is enabled.
隊 WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY (page 4-29), WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS (page 4-29)
- The machine is already using the line to send or receive a fax.
- Another fax transmission was reserved ahead of your fax.
- One of the following functions is being used for transmission.
Broadcast transmission, F-code transmission, timer transmission, Dual Page Scan, 2in1, Card Shot, Job Build, Original
Count
- The document glass is being used (except when the speaker is being used to dial).
• Up to 94 transmission jobs can be reserved.
• When the transmission is finished, the scanned original pages are cleared from memory. However, when the document
filing function is used, the transmitted fax is stored.
System Settings (Administrator): Quick On Line Sending
This is used to disable Quick Online transmission. In this case, fax transmissions will be sent by memory transmission
(reserved and then transmitted).
4-25
Contents
FACSIMILE
To fax thick originals or pages of a book, use the document glass.
隊 USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSION (page 4-34)
When the document glass is being used for a transmission, Quick Online transmission will not operate.
If you wish to send a fax ahead of other previously reserved fax
transmissions, use direct transmission mode.
The original is transmitted directly to the receiving fax machine without being scanned into memory.
When direct transmission mode is used, transmission will begin as soon as the transmission in progress is completed
(ahead of any previously reserved transmissions).
To send a fax by direct transmission, touch the [Direct TX] key in the base screen.
^ USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE (page 4-32)
隊 USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE (page 4-36)
• When transmission in direct transmission mode ends, the mode automatically changes back to memory transmission
mode.
• When the document glass is used, multiple original pages cannot be scanned.
4-26
Contents
FACSIMILE
PLACEMENT ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL
When an 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) original is placed in vertical orientation (_ ), the image is automatically rotated 90 degrees
and transmitted in horizontal orientation (圓） (Rotation Sending). If the original is placed in horizontal orientation (画）， it
is transmitted in that orientation (_) without being rotated.
Rotated to 8-1/2" x 11MR
(A4R) orientation
Transmission
8-1/2" x11"R(A4R)
image is transmitted.
8-1/2" x 1 1 "R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A4R, B5 and A5) size originals are not rotated for transmission.
System Settings (Administrator): Rotation Sending Setting
The factory default setting is rotate before transmission. If this setting is disabled, the original will be transmitted in the
orientation in which it is placed.
AUTOMATIC REDUCTION OF THE TRANSMITTED
IMAGE
If the width of the transmitted image is larger than the width of the paper in the receiving machine, the image will be
automatically reduced to fit the receiving machine's paper width.
Example: Reduced sizes and reduction ratios
Transmitted image
Receiving machine's
Reduced size
Ratio
width
paper width
A3
B4
B4
1 : 0.84
11nx17" (A3)
8-1/2" x14M, 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x11nR(A4R)
1 : 0.71
B4
A4
A4R
1 : 0.84
System Settings (Administrator): Auto Reduction Sending Setting
The factory default setting is automatic reduction enabled. If this setting is disabled, the image will be sent at full size and part
of the image may be cut off.
4-27
Contents
FACSIMILE
TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES
The following original sizes can be transmitted.
Minimum original size
Maximum original size
Using the automatic document
feeder
5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width)
(131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width))
11-5/811 (height) x 39-3/811* (width)
(297 mm (height) x 1000 mm* (width))
Using the document glass
一
11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width)
(297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width))
*A long original can be transmitted.
THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL
When a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in "Scan" in the base
screen.
When the automatic original detection function is operating and the original is a non-standard size, the closest standard
size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the correct original size.
隊 Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.) (page 4-48)
隊 Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 4-50)
STANDARD SIZES
Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in "Original Size
Detector Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The factory default setting is "Inch-111.
List of original size detector settings
Selections
Standard sizes (detected original sizes)
Document glass
Document feeder tray
(automatic document feeder)
lnch-1
1 r x 1 7n, 8-1 /2n x 1 4"， 8-1/2" x 1 1 ", 8-1/2" x 1 1nR,
5-1/2" x8-1/2n
11n x 17M, 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x IT, 8-1 /2M x 1TR,
5-1/211 x 8-1/2", A4, A3
Inch-2
1 1 ■■ x 1 7"， 8-1/211 x 1 3" (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1 /2M x 1 1n， 8-1/2Mx 11MR, 5-1/211 x 8-1/211
1 1n x 17"， 8-1/211 x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1 /2M x 1 1 8-1/2Mx11MR, 5-1 /2Mx 8-1/211, A4, A3
Inch-3
1 1n x 17"， 8-1/2Mx 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
8-1 /2M x 1 1n, 8-1/2Mx 11MR, 5-1/211 x 8-1/211
1 1n x 17"， 8-1/211 x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
8-1/2" x 1 1 ■■， 8-1/2Mx11MR, 5-1 /2Mx 8-1/211, A4, A3
AB-1
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 1 1
8-1/2Mx14M, 11"x17"
AB-2
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm
(8-1/2Mx 13M)
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
1 1n x 17M, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13M)
AB-3
A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K， 16K, 16KR
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 8-1/2" x 11",
1 1n x 17M, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13M)
AB-4
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 340 mm
(8-1 /2M x 13-2/5")
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 1 1",
1 r x 17M, 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")
AB-5
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 343 mm
(8-1/2Mx13-1/2M)
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 1 1",
1 r x 17"， 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1 /2Mx 13-1/211)
4-28
Contents
FACSIMILE
WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY
If the line is busy when you send a fax, transmission will be re-attempted automatically after a preset interval. This
function only operates in memory transmission mode. In direct transmission mode or manual transmission mode, the
transmission will be canceled. Wait briefly and then try sending the fax again.
To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
隊 CANCELING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A RESERVED FAX (page 4-132)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Line Busy
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot be
established because the line is busy. The factory default setting is 2 attempts at an interval of 3 minutes.
WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS
If a communication error occurs or the other fax machine does not answer the call within a preset period of time,
transmission will be re-attempted automatically after a preset interval. This function only operates in memory
transmission mode.
To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
隊 CANCELING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A RESERVED FAX (page 4-132)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Communication Error
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when a transmission fails due to an error.
The factory default setting is attempt at an interval of 3 minutes.
4-29
Contents
FACSIMILE
FAX DESTINATION CONFIRMATION MODE
The fax destination confirmation mode displays a destination confirmation message when a fax transmission is
performed to prevent accidental transmission to the wrong destination. This function is enabled in the system settings
(administrator). When the function is enabled, a message will appear to confirm the destination when the [START] key is
pressed to begin fax transmission.
The message that appears will vary depending on the method used to specify the destination.
Destination specified by one-touch key/search
number
Number Confirmation
^ BBB BBB
0312345678
Cancel I i OK
Make sure that the destination indicated in the message
is correct and touch the [OK] key. Scanning will begin.
If the destination is not correct, touch the [Cancel] key
and select the destination again.
Destination specified by the numeric keys, [Resend]
key, or [Global Address Search] key
/\ Enter the number again and
press the Start key.
-
Touch the [OK] key, re-enter the destination with the
numeric keys, and press the [START] key.
If the re-entered destination is correct, scanning will
begin.
If the re-entered destination is not correct, a message
will appear. Touch the [OK] key and re-enter the
destination. If an incorrect number is entered for
confirmation 3 times in a row, the screen will revert to the
base screen.
• If the [Sub Address] key was used to enter a sub-address and passcode, the fax number must be re-entered during
confirmation. After re-entering the fax number, touch the [Sub Address] key and enter the sub-address and passcode.
•If chain dialing was used, touch the [Pause] key to enter during confirmation.
Functions that cannot be used
When the fax destination confirmation function is enabled, only one destination is allowed, and thus the following
functions cannot be used.
• Broadcast transmission to multiple destinations including fax destinations
Group keys and program keys that contain multiple fax destinations cannot be used. After one destination is specified,
keys such as another one-touch key, the [Next Address] key, the [Address Entry] key, and the [Global Address
Search] key cannot be touched.
• Transmission using the speaker key
A destination cannot be specified after the [Speaker] key is pressed.
System Settings (Administrator): Fax Dest. Confirmation Mode
This setting is used to have a destination confirmation message appear when a fax is sent.
4-30
Contents
FACSIMILE
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION
This section explains how to use the automatic document feeder to send a fax.
Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray with the edges
aligned evenly.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
When sending a multi-page fax, the automatic document feeder and the document glass cannot both be used to scan
the original pages.
(2)
f_5 > 班 卜 :15 |
1
|EfT。 I (Sec
^ Condition
| r Settings
r
1
[AAA AAA 糾 fBBB BBB i
Address Review
DDD
\ Address Entry
[eee eee [fff fff 1 ♦ J
Global
| Address Search
GGG GGG V] [HHH HHH %) ( s j
f Sub Address ]
(ill III q |JJJ JJJ
J Sort Address
Freq. J| ABCD J| EFGH J| IJKL J| MNOP J| QRSTU J| VWXYZ J| etc.J
Preview
^'Auto Reception
i. ^ Fax Memory： 100%
Enter the destination fax number.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can also
directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS11 (page 4-16).
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
When scanning is completed, the machine sounds a beep.
When scanning is completed, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can be
used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report.
• If a fax is being received when the transmission operation is performed, the transmission will be reserved and transmitted
after fax reception is completed.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop. If Quick
Online transmission is taking place, the originals that were scanned will be transmitted. If Quick Online is not enabled, the
transmission will be canceled.
System Settings (Administrator): Scan Complete Sound Setting
The scan complete sound can be selected.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
Contents
4-31
FACSIMILE
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO
SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE
Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray with the edges
aligned evenly,
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
(3) (2)
||
[
(
(
[
i
[
i
5 卜 EB 卜 15
l^fTo 1 (SCc ) 1
^ Condition J
^ Settings |
[aAA AAA ^|l] fBBB BBB 喊 ]_
Address Review
DDD
Address Entry
[EEE EEE fFFF FFF 1 令 1
Global
Address Search
[GGG GGG fHHH HHH [ s |
Sub Address j
|III III |jJJ JJJ
Sort Address
Freq. J| ABCD J| EFGH J| IJKL J| MNOP J| QRSTU J| VWXYZ Jetc.J
1
Preview
な ’Auto Reception
I. 四 Fax Memory： 100%
Enter the destination fax number.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
(3) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.
• Only one destination can be entered. A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key) cannot
be used.
•In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS11 (page 4-16).
Touch the [Direct TX] key.
Press the [START] key.
Transmission begins.
@To cancel transmission...
While "Dialing. Press [◎] to cancel." appears or while the fax is being transmitted, press the [STOP] key ((§)).
Contents
4-32
FACSIMILE
• The following functions cannot be used with direct transmission:
Program, Timer Transmission, 2in1, Card Shot, Job Build, Original Count, File, Quick File, Memory Box, 2-Sided Original
Scanning, Global Address Search (When the [Direct TX] key is highlighted)
• Resending will not take place when a direct transmission is not successful due to a communication error or other reason.
• If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed, the direct transmission will
wait until the previous transmission is finished. When the previous transmission is completed, the direct transmission will
begin. While the direct transmission is waiting, the [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed to display the job status screen. No
other operations are possible.
隊 CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS (page 4-125)
Contents
4-33
FACSIMILE
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR
TRANSMISSION
To fax a thick original or other original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder, open the automatic
document feeder and place the original on the document glass.
Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale
Document glass scale
• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
金 on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.
• When faxing a multi-page original, scan each page in order starting from the first page.
• When sending a multi-page fax, the automatic document feeder and the document glass cannot both be used to
scan the original pages.
(2)
[■5 卜班卜 :15 |
1
l^iTo | (Sec
^ Condition
| r Settings
r
i
fAAA AAA ^l] fBBB BBB i
Address Review
_T' 麵 [DDD DDD V|
f Address Entry |
[eEE EEE fFFF FFF 1 f j
Global
| Address Search
[ggg ggg v] |hhh HHH v) ( s j
f Sub Address |
[ill III fjjj JJJ tj
f Sort Address
Freq. J| ABCD J| EFGH J| IJKL J| MNOP J| QRSTU J| VWXYZ J| etc .
Preview
^f'Auto Reception
i. ^ Fax Memory： 100%
Enter the destination fax number.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can also
directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS11 (page 4-16).
Contents
4-34
FACSIMILE
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
If you have another page to scan, change pages and then press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
If no action is taken for one minute, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved.
Touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep sounds.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
• When scanning is completed, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number.
This number can be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report.
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when M2in1M or "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be
changed, and this can only be done when scanning each even page number of the original pages.
To cancel transmission...
Press the [STOP] key (® ) before the [Read-End] key is touched.
• If a fax is being received when the transmission operation is performed, the transmission will be reserved and transmission
will take place after fax reception is completed.
•If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and transmission will be
canceled.
Contents
4-35
FACSIMILE
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN
DIRECT TRANSMISSION MODE
When sending a fax from the document glass in direct transmission mode, only one page can be transmitted.
Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
Document glass scale
Document glass scale
• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
M on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
①
Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.
||
[
(
(
[
i
(
i
1
5 卜 EEI 卜 15 j|
l^fTo 1 (SCc ) 1
^ Condition J
Settings |
(aAA AAA 秘 j [BBB BBB ||() ]_
Address Review
DDD
Address Entry
[EEE EEE fFFF FFF 1 专 1
Global
Address Search
fGGG GGG fHHH HHH [ s |
Sub Address j
[ill III [jjj JJJ
Sort Address
Freq. J| ABCD J| EFGH J| IJKL J| MNOP J| QRSTU J| VWXYZ J| etc .
Preview
<^Auto Reception
I. 四 Fax Memory： 100%
Enter the destination fax number.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
(3) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.
• Only one destination can be entered. A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key) cannot
be used.
•In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 4-16).
Contents
4-36
FACSIMILE
Touch the [Direct TX] key.
Press the [START] key.
Transmission begins.
@To cancel transmission...
While "Dialing. Press [◎] to cancel" appears in the display, press the [STOP] key ((§)).
• The following functions cannot be used with direct transmission:
Program, Timer Transmission, 2in1 , Card Shot, Job Build, Polling Memory, Original Count, File, Quick File, Memory Box,
2-Sided Original Scanning, Global Address Search
• Resending will not take place when a direct transmission is not successful due to a communication error or other reason.
• If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed, the direct transmission will
wait until the previous transmission is finished. When the previous transmission is completed, the direct transmission will
begin. While the direct transmission is waiting, the [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed to display the job status screen. No
other operations are possible.
隊 CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX JOBS (page 4-125)
Contents
4-37
FACSIMILE
TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER
When the speaker is used to dial, the fax is sent after the number is dialed and the connection is established. If a person
answers, you will be able to hear his or her voice, but you will not be able to speak.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
When the document glass is used, only one page can be
transmitted.
⑶
⑴
Enter the destination fax number.
(1) Touch the [Speaker] key,
You will hear the dial tone through the machine's speaker.
(2) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(3) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
A group key cannot be used.
•In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS11 (page 4-16).
• After touching the [Speaker] key, you can touch the [Speaker Volume] key to adjust the volume of the speaker. The
speaker volume changes each time the [Speaker Volume] key is touched. Adjust the volume to the desired level.
Wait until the connection is made and then press the [START] key.
Transmission begins.
@To cancel transmission...
Touch the [Speaker] key before the [START] key is pressed. The line will be disconnected and transmission will stop.
• When the speaker is used, transmission takes place without scanning the original into memory.
•A destination that includes an F-code (sub-address and passcode) cannot be used.
•A one-touch key that has multiple destinations or has a non-fax destination cannot be used.
System Settings (Administrator): Speaker Settings
The default volume level of the speaker can be changed in the "Speaker Settings".
Contents
4-38
FACSIMILE
It is convenient to store destinations to which you frequently send faxes by broadcast transmission in group keys. Group
dialing allows you to retrieve multiple fax numbers stored in a one-touch key by simply pressing the one-touch key. To
store group keys, see "Address Control" (page 7-16) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
When a group key is used to dial, the number of fax numbers that are dialed is the number of destinations that are
stored in the group key. When a group key that has 10 destinations is used, 10 fax numbers are dialed.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission)
This function is convenient when you need to send the same fax to multiple destinations, such as sending a report to
branch offices in different regions. You can transmit to as many as 500 destinations in one broadcast operation.
(Combined maximum of 200 file server, desktop, and shared folder destinations.)
Originals
Transmission
4-39
Contents
FACSIMILE
(2)
[qTo J (pec
Freq. Jl ABCD ||^EFGH ■[ IJKL |l MNOP ■[ QRSTU |l VWXYZ 儿 etc.
ぢ ■Auto Reception
Fax Memory： 100%
Enter the destination fax number.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
(3) Repeat step (2) until all destinations are
selected.
•In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS11 (page 4-16).
• It is convenient to use a group key to enter the destinations.
• After entering a destination with the numeric keys, if you wish to enter another destination with the numeric keys,
touch the [Next Address] key before entering the next destination. The [Next Address] key can be omitted before or
after a destination entered using a one-touch key. However, if "Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting"
is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the [Next Address] key must be touched before entering the next
destination.
Fax number entered
[Next Address]
Fax number
[Next Address]
Destination entered with
with the numeric keys
key
entered with the
key
a one-touch key
numeric keys
Cannot be omitted
Can be omitted*
* Cannot be omitted if "Must Input Next
Address Key at Broadcast Setting" is enabled
in the system settings (administrator).
System Settings (Administrator): Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
This setting is used to prohibit omission of the [Next Address] key when entering destinations for broadcast
transmissions.
(
i
(
I
[
(
1
5^
ESI ► 15 1
(eTto ] (Sec 1
^ Condition
^ Settings
fAAA AAA 移] [BBB BBB ■!_ 1
Address Review
(CCC CCC |DDD DDD '
Addre]
1 卜^ ry
|eee eee [fff fff (令 )
Globdi
Address Search
|ggg ggg [hhh HHH 1
L?J
Sub Address ]
[in iiS: fjJJ jjj %]
Sort
Address
Freq. Jl ABCD J| EFGH J| IJICL J| MNOP J| QRSTU J| VWXYZ J| etc.J
Preview
^'Auto Reception
1 Fax Memory： 100%
Touch the [Address Review] key.
4-40
Contents
FACSIMILE
•Address Review | OK
1001 ccc
■こ』 麵 002 [KKK KKK
1003 fiLLL LLL
004 [MMM MMM
1
1005 f.NNN NNN
006 [000 000
2
10071 Wp PPP
%] 008 [qQQ QQQ
m s
1009 f：RRR RRR
010 [sss sss
- ^ m
1011 f.TTT TTT
u\ 012 fouo uuu
El To
a cc
Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key,
©
To cancel a specified destination...
Touch the key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion. Touch the
[Yes] key.
隊 CHECKING AND DELETING ENTERED DESTINATIONS (page 4-19)
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
•A broadcast transmission takes place by memory transmission only.
•A broadcast transmission can be used in combination with the timer transmission function to transmit at night or any other
desired time. A broadcast transmission can also be used in combination with other convenient functions.
• The broadcast transmission can include Scan to E-mail and Internet fax destinations. In this case, the image sent to the
Scan to E-mail and Internet fax destinations will be black and white.
Contents
4-41
FACSIMILE
Touch the [Complete] key.
If the job status screen of fax mode does not appear, touch the
[Fax Job] tab.
If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes, the same broadcast transmission key will
appear in each of those modes.
(1)
1
A Print Job | ^ Scan to | Fax Job | 培 Internet Fax
Address 1 Start Time Pages Status
Job Queue
1 Broadcast0002 10:05 04/01 001/001 Send OK j 1
V B CCC CCC 10:22 04/01 004/004 Send OK
# Detail ]
^ J 0123456789 10:30 04/01 010/010 Send OK
Lj_
&
[ cal1 s
Display details on the broadcast
transmission.
Touch the key of the completed broadcast
transmission.
(1)
(2) Touch the [Detail] key
"Broadcastxxxx" will appear as the destination of the broadcast job key. The job control number that appeared in the
touch panel when scanning ended appears in "xxxx".
Contents
Resending to unsuccessful broadcast transmission destinations
The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the
destinations failed, resend the fax to those destinations.
JOB STATUS
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
4-42
FACSIMILE
(1) (2)
Resend to unsuccessful destinations.
(1) Touch the [Failed] tab.
(2) Touch the [Retry] key.
• The procedure after the [Retry] key is touched varies depending on whether or not the document filing function was
used.
Not using document filing
You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Place the original and perform the
broadcast transmission operation.
Using document filing
The document filing operation selection screen will appear with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Perform the
document filing resend procedure. (There is no need to rescan the original.)
If the job was stored in a confidential folder or was stored as confidential file, a password entry screen will appear
after you touch the [Retry] key. Enter the password.
• If the [All Destinations] key is touched in (1), all destinations will be displayed. The [Retry] key that appears in the
screen can be touched to resend to all destinations.
4-43
Contents
FACSIMILE
SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-Fax)
A document in a computer can be transmitted via the machine as a fax. Faxes are sent using the PC-Fax function in the
same way as documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver on your computer and then select the
Print command in the software application. Image data for transmission will be created and sent as a fax.
For more information on using PC-Fax, see the Help file for the PC-Fax driver.
•To use the PC-Fax function, the PC-Fax driver must be installed. For more information, see the Software Setup Guide.
• This function can only be used on a Windows® computer.
• This function can only be used for transmission. Faxes cannot be received to your computer.
4-44
Contents
FACSIMILE
IMAGE SETTINGS
Settings for scanning the original are selected in the base screen of each mode. The current state of each setting
appears to the right of the key used to select the setting.
1
USB Mem. Scan
コ E
Resolution I Standard
| Address Reviewj
i - ' i
[ Special Modes ]
Pile
1 I Reception
1 旧 J Fax Memory： 100%
f Quick File |
Preview j
⑴
(2)
⑶
(1) [Original] key
Touch this key to set the scan size, send size, and
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning
settings.
^ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF
AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 4-46),
SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE
(Enlarge/Reduce) (page 4-47)
(2) [Exposure] key
Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.
暖 CHANGING THE EXPOSURE (page 4-54)
(3) [Resolution] key
Touch this key to select the scanning resolution.
隊 CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 4-55)
4-45
Contents
FACSIMILE
AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN
ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original)
The automatic document feeder will automatically scan both sides of the document.
Transmission
2-sided original
Front and back are
sent as two pages
D Touch the [Original] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
⑴
Specify the binding style of the 2-sided
original (book or tablet) and the
orientation in which the original is placed.
(1) Touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the
[2-Sided Tablet] key.
A book and a tablet are bound as shown below.
Booklet Tablet
(2) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation] key,
If the wrong orientation is selected here, the image may
not be sent properly.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
@
To cancel 2-sided scanning, touch the highlighted key so that it is no longer highlighted.
• 2-sided scanning automatically turns off after the transmission operation is completed.
• 2-sided scanning is not possible when direct transmission or speaker transmission is performed.
4-46
Contents
FACSIMILE
SPECIFYING THE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE
(Enlarge/Reduce)
When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected and displayed in the base screen.
The size of the placed original is indicated as the scan size, and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the send size.
In the above screen, the scan size (the placed original) is 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) and the send size is auto. If, for example, the
scan size were 8-1/2" x 1 1" (A4) and the send size were 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5), the image would be reduced before
transmission.
"Scan Size"
Transmission
"Send Size" is set to
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5)
8-1/2" x 1 1" (A4) The image is reduced
to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5)
before transmission
• Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected.
隊 STANDARD SIZES (page 4-28)
• When the original size is a non-standard size, or if the size is not detected correctly, manually specify the original scan
size.
隊 Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.) (page 4-48)
瞭 Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 4-50)
4-47
Contents
FACSIMILE
Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.)
If the original is a non-standard size or you wish to change the scan size, touch the [Original] key to specify the original
size manually. Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and follow the steps below.
Touch the [Original] key.
The automatically detected original size appears to the right of the [Original] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
OK
100% Send Size
Auto 8%xll
1
I fe 2 -Sided 1 fftrL 2-Sided
I all Booklet J I LJ Tablet
Image Orientation
PEI [ ag
Touch the [Scan Size] key.
(1) (2)
Fax/Original
1 ~ OK ^ )
Auto
「 Manual
8MxllR 11x17 ]
1
5 你哪 ] f 8^x13 (213x330) j
8^x11 8^x14 f Long Size ]
f Size Input j
Specify the scan size.
(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
• If you are sending a long original, touch the [Long Size] key. Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long
original. The maximum length that can be scanned is 39-3/8" (1000 mm) (the maximum height is 11-5/8"
(297 mm)).
隊 TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES (page 4-28)
• To specify an AB size for the scan size, touch the [AB 令 Inch] key to highlight the [AB] side and then specify the
scan size.
Contents
4-48
FACSIMILE
Fax/Original
Scan Size 100% Send Size
5V2X8V2 J ^ 1 Auto
Image Orientation
[ 2-Sided 1 2-Sided j
I _ Booklet 丨 | 琶 Tablet J
FEB [sal
Touch the [OK] key.
When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed.
Contents
4-49
FACSIMILE
Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values)
When scanning a non-standard size original such as a postcard or card, follow these steps to specify the original size.
The width can be from 1 11 to 1 7" (25 mm to 432 mm), and the height can be from 1" to 1 1 -5/8" (25 mm to 297 mm).
Touch the [Original] key.
The automatically detected original size appears to the right of the [Original] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
OK
100% Send Size
Auto 8%xll
I fe 2 -Sided 1 fftrL 2-Sided
I all Booklet J I LJ Tablet
Image Orientation
PEI [ ag
Touch the [Scan Size] key.
Touch the [Size Input] key.
(1)，（2) (3)
1 ―
Fax/Original
I — OK — 1
Size Input
Cancel OK
&
S IV
Bl
Enter the scan size.
(1) Touch the [X] key and enter the X
(horizontal) dimension with the HS keys.
(2) Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical)
dimension with the keys.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
To complete the setting and return to the screen of step 3,
touch the [OK] key next to the [Cancel] key.
Contents
4-50
FACSIMILE
Touch the [OK] key.
The specified size appears in the [Scan Size] key.
• When the scan size is specified by numerical values, the send size cannot be specified.
• When the automatic document feeder is used, an original longer that 17" (432 mm) can be scanned (maximum width
39-3/8" (1000 mm)). In this case, touch the [Long Size] key in the screen of step 3.
暖 Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.) (page 4-48)
隊 TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES (page 4-28)
Contents
4-51
FACSIMILE
Specifying the send size of the original
Specify the send size as a paper size. If a send size bigger than the scan size is selected, the image will be enlarged. If
a send size smaller than the scan size is selected, the image will be reduced.
The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by
numerical values.
Touch the [Original] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
Fax/Original
Scan Size 100% Send Size
[ Auto 8V2xll
[m E
2-Sided
Tablet
Image Orientation
PEil 1001
Touch the [Send Size] key.
(1) (2)
1 —
Fax/Original
1 ^ OK ~ 1
Auto
| Manual
[ 5Mx8^ ] ( 8MxllR j ■
AB
{ 5^x8MR ] [8^x13 (213x330)]
( 8Mxll | [ 8MX14 )
Specify the send size.
(1) Touch the desired send size key,
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• Depending on the "Scan Size" setting, it may not be possible to select some sizes for the "Send Size". Size keys
that cannot be specified for the "Send Size" are grayed out to prevent selection.
• To specify an AB size for the send size, touch the [AB^Inch] key to highlight the [AB] side and then specify the
send size.
Contents
4-52
FACSIMILE
⑴ (2)
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
(1) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation]
key.
If the wrong orientation is selected here, the image may
not be sent properly when using enlargement/reduction.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the "Scan Size" and the "Send Size".
4-53
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHANGING THE EXPOSURE
The exposure can be changed to match the darkness of the original.
Refer the following tables to select appropriate settings.
Exposure settings
Exposure
When to select
Auto
This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original.
Manual
1-2
Select this setting when the original consists of dark text.
3
Select this setting for a normal original (neither dark nor light).
4-5
Select this setting when the original consists of faint text.
Touch the [Exposure] key.
The current exposure setting appears to the right of the [Exposure] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
Select the exposure.
(1) Touch the [Manual] key.
(2) Adjust the exposure with the m m keys.
When the exposure is set to [Auto], the , (T1 _ ) keys
cannot be used.
The exposure darkens when the I ] key is touched,
and lightens when the i Q ] key is touched.
To return to auto exposure adjustment, touch the [Auto]
key.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the exposure setting can be changed each time you change
pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun.
(However, when "Job Build" in the special modes is used, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is
inserted.)
System Settings (Administrator): Default Exposure Settings
This is used to change the default exposure setting.
4-54
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHANGING THE RESOLUTION
The resolution can be selected to match the characteristics of the original, such as text or photo, the size of the text, and
the darkness of the image.
Refer the following tables to select appropriate settings.
Resolution settings
Resolution
When to select
Standard
Select this setting when your original consists of normal-sized text (like the text in this manual).
Fine
Select this setting when your original has small text or diagrams with fine lines.
The original will be scanned at twice the resolution of the [Standard] setting.
Super Fine
Select this setting when your original has intricate pictures or diagrams.
A higher-quality image will be produced than with the [Fine] setting.
Ultra Fine
Select this setting when your original has intricate pictures or diagrams.
This setting gives the best image quality. However, transmission will take longer than with the
other settings.
Half Tone
Select this setting when your original is a photograph or has gradations of color (such as a
color original).
This setting will produce a clearer image than [Fine], [Super Fine], or [Ultra Fine] used alone.
Halftone cannot be selected when [Standard] is used.
Touch the [Resolution] key.
The current resolution setting appears to the right of the [Resolution] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 4-45)
⑴ (2)
Select the resolution.
(1) Touch the key of the desired resolution.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
When [Fine], [Super Fine], or [Ultra Fine] is selected, the [Half Tone] key can be touched to select halftone.
• When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the resolution setting can be changed each time you change pages.
When using the automatic document feeder, the resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun. (However, when
"Job Build" in the special modes is used, the resolution can be changed each time a new set of originals is inserted.)
• When a fax is sent at [Ultra Fine], [Super Fine], or [Fine] resolution, a lower resolution will be used if the receiving machine
does not have that resolution.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Resolution Setting
This is used to change the default resolution setting.
Contents
4-55
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE
TRANSMITTED (Preview)
If you touch the [Preview] key before scanning the original, you can check the scanned image in the touch panel before
sending the image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.
Depending on the size of the transmission data, part of the preview image may not appear in the preview screen in the touch
panel.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Touch the [Preview] key to highlight it.
Select transmission settings and press the [START] key.
"Originals are being read" appears while the originals are being scanned, and when scanning is finished, the preview screen
appears on the touch panel. Transmission will not take place until you touch the [Start Sending] key in the preview screen.
Check the preview image and then touch
the [Start Sending] key.
Transmission begins.
For information on the preview screen, see "PREVIEW CHECK
SCREEN" (page 4-57).
System settings (administrator): Default Preview
You can specify whether or not the [Preview] key function will be enabled in the base screens of the image send modes and
in the address book.
Contents
4-56
FACSIMILE
PREVIEW CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the preview check screen.
(1) Preview image
A preview of the scanned original appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and slide
it to scroll. (You can also touch the ▼ ▲ keys to scroll.)
(2) Change page keys
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
• EILS keys: Go to the first or the last page,
•as keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display:
This shows the total number of pages
and the current page number. You can
touch the current page number key and
enter a number with the numeric keys
to go to that page number.
(3) [Function Rev.] key
Touch to check special mode settings or scan settings for
two-sided originals.
(4) Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
■■4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.
(5) "Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
(6) [Start Sending] key
Touch to begin transmission.
•A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual send result.
• The preview image reflects certain scanning and special mode settings.
Settings reflected in the preview image are as follows:
Scanning settings: Original
Special modes: Erase, Dual Page Scan, Card Shot, 2in1
4-57
Contents
FACSIMILE
FAX RECEPTION
This section explains the basic procedures for receiving faxes.
RECEIVING FAXES
When the reception mode is set to "Auto Reception", the machine will receive and print faxes automatically. The fax
reception mode is displayed in the base screen.
Internet Fax
r
: TX |
ISS \
Address Review
Resolution I Standard
] ®
な. Auto Reception j
pax Memory： 100%
This shows the current fax
reception mode and the amount
of free memory remaining.
(§)
When fax reception is in progress, it is possible to reserve a transmission by performing the transmission in memory
transmission mode.
瞭 TRANSMISSION METHODS (page 4-25)
To print received faxes, make sure that the required paper is loaded in the machine's paper trays. It is not necessary to
load 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) paper and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5) paper in both the vertical (園） and horizontal (\M) orientations.
Differences in orientation are automatically adjusted when faxes are received.
When a fax smaller than 8-1/2" x 1 1 ■■ (A4) size is received, the size of the paper used for printing will vary depending on the
orientation (vertical or horizontal) in which the sender placed the original.
System Settings: Receive Setting (page 7-102)
This is used to change the fax reception mode. "Auto Reception" should normally be used.
Select "Manual Reception" when an extension phone is connected to the machine.
System Settings (Administrator): Allow/Reject Number Setting
You can store numbers and specify whether or not reception is allowed from those numbers.
4-58
Contents
FACSIMILE
RECEIVING A FAX
When a fax is transmitted to the machine, the machine automatically receives and prints the fax.
The machine rings and fax reception
begins automatically.
A beep sounds when reception ends.
• System Settings (Administrator): Speaker Settings
This is used to change the volume and tone of the reception beep.
• System Settings (Administrator): Number of Calls in Auto Reception
This is used to change the number of rings on which fax reception begins automatically. To receive faxes without
the machine ringing, select "0" rings.
The fax is automatically printed.
• If a password entry screen appears...
A password must be entered to print the received fax. When the correct password is entered, the received fax is
printed.
暖 PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold Setting For Received Data Print) (page 4-61)
• The output tray and stapling (when a finisher is installed) can be selected.
The number of copies of received faxes that are printed and the output tray can be selected. When a finisher is
installed, the number of copies printed, the output tray, and stapling can be selected.
•If printing of a copy job or print job is in progress when a fax is received, the fax will not be printed until the previously
reserved job is completed.
• Received faxes will not be printed when the machine cannot print due to an error condition such as out of paper, out of
toner, or a paper misfeed. The faxes will be printed automatically when the error condition is cleared. (If the machine ran
out of paper, touch the [OK] key in the touch panel after loading paper.
• When received faxes cannot be printed, the faxes can be forwarded to another fax machine.
隊 FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES (Fax Data Forward) (page 4-64)
• System Settings (Administrator): Duplex Reception Setting
This is used to have received faxes printed on both sides of the paper.
• System Settings (Administrator): Receiving Date & Time Print
Use this to select whether or not the date and time of reception is added when a received image is printed.
Contents
4-59
FACSIMILE
RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY
A fax can be received manually using the touch panel. While the machine rings, touch the [Speaker] key in the base
screen and then touch the [Fax Manual Reception] key that appears.
[speaker Volume^
Address Review!
f Exposure
Resolution j Standard
[W]
Fax Memory : 100%
Fax Manual
Reception
When a call is answered by touching the [Speaker] key, you will be able to hear the other party, however, you will not be
able to speak.
Even when you use an extension phone to answer a call, you can touch the [Fax Manual Reception] key in the touch panel
to begin fax reception. You can also use the extension phone to begin fax reception.
^RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTENSION PHONE (Remote Reception) (page 4-124)
4-60
Contents
FACSIMILE
PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print)
"Hold Setting for Received Data Print" can be enabled in the system settings (administrator) to have faxes received to
memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a password must be entered. When this function is used, a password
entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received.
Received data is stored.
Enter password via the 10 -key.
When the previously programmed 4-digit password is entered with the numeric keys, printing begins.
The [Cancel] key can be touched to close the password entry screen. If this is done, the data in memory key (回） will
blink in the touch panel. The password entry screen will reappear when you touch the blinking key (L^j) or change
modes.
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), a password can be
entered to display the received data list screen. If you wish to check an image before printing it, continue from step 1 on
the next page.
• The received faxes will be retained in memory regardless of whether they were received automatically or manually.
•If "Fax Data Receive/Forward 11 is executed in the system settings to forward received faxes to another machine, faxes
retained in memory will also be forwarded. At that time, the same password entry screen as for printing will appear.
Forwarding will not take place unless the password is entered.
System Settings (Administrator): Hold Setting for Received Data Print
Enable this setting to have received faxes retained in memory until a password is entered. This setting is also used to
program the password.
4-61
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled* in the system settings (administrator), you can check a received
image in the touch panel before printing it out. When this function is enabled, follow the steps below to print a received image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.
Depending on the size of the received data, part of the image in the image check screen on the touch panel may not appear.
The memory has received data.
Check the data?
If )
When an image is received, a confirmation
prompt will appear. Touch the [Yes] key.
If this message appears while you are configuring settings of
any type and you touch the [Yes] key, the settings that you are
configuring will be cancelled. If this message appears in
another mode, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode after checking the image.
(1)
(2)
Select the received image
(1) Touch the key of the received image that
you want to check.
Multiple received images can be checked.
(2) Touch the [Image Check] key,
• To show thumbnails of the received images, touch the
[Thumbnail] key.
• To delete an image that has been selected, touch the
[Delete] key. To print an image that has been selected,
touch the [Print] key.
When the [Select All] key is touched, it will change into the [Cancel All] key. When all received data has been selected
using the [Select All] key, the selection can be canceled by touching the [Cancel All] key.
Check the received image and then
touch the [Print] key.
Printing begins.
For information on the image check screen, see "IMAGE
CHECK SCREEN11 (page 4-63).
If the screen of step 1 appears when you are configuring settings in the setting screens of any of the modes, the configured
settings will be cancelled if you view the image. After viewing the image, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode, regardless of which mode you were in previously.
System Settings (Administrator): Received Data Image Check Setting
Use this to specify whether or not a received fax can be viewed before it is printed.
4-62
Contents
FACSIMILE
IMAGE CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the image check screen.
(1) Information display
This shows information on the displayed image.
(2) Preview image
An image of the selected received image appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the ▼ ▲ keys to
scroll.)
(3) Change page keys
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
• N] keys: Go to the first or the last page,
•aa keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.
(4) "Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
(5) [Print] key
Touch to start printing.
(6) Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
"4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.
(7) Image select key
When multiple images are selected for preview display,
use this to change the displayed images.
A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.
Contents
4-63
FACSIMILE
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES
(Fax Data Forward)
When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another
previously programmed fax machine.
This function is convenient in an office or work area that has two or more telephone lines and another fax machine is
connected to a different line than the machine.
The machine The machine cannot print
Forwarding
destination
Received fax
Printing
Forwarding of received faxes is executed in the system settings of the machine. Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key on
the operation panel to display the system setting menu screen in the touch panel. Select [Fax Data Receive/Forward] -
[Fax Settings], and then touch the key that executes received fax forwarding.
•If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be
forwarded.
•A forwarded fax becomes a fax transmission job. If transmission does not take place because the transmission was
canceled or an error occurred, the fax will be held in memory until it can be printed.
• All faxes received are forwarded. Note, however, that faxes received to an F-code confidential memory box cannot be
forwarded.
• If a password entry screen appears after touching the [OK] key, "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" has been enabled.
Enter the password with the numeric keys to begin forwarding.
隊 PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX (Hold Setting For Received Data Print) (page 4-61)
• System Settings: Fax Data Receive/Forward (page 7-20)
Use this to forward received faxes when the machine is unable to print.
• System Settings (Administrator): Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding
This is used to store the forwarding fax number.
4-64
Contents
FACSIMILE
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A
NETWORK ADDRESS
(Inbound Routing Settings)
You can have received faxes automatically forwarded to an e-mail address, file server address, desktop address, or
network folder address. This function can be used to forward received faxes to a specified address without printing them.
• This function cannot be used for faxes received by confidential reception.
• When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot
be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)
CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS
All inbound routing settings are configured in the Web pages. For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the
Quick Start Guide.
The following explanation assumes that the Web pages have been accessed with administrator rights.
To configure inbound routing settings, follow the steps below.
Administration Settings
[So6»wl<Uj R| )
| Inbound Routing Scdingt
Inbound Routing
□ Dttjibl# R^gistnrtion ol Foiwwri
口 of Forwmt$ TaMt
LJ Dtsablt Chan^t of Forward Appcovil
Pfint Scylt SfCting
[Submit ][Up<l«*(R| ]
|h<mi)I
O Print Out AAR«po(t
® Pfim 飙 Enoi
B»ck \o tNt Top on Tbrt P»g« 4
Enabling the inbound routing function.
(1) In the Web page menu, click [Application
Settings], [Inbound Routing Settings], and
then [Administration Settings].
(2) Select [Enable] in "Inbound Routing" and
click the [Submit] button.
Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen,
and from specifying which table is used. To do so, select the checkboxes below 0.
• Disable Registration of Forward Table • Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table • Disable Change of Forward
Approval
When inbound routing is enabled, you can also specify whether or not you wish the machine to print the forwarded
faxes.
To have all received faxes printed before being forwarded, select "Print Out All Report" in "Print Style Setting". To
have received faxes printed only when an error prevents forwarding, select "Print at Error".
After configuring the settings, be sure to click the [Submit] button.
4-65
Contents
FACSIMILE
Sender Number/Address Registration
I Submit(U) ] [ Update(R) I
Address to be Entered:
012345678
abc@aaa.bbb.ccc
Delete(O) I
I Help(l) |
Fax Number:
コ (Up to 1500
characters)
( Global Address Search(C) j
[ Add to L_ 1
Internet Fax Address: 丨 丨 (Up to 1500
characters)
l Global Address Search(N) )
[ Add to List(M) |
Back to the Top on This Page 4
I Submit fU) |[Update(R) I
Storing sender addresses.
If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses
forwarded, store the desired sender addresses. Send
addresses stored here can be selected from a list when you
store a forwarding table.
(1) Click [Sender Number/Address
Registration] in the [Inbound Routing
Settings] menu in the Web page.
(2) Enter the sender address in "Internet Fax
Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate,
and click the [Add to List] button.
The entered address will be added to the "Address to be
Entered" list.
• Specify whether the address will be directly entered
(maximum of 1500 characters) or selected from a
global address book by clicking the [Global Address
Search] button.
• To store multiple addresses, repeat this step.
(3) When you have finished adding addresses,
click the [Submit] button.
•A maximum of 500 sender numbers/addresses can be stored.
•To delete an entered address, select the address in "Address to be Entered" and click the [Delete] button.
4-66
Contents
FACSIMILE
(2) (3)(4)
(8) (7) (6) (5)
Store a forwarding table.
Follow the steps below to store a forwarding table that
combines a specified sender and forwarding address.
(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web
page menu and click the [Add] button.
(2) Enter a "Table Name".
(3) Select the line used for reception.
(4) Select the sender whose faxes will be
forwarded.
• To forward all received faxes, select [Forward All
Received Data].
• To forward only data received from specific senders,
select [Forward Received Data from Below Sender].
To forward all data except data from specific senders,
select [Forward Received Data from Senders except
Below]. Select the appropriate senders from the list and
click the [Add] button.
(5) Select the forwarding conditions.
• To always forward received data, select [Always
Forward].
• To specify a day and time on which received data will
be forwarded, select [Forward on Selected Day & Time]
and select the checkbox 0 of the desired day of the
week. To specify a time, select the [Set Forwarding
Time] checkbox [ and specify the time.
(6) Select the file format.
The format can be set separately for each forwarding
address (for each of forwarding addresses 1, 2, and 3 in
the table).
(7) Select the forwarding address.
Forwarding addresses can be selected from the
machine's address book. (Multiple addresses can be
selected.) A maximum of 1000 forwarding addresses can
be stored (a combined maximum of 100 file server,
desktop, and network folder addresses can be stored).
(8) Click [Submit].
• When selecting senders from the "Sender Number/Address Setting" list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key
on your keyboard to select multiple senders.
•A maximum of 50 forwarding tables can be stored.
• Images sent in TIFF format may not display correctly in some recipient environments. In this event, change the file
format to PDF.
• Up to three forwarding day and time settings can be set for one forwarding table, and a forwarding destination can
be set for each set time. To configure these settings, use the forwarding list tabs to access each setting.
• When the forwarding destination is a file server, desktop, or shared folder, the computer of that destination must be
powered on.
4-67
Contents
FACSIMILE
Inbound Routing Settings
1 Login(P) |
fH^ipFI
| Submit(U) || Update(R) |
Inbound Routing Settings: Enable
Display Items: 110 v
Forward Destination 1
©Not Forward
O Always Forward
O Forward on Sele
cted Day &Time
Forward Destination 2
©Not Forward
O Always Forward
Forward Destination 3
©Not Forward
〇 Always Forward
Forward Destination 1
□ Table 2
©Not Forward
〇 Always Forward
O Forward on Selected Day &Time
Forward Destination 2
©Not Forward
O Always Forward
Forward Destination 1
® Not Forward
O Always Forward
O Forward on Selected Day &Time
□ Table 3 c n n
Forward Destination 2
©Not Forward
〇 Always Forward
Forward Destination 3
©Not Forward
O Always Forward
Total Table:3
[ Previous(M) ] y^\ [ Next(N) ]
| Select AII(S) 1 1 Clear Checked の |
| Delete(O) ]
|[ Add(Y) |
Back to the Top on This Page ▲
|Subrr>it(U)
II Update(R) |
Specifying forwarding tables to be used.
To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding
tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.
(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web
page menu.
(2) Select [Always Forward] or [Forward on
Selected Day & Time] from the forwarding
table.
The forwarding permission settings that appear here are
linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 3. If you
wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set
in step 3, set the forwarding permission settings
(3) Click [Submit].
To delete a forwarding table, click the checkbox next to the table name so that it is selected | and click [Delete].
4-68
Contents
FACSIMILE
V Venf . | 下 Transactioi
I uJ Stamp I _ Report
i Name
jlect
ft
2
a
a
(1) -
Program
(2) -
Erase
(1 2 3 4 卜 離
f5 6 7}m ^
v Arj=n Mixed S
| 哪 Origin，
ize r-, Slo^
al | try ^
^ Original
| し國 Count
-(1M -
File
-/1 2)
P Quick
SPECIAL MODES
This section explains special modes that can be used for fax transmission.
SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is touched in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. The special
modes menu consists of two screens. Touch the \±] Q key to switch between the two screens. When the [OK] key is
touched in the special modes screen, the selected settings are entered and the base screen reappears.
1st screen 2nd screen
(1) [Program] key
隊 STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program) (page
4-71)
(2) [Erase] key
^ ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase) (page 4-73)
(3) [Dual Page Scan] key
^ TRANSMITTING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO
SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan) (page 4-75)
(4) [Timer] key
隊 SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME (Timer)
(page 4-77)
(5) [2in1] key
隊 SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (2in1)
(page 4-79)
(6) [Card Shot] key
^ SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE
PAGE (Card Shot) (page 4-82)
(7) [Job Build] key
隊 SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES (Job
Build) (page 4-85)
(8) [Mixed Size Original] key
^TRANSMITTING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original) (page 4-87)
(9) [Slow Scan Mode] key
暖 FAXING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode) (page
4-89)
(10) [Original Count] key
暖 CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count) (page 4-91)
(11) [File] key
Touch this to use the File function of document filing
mode.
(12) [Quick File] key
Touch this to use the Quick File function of document
filing mode.
(13) [Verif. Stamp] key*
瞭 STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (Verif. Stamp)
(page 4-93)
Contents
1 2 S a
4-69
FACSIMILE
(14) [Transaction Report] key
隊 CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report)
(page 4-95)
(15) [Own Name Select] key
隊 TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER
INFORMATION (Own Name Select) (page 4-98)
(16) [Memory Box] key
暖 SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER MACHINE
POLLS YOUR MACHINE (Polling Memory) (page
4-102)
(17) [Polling] key
瞭 CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING
RECEPTION (Polling) (page 4-99)
Does not appear when the stamp unit is not installed.
Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a message will appear in the touch panel.
[OK] key and [Cancel] key
In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:
(A) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the base screen.
(B) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the special modes menu screen. Touch this key when you
wish to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special modes menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special modes menu
screen.
4-70
Contents
FACSIMILE
STORING FAX OPERATIONS (Program)
A program is a group of transmission settings stored together. When transmission settings are stored in a program, the
settings can be retrieved and used for a fax job by means of a simple operation.
For example, suppose that the same 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size documents are distributed to branch offices in various
regions once a month.
(1) The same documents are faxed to each branch office
(2) To save paper, two document pages are faxed as a single page
(3) Smudges on the edges of the documents are erased before transmission
8-1/2" x 1 1" (A4) size Fax received by recipients,
documents to be distributed
Programs are stored, edited, and deleted using "Address Control" in the system settings. See "Program" (page
7-19) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
• Programs can also be stored using the Web pages. Click [Job Programs] and then [Image Send] in the Web page menu.
• The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can
be used repeatedly for transmission.
• The following settings can be stored in programs.
Destinations: One-touch keys, group keys, search numbers
Image settings: Original scan size, Image orientation, duplex scanning, exposure, resolution
Special modes: Polling reception, Erase, Dual Page Scan, Job Build, Mixed Size Original, Slow Scan Mode,
Original Count, Verif. Stamp, 2in1
Preview
F-code communication: A destination that includes an F-code can be stored to perform an F-code operation.
• Up to 48 programs can be stored.
• Up to 500 destinations can be stored in each program.
When a job program is not stored
When a job program is stored
Enter the fax numbers of the branch offices
及
Retrieve the stored program.
及
▼
Select the 2in1 function.
+
▼
Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.
Select erase settings
及
▼
Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.
Considerable time is required to send the documents each
month because the above settings must be selected.
In addition, mistakes may occasionally be made when
selecting the settings, so incorrect transmissions may occur.
When a program is stored, settings are selected with ease by
simply pressing the program key.
In addition, transmission takes place based on the stored
settings so there are no chances for mistakes.
I ■
n
□圓 □コ
□ □□ E
s
nt
e
nt
o
c
V.
FACSIMILE
Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass as appropriate for the functions stored in the
program.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Program] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
(1)
(2)
Retrieve the stored program.
(1) Touch the desired program key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Scan 1 Internet Fax | Fax | USB Mem. Scan [ PC Scan
f Original _ Scan: Send:
[ Exposure j
[ Resolution j Standard
f Address Review
[ Special Modes ] | [T|| j
File
Quick File
な ••Auto Reception
Fax Memory ： 100%
Select additional settings.
When a program is used, the following settings can be
additionally specified:
• Image settings: Original scan size*, send size
• Special modes: Timer Transmission, Card Shot, File, Quick
File, Own Name Select, Transaction Report
• When stored in the program, this cannot be additionally
specified.
• The screen that appears will vary depending on the destination stored in the program.
• The mode cannot be changed here.
• Functions stored in the program cannot be canceled here.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
Contents
4-72
FACSIMILE
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase)
The erase function is used to erase shadows on images produced when scanning thick originals or books. (This function
erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form. The function does not detect shadows and erase only the
shadows.)
Scanning a thick book
Not using the erase
function
Using the erase
function
□
No shadows appear.
Erase modes
Edge Erase
Center Erase
Edge + Center Erase
Side Erase
三 p
ニ ロ ——
三 口 !=□:：
! | ! 1
三 □
' - J
— —
1 1
パ —— r
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
B Enter the destination fax number.
暖 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Erase] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
4-73
Contents
FACSIMILE
⑴ P) ⑶
Select the erase settings.
(1) Touch the desired erase mode.
Select one of the 4 erase modes.
Touch the [Side Erase] key to open the following screen.
Erase
Side Erase
_
Cancel |( OK j
□di
)
Erase position
for Original Side 2
i
LeftQ
j~j Right
□Dc
>wn
[Different Side
1 from Side 1
Touch the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase
and make sure that a checkmark (i>/|) appears.
When performing two-sided scanning, set the erase edge
on the reverse side.
• If you touch the [Same Side as Side 1] key, the edge in
the same position as on the front side will be erased.
• If you touch the [Different Side from Side 1], the edge in
the position opposite to the erased edge on the front
side will be erased.
When you have completed the settings, touch the [OK]
key.
(2) Set the erasure width with the keys,
0" to 1 11 (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®).
When the erase function is used, erase takes place at the edges of the original image. If you also use a reduction or an
enlargement setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. For example, if the erase width setting is 1
(20 mm) and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 1/2" (10 mm).
@To cancel an erase setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment
The default erase width setting is linked to the copy mode system setting, and can be set from 0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm). The
factory default setting is 1/2" (10 mm).
Contents
4-74
FACSIMILE
TRANSMITTING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO
SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan)
The left and right sides of an original can be transmitted as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to
fax the left and right pages of a book or other bound document as separate pages.
Example: Faxing the left and right pages of a book
Example:
Original scan size
Transmitted image
11nx17" (A3) x 1 page
8-1/2Mx11M (A4) x 2 pages
• When using dual page scan, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• The send size cannot be changed.
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
Align the center of the original with the appropriate size mark
Size mark
圔
▼ ▼
_ • i
r
Centerline of
Centerline of
A3 original
11nx17" original
B Enter the destination fax number.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
Contents
4-75
FACSIMILE
Program j
i f -ase (shhi
Timer
[画 2 ini
Card Shot
ユ I
P-n Slow Scan
Mode
lan 丨 心 |
Quick File
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
©
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®).
@ マ
To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function. (Note, however, that
Center Erase" and "Edge + Center Erase" cannot be used.)
When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.
©
To cancel Dual Page Scan...
Touch the [Dual Page Scan] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
Contents
Select Dual Page Scan.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
瞭 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
(2) Touch the [Dual Page Scan] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
1 1 0 0
4-76
FACSIMILE
SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer)
When this function is used, transmission takes place automatically at a specified time.
The timer transmission function makes it easy to perform reserved transmissions, broadcast transmissions and other
transmissions at night or other times when phone rates are low.
A timer setting can also be specified for polling reception to receive a fax when you are not present.
n.
During the day, set up a At 20:00, the broadcast
broadcast transmission to transmission begins automatically
take place at 20:00 (Transmission to the first destination
takes place)
When a timer transmission is set, keep the main power switch on . Transmission will not take place if the main power is
turned off at the specified time.
When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. It is not
possible to leave the document in the auto document feeder or on the document glass and have it scanned at the reserved
time of transmission.
Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, special modes, etc.) are automatically cleared after the
transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function is used, the scanned original and settings are stored
on the built-in hard drive.)
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Enter the destination fax number.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Timer] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
□ □□「
□ □□r
4-77
Contents
FACSIMILE
⑴ (2) (3)
Fax/Special Modes
0
= i ~ j
timer
Cancel
OK
Day of
the Week
Time
■
BL SOL
QQ
S3 Q Q
Set the time with the _ _ keys.
(1) Specify the day.
If you do not wish to specify a day, select [---]. In this
case, transmission will begin when the time specified in
(2) arrives.
(2) Specify the time (hour, minute)
Select the time in 24-hour format.
You can also directly touch a numeric display key to
change the setting with the numeric keys.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
When this screen is opened, the setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CLEAR ALL]
key (©) to cancel the operation. Correct the time in the system settings and then perform the timer transmission
procedure.
隊 CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME (page 4-6)
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• The time can be specified up to a week in advance.
• Up to 94 timer transmissions can be stored at once.
• Only one timer polling operation can be stored at once. If you wish to poll multiple machines, store a serial polling timer
operation.
•If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer operation will begin after that transmission
is finished.
• Other operations can be performed after a timer transmission is set up.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
• If a timer transmission is given priority in the job status screen, the time specification is canceled. The transmission will
begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.
暖 GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX JOB (page 4-133)
@To cancel timer transmission...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
Contents
4-78
FACSIMILE
SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE
(2in1)
Two original pages can be reduced and sent as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large
number of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent.
Portrait-oriented originals
Transmission
Landscape-oriented originals Transmission
Place the original.
When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.
B Enter the destination fax number.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
4-79
Contents
FACSIMILE
Select 2in1.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
瞭 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
(2) Touch the [2in1] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
Scan
Internet Fax 1 Fax 1 USB Mem. Scan 1 PC Scan
1 ►Address Book
[ Original j Scan： Send:
[ Direct TX ]
1 y I ^9
[ Sub Address \
[| Resolution ] Standard
| Address Review
[ Special Modes j | [T||
File
1 Quick File |
[ — i W Fa，=:r
Touch the [Original] key.
(1) (2)
Scan Size 100% Send Size
Auto 8^x11
=」匬
2 -Sided
Tablet
Image Orientation
PBil f 00 1
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
(1) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation]
key.
If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be
transmitted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
The [Configure] key can be touched in the scan-end confirmation screen to change the exposure, resolution, scan
size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure can be
changed.)
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
Contents
a a
4-80
FACSIMILE
• Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
• The 2in1 function cannot be used when the original is other than 8-1/2" x 1 T (A4) or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5 or A5) size.
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.
@To cancel 2in1...
Touch the [2in1] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
4-81
Contents
FACSIMILE
SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A
SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot)
This function lets you send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side
separately.
Transmitted image
Originals
Front
Back
Transmission
_ Example of an 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
Example of an 8-1/2" x 1 1" (A4) size landscape scan transmission
size portrait scan transmission
When using card shot, the original must be scanned on the document glass.
B Enter the destination fax number.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Card Shot] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
4-82
Contents
FACSIMILE
(i)
(A)
Fax/ Special Modes
S3
a
m
(1~8 1
inch
■i は1
aa
(B) (2)
Is,
OK J
Fit to I
lend Size I
Y
X
Specify the original size.
(1) Enter the original size.
• Touch the [X] key and enter the horizontal dimension
(X) of the original with the ェ J Q keys.
• Touch the [Y] key and enter the vertical dimension (Y)
of the original with the Q Q keys.
(A) To return the original size to the default size, touch
the [Size Reset] key.
(B) To automatically enlarge or reduce the image size to
the send size, touch the [Fit to Send Size] key. Do not
touch this key if you wish to scan the original at the
original size that you entered.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• The send size is automatically selected based on the original size you entered.
• After selecting Card Shot, you can touch the [Original] key in the base screen to change the original scan size or the
send size. In this case, the screen of step 3 appears when you touch the scan size key. For the procedure for
setting the send size, see "Specifying the send size of the original" (page 4-52).
Press the [START] key to scan the front of the card.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
Turn the card over so that the back is face down, and press the [START] key to
scan the back of the card.
Before scanning the back of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key in the touch panel to change the exposure.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
Contents
4-83
FACSIMILE
Place next original . (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start] .
When finished, press [Read-End] .
Touch the [Read-End] key.
If you will continue by scanning the front of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key to change the exposure,
resolution, scan size, and send size.
• The ratio cannot be specified and "Rotation Sending Setting" cannot be selected.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
@To cancel Card Shot-
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
4-84
Contents
FACSIMILE
Select job build mode.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key,
瞭 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
(2) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
Contents
Fax/Special Modes
[HP
1
i.
画
Mixed Size
Original
I；
i Quick File
SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES
(Job Build)
This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic
document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. Use this function when there are more original pages
than can be placed at once in the auto document feeder.
When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The settings that you
select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
B Enter the destination fax number.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
s a
J
Q
4-85
FACSIMILE
Press the [START] key to scan the first set.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®).
Insert the next set of originals and press the [START] key.
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)). All scanned data will be cleared.
Touch the [Read-End] key.
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when Job Build is used in combination with 2in1 in the special modes, only the exposure
can be changed when scanning each even-numbered page of the original pages.
• If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the transmission will be canceled.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
@To cancel Job Build....
Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
Contents
4-86
FACSIMILE
TRANSMITTING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original)
This feature lets you scan and transmit originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) size
originals mixed together with 11" x 17" (A3) size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically
detects the size of each original.
This feature can only be used with the following combinations of original sizes:
• 11M x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14" •11" x17M and 8-1/2" x 13" • 11" x 17" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
•A3 and B4 • A3 and B5 • B4 and A4 • A4 and B5
• A4R and B5 • B4 and A4R • B4 and A5 • B5 and A5
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals with the corners aligned together in the far
left corner of the document feeder tray.
Enter the destination fax number.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
Select the mixed size original setting.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key,
暖 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
(2) Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key so that
it is highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
If an original scan size has been specified, a message will appear when the [Mixed Size Original] key is touched. To
enable the Mixed Size Original setting, change the scan size setting to auto and then touch the [Mixed Size Original]
key again.
Contents
4-87
FACSIMILE
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
• Once mixed size originals has been selected, an original scan size cannot be specified.
• When mixed size originals are set, automatic duplex scanning cannot be used. (When using the MX-M283N.)
• When the mixed size original setting is selected, rotation sending does not operate.
@To cancel the mixed size original setting...
Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
The original feeding mode can be set to always scan mixed size originals.
4-88
Contents
FACSIMILE
Fax/Special Modes
D
s
Dual Page
Scan
] 匡
Job
Build
(o
Mixed Size
Original
IfSl Original |
しし 幽 Count | し
Select slow scan mode.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key,
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
(2) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
Contents
FAXING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Adjust the document guides slowly.
\^\ If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.
Enter the destination fax number.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
0 0
4-89
FACSIMILE
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
©
When this function is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.
To cancel slow scan mode...
Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
This is used to have scanning always take place using slow scan mode.
Contents
4-90
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count)
The number of scanned original sheets can be counted and displayed before transmission. Checking the number of
scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes.
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
B Enter the destination fax number.
暖 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
(2
!) (3)
且
Fax/Special Modes
a 「念，
Program
Erase
| lii^Scan96
Timer
| \M 2ini
| Card Shot 2
(1 bSm
Mixed Size
| 響 Original
f Slow Scan
| hJ Mode LJ_J
File
| Quick File '■ )
Select the original count function.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
(2) Touch the [Original Count] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation. All scanned data will be cleared.
Contents
4-91
FACSIMILE
When scanning ends, check the number
of original sheets scanned and touch the
[OK] key.
Transmission will begin.
• When Job Build mode is used, the confirmation message will
appear after the [Read-End] key is touched.
• The message on the screen shows the number of sheets
scanned in (A), and the number of pages (sheet sides)
scanned in (B). For example, if both sides of one original
sheet are scanned, "1" will appear in (A) and "2" will appear
in (B).
If this step is not performed for one minute while the above confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and
settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the
image will not be reserved for transmission.
If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets...
Touch the [Cancel] key and then touch the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings
and destination settings will not be cleared. Insert the original sheets in the automatic document feeder again and
press the [START] key to re-scan.
©
When original count is enabled for a broadcast transmission that includes destinations of different modes, original count will
operate in all modes.
To cancel the Original Sheet Count function...
Touch the [Original Count] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Original Count Setting
This can be enabled to have the number of original sheets always counted. The setting can be enabled separately for each
mode.
Contents
4-92
FACSIMILE
STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (Verif. Stamp)
This function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder， allowing you to verify that all
originals were correctly scanned.
Position of stamp
An "O" mark is
stamped
in fluorescent
pink.
To use this function, the optional stamp unit must be installed.
B Enter the destination fax number.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
(3) (2) (4)
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Select "Verif. Stamp".
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the
screens.
(3) Touch the [Verif. Stamp] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
Contents
4-93
FACSIMILE
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®) to cancel the operation.
• When two-sided originals are used, the front of each original is stamped twice. (MX-M283N only)
• If an error occurs during scanning, an original that was not scanned may be stamped.
• When the "〇" mark that is stamped on originals starts to become faint, replace the stamp cartridge. For the procedure for
replacing the stamp cartridge, see "REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE11 (page 1-68) in M1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE".
@To cancel the stamp function...
Touch the [Verif. Stamp] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Verification Stamp
This setting is used to always have originals stamped.
4-94
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT
(Transaction Report)
A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when a transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission
is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of other party,
time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
暖 INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN (page 4-135)
Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the system settings; however, you can temporarily select
different conditions for a transmission. To change the transaction report print conditions at the time of transmission,
follow the steps below.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Enter the destination fax number.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the H S keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Transaction Report] key,
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
Select print conditions.
(1) Select the print conditions.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows:
"Always Print": A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails.
"Print at Error": A transaction report is printed when transmission fails.
"Do not Print": Do not print a transaction report.
• When the [Print Original Image] checkbox is selected 0， part of the transmitted original is included on the
transaction report.
• Even if the [Print Original Image] checkbox is selected ゾ I， the original cannot be printed when speaker dialing,
direct transmission, polling reception, or F-code transmission is used.
Contents
4-95
FACSIMILE
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®) to cancel the operation.
For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations.
广、 To cancel the transaction report setting...
\3 / Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
/^\ • System Settings (Administi
This is used to set the conditi
The factory default setting is
Single Sending: Print Out A
Broadcastina： | Print Out/
Receiving: Print Out A
Confidential Reception (fax
• System Settings (Administi
The first page of a transmitter
^ator): Tr
ons for pi
ansaction Report Print Select Setting
rinting transaction reports.
1.
1 I
II Report/I Print Out Error Report Only |/n0 Printed Report
Ml Report /Print Out Error Report Only/No Printed Report
II Report/Print Out Error Report Onlv/lNo Printed Report |
mode): Print Out Notice Page /No Printed Report
，ator): Original Print on Transaction Report
d fax can be printed on the transmission report.
4-96
Contents
FACSIMILE
ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO
FAXES (Own number sending)
Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender fax number, number of pages) is automatically added to the
top of each fax page you transmit.
Example of the sender information printed
, APR/04/201 0/Sat 3:00 PM , ,AAAAAM FAX No. 012345 6789, , P.001/001,
(1) (2) (3) ⑷
(1) Date, time: The date and time of transmission.
(2) Sender name: The sender name programmed in the machine.
(3) Sender fax number: The sender fax number programmed in the machine.
(4) Page numbers: Page number/ total pages (the total page number is only printed
when the fax is sent by memory transmission.)
Information programmed in Own Number Sending
Date, time: Adjust the setting in "Clock Adjust" in the system settings.
Sender name, sender fax number: Program the sender name and fax number in "Sender Data Registration" in the system
settings (administrator). If you intend to use own number sending, be sure to configure
this information.
Page numbers: Select whether or not to include page numbers in "Printing Page Number at Receiver" in
the system settings (administrator).
Page numbers appear in the format "page number/ total pages". Only the page number
is printed when manual transmission or quick online transmission is used.
System Settings (Administrator): Date/Own Number Print Position Setting
This is used to set the position where the sender information is printed. The sender information can be printed outside the
scanned original image or inside the scanned original image.
Outside scanned image (factory default setting)
H — Sender
information
— Originals
00000
Inside scanned image
y\ — Sender
information
00000
— Originals
The transmitted image length will be: length of sender
information + length of original image. When the fax is
printed by the receiving machine, it may be reduced or
divided onto two pages.
The sender information is printed inside the original
image, and thus the transmitted image length is the
length of the original. Note that the sender information
will overlap part of the original image (the overlapped
part of the original image will not appear).
4-97
Contents
FACSIMILE
TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER
INFORMATION (Own Name Select)
You can select the sender information printed on a transmitted fax from a list of stored senders.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the 3 S keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Own Name Select] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
Select the sender information.
(1) Touch the desired sender information key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Fax/Special Modes
fe = I [
Transaction
Report
Memory Box
哭 I
w
Polling 2
a
a
Touch the [OK] key.
System Settings (Administrator): Registration of Own Name Select
This is used to store sender information for Own Name Select.
Contents
4-98
FACSIMILE
CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING
RECEPTION (Polling)
The Polling function allows the receiving machine to call the transmitting machine and initiate reception of a document in
that machine.
Because the receiving machine initiates reception of a document, this is called "Polling Reception".
document is transmitted.
Make sure that an original is not placed in the machine when using the polling reception function.
(3) (2) (4)
Select polling reception.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the
screens.
(3) Touch the [Polling] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key,
Enter the destination fax number.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 4-16)
• Multiple fax numbers can be entered.
Polling will take place in the order that the numbers were entered.
Polling multiple machines is called "Serial Polling".
Up to 500 fax numbers can be entered. In this procedure, one-touch keys that have a sub-address and passcode
cannot be used.
• To enter multiple fax numbers, touch the [Next Address] key after entering a fax number and enter the next fax
number.
Contents
4-99
FACSIMILE
Press the [START] key.
Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax.
• Polling reception can be used in combination with the timer function to poll at any specified time, such as at night or when
you are not present (Only one timer polling reception can be set.).
• This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
• The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of the polling reception.
@To cancel polling reception...
Touch the [Polling] key in the screen of step 1 so that it is not highlighted.
Contents
4-100
FACSIMILE
INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION MANUALLY
Use this procedure when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting, such as when using a fax
information service.
• Make sure that an original is not placed in the machine when using the polling reception function.
• This function cannot be used to poll multiple machines (serial polling).
(1)
Enter the destination fax number.
(1) Touch the [Speaker] key,
You will hear the dial tone through the machine's speaker.
(2) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(3) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
A group key cannot be used.
• In addition to specification by one-touch key, a destination can also be specified using a search number. You can
also directly enter a fax number with the numeric keys or look up a destination in a global address book. For more
information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS11 (page 4-16).
• After touching the [Speaker] key, you can touch the [Speaker Volume] key to adjust the volume of the speaker. The
speaker volume changes each time the [Speaker Volume] key is touched. Adjust the volume to the desired level.
(3) (2)
Fax/Special Modes
OK
2
[ Transaction
Report
f Own Name 1
Select
1 Memory Box | : P
oiling
1
Receive the fax.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
暖 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the
screens.
(3) When you hear the fax tone, touch the
[Polling] key.
The fax is received.
• This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
• The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of the polling reception.
Contents
4-101
FACSIMILE
SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER
MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE
(Polling Memory)
Sending a document that has been scanned into memory when another machine polls your machine is called "Polling
Memory".
Prior to polling, the document that will be faxed to the other machine must be scanned into a polling memory box.
This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
(1) Requests fax transmission.
RESTRICTING POLLING ACCESS (Polling security)
To only allow specified machines to poll your machine, you can restrict polling to machines whose programmed sender
fax number matches a fax number stored in your machine as a polling passcode number. This is called "Polling
Security".
To use this function, first store polling passcode numbers (the sender fax numbers programmed in the other machines)
in the machine's system settings, and then enable polling security.
Up to 10 fax numbers can be stored as polling passcode numbers.
System Settings (Administrator): Fax Polling Security
This is used to enable polling security. This is used to store fax numbers as polling passcode numbers.
4-102
Contents
FACSIMILE
SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORY
Follow these steps to scan a document into the memory box for polling transmission (Public Box).
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
Touch the [Data Store] key.
Touch the [Public Box] key.
Specify the number of polling times.
(1) Touch the key for the desired number of
times.
Touch the [Once] key if you want the document cleared
from memory after it is transmitted. Touch the [Unlimited]
key to allow polling an unlimited number of times.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Contents
4-103
FACSIMILE
^j''Auto Reception
Fax Memory : 100%
Select image settings and special
modes.
•A program, timer setting, transaction report, polling, verif. stamp and filing cannot be selected.
• To return to the screen of step 4, touch the [Memory Box List] key.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®) while the original is being scanned.
If another document remains in the memory box (Public Box), the newly scanned document is added to the previous
document. In this case, the number of polling times will be the number set for the newly scanned document.
4-104
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE PUBLIC BOX
You can check the document stored in the machine's public box for memory polling.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key,
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
Memory Box | Exit
Polling Memory
Confidential
Reception
1 Data Store j 1 Data Check j | Delete Data j
| Data Check J
Touch the [Data Check] key.
Touch the [Public Box] key.
When nothing is stored in the Public Box, the [Public Box] key will be grayed out.
Press [Image Check] to check data.
Press [Print] to output data.
Image Check I
Touch the [Image Check] key.
The content of the document can be viewed in the image check
screen. For information on the image check screen, see
"IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-63).
To print the document, touch the [Print] key.
Contents
4-105
FACSIMILE
Touch the [Public Box] key.
When nothing is stored in the Public Box, the [Public Box] key will be grayed out.
Delete the data in the memory box?
Press [ Image Check] to check data.
Image Check j i No
Touch the [Yes] key.
• The document is deleted and you return to the screen of step 3.
• You can touch the [Image Check] key to check the image in
the touch panel before deleting it. For information on the
image check screen, see "IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page
4-63).
©
To cancel the deletion...
Touch the [No] key. You will return to the screen of step 3.
Contents
DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE PUBLIC BOX
Delete a document from the Public Box when it is no longer needed.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the U S keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key,
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
Memory Box | Exit
Polling Memory
Confidential
Reception
1 Data Store j 1 Data Check j | Delete Data j
| Data Check J
Touch the [Delete Data] key.
4-106
FACSIMILE
PERFORMING F-CODE
COMMUNICATION
This section explains how to perform F-code communication operations. F-code communication is possible with
machines of other manufacturers that also support F-code communication.
F-CODE COMMUNICATION
Exchange of confidential documents (confidential communication), retrieval (polling) and distribution (polling memory) of
information, distribution of information to multiple destinations (relay broadcast transmission) are possible with other
machines that support F-code communication.
An F-code* is specified in each communication, enabling a higher level of security.
* F-code is a communication function based on the G3 standard of the ITU-T.
The ITU-T is a United Nations organization that establishes communications standards. It is a department of the International
Telecommunication Union (ITU), which coordinates global telecommunications networks and services.
HOW F-CODES WORK
A fax that is transmitted with an F-code is received to the memory box in the receiving machine specified by the F-code
(sub-address and passcode). If the F-code sent by the transmitting machine does not match the F-code in the receiving
machine, reception will not take place.
— F~Cviu©
Sub-address: A A A A A A A A
Passcode: XXXXXXXX
The products of other manufacturers may use different terms for "sub-address" and "passcode". If you need to contact the
operator of another machine regarding sub-addresses and passcodes, refer to the terms used by the ITU-T in the table below.
The machine
ITU-T
F-code polling memory box
F-code confidential box
F-code relay broadcast
memory box
Sub Address
SEP
SUB
SUB
Passcode
PWD
SID
SID
[^\ An F-code consists of a sub-address and passcode, and cannot be longer than 20 digits.
4-107
Contents
FACSIMILE
CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR
F-CODE COMMUNICATION
Before the F-code communication function can be used, special memory boxes must be created using "F-Code Memory
Box" in the system settings.
A box name and F-code (sub-address and passcode) are programmed in each box， and an F-code communication
function is assigned to each box.
After you have created a memory box, inform the other party of the sub-address and passcode of the box.
To use the following F-code communication functions, F-code memory boxes must be created in your machine.
F-code confidential reception, F-code polling memory, F-code relay broadcast transmission
To use the following F-code communication functions, F-code memory boxes must be created in the other machine.
F-code confidential transmission, F-code polling reception, F-code relay request transmission
System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-100)
This is used to configure memory boxes for F-code communication.
• Up to 100 memory boxes can be created.
• The memory box name cannot be longer than 18 characters, and the sub-address and passcode cannot be longer than 20
digits.
F-CODE DIALING
When performing an F-code operation, the F-code (sub-address and passcode) is appended to the fax number that is
dialed. Check the F-code (sub-address and passcode) programmed in the memory box in the other machine before you
perform an F-code transmission. It is convenient to store an F-code together with the fax number in a one-touch key or
group key.
0123456789 / AAAAAAAA / XXXXXXXX
i _ 1 1 __ i i _ i i __ 1 1 _ i
Fax number of other * Sub Address * Passcode
machine
Touch the [Sub Address]
key in the screen to enter
When the following F-code functions are used, your machine dials the other machine.
F-code confidential transmission, F-code polling reception, F-code relay request transmission
When the following F-code functions are used, the other machine dials your machine.
F-code confidential reception, F-code polling memory, F-code relay broadcast transmission
• If the destination machine does not have a passcode configured in the F-code, do not enter a passcode when dialing that
machine.
• F-code communication cannot be performed when using the speaker or performing manual transmission.
System Settings: Address Book (page 7-16)
This is used to store and edit one-touch keys and group keys.
Contents
4-108
FACSIMILE
CONFIDENTIAL COMMUNICATION USING
F-CODES
By sending a fax to an F-code memory box (confidential) in the receiving machine (your machine or the other machine),
the sender can direct the transmission specifically to the user of the box.
This is convenient for sending sensitive documents that you do not wish people other than the recipient to see, or when
the receiving machine is shared by multiple departments.
To print an F-code confidential fax, the print passcode must be entered.
Receiver
Sender
4-109
Contents
FACSIMILE
⑶， ⑼
Enter the destination fax number.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
If the destination is not stored in the address book, enter
the fax number with the numeric keys.
If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch
key, the following sub-steps are not necessary. Go to step 3.
(3) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
7" appears.
(4) Enter the sub-address with the numeric
keys,
(5) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
7" appears.
(6) Enter the passcode with the numeric keys.
©
If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the other machine, (5) and (6) are not necessary.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
This function can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. This function can also be
stored in a program.
Contents
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
Follow the steps below to send a confidential fax by adding an F-code to the fax number.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
十 a a
4-110
FACSIMILE
CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F-CODE
CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION
When an F-code confidential fax is sent to your machine, the fax is received to the memory box specified by the F-code.
To check received faxes, enter the print passcode.
The machine rings and the fax is
received.
A beep sounds when reception ends.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the 3 S keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
Touch the [Data Check] key.
Memory Box -
- Confidential Reception
1 ♦ Back |
|box 1
oj [box 2 门
ej
[box 3
[box 5
j [Box 6
1 上 1
a
Touch the key of the memory box
containing the confidential fax.
"Qj" appears in the keys of memory boxes that have received
faxes. The keys of memory boxes that have not received faxes
are grayed out and cannot be selected.
Contents
4-111
FACSIMILE
Enter the print passcode with the
numeric keys.
As each digit is entered, ■■-" changes to ■■氺 ■■■
Take care to enter the correct print passcode. If you make a mistake, a message will appear and you will return to the
entry screen. You can touch the [Cancel] key to return to step 4.
Press [ Image Check] to check data.
Press [Print] to output data.
Touch the [Image Check] key.
The content of the document can be viewed in the image check
screen. For information on the image check screen, see
"IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page 4-63).
To print the document, touch the [Print] key.
• The confidential fax is automatically given priority in the print job queue.
• The fax is automatically cleared from the memory box after printing.
•If you forget the print passcode...
There is no way to check a forgotten passcode on the machine. Take care not to forget the passcode. In the event that you
forget the passcode or need to verify the passcode, contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
System Settings (Administrator): Transaction Report Print Select Setting
You can specify whether or not a transmission report is printed when an F-code confidential fax is received.
4-112
Contents
FACSIMILE
POLLING RECEPTION USING F-CODES
This function enables your machine to call another machine and initiate reception of a fax stored in an F-code memory
box (polling memory) in the other machine. During the polling operation, your machine must correctly specify the F-code
(sub-address and passcode) configured in the other machine or polling reception will not take place.
Transmission request (polling)
using an F-code
• Verify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) of the memory box in the other machine before you perform F-code polling
reception.
• Do not place an original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass when using this function.
• The receiving machine bears the phone charges of the transmission.
(3) (2) (4)
Select polling.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
瞭 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
(2) Touch the 33 keys to switch through the
screens.
(3) Touch the [Polling] key so that it is
highlight.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
4-113
Contents
FACSIMILE
Sort Address
Freq. Jl ABCD || EFGH II IJKL || MNOP 儿 QRSTu|l VWXYZ Jletc . |
IT
《Auto Reception
Fax Memory： 100%
⑶， ⑼
Enter the destination fax number.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
If the destination is not stored in the address book, enter
the fax number with the numeric keys.
If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch
key, the following sub-steps are not necessary. Go to step 3.
(3) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
7" appears.
(4) Enter the sub-address with the numeric
keys,
(5) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
7" appears.
(6) Enter the passcode with the numeric keys.
If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the other machine, (5) and (6) are not necessary.
Press the [START] key.
Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax.
® :
©
Polling multiple machines (serial polling) is not possible.
F-code polling reception can be used in combination with a timer setting. Only one polling reception operation with a timer
setting can be stored at a time.
暖 SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME (Timer) (page 4-77)
To cancel polling...
Touch the [Polling] key in the screen of step 1 so that it is not highlighted.
Contents
1 j a a
4-114
FACSIMILE
POLLING MEMORY TRANSMISSION USING
F-CODES
When your machine receives a transmission request from another machine, this function sends a fax stored in an
F-code memory box (polling memory) in your machine to that machine. The other machine must correctly specify the
F-code configured in your machine or transmission will not take place.
The document to be transmitted must be scanned into an F-code polling memory box.
Transmission request (polling)
using an F-code
System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-100)
This is used to create memory boxes (polling memory) for F-code polling memory transmission.
A memory box name, sub-address, and passcode are programmed in each box.
SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A MEMORY BOX FOR
F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION
Follow these steps to scan a document into a memory box (polling memory) for F-code polling transmission.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
暖 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
4-115
Contents
FACSIMILE
Touch the [Data Store] key.
Memory Box
- Data Store
f ♦ Back
Public Box
("box 1
-Tk
j [Box 2
□
[box 3
<7
] [box 4
J +
(box 5
j [Box 6
- ' m
[box 7
j [box 8
1 」
(box 9
j [box 10
コ S
[Box 11
j | Box 12
□
Touch the key of the F-code memory
polling box.
(1) (2)
Memory Box - Data Store
Specify the number of polling times.
(1) Touch the key for the desired number of
times.
Touch the [Once] key if you want the document cleared
from memory after it is transmitted. Touch the [Unlimited]
key to allow polling an unlimited number of times.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Memory Box - Data Store
k Memory Box
[ List
[ Original j scan: Send:
[ Exposure ]
( Resolution j Standard
[ Special Modes |
^*^uto Reception
Fax Memory ： 100%
Select image settings and special
modes.
•A program, timer setting, transaction report, polling, verif. stamp and filing cannot be selected.
•To return to the screen of step 4, touch the [Memory Box List] key.
Contents
4-116
FACSIMILE
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) while the original is being scanned.
•If other documents have already been stored in the memory box, the document is added to the previously stored
documents.
• The factory default setting for the number of polling times is "Once" (after the document is transmitted to the receiving
machine, it is automatically cleared).
4-117
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE F-CODE MEMORY
POLLING BOX
You can check the document stored in the F-code memory polling box.
A document in a memory box cannot be printed while the document is being transmitted.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
Memory Box [ Exit ]
Polling Memory
Confidential
Reception
J Data Store j J Data Check j J Delete Data j
| Data Check j
方
Touch the [Data Check] key.
Memory Box -
- Data Check
| ♦ Back ]
Public Box ^|]
[Box 1
=ru —
■ j [Box 2
[Box 3
IOj [box 4
[box 5
] [Box 6
[Box 7
] [Box 8
(box 9
] [Box 10
コ a
[Box 11
] [Box 12
□
Touch the key of the F-code memory
polling box where the document you
wish to print is stored.
Q appears in keys that have documents stored.
Press [ Image Check] to check data.
Press [Print] to output data.
I ( Print j f
Touch the [Image Check] key.
The content of the document can be viewed in the image check
screen. For information on the image check screen, see
"IMAGE CHECK SCREEN11 (page 4-63).
To print the document, touch the [Print] key.
Contents
4-118
FACSIMILE
DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F-CODE
POLLING TRANSMISSION
When a document in an F-code memory polling box is no longer needed, follow the steps below to delete it.
A document in a memory box cannot be deleted while the document is being transmitted.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Memory Box] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 4-69)
Touch the [Delete Data] key.
Memory Box
- Delete Data
丨 f Back ]
Public Box Q J
[Box 1
I3lj [box 2
[box 3
Jb
3lj (box 4
bbbbbi^b t-
[box 5
] [Box 6
- ) m
[Box 7
] [Box 8
コ s
[box 9
j [Box 10
コ 3
[Box 11
j [Box 12
□
Touch the key of the F-code memory
polling box that has the document you
wish to delete.
Q appears in keys that have documents stored.
Delete the data in the memory box?
Press [ Image Check] to check data.
Image Check | f No
Touch the [Yes] key.
• The document is deleted and you return to the screen of step 3.
• Printing will begin.
You can touch the [Image Check] key to check the image in
the touch panel before deleting it. For information on the
image check screen, see "IMAGE CHECK SCREEN" (page
4-63).
@To cancel the deletion...
Touch the [No] key. You will return to the screen of step 3 without deleting the document.
Contents
4-119
FACSIMILE
RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING
F-CODES
This function is used to send a fax to an F-code relay broadcast memory box in another machine and have that machine
relay the fax to multiple end receiving machines.
When the end receiving machines are far from your machine, sending the fax to a relay machine that is close to the end
receiving machines can help reduce phone charges. A relay request transmission can be used in combination with the
timer transmission function to further reduce phone costs.
隊 SENDING A FAX AT A SPECIFIED TIME (Timer) (page 4-77)
The machine
Relay machine
F-code relay broadcast
memory box
The fax is transmitted to
each of the end receiving
machines programmed in
the F-code relay
broadcast memory box.
Transmission
End receiving
machines
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
-
曙
Transmission specifying an F-code
Sub-address: AAAAAAAA
Passcode: XXXXXXXX
Box name: BBBB
Sub-address: AAAAAAAA
Passcode: XXXXXXXX
End receiving machines are
programmed in this box
』 - ^ V
A
1111111
1111111
=ti
/ ' - s
n
Verify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) and end receiving machines programmed in the relay broadcast memory
box in the relay machine before you perform an F-code relay request transmission.
• Before this function can be used, the end receiving machines must be programmed in the F-code relay broadcast memory
box in the relay machine.
• The end receiving machines do not need to support F-code communication.
• This function can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. An F-code relay request
transmission can also be stored in a program.
• Your machine (the machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission) only bears the cost of sending the fax to the
relay machine. The relay machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the end receiving machines.
• When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot
be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)
System Settings: F-Code Memory Box (page 7-100)
/ This is used to create memory boxes for F-code relay broadcast transmission.
A memory box name, sub-address, passcode, and end receiving machines are programmed in each box.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
□ □□r
4-120
Contents
FACSIMILE
Sort Address
Freq. Jl ABCD || EFGH II IJKL || MNOP 儿 QRSTu|l VWXYZ Jletc . |
IT
《Auto Reception
Fax Memory： 100%
⑶， ⑼
Enter the destination fax number.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
If the destination is not stored in the address book, enter
the fax number with the numeric keys.
If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch
key, the following sub-steps are not necessary. Go to step 3.
(3) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
7" appears.
(4) Enter the sub-address with the numeric
keys,
(5) Touch the [Sub Address] key.
7" appears.
(6) Enter the passcode with the numeric keys.
If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the other machine, (5) and (6) are not necessary.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
When the relay machine receives the fax, it will automatically transmit the fax to each of the end receiving machines
programmed in the memory box.
©
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®) while the original is being scanned.
Contents
1 j a a
4-121
FACSIMILE
RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION
USING F-CODES
When your machine receives an F-code relay request transmission, the fax is received to an F-code relay broadcast
memory box in your machine. Your machine then relays the fax to each of the end receiving machines programmed in
the memory box. Transmission to the end receiving machines takes place automatically.
The other
machine
The machine
F-code relay broadcast
memory box
Transmission specifying an F-code
The fax is transmitted to
each of the end receiving
machines programmed in
the F-code relay
broadcast memory box.
Transmission
End receiving
machines
n
Box name:
BBBB
Sub-address:
AAAAAAAA
Passcode:
XXXXXXXX
End receiving machines are
programmed in this box
Sub-address: AAAAAAAA
Passcode: XXXXXXXX
Prior to the operation, inform the requesting party of the sub-address and passcode of the relay broadcast memory box in
your machine.
Program the end receiving machines in the F-code relay broadcast memory box when you create the box in your machine.
暖 CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR F-CODE COMMUNICATION (page 4-108)
The end receiving machines do not need to support F-code communication.
The machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission only bears the cost of sending the fax to your machine (the relay
machine). Your machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the end receiving machines.
When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot
be printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)
□ □□「
□ □□r
4-122
Contents
FACSIMILE
USING AN EXTENSION PHONE
This section explains how to use an extension phone to make voice calls and receive a fax after talking with the other
party.
CONNECTING AND USING AN EXISTING
PHONE (Extension Phone Connection)
You can connect an existing extension phone to the machine.
The phone can be used for voice calls and to start fax reception on the machine.
As an example, you can make a phone call using the existing phone, speak to the other party, and then press the
[START] key to fax an original that has been placed to that party. You can also press the [START] key when an original
is not placed to receive a fax.
Connect the extension phone as shown below.
Extension phone jack
r
Attach the provided core to
your extension telephone cord
and then connect the cord to
the machine.
cord is securely connected.
• Connect an extension phone that has a modular jack. Use standard phone line cable to connect the phone. If other than a
standard phone line cable is used, the connection may not work correctly.
•If the plug on the telephone line cord does not fit into the jack on your extension phone, contact your dealer or nearest
SHARP Service Department.
4-123
Contents
FACSIMILE
RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON
THE EXTENSION PHONE (Remote Reception)
Follow the steps below if you need to start fax reception after answering a call and speaking on the extension phone.
If you are on a pulse-dial (rotary) line, set the extension phone to issue tone signals.
When you hear ringing, answer the call
on the extension phone.
Signal the machine to start fax
reception.
Press © © © on the keypad of the extension phone.
Replace the extension phone.
The machine sounds a beep when reception ends.
• System Settings: Receive Setting (page 7-102)
To use remote fax reception, set this setting to "Manual Reception".
• System Settings (Administrator): Remote Reception Number Setting
This is used to change the number used for remote fax reception. The factory default setting is "5".
MAKING AND RECEIVING PHONE CALLS
You can make and receive calls like normal on your extension phone. A phone call can also be made by dialing on the
machine.
Contents
4-124
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE STATUS OF FAX
JOBS
This section explains how to check the status of reserved transmission jobs and received faxes.
JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Reserved transmissions and received faxes are referred to as jobs here.
Example: Pressing the key in fax mode
JOB STATUS
/• \
ni
V 0123456789
V
4 V BBB BBB
5 .，秘 Broadcast
? Internet Fax I
Pages Status
10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting
:10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
10:30 04/01 000/010 Waiting
：10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting
温
f Stop/Delete I
The job status display is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the job
status screen.
4-125
Contents
FACSIMILE
(1) Mode select tabs
Use these tabs to select the job status screen of each
mode.
(2) Job status screen selector key
Touch this key to switch between the job queue screen
and the completed jobs screen.
(3) Job queue screen [Detail] key
This shows detailed information on a broadcast
transmission or serial polling job that is reserved or in
progress. Select the key of the desired job in the job
queue screen (6) and then touch the [Detail] key.
^ CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN
PROGRESS (page 4-130)
(4) [Priority] key
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.
^ GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX JOB
(page 4-133)
(5) [Stop/Delete] key
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.
^ CANCELING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A
RESERVED FAX (page 4-132)
4-126
JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of two screens: the job queue screen, which shows reserved jobs and the job currently in
progress， and the completed jobs screen. To switch between the two screens, touch the job status screen selector key
((2) below).
Job queue screen
(1)
■ 总 Print Job J Scan to J 虔 Fax Job | 慘 Internet
Completed job screen
(1)
Job queue screen
Jobs are shown as keys in the order they were reserved.
Each key shows information on a job and its current
status.
瞭 Job key display (page 4-127)
Completed jobs screen [Detail] key
This shows detailed information on the results of
completed broadcast transmission jobs, completed serial
polling jobs, and completed jobs that used the document
filing function. Select the key of the desired job in the
completed jobs screen (9) and then touch the [Detail]
key.
From the details screen, it is possible to resend the fax to
destinations to which transmission was not successful.
隊 CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS (page 4-131)
[Call] key
Touch this key to retrieve and use a transmission or
reception job that was stored using the document filing
function.
Completed jobs screen
This shows up to 99 completed transmission/reception
jobs. A description of each job and the result (status) are
shown.
Broadcast transmission jobs, serial polling jobs, received
fax forwarding jobs, and transmission/reception jobs that
used the document filing function are indicated as keys.
Contents
\17
2 3 4 5
/V
FACSIMILE
Job key display
The following information is shown in the job queue keys and completed job keys that appear in the job status screen.
10:22 04/01
000/004
Waiting
(1) (2)
(1) Indicates the number (position) of the job in the job
queue.
When the job currently being transmitted is finished, each
job moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.
(2) Mode icon
This indicates the type of job. In the completed jobs
screen, a color bar indicating black & white will appear
next to the icon. (However, the color bar icon does not
appear in the key of a job that used document filing or in
the key of a transmission/reception job that was
canceled.)
Icon
Job type
V
Fax transmission
%
Fax reception
Broadcast transmission, Serial polling
or Inbound routing
¥
PC-Fax transmission
(3) Name of other party
For a transmission, the name or fax number of the
destination. For a reception, the fax number of the
sending party.
In the case of a broadcast transmission or serial polling
operation, "Broadcast" or "Multi Polling" appears together
with a broadcast control number (4-digits).
(4) Time reserved / Time started
In the job queue screen, the date and time the job was
reserved. In the completed jobs screen, the date and
time the job was started.
(5) Number of pages
Shows the number of pages transmitted / total number of
original pages.
(6) Status
Shows the job status.
• Job in progress
Message
Status
"Connecting"
Connecting
"Sending"
Sending
■■Receiving"
Receiving
"Tel11
Speaking with the other party using
an extension phone
"Stopped"
The job has been stopped.
■■Error"
An error occurred while the job was
being executed.
• Job waiting to be executed
Message
Status
"Waiting11
The job is waiting to be executed.
"Retry Mode11
The job is being re-attempted due
to a communication error or other
problem.
The day and
time are
displayed.
Timer transmission job (the
specified time is displayed)
4-127
Contents
FACSIMILE
• Completed job
Message
Status
"Send OK11
Transmission completed.
"In Memory"
Reception completed but the fax
has not been printed.
"Received11
Printed received fax data.
"Forward OK"
The received fax has been
forwarded.
"Stopped"
The job was stopped.
"Delete"
Deleted received data in the image
check screen.
"Number of
successful
transmission
destinations /
Total
destinations
OK11
Completion of a broadcast
transmission, serial polling or
inbound routing operation.
If transmission to 3 destinations
was successful out of a total of 5,
M003/005M will appear.
"No
response"
An error occurred because there
was no response from the
destination.
"Busy"
An error occurred because the
other party was busy.
"Reject
Reception"
A fax was sent from a party that
has been blocked by the anti junk
fax function.
"NGxxxxxx"
Transmission/reception was not
successful because a
communication error occurred (a
6-digit error code appears in
xxxxxx.)
"Error"
An error occurred while the job was
being executed.
4-128
Contents
FACSIMILE
OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB QUEUE IS
COMPLETED
When a normal transmission job is completed, it moves to the completed jobs screen and "Send OK" appears in the
status column.
Received faxes, timer transmission jobs, retry jobs, and forwarding jobs are handled in the job status screen as
explained below.
Fax reception jobs
While a fax is being received, "Receiving" appears in the job queue screen.
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears.
After the fax is printed, the status changes to "Printed".
Timer transmission jobs
A timer transmission job appears at the bottom of the job queue screen until the specified time arrives.
When the specified time arrives, the job is executed. If another job is in progress, the timer job is started when the other
job is completed.
Retry jobs
A retry job appears at the bottom of the job queue screen. When the set retry interval elapses, the job is executed. If
there are jobs reserved ahead of the retry job, the retry job is reserved at the bottom of the job queue and executed
when its turn arrives.
Fax reception jobs when Inbound Routing is enabled
When Inbound Routing is enabled in the Web pages, fax reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print
setting.
暖 FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings) (page 4-65)
• Received fax is not printed
"Receiving" appears in the job queue screen while the fax is being received. When reception is completed, the job
moves to the job queue of the job status screen of scan mode.
• Received fax is printed
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears. After the fax is
printed, "Printed" appears. The job being sent is added to the job status screen of scan mode. When forwarding is
finished, "Forward OK" appears.
4-129
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN
PROGRESS
The detailed contents of a broadcast transmission or serial polling job can be displayed. Select (touch) the key of the job
that you wish to check and touch the [Detail] key. The job details screen will appear (see below).
The job name and progress (number of completed destinations / total destinations) appear at the top of the screen.
Touch a tab to display the information that appears on that tab. The following information appears on each tab.
Tab name
Information displayed
Fax Connecting
Information on the current destination appears.
Fax No.: The fax number of the destination.
Name: The name of the destination.
Number: The broadcast control number (3-digits).
Pages: Number of pages completed / total number of pages
Fax Waiting
This shows information on the destinations that are waiting. A broadcast control
number (3-digits) appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name of the other destination.
Status: The status of communication.
Failed
This shows information on destinations for which communication failed. A broadcast
control number (3-digits) appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of each destination.
Start Time: The time when communication began.
Status: The status of communication.
All Destinations
This shows all destinations specified in the job. A broadcast control number (3-digits)
appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of the destination.
Start time: The time at which communication began.
Status: The status of communication.
4-130
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS
You can check a list of the destinations, the destinations for which transmission failed, and other detailed information on
completed broadcast transmission jobs, received fax forwarding jobs, serial polling jobs, and jobs that used document
filing. Touch the key of the desired job in the completed jobs screen and touch the [Detail] key. The job detail screen
(see below) will appear.
The job name appears at the top of the job detail screen.
To view details on the job, touch one of the tabs. The following information appears on each tab.
Tab name
Information displayed
File
Information on a transmission/reception that used document filing.
To retrieve the file and use it, touch the [Call] key.
Failed
This shows information on destinations for which communication failed. A broadcast
control number (3-digits) appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of each destination.
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Description of failure (error)
The [Retry] key can be touched to re-attempt transmission to that destination.*
All Destinations
Shows all addresses specified in the job. A broadcast control number (3-digits)
appears in front of each destination.
Address: The name or fax number of each destination.
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Communication result
The [Retry] key can be touched to transmit to all destinations again.*
Recalling is not possible for a broadcast transmission that includes a Scan to FTP address, Scan to Network Folder
address, or Scan to Desktop address.
4-131
Contents
FACSIMILE
CANCELING A FAX IN PROGRESS OR A
RESERVED FAX
Follow the steps below to cancel a fax transmission that is in progress or a reserved fax job.
JOB STATUS
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
蟲 Print Job [ Scan to [ Fax Job 丨燈 Internet Fax]
\ 1 ^ Broadcast 10:00 ,04/01 020/003 Connecting j
1
1 丄
1 1
Complete
f 2 V 0123456789 10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting
( 3 ^ AAA AAA 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
[5 .•相 Broadcast 10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting
罕
(i)
Select the fax job that you wish to
cancel.
(1) Touch the key of the fax job to be canceled.
(2) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
Touch the [Yes] key.
A Delete the job?
V BBB BBB 10:30 04/01
If you do not wish to cancel the selected fax job...
Touch the [NO] key.
Printing of received faxes and forwarding jobs set using "Inbound Routing Settings" cannot be canceled.
暖 FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings) (page 4-65)
4-132
Contents
FACSIMILE
GIVING PRIORITY TO A RESERVED FAX
JOB
When multiple jobs are waiting to be transmitted, the jobs are normally transmitted in the order they were reserved.
If you need to give priority to a job and send it ahead of the other jobs, follow the steps below.
JOB STATUS
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
[ ^ Print Job \ Scan to | Fax Job | ^ Internet Fax I
Address Set Time Pages : Status
[ 1 M Broadcast 10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting j
1 Complete
f 2 V 0123456789 10:05 04/01 000/004 Waiting
f 3 V AAA AAA 10:22 04/01 000/004 Waiting
1
a
X | (1 Detail |
1
f 5 Broadcast 10:33 04/01 000/010 Waiting
\ Priority
f Stop/Delete]
i r
(i)
Select the fax job to which you wish to
give priority.
(1) Touch the key of the desired job.
(2) Touch the [Priority] key.
The selected job moves up to the position immediately
following the job in progress. The job will be executed
when the job in progress is completed.
If the job in progress is a broadcast transmission job or a serial polling job, the priority job will be transmitted between
destinations of the broadcast transmission or serial polling job. However, if the priority job is a broadcast transmission job or
a serial polling job, it will be executed after the current job is completed.
4-133
Contents
FACSIMILE
CHECKING THE ACTIVITY LOG
(Image Sending Activity Report)
IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT
You can have the machine print a log of recent image sending activity (date, name of other party, time required, result,
etc.). The Image Sending Activity Report contains useful information such as the types of errors that occurred.
The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report.
You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 201,
or at a specified time (once a day only).
The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted.
System Settings (Administrator): Activity Report Print Select Setting
This is used to set the conditions for printing activity reports. The factory default setting is not to print.
The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 201 , or at a specified
time (once a day only).
4-134
Contents
FACSIMILE
INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN
Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction
report or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.
Examples of messages that are printed in the result column
Message
Explanation
OK
The transaction was completed normally.
G3
Communication took place in G3 mode.
ECM
Communication took place in G3 ECM mode.
SG3
Communication took place in Super G3 mode.
Forwarding
The received data was forwarded.
NO RESPONSE
No response from the receiving party.
BUSY
Transmission was not possible because the other party was already using the line.
CANCEL
The transmission was canceled while in progress.
MEMORY OVER
The memory became full during quick on-line transmission.
MEM. FULL
The memory became full during reception.
LENGTH OVER
The transmitted fax was over 1 .5 m (59") long and therefore could not be received.
ORIGINAL ERROR
Direct transmission or manual transmission was not successful because a misfeed occurred.
PASS# NG
The connection was broken because the polling passcode was not correct.
NO RX POLL
The machine that was polled does not have a polling function.
RX POLL FAIL
The other machine refused the polling operation, or your machine broke the connection when
polled because no data was in memory.
NO F-CODE POLL
The other machine refused an F-code polling operation, or your machine broke the connection
when polled because no data was in its F-code memory polling box.
RX POLL# NG
The connection was broken because the sub-address for F-code polling memory was not valid.
F POLL PASS# NG
The connection was broken because the passcode for F-code polling memory was not valid.
BOX NO. NG
Your machine broke the connection because the specified sub-address for an F-code memory
box does not exist.
F PASS# NG
Your machine broke the connection because the other machine sent an incorrect passcode for
F-code communication.
RX NO F-CODE POLL
F-code polling was attempted, however, the other machine did not have an F-code polling memory box.
NO F FUNC
F-code communication was attempted, however, the other machine does not support F-code
communication.
NO F-CODE
F-code communication was refused by the other machine because of an incorrect sub-address or
other reason.
M. BOX: [xxxxxx]
Data was received to a confidential or relay broadcast memory box, or data was sent from a
memory polling box.
The name of the memory box appears in [xxxxxx], and the type of F-code operation (relay request
reception, polling memory transmission, or confidential reception) appears in 氺 氺氺氺 氺氺.
FAIL xx (xxxx)
The transaction failed due to a communication error.
First 2 digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 99.
Last 4 digits of communication error number: Code for use by service technicians.
REJECTED
A fax was sent from a party from which reception is blocked.
4-135
Contents
CHAPTER 5
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and the Internet fax function.
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
NETWORK SCANNER
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION . 5-3
PREPARATIONS FOR USE AS A NETWORK
SCANNER . 5-5
• MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH
IS IN THE "ON" POSITION . 5-5
• CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME . 5-5
• STORING SENDER INFORMATION . 5-5
• SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB
PAGES . 5-6
• STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES
FOR EACH SCAN MODE IN THE
ADDRESS BOOK . 5-6
• STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN
TO DESKTOP . 5-7
• BEFORE SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP
ADDRESS . 5-8
BASE SCREEN . 5-9
• ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN . 5-12
• CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF
ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN THE ADDRESS
BOOK SCREEN . 5-13
SCAN SEND SEQUENCE . 5-15
ORIGINAL SIZES . 5-17
• TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES . 5-17
• THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL . 5-17
ENTERING DESTINATIONS
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK . 5-18
• RETRIEVING A DESTINATION . 5-19
• CHECKING AND DELETING THE
SELECTED DESTINATIONS . 5-20
USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION . 5-21
ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY . 5-22
• SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER . 5-23
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK . 5-25
USING THE RESEND FUNCTION . 5-27
TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE
SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE . 5-28
• CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT . 5-32
SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY
MODE . 5-35
• SPECIFY THE FOLDER IN WHICH THE
FILE WILL BE STORED . 5-39
• ENTERING A FILE NAME . 5-40
SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE . 5-41
• CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
AND BODY TEXT . 5-44
SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission) _ 5-47
• BROADCAST TRANSMISSIONS THAT
INCLUDE INTERNET FAX
DESTINATIONS . 5-50
SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A
COMPUTER (PC ■卜 Fax) . 5-52
IMAGE SETTINGS . 5-53
• AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH
SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided
Original) . 5-54
• SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE
AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) . 5-55
• CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND
ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE . 5-61
• CHANGING THE RESOLUTION . 5-63
• CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT . 5-64
• CHANGING THE COLOR MODE . 5-68
CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE
TRANSMITTED (Preview) . 5-69
• PREVIEW CHECK SCREEN . 5-70
5-1
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SPECIAL MODES
SPECIAL MODES . 5-71
STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) .... 5-73
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase) . 5-75
SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO
SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan) . 5-77
SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer Transmission) . 5-79
WHITENING FAINT COLORS IN THE IMAGE
(Suppress Background) . 5-81
SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO
A SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) . 5-83
SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE
(Job Build) . 5-86
SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original) . 5-88
SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode). . . 5-90
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE
TRANSMISSION (Original Count) . 5-92
STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (Verif. Stamp). . . 5-94
SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE
(2in1) . 5-96
CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report) … 5-99
CHECKING THE STATUS OF
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS
JOB STATUS SCREEN . 5-101
• JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN . 5-102
• OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB
QUEUE IS COMPLETED . 5-105
• CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS . 5-106
STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED
OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED . 5-107
GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN
TRANSMISSION JOB . 5-108
CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY
LOG (Image Sending Activity Report) . 5-109
• IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT . 5-109
• INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE
RESULT COLUMN . 5-109
INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS
RECEIVING AN INTERNET FAX . 5-110
• MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET
FAXES . 5-111
PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print) . 5-112
CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING . . 5-113
•IMAGE CHECK SCREEN . 5-114
FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET
FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS
(Inbound Routing Settings) . 5-115
• CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING
SETTINGS . 5-115
SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC
Scan Mode)
BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE . 5-119
METADATA DELIVERY
METADATA DELIVERY (Data Entry) . 5-124
PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA
TRANSMISSION . 5-125
• SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB
PAGES . 5-125
• METADATA TRANSMISSION FOR SCAN
TO DESKTOP . 5-125
TRANSMITTING METADATA . 5-126
• METADATA FIELDS . 5-128
5-2
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
NETWORK SCANNER
This section provides information that you should know before using the machine as a network scanner.
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
The network scanner function of the machine can be used to scan an original, create an image file, and send the file
over a network to a computer, FTP server, or other destination. Scanning is also possible from your computer using a
TWAIN-compliant application.
The network scanner function provides the following scanning modes.
Scan modes
瞭 SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE (page 5-28)
Scan to E-mail
The scanned file is sent to an e-mail address.
_ □
Scan to FTP
The scanned file is sent to a specified directory of an FTP server.
When the file is sent, it is also possible to send an e-mail to a previously stored e-mail
address to inform the recipient of the location of the file. (This is called "Scan to FTP
(Hyperlink)".)
Scan to Desktop
The scanned file is sent to a specified folder on your computer.
To use Scan to Desktop, software must be installed from the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner
Utilities" CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. For the system requirements of the
software, see the manual (PDF format) or the Readme file on the CD-ROM. For the
procedures for installing the software, see the "Sharpdesk Installation Guide".
Scan to Network Folder
The scanned file is sent to a Network Folder on a Windows computer on the same network
as the machine.
5-3
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
USB memory mode
隊 SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE (page 5-35)
USB Memory Scan
The scanned file is sent to and stored in a USB memory device connected to the machine.
Internet fax mode
To use the Internet fax function, the Internet fax expansion kit must be installed.
隊 SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE (page 5-41)
Internet fax transmission
The scanned file is sent as an Internet fax. Reception of Internet faxes is also possible.
The machine supports Direct SMTP， which lets you directly send Internet faxes within your
company without using a mail server.
PC scan mode
隊 SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) (page 5-119)
PC Scan
A TWAIN-compliant application on a computer connected to the same network as the
machine is used to scan a document or image.
To use PC Scan, the scanner driver must be installed from the "Software CD-ROM" that
accompanies the machine.
Operating systems that can be used are Windows 98/Me/ 2000 /XP/Server 2003/Vista/
Server 2008.
Data entry mode
The application integration module is required to use the metadata transmission function.
^ 隊 METADATA DELIVERY (page 5-124)
Metadata delivery
The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner function to append a metadata* file to a
scanned image file. (This is called metadata delivery.)
Information entered using the touch panel or automatically generated by the machine can be sent to a directory on an
FTP server or an application on a computer as a metadata file in XML format.
* Metadata is information about a file, how it is to be processed, and its relation to other objects.
5-4
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
PREPARATIONS FOR USE AS A NETWORK
SCANNER
MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH IS IN THE
"ON" POSITION
The main power is "on" when the main power indicator on the right side of the operation panel is lit.
If the main power indicator is not lit, the main power is "off". Switch the main power switch to the "on" position and press
the [POWER] key (©) on the operation panel.
If the Internet fax function will be used, and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, always
keep the main power switch in the "on" position.
When the [POWER SAVE] key ((§)) indicator light is blinking, the machine is in auto power shut-off mode. If the [POWER
SAVE] key ((§)) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will turn off and the machine will return to the ready
state after a brief interval.
Main power indicator Main power switch
CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME
Verify that the correct date and time are set in the machine.
The date and time are set in the system settings of the machine. When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the
system settings menu screen appears on the touch panel. Select [Default Settings], [Clock], and [Clock Adjust], and set
the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
If "Disabling of Clock Adjustment" has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the date and time cannot be set.
STORING SENDER INFORMATION
Be sure to configure this information, as it is required for communication.
Before using Scan to E-mail
Store a default sender name in "Sender Name" and a reply e-mail address in "Reply E-mail Address". These will be
used when a sender is not selected.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Sender Set
This is used to store the sender name and e-mail address that is used when a sender is not selected.
Before using Internet fax
Store a sender name in "Sender Name" and a sender Internet fax address in "Own Address".
System Settings (Administrator): Sender Data Registration
Use this setting to program the sender name and sender address.
5-5
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES
To use scan mode and Internet fax mode, the basic network scanner settings, server settings such SMTP and DNS
server settings, and sender addresses must be configured in the Web pages.
• Server settings
To configure server settings, click [Network Settings] and then [Services Settings] in the Web page menu.
(Administrator rights are required.)
• Basic network scanner settings
To configure network scanner settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Network Scanner Settings] in the Web
page menu. (Administrator rights are required.)
• Internet fax settings
To configure the network scanner settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Internet Fax Settings] in the Web
page menu. (Administrator rights are required.)
STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK
To use Scan to FTP or Scan to Desktop, the destination must be stored in the address book. For Scan to E-mail,
Internet Fax, and Scan to Network Folder, the destination can be directly entered or looked up in a global address book
at the time of transmission, however, the procedure is simpler when the destination is stored in the address book. Store
each type of destination as explained below.
Types of transmission in scanner mode
• Scan to FTP: Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [FTP] in
[Address Type] and store an address.
• Scan to Network Folder: Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Network
Folder] in [Address Type] and store an address.
• Scan to E-mail: Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [E-mail]
in [Address Type] and store an address. Addresses can also be stored in the system
settings.
• Scan to Desktop: See "STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP" (page 5-7). Scan to Desktop
destinations can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Address Book] in the Web page
menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Desktop] in [Address Type] and store an
address.
A total of 1000 addresses can be stored. Among these, a combined maximum of 200 Scan to Network Folder, Scan to FTP,
and Scan to Desktop addresses can be stored.
Transmission in Internet fax mode:
Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Internet
Fax] or [Direct SMTP] for the [Address Type], and store the address. Addresses can also be
stored in the system settings.
System Settings: Address Book (page 7-16)
This is used to store destination addresses for Scan to E-mail and Internet fax.
5-6
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP
To store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to Desktop, Network Scanner Tool must be installed
from the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. To scan an image to your
computer, Network Scanner Tool must be running on your computer.
INSTALLING NETWORK SCANNER TOOL
To install Network Scanner Tool, see the "Sharpdesk Installation Guide" that accompanies the machine. When a
standard installation is performed, Network Scanner Tool is installed with Sharpdesk.
When you restart your computer after installing Network Scanner Tool, the Setup Wizard will start automatically. Follow
this wizard to set up Network Scanner Tool. This will store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to
Desktop. The stored destination will be displayed as a one-touch key in the address book screen.
The following window appears while Network Scanner Tool is being set up. The item selected in "My Profiles" (C) will be
the name of the one-touch key.
The profile name is determined by the combination of the text entered in "Prefix" (A) and the profile*.
The one-touch key is assigned to an index tab in the address book screen based on the text entered in "Initial" (B).
* This defines how an image sent to your computer is processed. For more information, see profile explanation (D).
ADDING DESTINATIONS
For the number of computers that can be stored in the machine as destinations of Scan to Desktop, see the number of
licenses indicated in the "Sharpdesk Installation Guide". To store more destinations, a license kit is required. Store Scan
to Desktop destinations by installing Network Scanner Tool on each computer.
5-7
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
BEFORE SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP ADDRESS
The machine supports Direct SMTP， which lets you directly send Internet faxes within your company without using a
mail server. For the procedure for storing a Direct SMTP address in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION
ADDRESSES FOR EACH SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK" (page 5-6). Stored Direct SMTP addresses are
included in the address book for Internet fax mode.
If the destination is busy
If the destination is busy, the machine will wait briefly and then automatically resend.
To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
隊 STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-107)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Line Busy
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot be
established because the line is busy. The factory default setting is 2 attempts at an interval of 3 minutes.
When a communication error occurs
If a communication error occurs or the other fax machine does not answer the call within a preset period of time,
transmission will be re-attempted automatically after a preset interval.
To cancel transmission...
Cancel the transmission from the job status screen.
瞭 STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-107)
System Settings (Administrator): Recall in Case of Communication Error
This is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when a transmission fails due to an error.
The factory default setting is attempt at an interval of 3 minutes.
5-8
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
BASE SCREEN
Scan mode, USB memory mode, Internet fax mode, and PC scan mode are used by selecting operations and settings in
the base screens of those modes. To display the base screen of a mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key in the touch
panel and then touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
Base screen of scan mode
⑺.
• J ll) COPY
Resend
J; Scan
Internet Fax | Fax | USB Mem. Scan | PC Scan
■♦►Address Book|
1 f
[ Original ] Scan： Send：
■# Address Entry
f Exposure ]
1 し _
Send Settings |
[ Resolution _ 2 00X2 00dpi #
| Address Review
f File Format j pP PDF
• File
[ Color Mode 丨 J Mono2
j Quick File |
Preview
® 1
■(10)
(11)
Base screen of USB memory mode
(12) (13)
Base screen of Internet 1
(1 ) © copy j i
(2)
(3)4.
USB Mem. Scan I
(14) Stored to
File Name
(15)
⑻
(1)
(4) -
(5) .
Resolution I 200X200dpi
_(10) ⑹ +
D cP 1
f Color Mode I |~p h
f Special Modes |
⑺.
■(13)
•J © COPY
皿 GE S 讎 ㈣
を國
f: Scan
Internet Fax |[ Fax | USB
Mem. Scan | PC Scan
►Address Book 1
1 ' -
[ Original ] Scan：
Send：
_ Address Entry
[ Exposure j ■
1 ' -
Send Settings j
f Resolution ] 200X100dpi
| Address Review!
\ File Format 丨 TIFF-F
•[ File
j Quick File j
■# Preview |
mm
f I -Fax Manual Lll
し Reception
■(10)
■(13)
■(12)
■(16)
■(17)
Mode select keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
To use scan mode, USB memory mode, Internet fax
mode, PC scan mode, or data entry mode, touch the
[IMAGE SEND] key.
Various messages are displayed here.
The icon of the selected mode appears on the left.
Send mode tabs
Touch one of these tabs to change the image send
mode.
Tabs of modes that cannot be used because the
corresponding options are not installed do not appear.
If the [USB Mem. Scan] and [PC Scan] tabs do not
appear, touch the 「 __» | tab to move the screen.
If the [Scan], [Internet Fax], [Fax], and [Data Entry] tabs
do not appear, touch the 「 ♦_ ] tab move the
screen.
The [Data Entry] tab appears when the application
integration module is installed. For information on
metadata delivery using the [Data Entry] tab, see
"METADATA DELIVERY11 (page 5-124).
[Address Book] key
Touch this key to use a one-touch key or a group key. When
the key is touched, the address book screen appears.
^ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-18)
[Address Entry] key
Touch this key to manually enter an destination address
instead of using a one-touch key.
瞭 ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-22)
[Send Settings] key
Touch this key to select or enter the subject, file name,
sender name, or body text, which has been previously
stored in the Web page.
Scan modes:
隊 CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
REPLY-T 〇， AND BODY TEXT (page 5-32)
Internet fax mode:
暖 CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND
BODY TEXT (page 5-44)
Contents
5-9
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(7) Customized keys
The keys that appear here can be changed to show
settings or functions that you prefer.
隊 Customizing displayed keys (page 5-11)
(8) [Preview] key
Touch to check the image that will be sent in the touch
panel before transmission.
隊 CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED
(Preview) (page 5-69)
(9) [Resend] key/[Next Address] key
The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by Scan
to E-mail, fax and/or Internet fax are stored. Touch this key
to select one of these destinations. After a destination is
selected, this key changes to the [Next Address] key.
暖 USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 5-27)
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 5-19)
(10) Image settings
Image settings (original size, exposure, resolution, file
format, and color mode) can be selected.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
(11) 固 key
This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided
scanning is selected. Touch the key to display the
selected special modes.
隊 Checking what special modes are selected (page 5-11)
(12) \W] key
Touch this key to specify a destination using a search number .
* 4-digit number assigned to a destination when it is stored.
隊 USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 5-21)
(13) [Special Modes] key
Touch this key to use a special mode.
暖 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
(14) [Stored to] key
Touch to select the folder in USB memory where a file
will be stored.
暖 SPECIFY THE FOLDER IN WHICH THE FILE WILL
BE STORED, (page 5-39)
(15) [File Name] key
Touch this key to enter a file name when storing a file to
USB memory.
隊 ENTERING A FILE NAME (page 5-40)
(16) 匿]， 画 / 區 key
When "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" or
"Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the
system settings (administrator), this will appear when an
Internet fax is received.
[W\ : Only "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" is
enabled
[ ^ : Only "Received Data Image Check Setting" is
enabled
[a3 : Both settings are enabled
暖 PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print) (page 5-112)
隊 CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING
(page 5-113)
(17) [1-Fax Manual Reception] key
Touch this key to receive an Internet fax manually.
隊 MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES (page 5-111)
When sending an image, you can retrieve and use a stored transmission destination from the address book screen. The
address book screen is shared by scan mode, Internet fax mode, fax mode and data entry mode.
Touch the [Address Book] key in the base screen to switch to the address book screen. Touch the [Condition Settings]
key in the address book screen to switch to the base screen.
Base screen of scan mode
Address book screen
f| 5 ► EB ► 15 I (eT To (Sec ]
I w Condition 1
1 Settings |
[aAA AAA q] (bBB BBB 创 1
Addro4 *^iew
[ccc ccc [d® DDD b] L
Address Entry
[eee eee Vj |fff FFF aj l ^ 1
Global
| Address Search
[ggg GGG _ffl HHH 贷 1 f = ]
LlJ
fill III- q] fjjj JJJ
| Sort Address
Freq. J| ABCD J| EFGH J| IJKL J| MNOP J| QRSTU J| VWXYZ J| etc .
Preview | ^'Auto RecePtion
1. 1. Fax Memory: 100%
• This chapter uses the base screen of scan mode as an example when operations common to all modes are explained.
• The procedures in this chapter assume that the base screen of scan mode appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
• Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
• Address book screen
5-10
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Customizing displayed keys
Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. Set these keys to functions that you frequently
use to access the functions with a single touch. The customized keys are configured using "Customize Key Setting" in
the Web pages. The following keys appear by factory default:
• [Address Review] key
Touch this key to display a list of the destinations that have been selected in the address book. This is the same key
as the [Address Review] key in the address book screen.
• [File] key, [Quick File] key
Touch either of these keys to use the File function or Quick File function of document filing mode.
In USB memory mode...
Customized keys do not initially appear, however, up to three keys can be added.
Example: When "Dual Page Scan", "Job Build", and "Mixed Size Original" are assigned to the customized keys
These three keys can be changed
as desired.
Displaying a program key in the base screen will enable you to retrieve the program by simply touching the key.
隊 STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) (page 5-73)
• The functions that can be selected for the customized keys vary depending on the mode.
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.
Checking what special modes are selected
The 加 key appears in the base screen when a special mode or 2-sided scanning is selected.
The Si I key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.
J
Scan
Internet Fax | Fax J USB Mem. Scan 1 PC Scan
►Address Book
[ Original j Scan： ■QJJ Send:
Address Entry
f Exposure j
Send Settings
\ Resolution j 2 00X2 00dpi
Address Review
f File Format ] pP PDF
File
f Color Mode j pP Mono2
Quick File |
[ Special Modes j | | ij| |
Preview
Function Review
[ 0K 1
Erase
. Edge： 1/2 inch
' Center ： l/2inch
Timer
b Day of the Week： Monday
: Time： 21： 30
1
Mixed Size
Original
: On
E
E
The special mode settings cannot be changed from the review screen. To change a setting, touch the [OK] key to close the
review screen and then touch the [Special Modes] key and select the setting that you wish to change.
Contents
5-11
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
This screen is used to select transmission destinations.
(1)
(1) This shows the selected destination.
(2) Number of displayed items selector key
Touch this key to change the number of destinations
(one-touch keys) displayed in the address book screen.
Select 5, 10, or 15 keys.
(3) [Condition Settings] key
Touch this key to select transmission settings. When the
key is touched, the base screen appears.
隊 BASE SCREEN (page 5-9)
(4) [Address Review] key
Touch this key to view a list of the selected destinations.
Destination selections can be changed.
隊 CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED
DESTINATIONS (page 5-20)
(5) [Address Entry] key
Touch this key to manually enter a destination address
instead of using a one-touch key.
隊 ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-22)
(6) [Global Address Search] key
When the use of an LDAP server has been enabled in
the machine's Web pages, a transmission address can
be obtained from a global address book.
^ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL
ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-25)
(7) [Sort Address] key
Touch to change the index tabs to custom indexes or to
display one-touch keys by send mode.
^ CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS
IN THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN (page 5-13)
(8) [Preview] key
Touch to check the image that will be sent in the touch
panel before transmission.
暖 CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED
(Preview) (page 5-69)
(9) [To] key
Touch this key to enter the selected destination
(one-touch key).
暖 RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 5-19)
(10) [Cc] key
When using Scan to E-mail, touch the [Cc] key when you
wish to send a "Carbon copy" of the e-mail to an
additional destination.
(11) [Bcc] key
When using Scan to E-mail, touch the [Bcc] key when
you wish to send a "Blind carbon copy" of the e-mail to an
additional destination.
When an address is specified as a Bcc recipient, other
recipients will not know that the address is a recipient.
This key only appears when Bcc has been enabled using
"Bcc Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
(12) One-touch key display
The destinations (one-touch keys) stored in each index
are displayed. This chapter refers to keys in which
destinations and groups are stored as one-touch keys.
暖 RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 5-19)
(13) Index tabs
Touch this to change the displayed index tab.
瞭 Index display (page 5-14)
(14) [W\ key
Touch this key to specify a destination using a search
number*.
* 4-digit number assigned to a one-touch key or group
key when it is stored.
隊 USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 5-21)
5-12
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Icons appear in the one-touch keys in the address book to indicate which mode is used for transmission.
隊 RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-18)
• For information on storing addresses in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK11 (page 5-6).
• For information on storing destinations for Scan to Desktop, see "STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP"
(page 5-7).
• System Settings: Address Book (page 7-16)
This is used to store Scan to E-mail and Internet fax addresses in one-touch keys.
• System Settings (Administrator): The Number of Direct Address Keys Displayed Setting
This is used to change the default setting for the number of one-touch keys displayed in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
- Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
- Address book screen
• System Settings (Administrator): Address Book Default Selection
The following settings are available for the method of sorting the addresses that appear in the address book.
- Index type (alphabetical, custom)
- Address type (all, group, E-mail, FTP/Desktop, Network Folder, Internet fax, fax)
CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN
THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
You can show destinations of only a specific transmission mode in the address book screen, or change the displayed
index tabs from the alphabetical tabs to the custom tabs. The procedure for selecting destinations does not change.
Touch the [Sort Address] key.
⑴ (2)
Change the display mode.
(1) Touch the key of the mode or tab that you
wish to display.
• To show only the one-touch keys of a particular send
mode, touch the desired mode key under "Address
Type".
• To change the index tabs to the custom indexes, touch
the [User] key under "Tab Switch".
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Contents
5-13
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Narrowing the search letter range
An alphabet tab on an index tab can be touched to display keys to further narrow the search range. For example, when
the [ABCD] tab is touched, keys from "A" to "D" appear. If the [B] key is touched, only destinations starting with the letter
"B" will appear. To cancel, touch the key again. Note that the search letter range cannot be narrowed on the [Freq.] tab,
the [etc.] tab, or on a user index tab.
5-14
Contents
Index display
Indexes make it easy to search for a destination (one-touch key). The destinations are displayed separately using
alphabetical search characters and index numbers. To display a stored destination, touch the appropriate index tab. It is
convenient to store frequently used destinations in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in the [Freq.]
index when you store the destination.
Index tabs
The destinations can also be displayed in alphabetical order by initial.
Each time the displayed index tab is touched, the display order changes in the following order: search numbers (page
5-21), ascending names, descending names. When the display order is changed, the display order of the other index
tabs also changes.
Ordered by search number (default) Ascending names Descending names
Freq. II ABCD
一
Index names can be changed using "Custom Index" in the system settings, allowing you to create groups of one-touch
keys that can be easily recognized.
System Settings: Custom Index (page 7-18)
This setting is used to store custom index names. The custom index where a one-touch key appears is specified when the
transmission destination is stored in the key.
1 la
0 0
Iny
ill
6
i
□
□
國
□
I®
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCAN SEND SEQUENCE
This section explains the basic procedure for scanning and transmission. Select settings in the order shown below to
ensure smooth transmission.
For the detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this chapter.
Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic
document feeder, or on the document glass.
隊 SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE (page 5-28)
^ SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE (page
5-35)
隊 SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE (page 5-41)
Enter the destination
Specify the destination of the scan transmission.
• [Address Book] key:
^ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS
BOOK (page 5-18)
^ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL
ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-25)
• [Address Entry] key:
隊 ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-22)
• \W\ key:
隊 USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 5-21)
• [Resend] key:
暖 USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 5-27)
Select settings
Settings can be selected for scanning the original.
• Original (2-sided original, scan size, send size)
• Exposure • Resolution • File Format • Color Mode
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
• Send Settings (File Name)
Scan mode, Data entry mode:
隊 CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO,
AND BODY TEXT (page 5-32)
USB memory mode:
隊 ENTERING A FILE NAME (page 5-40)
Internet fax mode:
隊 CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY
TEXT (page 5-44)
Scan 1 Internet Fax | Fax 丨 USB Mem. Scan J PC Scan
f ►Address Book
[ Original j Scan： [18%xll Send:
f Address Entry |
[ Exposure j
|l Send Settings
f Resolution j 2 00X2 00dpi
| Address Review
f File Format 丨 J PDF
File
| Color Mode 丨 pP Mono2
j Quick File
f Special Modes J
Preview
5-15
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Special mode settings
Special modes can be selected.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
Start scanning and transmission
Start scanning and transmission.
If the original is placed on the document glass, follow these steps to start scanning and transmission:
(1) Press the [START] key.
(2) When scanning is finished, replace the original with the next original.
(3) Press the [START] key.
(4) Repeat (2) and (3) until all originals have been scanned.
(5) Touch the [Read-End] key.
After the original is scanned, the settings revert to the default settings.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
The settings can be kept in effect a fixed period of time after scanning is completed.
5-16
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
ORIGINAL SIZES
TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES
The following original sizes can be transmitted
Minimum original size
Maximum original size
Using the automatic document feeder
5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width)
(131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width))
11-5/8" (height) x 39-3/811* (width)
(297 mm (height) x 1000 mm* (width))
Using the document glass
一
11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width)
(297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width))
A long original can be transmitted. (When only scan destinations are selected for scan transmission or metadata transmission,
scanning will take place in Mono2 at a resolution of 300 X300dpi or less. When a resolution of 600 X600dpi is used for Internet fax
transmission, the maximum original size is 31-1/2" (800 mm).)
THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL
When a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in "Scan" in the base screen.
When the automatic original detection function is operating and the original is a non-standard size, the closest standard
size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the correct original size.
隊 Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.) (page 5-56)
隊 Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 5-57)
STANDARD SIZES
Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in "Original Size
Detector Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The factory default setting is "Inch-111.
List of original size detector settings
Selections
Standard sizes (detected original sizes)
Document glass
Document feeder tray
(automatic document feeder)
Inch-1
1 1n x 1 7n, 8-1/2" x 1 4"， 8-1/2" x 1 1 ", 8-1/2" x 1 1nR,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
11n x 17M, 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x IT, 8-1 /2M x 1TR,
5-1/211 x 8-1/2", A4, A3
Inch-2
1 1 ■■ x 1 7"， 8-1/2Mx13n (21 6 mm x 330 mm),
8-1 /2M x 11M, 8-1/211 x 11MR, 5-1 /2Mx 8-1 /2M
1 1n x 17"， 8-1/211 x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1 /2M x 1 1 8-1/2Mx11MR, 5-1 /2Mx 8-1/211, A4, A3
Inch-3
1 1n x 17"， 8-1/2Mx 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
8-1 /2M x 1 1n, 8-1/2Mx 11MR, 5-1 /2M x 8-1/211
1 1n x 17"， 8-1/211 x 13-2/5" (216 mm x 340 mm),
8-1/2" x 1 1 ■■， 8-1/2Mx11MR, 5-1 /2Mx 8-1/211, A4, A3
AB-1
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 1 1"，
8-1/2" x 14n, 11"x 17"
AB-2
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm
(8-1/2Mx 13M)
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
1 1n x 17M, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13M)
AB-3
A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 8-1/2" x 11",
1 1n x 17M, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13M)
AB-4
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 340 mm
(8-1 /2M x 13-2/5")
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 1 1 __，
1 r x 17M, 216 mm x 340 mm (8-1/2" x 13-2/5")
AB-5
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 343 mm
(8-1/2Mx13-1/2M)
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 1 1",
1 r x 17"， 216 mm x 343 mm (8-1 /2Mx 13-1/211)
5-17
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
ENTERING DESTINATIONS
This section explains how to specify destination addresses, including selecting an address from the address book and
retrieving an address by entering a search number.
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK
The address book screen shows stored destinations as one-touch keys.
The destinations are displayed in order by search number.
The address book screen shows the destinations of all modes of the image send function. Each one-touch key shows
the name of the destination and an icon indicating the mode to be used.
Icon
Mode
Fax
Scan to E-mail
珍
Internet fax (Direct SMTP)
Scan to FTP
S
Scan to Network Folder
Scan to Desktop
Group key with multiple destinations
• For information on storing addresses in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK11 (page 5-6).
• For information on storing destinations for Scan to Desktop, see "STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP"
(page 5-7).
System Settings: Address Book (page 7-16)
This is used to store Scan to E-mail and Internet fax addresses in one-touch keys.
5-18
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION
A destination is retrieved by selecting its one-touch key.
Scan
Internet Fax 1 Fax I USB Mem. Scan J PC Scan
►Address Book!
| AddJ つ ry]
[ Original ] Scan： ■■ 8ypcll Send:
[ Exposure ]
f Send Settings
[ Resolution j 2 00X2 00dpi
f Address Review
f File Format 丨 J PDF
File
[ Color Mode ] [~p Mono2
1 Quick File |
I Special Modes ]
Preview
Touch the [Address Book] key.
(3) (2)
(1)
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the index tab where the destination
is stored.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
If you select an incorrect destination, touch the key again
to cancel the selection.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
This enters the selected destination.
• It is convenient to store frequently used destinations in the [Freq.] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in
the [Freq.] index when you store the destination.
• To continue specifying other destinations...
It is possible to specify multiple scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, Scan to Network
Folder), Internet fax, and fax mode destinations when performing a broadcast transmission (maximum of 500
destinations). To specify multiple destinations, repeat (1) through (3) of this step.
When performing Scan to E-mail, you can select a one-touch key and then touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key to
send Cc or Bcc copies of the e-mail.
• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
This setting determines whether or not the [Next Address] key can be omitted before specifying the next destination.
Factory default setting: the [Next Address] key can be omitted.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Switching of Display Order
This is used to disable switching of the order of display of the one-touch keys in the address book screen. The currently
selected display order will be the order that is used after this setting is enabled.
Contents
5-19
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED
DESTINATIONS
When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a
destination from the list (cancel selection of the destination).
Touch the [Address Review] key.
Address Review
f OK I
001 [^AA AAA
B] 1002 fBBB BBB
003 fKKK KKK
b] 1004 [lll lll
q] 1
005 1 .MMM MMM
1006 fNNN NUN
007 f|00 000
q] 008fppp PPP
m s
009 fQQQ QQQ
B] lOlof'RRR RRR
- ^ m
01l(：SSS sss
创 1012 [,TTT TTT
焓] □
Q’ To
1 S CC 1
Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key,
To check Cc or Bcc destinations, touch the corresponding tab.
@
To cancel selection of a destination...
Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key. Touch the [Detail] key to check the specified destination type and name.
Deselect the address?
Detail | i No \ i Yes
Contents
5-20
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Enter the 4-digit search number of the
address with the numeric keys.
When the 4-digit search number is entered, the stored address
is retrieved and specified as a destination.
• The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book.
• If you do not know the search number, print the one-touch address list using "Sending Address List" in the system
settings.
• When entering search numbers such as "0001" and "0011", "0" can be omitted. For example to enter "0001"， enter
■■1 " and touch the key or the [Next Address] key.
©
If an incorrect search number is entered...
Press the [CLEAR] key (©) to clear the number and enter the correct number.
Contents
USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION
A destination stored in the address book can be retrieved using the \W] key. This can be done in the base screen of any
of the modes or in the address book screen.
Touch the [W] key.
® ® ® ©
® ® ® @
① @ ⑦ ®
5-21
Display the address input screen.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
Before touching the [Address Entry] key in the base
screen, touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Address Entry] key.
Select the destination type.
DG
E-mail I Network Folderl
Internet Fax \ Direct t
Enter the destination address.
(1) Touch the key of the desired delivery
method.
• Touch the [E-mail] key to open the delivery method
selection screen. Normally the [To] key is touched.
• Touch the [Network Folder] key to open the network
folder entry screen. To specify a network folder, see
"SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER11 (page 5-23).
• If you touched the [Address Entry] key in the base
screen in step 1 , the delivery methods that can be
selected vary depending on the mode being used.
(2) Enter the destination address in the text
entry screen that appears.
Enter the destination address and touch the [OK] key.
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING
TEXT11 (page 1-70) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE11.
If you wish the destination to be a Cc destination, touch the [Cc] key.
The [Bcc] key only appears when Bcc has been enabled using "Bcc Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
If you wish the destination to be a Bcc destination, touch the [Bcc] key.
When Internet fax mode is selected, the base screen appears after the destination address is entered. However, if
"l-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the reception report
request screen will appear. If you wish to receive a report, touch the [Yes] key. If not, touch the [No] key. (When
Direct SMTP is used, transmission confirmation is not performed.)
System Settings (Administrator): 1-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting
This setting is used to request a reception report when an Internet fax is sent. When the destination is specified by directly
entering the address, a message will appear asking you if you wish to receive a report. (When Direct SMTP is used,
transmission confirmation is not performed.)
System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen and the
delivery type selection screen.
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY
Scan to E-mail, Internet fax, Network Folder and data entry mode addresses can be manually entered.
匿
a a
一一 Ji
LU
一 ccc
I fir
5-22
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER
A network folder on a server or computer connected to the same network as the machine can be directly specified.
Select [Network Folder] in step 2 on the previous page and follow the steps below.
Network Folder
Folder Path
1 User Name |
Browse
Jb
| Password |
- 1 i
Touch the [Browse] key.
• To directly enter a folder, touch the [Folder Path] key. A
text entry screen will appear.
• If a user name and password are required, check with
the administrator of the server and enter the user name
and password.
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT11 (page 1-70) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
5-23
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(i)
Access the network folder.
(1) Touch the key of the workgroup that you
wish to access.
⑵
(3) (4)
lo
Network Folder
Cancel || 0J
1
\\ Server 1
fretwork Folder Name
▲ |
| 蟲 | User 1 |
f 蟲 | User 2
3
f 蟲 | User 3
0
丨蟲 | User 4 j
m
[ 蟲 | User 5
LiJ
| 蟲 | User 6
(2) Touch the key of the server or computer
that you wish to access.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name
and password, check with your server administrator and
enter the appropriate user name and password.
(3) Touch the key of the network folder.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the screen of step 1 . Touch the [OK] key
again to enter the folder.
• You can touch the [Search] key and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup, server, or network folder. For the
procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT11 (page 1 -70) in M1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE11.
• Up to 100 workgroups, 100 servers, and 100 network folders can be displayed.
•To move up one level, touch the 1 1 key.
• The [Cancel] key can be pressed to return to the screen of step 1 .
• To change the sorting order of the displayed keys, touch the key that shows Ao f in each screen. The order
switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
• To go to a particular page, touch the Q key that shows the current page number and enter the desired page
number.
Contents
5-24
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK
When an LDAP server is configured in the Web pages, you can look up an address in a global address book and
retrieve the address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission (excluding Direct SMTP addresses).
(2)
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
5 ► EE ► 15 ]
Ef To ] (SCc )
w Condition
^ Settings
|aAA AAA q| fBBB BBB 珍 | 1
Address Review
f；CCC CCC (ddd ddd q] ‘
Address Entry
[eee EEE vl fFFF FFF d | 令 1
Global ^
Address Search:
: GGG GGG q] [hHH HHH s j
L?J
in hi fj® jjj
Sort Address
Freq. J| ABCD J| : EFGH J| IJKL J| MNOP J| QRSTU J| VWXYZ J| etc .
Preview | ㈣ ^'Aut0 Reception
l. Fax Memory： 100%
Open the global address search screen.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the [Global Address Search] key.
Search for the destination.
If only one LDAP server has been stored, (1) and (2) are not
necessary. Go directly to (3). If an authentication screen for the
し DAP server appears, enter your user name and password.
(1) Touch the key of the LDAP server that you
wish to use.
If an authentication screen for the し DAP server appears,
enter your user name and password.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
(3) Search for the destination in the search
screen.
Enter search characters for the destination and touch the
[Search] key. The search results will appear after a brief
interval.
For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING
TEXT" (page 1-70) in "1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE11.
How to search
Enter the search characters (maximum of 64 characters). The system will look for names starting with the entered
letters.
An asterisk 氺 can be used as follows:
XXX 氺： Names beginning with MXXXM.
木 XXX: Names that end with nXXX".
木 XXX 木： Names that include "XXX".
AA 氺 XX: Names that start with MAAM and end with ■■XX11.
Contents
5-25
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(2) (1)
Select the destination.
(1) Touch the key of the desired destination.
If no names are found that match the search characters, a
message will appear. Touch the [OK] key to close the
message and touch the [Search Again] key to search
again.
(2) Touch the [To] key.
This enters the selected destination.
If you wish to enter another destination, repeat (1) and (2)
of this step.
• If 30 or more matches are found, a message will appear in the screen. Touch the [OK] key to close the message. Up
to 300 matches can appear. If no names are found that match the search letters, touch the [Search Again] key to
search again using more search letters.
• To check the information stored in a destination...
Touch the key of the destination and then touch the [Detail] key. The information stored for the selected destination
will appear. Check the information and then touch the [OK] key to return to the search results screen.
• If a screen for selecting the item to be used appears...
If the selected destination includes a fax number, telephone number, or other contact information in addition to the
e-mail address or Internet fax address, you will need to select which item you wish to use. Touch the [E-mail] key or
the [Internet Fax] key to retrieve the address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission.
Storing a destination from a global address book in the machine's
address book
A destination address obtained from a global address book can be stored as a destination (one-touch key) in the
address book of the machine.
Touch the [Detail] key in the search results screen of the global address book (the screen of step 3 above) to display
information on the selected destination. Touch the [Register] key in the detailed information screen and then touch the
item to be used (the [E-mail] key or the [Internet Fax] key). The following screens will appear.
E-mail address registration screen
Internet fax address registration screen
Direct Address / Individual
し y/J E-mail
_ j Internet Fax
■ Fax
Exit
f Search Number
m 0001
Name | AAA AAA
Initial
1 A f Index
j User 1
Address
] AAA@xx.xxx.com
f Key Name | AAA AAA
[ File Format
■ Color/ Grayscale : PDF/Medium
B/W : PDF/MMR(G4)
Direct Address / Individual
OB
Internet Fax
Search Number I 0001
I -Fax Report
AAA@xx. xxx . com
The information stored in the global address book is automatically entered. (The settings can be changed if needed. For
detailed information on each item, see "Address Control" (page 7-16) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS11.) However, configure
the items below manually. To complete the storing procedure, touch the [Exit] key.
• [Initial] key: Touch this key to enter the initials that determine where the destination will appear in the alphabetical
index and the order of one-touch key display. Enter up to 10 characters for the initials.
• [Index] key: Touch this key to select the custom index in which the address will appear. You can also select whether
or not the destination will be included on the [Freq_] tab of the address book.
• [File Format] key: Set the format for Scan to E-mail. Default format settings have already been configured; however,
selecting format settings when you store a destination saves you the trouble of selecting the
settings each time you transmit to that destination.
• [Compression] key: Touch this key to set the compression mode when sending an Internet fax.
• [1-Fax Report] key: Touch this key to request a reception report when sending an Internet fax.
5-26
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
USING THE RESEND FUNCTION
The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by Scan to E-mail, Internet fax (including Direct SMTP addresses)
and/or fax are stored. One of these can be selected to resend to that destination.
ItNo.Ol 、AAA AAA
[ko.03 QCCC CCC
卜 0.05 t^EEE EEE
mo. 01 QGGG GGG
[No. 02 ^ BBB BBB
[No. 04 资 DDD DDD
[no.06 贷 FFF FFF
[No. 08 ^ HHH HHH
Touch the key of the desired address.
The last 8 addresses used for transmission are displayed.
• When the [Resend] key is touched and a destination selected, the mode of the selected destination is automatically
selected.
• The following types of addresses are not stored for resending.
- A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key).
- Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder addresses.
- Broadcasting destinations
- Addresses used only for BCC delivery
- Destinations transmitted to using a program
System Settings (Administrator): Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Send Mode
This prohibits use of the resend function. When this setting is enabled, the [Resend] key cannot be used in the base screen
of image send mode.
Contents
5-27
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE
SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE
This section explains the basic procedure for transmission in scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP， Scan to
Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder).
When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot be
changed, the destination cannot be changed, and destinations cannot be added. If you wish to change the mode or
destination, touch the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then follow the procedure below.
Place the original.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and
prevent correct detection of the document size.
• When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.
" To place a large portrait-oriented original, place it as shown above in "Landscape orientation" and specify the
placement orientation in step 3.
• Place 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation (園） ■ If placed in landscape (horizontal)
orientation (_)， an incorrect size will be detected. For a 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R (A5R) size original, enter the original size
manually.
• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.
Contents
5-28
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(4) (3) (2)
1 1
f 5 ► EE ► 15 ||
fbJ To
_ ) 1 fa cc )
f ^ Condition
| f Settings
(bbb bbb
i
(
Address Review
[ccc ccc
DDD DDD
[
Address Entry
[eee eee
FFF FFF
令.. I
Global
| Address Search
[ggg ggg
q] |hhh hhh
fill III
q] [jjj JJJ
f Sort Address
Freq • Jl
ABCD J| ； EFGH J| IJKL J MNOP J| QRSTU J|
VWXYZ | etc.
Preview j 丨 担 デ
《Auto Reception
Fax Memory： 100%
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
The icon on the key indicates the type of destination
stored in the key.
: Scan to E-mail
d : Scan to FTP
S : Scan to Network Folder
E : Scan to Desktop
(3) Touch the [To] key,
The destination is specified.
(4) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.
• After a one-touch key is touched, if the screen is changed without touching the [To] key, the destination is
automatically specified.
• When performing Scan to E-mail, you can also send Cc or Bcc copies to other destinations. Touch the desired
destination and then touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key.
• Multiple destinations can be specified. To specify multiple destinations, repeat steps (2) and (3).
• You can also select multiple one-touch keys and then touch the [To] key (or the [Cc] or [Bcc] key) to specify all
selected keys at once.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. Destinations
for Scan to E-mail and Scan to Network Folder can also be manually entered or looked up in a global address book.
For more information, see "ENTERING DESTINATIONS11 (page 5-18).
System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.
Switch to scan mode and display the
image settings screen.
(1) Touch the [Scan] tab,
(2) Touch the [Original] key,
The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], [File Format], and [Color Mode] are indicated at the right of
each key. To change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
隊 AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-54), SPECIFYING
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 5-55), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE
AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 5-61), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-63), CHANGING THE FILE
FORMAT (page 5-64), CHANGING THE COLOR MODE (page 5-68), SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
Contents
5-29
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1) (2)
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
To enable the original to be scanned in the correct orientation
(the orientation of the top edge of the original that is shown at
the top of the display), specify the orientation in which the
original was placed in step 1 .
(1) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the [ key. If
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the [W0 1
key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the screen of step 2.
The original orientation is initially set to Qa] . If the original was placed with the top edge up, this step is not
necessary.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one
page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
•If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission
will take place.
• The image is scanned in the mode set in "Color mode". For the color mode settings, see "CHANGING THE COLOR
MODE11 (page 5-68).
• If Encrypt PDF is selected for the file format ([PDF] is selected in the format settings screen and the [Encry.]
checkbox is set to VJ), you will be prompted to enter a password when you press the [START] key.
Please enter encrypt PDF
password.
Cancel 1 f Entry
Touch the [Entry] key to open the keyboard screen, enter a password (maximum of 32 characters), and touch the
[OK] key. The recipient must use the password entered here to open the Encrypt PDF file.
To cancel Encrypt PDF, touch the [Cancel] key. The format settings screen will appear to let you change the file
type. Select a new file type and press the [START] key to begin transmission.
If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original
and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
Contents
5-30
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Place next original . (Pg.N'
Press [Start] .
When finished, press [Read-End] .
Contiaure ^
誓
Touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be changed
when scanning an even-numbered original page.
• When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can
be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report. If the job is a broadcast
transmission, this number will also appear in the key of the job in the job status screen. For this reason, making a note of
the number is useful for checking the result.
•If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.
• When performing Scan to E-mail, take care not to send a file that is too large. In particular, multi-page files tend to be large.
When sending a multi-page file or other large file, it may be necessary to reduce the number of scanned pages or reduce
the send size.
• Storing a mail signature
You can have preset text automatically added at the end of e-mail messages as a mail signature. This is convenient when
you wish to have a corporate policy or other preset text appear at the bottom of e-mail messages. To store the text for the
mail signature, click [Application Settings], [Network Scanner Settings] and then [Administration Settings] in the Web page
menu. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 900 characters can be entered. (The mail signature is not included in the
maximum number of characters that can be entered in the e-mail message.)
Use "Pre-Setting Mail Signature" in the system settings (administrator) to specify whether or not a mail signature is added.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
• System Settings (Administrator): Image Send Settings
Use this to configure scanner transmission settings, including the default resolution and exposure settings, the default
color mode and file format, the file compression method for broadcasting, the file size limit for Scan to E-mail, and the
default sender and destination.
• System Settings (Administrator): Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Use this setting to specify whether or not a mail signature is added at the end of e-mail messages. By factory default, a
mail signature is not added.
5-31
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO,
AND BODY TEXT
The subject, file name, reply-to, and body text can be changed when performing a scan transmission. Preset items can
be selected or text can be directly entered.
• When performing Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to Network Folder, only the file name is used.
•If the subject and file name are not changed, the settings in the Web page are used.
•If the sender name is not changed, the name set in "Default Sender Set" in the system settings is used. If this is not
configured, the reply address in [Network Settings] - [Services Settings] - [SMTP Settings] in the Web pages is used.
(Administrator rights are required.)
• Selections for the subject, file name, and body text are configured by clicking [Application Settings] and then [Network
Scanner Settings] in the Web page menu.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page 1-70) in "1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
Touch the [Send Settings] key in the base screen.
隊 BASE SCREEN (page 5-9)
If you are sending to a Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to Network Folder destination, go to step 4.
Send Settings
I Reply-To I
l Body Text I
] Add ' Reply to 丨 to Cc
To change the subject, touch the
[Subject] key.
⑴
Subject
jj | No
03 Sub： Minutes of planning ml |^o
] E
] E
02 Sub: Monthly Schedule
Enter the subject.
(1) Touch a Pre-Set text key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
•If you wish to directly enter the text, touch the [Direct Entry] key to open the text entry screen. Enter the text and
touch the [OK] key.
• The text in a pre-set text key can be edited by touching the pre-set text key and then the [Direct Entry] key. The text
entry screen will appear with the selected pre-set text entered. (When a destination is stored using the Web pages,
up to 80 characters can be entered. However, only 54 characters can be entered in the touch panel.)
Contents
5-32
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Subiect j Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
疆
□
Add ' Reply to' to Cc
To change the file name, touch the [File
Name] key.
• The file name is entered in the same way as the subject.
• If you are sending to a Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or
Scan to Network Folder destination, go to step 9.
Send Settings
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
Material for planning meeting
i Reply-To J
To change "Reply-To", touch the
[Reply-To] key.
If user authentication is being used, the information of the user that logged in will be applied, and thus "Reply-To"
cannot be changed.
[ 6 ► SB ► 18 J
Global
| Address Search
画 [bbb
fccc CCC I I 麵
[eee eee j [fff
Address Entry
[gGG GGG 1 [HHH
fm hi H
|kkk KKK 31
令
User
All Jl ABCD J| EFGH J| IJKL
哭 1
a
a
Specify a user for "Reply-To" and touch
the [OK] key,
• Touch the key that you wish to use for "Reply-To".
• You can touch the [Global Address Search] key to specify a
user stored in a global address book for "Reply-To". You can
also touch the [Address Entry] key to directly enter an e-mail
address.
• To specify the return address, you can touch the [tj key and enter a user number that has been previously stored
using "User List" in the system settings (administrator).
•A key can only be selected for the return address if an e-mail address has been stored for that user in "User List" in
the system settings (administrator).
Contents
5-33
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Send Settings
■ 0K 1
Subject
j Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
[ File Name
j Material for planning meeting
\ Reply-To ) AAA AAA
( ~t J
Ly to' to Cc
To change the body text, touch the
[Body Text] key.
Body Entry
Thank you for your continuous support .
which you have requested. I
We have attached scannedi
w
Pre-Set select
as
Enter the body text and touch the [OK]
key.
• To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Web page,
touch the [Pre-Set Select] key.
• To directly enter the body text, touch the [Edit] key.
• 1800 characters can be entered. (A line break counts as one character.)
• To clear all entered text, touch the [Clear All] key. When this key is touched, the entire body of the message is
erased immediately; not just the selected line.
• Each line of the entered text can be selected with the Q Q keys. To edit the selected line, touch the [Edit] key.
The text entry screen will appear with the selected text entered.
Send Settings
Subject
ぎ
I Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
f File Name ]
I Material for planning meeting
f Reply-To ]
AAA AAA
f Body Text |
I Thank you for your continuous support . We have attached sea
!| Add 'Reply to' to Cc
Touch the [OK] key.
The [Add 'Reply to1 to Cc] checkbox can be selected ど] to send a Cc copy to the sender.
When storing pre-set text for the subject and file name in the Web pages, up to 80 characters can be entered.
• System Settings (Administrator): The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed Setting
The setting for the number of subject keys and file name keys displayed in one screen can be changed to 6, 12, or 18.
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Sender Set
This is used to store the sender name and e-mail address that is used when a sender is not selected.
Contents
5-34
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE
Follow the steps below to send a scanned image to a commercially available USB memory device that has been
connected to the machine. This stores the file in the USB device.
• Use a FAT32 USB memory with a capacity of no more than 32 GB.
• When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot
be changed. To switch to USB memory mode, touch the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then follow the steps below.
Connect the USB memory to the USB
connector (Type A) on the machine.
Place the original.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and
prevent correct detection of the document size.
• When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.
" To place a large portrait-oriented original, place it as shown above in "Landscape orientation" and specify the
placement orientation in step 4.
• Place 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation (國） ■ If placed in landscape (horizontal) orientation
(rfinl). an incorrect size will be detected. For a 5-1/2" x 8-1 /2MR (A5R) size original, enter the original size manually.
• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.
Contents
5-35
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(2) (1)
Scan f Internet Fax || Fax | USB Mem. Scan || PC Scan
1：
[ Stored to
[ Original J Scan： 8$xll Send：
File Name
[ Exposure ]
f Resolution ] 200X200dpi
[ File Format ) J PDF
( Color Mode ] ^ Mono2
( Special Modes ]
Preview
Switch to USB memory mode and
display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the [USB Mem. Scan] tab
If the [USB Mem. Scan] tab does not appear, touch the
"» 1 tab to move the screen.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
• When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination.
• If a destination of another mode has been previously specified, a message will appear when you change to USB
memory mode indicating that the destination setting will be cleared. Touch the [OK] key in the message screen and
go to the next step.
• The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], [File Format], and [Color Mode] are indicated at the right
of each key. To change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
隊 AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES 〇 FAN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-54), SPECIFYING
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 5-55), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE
AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 5-61), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-63), CHANGING THE
FILE FORMAT (page 5-64), CHANGING THE COLOR MODE (page 5-68), SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
(1) (2)
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
To enable the original to be scanned in the correct orientation
(the orientation in which the top edge of the original appears at
the top of the display), specify the orientation in which the
original was placed in step 2.
(1) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the key. If
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the r^3l
key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
You will return to the screen of step 3.
The original orientation is initially set to QQ | . If the original was placed with the top edge up, this step is not
necessary.
Contents
5-36
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one
page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
•If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission
will begin. Go to step 8.
Do not disconnect the USB memory until "Sending data has been completed." appears in the touch panel.
• The image is scanned in the mode set in "Color mode". For the color mode settings, see "CHANGING THE COLOR
MODE11 (page 5-68).
• If Encrypt PDF is selected for the file format ([PDF] is selected in the format settings screen and the [Encry.]
checkbox is set to ノ I)， you will be prompted to enter a password when you press the [START] key.
Please enter encrypt PDF
password.
Cancel I T Entry
Touch the [Entry] key to open the keyboard screen, enter a password (maximum of 32 characters), and touch the
[OK] key. The recipient must use the password entered here to open the Encrypt PDF file.
To cancel Encrypt PDF, touch the [Cancel] key. The format settings screen will appear to let you change the file
type. Select a new file type and press the [START] key to begin transmission.
If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original
and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
Touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be changed
when scanning an even-numbered original page.
Contents
5-37
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
When "Sending data has been
completed." appears in the touch panel,
disconnect the USB memory.
①
Do not disconnect the USB memory while "Processing data." or "Sending data." appears in the touch panel.
• When transmission to USB memory is completed, "Sending data has been completed." is displayed. After a brief interval
the message is cleared and the base screen of image send mode reappears. (The base screen of image send mode is the
screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.)
• If the USB memory becomes full during scanning...
A message will appear and scanning will stop. The scanned data will not be stored. However, if the file format is set to
JPEG and the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox is selected, files for which scanning is completed will be stored in USB
memory.
©
• To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
• To cancel scanning to USB memory...
While scanned data is being stored in the USB memory, the message "Sending data." and the [Cancel] key appear in the
touch panel. To cancel the storing operation, touch the [Cancel] key.
• System Settings: USB-Device Check (page 7-25)
This is used to check the connection of a USB device to the machine.
• System Settings (Administrator): Scan Settings
This is used to set the default color mode and file format.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Scan Function
The use of PC scan mode and USB memory mode can be prohibited.
Contents
5-38
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SPECIFY THE FOLDER IN WHICH THE FILE WILL BE
STORED.
When sending a file to USB memory, a folder can be specified in USB memory. A new folder can also be created in USB
memory.
If a folder is not specified, the file will be stored on the first level of the USB memory.
Touch the [Stored to] key.
(A) (1) (2)
_ 1
J
Stored to 1
Cancel | OK ]
1 1
[ New Folder ]
[Folder Name
4 1
f CD | Folder 1
1
f 01 I Folder 2
1
f C3 | Folder 3
S
f Q | Folder 4
s
Select the folder.
(1) Touch the key of the folder in which you
wish to store the file.
If the selected folder contains another folder, you can
select that folder. The current folder level appears in (A).
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
You will return to the base screen. The [Stored to] key will
be highlighted.
• To create a new folder on the currently displayed level, touch the [New Folder] key. A text entry screen will appear.
Enter a folder name and touch the [OK] key. For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT" (page
1-70) in M1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE11.
• To move up one level, touch the t j key. This key appears when a folder on the second level or lower is selected.
•To change the order of the keys that appear in a screen, touch the key that shows Aorf. Each time the key is
touched, the order changes between ascending and descending.
Specify a folder name and file name that are within the allowed number of display characters of your operating system. If the
file name or folder name exceeds the allowed number of characters, it may not be possible to display the scanned file.
Contents
5-39
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
ENTERING A FILE NAME
The file name can be directly entered when performing a scan transmission.
(A)
Touch the [File Name] key. A text entry screen will appear. Enter the file name and touch the [OK] key. The entered file
name will appear in (A).
5-40
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE
The basic procedure for sending a fax in Internet fax mode is explained below. This procedure can also be used to
perform direct transmission by Direct SMTP.
When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot be
changed, the destination cannot be changed, and destinations cannot be added. To switch to Internet fax mode, touch the
[Cancel] key in the touch panel and follow the steps below.
Place the original.
• Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or
face down on the document glass.
• Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and
prevent correct detection of the document size.
• Place 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation (國） ■ If placed in landscape (horizontal) orientation
(¢[11]), an incorrect size will be detected. For a 5-1/2" x 8-1/2MR (A5R) size original, enter the original size manually.
• Image rotation
8-1/2" x 11" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R (A4, B5R, A5R, and 16K) originals are rotated 90 degrees and transmitted in
8-1/2" x 1 1"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A4R, B5, A5, or 1 6KR) orientation. (8-1/2" x 1 1"R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A4R, B5, and
A5) originals cannot be rotated for transmission.)
； Transmission
9
ハ >
• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.
System Settings (Administrator): Rotation Sending Setting
This is used to select whether or not a scanned original image is rotated before transmission.
The default setting is: rotate 8-1 /2M x 1 1 11 to 8-1/211 x 1 1MR, and 5-1 /2M x 8-1/2MRto 5-1 /2M x 8-1 /2M (A4 to A4R, B5R to
B5, and A5R to A5).
(4) (3) (2)
1 I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5 ► ffl ► 15 ]|
Mto ] I ®Cc ]
^ Condition
^ Settings
1
[aAA AAA Q]
Address Review 1
fccc ccc (ddd ddd b] 乙
Address Entry
[eEE EEE (fFF FFF Q] ♦
'Global
Address Search|
[ggg ggg El| |hhh hhh f _=_ I
L _ J
fm hi aj fjjj jjj
Sort Address |
Freq. J| ABCD J| EFGH J| IJKL J| MNOP J| QRSTU J| VWXYZ J| etc .
Preview [ ^"Aut0 RecePtion
1. Fax Memory； inn%
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the key of the desired destination.
The 培 icon appears in one-touch keys in which Internet
fax addresses are stored.
(3) Touch the [To] key,
The destination is specified.
(4) Touch the [Condition Settings] key.
• After a one-touch key is touched, if the screen is changed without touching the [To] key, the destination is
automatically specified.
•In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can
also manually enter a destination or look up a destination in a global address book. For more information, see
"ENTERING DESTINATIONS11 (page 5-18).
Contents
5-41
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1) (2)
Scan
Internet Fax 1 Fax I USB Mem. Scan 1
PC Scan
1
►Address Book
f Original j Scan： J ^8^x11 Send：
1
Address Entry
[ Exposure ]
i
Send Settings
[ Resolution jj 2 00X1 00dpi
i
Address Review
f File Format ) TIFF-F
1
File
f Special Modes 1
1:
Quick File |
1
Preview j
| |irl [
I -Fax Manual
Reception
Switch to Internet fax mode and display
the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], and [File Format] are indicated at the right of each key. To
change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
隊 AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-54), SPECIFYING
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 5-55), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE
AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 5-61), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-63), CHANGING THE FILE
FORMAT (page 5-64), SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
(1) (2)
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
When specifying the orientation of the image to be transmitted,
specify the orientation of the original placed in step 1 .
(1) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the 「卿1 key. If
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the r^3l
key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
You will return to the screen of step 2.
The original orientation is initially set to QQ | .If the original was placed with the top edge up, this step is not
necessary.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one page,
go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
•If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission
will take place.
If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original
and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
Contents
5-42
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Place next original . (Pg.N'
Press [Start] .
When finished, press [Read-End] .
Contigure 1
Read-End )
w
Touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when M2in1M or "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be
changed when scanning an even-numbered original page.
• When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can
be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report. If the job is a broadcast
transmission, this number will also appear in the key of the job in the job status screen. For this reason, making a note of
the number is useful for checking the result.
•If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.
• Storing a mail signature
You can have preset text automatically added at the end of e-mail messages as a mail signature. This is convenient when
you wish to have a corporate policy or other preset text appear at the bottom of e-mail messages. To store the text for the
mail signature, click [Application Settings], [Network Scanner Settings] and then [Administration Settings] in the Web page
menu. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 900 characters can be entered. (The mail signature is not included in the
maximum number of characters that can be entered in the e-mail message.)
Use "Pre-Setting Mail Signature" in the system settings (administrator) to specify whether or not a mail signature is added.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
• System Settings (Administrator): 1-Fax Send Settings
This is used to select Internet fax transmission settings such as the receive report setting, rotation setting, size restriction
setting, and sender information attachment setting.
• System Settings (Administrator): Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Use this setting to specify whether or not a mail signature is added at the end of e-mail messages. By factory default, a
mail signature is not added.
5-43
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME， AND BODY
TEXT
The subject, file name, and body text can be changed when performing an Internet fax transmission. Preset items can
be selected or text can be directly entered.
•If the subject and file name are not changed, the settings in the Web page are used.
• Selections for the subject, file name, and body text are configured by clicking [Application Settings] and then [Network
Scanner Settings] in the Web page menu.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT11 (page 1-70) in M1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
Touch the [Send Settings] key in the base screen.
隊 BASE SCREEN (page 5-9)
To change the subject, touch the
[Subject] key.
(i)
(2)
^3
雇 (^2.
Wo
[to
i Sub： Minutes of planning m
J t
〕 E
] E
02 Sub: Monthly Schedule
■
Enter the subject.
(1) Touch a pre-set text key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• If you wish to directly enter the text, touch the [Direct Entry] key to open the text entry screen. Enter the text and
touch the [OK] key.
• The text in a pre-set text key can be edited by touching the pre-set text key and then the [Direct Entry] key. The text
entry screen will appear with the selected pre-set text entered. (When a destination is stored using the Web page,
up to 80 characters can be entered. However, only 54 characters can be entered in the touch panel.)
Contents
5-44
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
To change the file name, touch the [File
Name] key.
The file name is entered in the same way as the subject.
Send Settings
Subiect 1 Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
File Name I Material for planning meeting
To change the body text, touch the
[Body Text] key.
Enter the body text and touch the [OK]
key.
• To select a pre-set message previously stored in the Web
page, touch the [Pre-Set Select] key.
• To directly enter the message, touch the [Edit] key.
• 1800 characters can be entered. (A line break counts as one character.)
•To clear all entered text, touch the [Clear All] key. When this key is touched, the entire body of the message is
erased immediately; not just the selected line.
• Each line of the entered text can be selected with the 國 ■ keys. To edit the selected line, touch the [Edit] key.
The text entry screen will appear with the selected text entered.
Contents
5-45
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Send Settings
1 _ ^ ~ )
Subject
J Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
[ File Name j
I Material for planning meeting
f Body Text j
Thank you for your continuous support . We have attached sea
Touch the [OK] key.
When storing pre-set text for the subject and file name in the Web pages, up to 80 characters can be entered.
System Settings (Administrator): The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed Setting
The setting for the number of subject keys and file name keys displayed in one screen can be changed to 6, 12, or 18.
Contents
5-46
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission)
The same scanned image can be sent to multiple scan modes, Internet fax mode, and fax mode destinations in a single
operation. Up to 500 destinations can be selected in one broadcast operation. (Combined maximum of 200 file server,
desktop, and shared folder destinations.)
If you frequently use broadcasting to send images to the same group of destinations, it is convenient to store those
destinations in a group key.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
5-47
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(3) (2)
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
The destination is specified.
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) until all
destinations are selected.
To add Cc or Bcc recipients, select a recipient and touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key.
If "Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), touch the
[Next Address] key before specifying the next destination.
• One-touch keys that cannot be used for broadcast transmission are grayed out to prevent selection.
• If a Scan to FTP (Hyperlink) address is specified in a broadcast transmission, hyperlink e-mail transmission will not
take place.
• If you frequently use broadcasting to send images to the same group of destinations, it is convenient to store those
destinations in a group key.
1
1
!
1
5 ► EB ► 15 )
(eTto Cc ]
^ Con
r Se-
Addresi
Ldition
匕 tings
s Review!
Q) (bbb bbb 设] i
fccc CCC DDD DDD b]
Addr^
[eee eee [fff fff sj | ♦ j
Global
Address Search
[ggg ggg q) [hhh hhh 设 j f 丄 1
LlJ
fill III q] fjjj JJJ
Sort 」
Address
Freq. J| ABCD J| EFGH J| IJKL J MNOP J| QRSTU J| VWXYZ J| etc . J
Preview I ^'Aut0 Reception
i. i. Fair MAmDry: 1 DO%
Touch the [Address Review] key.
Address Review
[ OK )
001 [AAA AAA
q] 1002 [bbb BBB
003 |KKK KKK
qJ 1004 [lLL LLL
Sj 1
005 [mMM MMM
1006 [nNN NNN
q)
0071000 000
Q] 1008 [PPP PPP
y s
009 [qQQ QQQ
[" ； aj lOlof'RRR RRR
- ^ m
onfsss sss
劍 012[TTTTTT
El To
a cc
Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key.
If the transmission includes Cc or Bcc destinations, touch the [Cc] tab or the [Bcc] tab to check those destinations.
©
To cancel a specified destination...
Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key.
隊 CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-20)
Contents
5-48
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next page and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
If Internet fax or fax destinations are included in the broadcast transmission, scanning will take place in [Mono2].
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
5-49
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
BROADCAST TRANSMISSIONS THAT INCLUDE
INTERNET FAX DESTINATIONS
When a broadcast transmission includes both scan mode and Internet Fax mode destinations, the Internet Fax mode
settings (original orientation and other various settings) are given priority. When performing this type of broadcast
transmission, note the information below.
Original placement orientation
The orientation of Internet fax mode is given priority. When "Rotation Sending Setting"
is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the image is rotated 90 degrees. For
this reason, in some cases the image may not be displayed in the correct orientation.
Send size
When the file format is set to [TIFF-S] in Internet fax mode, transmission is only
possible in 8-1/2" x 1 TR (A4R) size.
Exposure
The Internet fax settings are given priority.
Resolution
When the file format is set to [TIFF-S] in Internet fax mode and a high resolution
setting is selected in scan mode, the resolution will be changed to [200X200dpi].
File compression mode
The compression mode will be changed to the compression mode set in
"Compression Mode at Broadcasting" in the system settings (administrator).
Color scanning
Scanning will take place in Mono2 regardless of the color mode setting.
Special modes 2in1
This cannot be selected in scan mode, however, if selected in Internet fax mode, it will
also be applied to scan destinations.
Scan file size
If a broadcast transmission is performed that includes destinations for which an
attachment size limit has been set using "Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments
(E-mail)11 or "Maximum Size of Data Attachments ( FT P/D es ktop/N et wo rk Folder)11 in
the system settings (administrator), the limit will also apply to destinations for which a
limit is not set. (The limitation setting of Scan to E-mail or Internet fax is given priority.)
Resending to unsuccessful broadcast transmission destinations
The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the
addresses failed, resend the image to those addresses.
JOB STATUS
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
v J
(1)
总 Print Job J
2 S’ AAA' AAA
10:05 04/01 1000/001 Waiting
(1) (2)
1 1 Complete
: ゴ BBB BBB
10:22 04/01 1000/004 Waiting
4 eT ccc CCC
10:30 04/01 1000 /010 Waiting
5 eT ddd ddd
10:33 04/01 1000/010 Waiting
〕 1
©
fstop/DeleteJ
Display the jobs completed screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
display.
(2) Touch the [Complete] key.
If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes, the same broadcast transmission key will
appear in each of those modes.
5-50
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(i)
[K.
Internet Fax I
Start Time Pages : Status
1
| ^ 1 .Broadcast 00 02
10:05
04/01 1001/001 Send OK
1 と
[" 部丨 Broadcast0003
10:22
04/01 1004/004 Send OK
1 1
bDD DDD
10:30
04/01 1010 /010 Send OK
■01
Display details on the broadcast
transmission.
(1) Touch the key of the completed broadcast
transmission.
(2) Touch the [Detail] key,
"Broadcastxxxx" will appear as the address of the broadcast job key. The job control number that appeared in the
touch panel when scanning ended appears in "xxxx".
Detail
OK
I
•薄 Broadcast 0001
Address
Start Time Status ( ^txy
002 EEE EEE
10:01 04/01 NG000000
i
010 FFF FFF
10:10 04/01 NG000000
i
[i
[i
File
Failed | All Destinat
)ns J
I
(1)
Resend the image to the unsuccessful
destinations.
(1) Touch the [Failed] tab.
(2) Touch the [Retry] key.
• The steps to follow after the [Retry] key is touched differ depending on whether or not the document filing function is
used.
Not using document filing
You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Place the original and perform the
steps of the broadcast transmission.
Using document filing
You will return to the document filing resend screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Perform the
document filing resend procedure. (There is no need to rescan the original.)
• If the [All Destinations] tab is touched in (1)， all destinations will be displayed. The [Retry] key that appears in the
screen can be touched to resend to all the destinations.
Contents
5-51
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-l-Fax)
A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as an Internet fax (PC-l-Fax function). Internet faxes are sent using the
PC-l-Fax function in the same way as documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your
computer and then select the Print command in the software application. Image data for transmission will be created and
sent as an Internet fax.
For the procedures for using this function, see the PC-Fax driver Help.
•To send an Internet fax using the PC-l-Fax function, the PC-Fax driver must be installed and then updated using the
CD-ROM that accompanies the Internet fax expansion kit. For more information, see the Software Setup Guide.
• This function can only be used on a Windows computer.
• This function can only be used for transmission. Internet faxes received on the machine cannot be received to a computer
that is connected to the machine.
5-52
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
IMAGE SETTINGS
Settings for scanning the original are selected in the base screen of each mode. The current state of each setting
appears to the right of the key used to select the setting.
J
Scan
Internet Fax | Fax \ USB Mem. Scan \ PC Scan
►Address Book
f Original ] Scan： Send： #■
!r ⑴
Address Entry
1 1 Exposure ] #|
L ⑵
卜⑶
卜 (4)
Send Settings
[f Resolution j 2 00X2 00dpi 春!
Address Reviewj
| f File Format ] |~P PDF
File
| ( Color Mode j qP Mono2 ^
-⑼
Quick File |
f Special Modes ]
Preview j
[ sr
(1) [Original] key
Touch this key to set the scan size, send size, and
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning
settings.
^ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF
AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 5-54),
SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 5-55)
(2) [Exposure] key
Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.
^ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE (page 5-61)
(3) [Resolution] key
Touch this key to select the resolution for scanning.
隊 CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 5-63)
(4) [File Format] key
Touch this key to change the format (file type) of the
scanned image file.
暖 CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT (page 5-64)
(5) [Color Mode] key
Touch this key to select the color mode for scanning.
This key does not appear in Internet fax mode.
瞭 CHANGING THE COLOR MODE (page 5-68)
Contents
5-53
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN
ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original)
The automatic document feeder can be used to automatically scan both sides of an original.
2-sided original
Front and reverse sides are scanned
Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
ぼ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
⑶
曇
Scan/Original f OK ||
Scan Size 100% Send Size
( Auto 8^x11 ) 4 [ Auto )
Image Orientation
2-Sided
I 眉 Tablet
PE1I [ 00 1
1 ^
1
(1) (2)
Specify the binding style of the 2-sided
original (book or tablet) and the
orientation in which the original is placed.
(1) Touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the
[2-Sided Tablet] key.
A book and a tablet are bound as shown below.
Book Tablet
l_
t ，
A
イ
c
J
l .
A B
C
p
0
ン
L
lE F\,
K L
(2) Touch the appropriate [Image orientation] key.
If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be
transmitted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
©
To cancel 2-sided scanning, touch the highlighted key so that it is no longer highlighted.
2-sided scanning automatically turns off after the transmission operation is completed.
Contents
5-54
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND
SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce)
When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected and displayed in the base screen.
The size of the placed original is indicated as the scan size, and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the send size.
In the above screen, the scan size (the placed original) is 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) and the send size is auto. For example, if the
scan size is 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) and the send size is 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5), the image will be reduced before transmission.
"Scan Size11
"Send Size" is set
to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
(B5)
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
The image is reduced
to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5)
before transmission
• Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected.
\^) ^ STANDARD SIZES (page 5-17)
• When the original size is a non-standard size, or if the size is not detected correctly, manually specify the original scan
size.
隊 Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.) (page 5-56)
瞭 Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 5-57)
5-55
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.)
If the original is a non-standard size or you wish to change the scan size, touch the [Original] key to specify the original
size manually. Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and follow the steps below.
Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
⑵ Touch the [Original] key.
The automatically detected original size appears to the right of the [Original] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
Scan Size 100% Send Size
〔Auto 8^x11 ] ^
Image Orientation
f .fe 2 -Sided 1 f(gk 2-Sided
1 M Booklet 丨丨 ^ Tablet
[sal
Touch the [Scan Size] key.
(1) (2)
Specify the scan size.
(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
• If you are sending a long original, touch the [Long Size] key. Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long
original. The maximum width that can be scanned is 39-3/8" (1000 mm) (the maximum height is 11-5/8" (297 mm)).
隊 TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES (page 5-17)
• To specify an AB size for the scan size, touch the [AB^Inch] key to highlight the [AB] side and then specify the scan size.
Touch the [OK] key.
When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. In addition, when only scan
destinations are selected for scan transmission or metadata transmission, scanning will take place in Mono2.
Contents
5-56
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values)
When scanning a non-standard size original such as a card， follow these steps to specify the original size. The width can
be from 1 " to 1 7" (25 mm to 432 mm), and the height can be from 1 11 to 1 1 -5/8" (25 mm to 297 mm).
Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
The automatically detected original size appears to the right of the [Original] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
, Scan/Original f OK
Scan Size 1C
_
)0% Send Size
► [ Auto
[ 2 -Sided | f|gk 2-Sided
| l!il Booklet | | 眉 Tablet
Image Orientation
EH [sa"|
Touch the [Scan Size] key.
j] Touch the [Size Input] key.
Manual
f 5^8% ] [ 8^xllR ) [ 11x17 ]
AB
f 5 你 8你 | [8^x13 (216x330)1
872x11 ] [ 872x14 j Long Size j
(1),(2) (3)
Enter the scan size (original size).
(1) Touch the [X] key and enter the X
(horizontal) dimension with the QH keys
(2) Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical)
dimension with the Q&J keys.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Touch the [OK] key next to the [Cancel] key to complete
the setting and return to the screen of step 3.
c
Contents
5-57
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Touch the [OK] key.
The specified size appears in the [Scan Size] key.
• When the scan size is specified by numerical values, the send size cannot be specified.
• When the automatic document feeder is used, an original longer than 17" (432 mm) can be scanned (maximum width
39-3/8" (1000 mm)). In this case, touch the [Long Size] key in the screen of step 3.
暖 Specifying the original scan size (Specify using a standard size.) (page 5-56)
隊 TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES (page 5-17)
Contents
5-58
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Specifying the send size of the image
Specify the send size as a paper size. If a send size bigger than the scan size is selected, the image will be enlarged. If
a send size smaller than the scan size is selected, the image will be reduced.
• The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by
numerical values.
• The send size cannot be specified when [TIFF-S] is selected for the format in Internet fax mode. (The send size is fixed at
8-1/2" x11MR(A4R).)
Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
.Scan/Original
Scan Size _
I Auto 8^x11 j
100% Send Size
Auto
^5
( 1^ 2 -Sided I f|gU 2-Sided
Booklet I I 1^] Tablet
Image Orientation
PEI (0a]
Touch the [Send Size] key.
(1) (2)
Specify the send size.
(1) Touch the desired send size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
• Depending on the paper size specified for the "Scan Size", it may not be possible to select some sizes for the "Send
Size". Size keys that cannot be specified for the "Send Size" are grayed out to prevent selection.
• To specify an AB size for the send size, touch the [AB^Inch] key to highlight the [AB] side and then specify the
send size.
Contents
5-59
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(2)
Scan/Original
f ^ i — )1
Scan Size 129% Send Size
[Auto 8^1 1| 4 | 11x17
[ iPjq 2 -Sided I [ (gU 2-Sided
| m Booklet || LJ Tablet
Image Orientation
EE11 10011
1
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
(1) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation]
key.
If this setting is not correct when sending an image with a
changed ratio, a suitable image may not be transmitted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
(i)
The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the "Scan Size" and the "Send Size".
5-60
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE
TYPE
The exposure and original image type can be set appropriately for the original to enable optimum scanning.
Refer the following tables to select appropriate settings.
How to select the exposure
Exposure
When to select
Auto
This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original. (Only
when mono2 is set.)
Manual
1-2
Select this setting when the original consists of dark text.
3
Select this setting for a normal original (neither dark nor light).
4-5
Select this setting when the original consists of faint text.
How to select the original image type (Scan mode, USB memory mode and Data entry mode)
Setting
Description
Text/P rtd. Photo
This mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and
printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.
Text/Photo
This mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and
photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.
Text
Use this mode for regular text documents.
Photo
Use this mode to scan photos.
Printed Photo
This mode is best for scanning printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or
catalogue.
Map
This mode is best for scanning the color shading and fine details found on most maps.
I Select the mode and display the exposure settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Exposure] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
When Fax/ エ -Fax address is included,
exposure setting shared among Fax/
I -Fax/ Scanner mode is selected.
Read the displayed message and touch
the [OK] key,
This message does not appear in USB memory mode or
Internet fax mode. Go to the next step.
If a broadcast transmission is performed that includes both scan mode destinations and Internet fax destinations, the
exposure settings for Internet fax mode will have priority.
5-61
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Scan mode, USB memory mode, Data entry mode
(2) (1) (3)
Internet fax mode
(1) (2) (3)
Select the exposure and original image
type.
(1) Select the original image type.
Touch the original image type key that matches the
original image type.
(2) Adjust the exposure with the m m keys.
The exposure darkens when the I I key is touched,
and lightens when the f G I key is touched.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
(1) Touch the [Manual] key.
(2) Adjust the exposure with the m : T] keys.
The exposure darkens when the I 1 key is touched,
and lightens when the ^ G J key is touched.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
• In Internet fax mode, the original image type and moire reduction cannot be selected.
•To reduce the occurrence of line patterns (moire effect) when scanning printed matter, touch the [Moire Reduction]
checkbox so that a checkmark ノ] appears.
When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the exposure setting can be changed each time you change
pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun.
(However, when "Job Build" is used in the special modes, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is
inserted.)
System Settings (Administrator): Default Exposure Settings
This is used to change the default exposure setting.
Contents
5-62
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHANGING THE RESOLUTION
The resolution setting can be selected.
Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Resolution] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
Scan mode, USB memory mode, Data entry mode
(1) (2)
Select the resolution.
(1) Touch the key of the desired resolution.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Internet fax mode
⑴
(2)
In Internet fax mode, the [Half Tone] key can be touched to select halftone (except when [200X1 00dpi] is selected).
When the original has many gradations of light and dark such as a photo or color illustration, halftone provides a more
attractive image than regular transmission.
Contents
5-63
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
How to select the resolution
For normal text originals, 200X200dpi (200X1 00dpi in Internet fax mode) produces an image that is sufficiently legible.
For photos and illustrations, a high resolution setting (600X600dpi, etc.) will produce a sharp image. However, a high
resolution setting will result in a large file, and if the file is too large, transmission may not be possible. In this event,
reduce the number of pages scanned or take other measures to decrease the file size.
暖 CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT
Specifying the send size of the image (page 5-59)
• When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the resolution setting can be changed each time you
change pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has
begun. (However, when "Job Build" is used in the special modes, the resolution can be changed each time a new set of
originals is inserted.)
• When [TIFF-S] is selected for the format in Internet fax mode, only [200X1 00dpi] or [200X200dpi] can be selected.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Resolution Setting
This is used to change the default resolution setting.
CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT
Changing the format
(Scan mode, USB memory mode and Data entry mode)
The file format (file type and compression mode/compression ratio) for sending a scanned image can be changed at the
time of transmission. In addition, if the scanned originals are divided into separate files, the number of pages per file can
be changed.
The file format for sending a scanned image is specified when the destination is stored in a one-touch key; however, you can
change the format at the time of transmission.
I Select the mode and display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [File Format] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
Read the displayed message and touch
the [OK] key,
The message does not appear in USB memory mode. Go to
the next step.
5-64
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Set the format.
• Scanning in Mono2
(1) (2)
(1) Select the file type.
To send a file using Encrypt PDF, touch the [Encry.]
checkbox to select it ( ノ 1).
(2) Select the compression mode.
• Scanning in color/grayscale
(i)
(1) Touch the indicated key to select [Color/Gray] mode.
When [Color/Gray] is highlighted, [Color/Gray] mode is selected.
(2) Select the file type.
• To send a file using Encrypt PDF, touch the [Encry.]
checkbox to select it ( ノ 1).
• When Enhanced compression kit is installed, the [High] and
[U-Fine] checkboxes appear. To suppress image quality
deterioration and reduce the data size of a file to be
transmitted, Compact PDF can be selected. [U-Fine] can only
be selected when Compact PDF is set.
(3) Select the compression ratio.
• High compression results in a smaller file size,
however, the image quality is slightly degraded.
• When [High] is selected in the file format settings, the
compression ratio cannot be selected.
• The [Programmed] key does not appear in USB memory mode.
• When this screen is displayed, the setting screen of [B/W] mode initially appears.
• The format setting of [B/W] mode is the file format when the color mode is set to [Mono2].
• The format setting of [Color/Gray] mode is the file format when the color mode is set to [Full Color] or [Grayscale].
• The file type of [B/W] mode and the file type of [Color/Gray] mode are linked. The file type cannot be set separately
for each. (When [JPEG] is selected for [Color/Gray] mode, [TIFF] is automatically selected for [B/W] mode.)
• Note the following when the file format is set to Compact PDF ([PDF] is selected and the [High] checkbox is set to y l):
- When Compact PDF is set for one address in a broadcast transmission, the file will be sent as a Compact PDF
file to all scanner addresses.
- When Compact PDF format or Compact PDF (Ultra Fine) format is set for one address in a broadcast transmission, the
file will be sent in Compact PDF (Ultra Fine) format to all scanner addresses.
- If a fax destination is specified or the resolution is set after Compact PDF is set, the Compact PDF setting will be
canceled, the file format will be [PDF], and the compression ratio will be [High].
-If Compact PDF is set when a resolution setting has been specified in scanner (or other) mode, the resolution
setting will be canceled and the Compact PDF resolution will be used for transmission.
- When Compact PDF is selected, [Resolution] cannot be changed while waiting for the next original or in
[Configure] in the job build settings.
5-65
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
⑶
(i)
(2)
To change the number of pages per file,
enter the number of pages and exit the
format settings.
(1) Touch the [Specified Pages per File]
checkbox so that a checkmark 0 appears.
(2) Set the number of pages per file with the
SS keys.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
• When a checkmark does not appear in the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox ^ _ ), one file is created for all
scanned pages.
• When [Specified Pages per File] is selected, consecutive numbers are added to the created file names.
• When [JPEG] is selected for the file type, one file is created for each page (a file cannot be created for multiple
pages). For this reason, the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox does not appear.
• When the file format is set to Encrypt PDF ([PDF] is selected in the format settings screen and the [Encry.] checkbox is set
to0), a screen prompting you to enter a password will appear when the [START] key is pressed to start scan send
transmission.
• Touch the [Entry] key in the displayed screen to open the keyboard screen. Enter a password (maximum of 32 characters)
and touch the [OK] key. Scanning and transmission will begin.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial File Format Setting
This sets the default file format setting for scanner transmission.
5-66
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Changing the format (Internet fax mode)
The file format for sending an Internet fax is normally set to [TIFF-F]. If the destination Internet fax machine does not
support full mode (it only supports simple mode), follow the steps below to select [TIFF-S].
I Switch to Internet fax mode and display the file format settings screen.
(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab,
(2) Touch the [File Format] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
Select the file format.
(1) Touch the key of the desired format.
If you selected [TIFF-F], select the compression mode.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
When [TIFF-S] is selected, the transmission settings are restricted as follows:
• Resolution: The selections are [200X1 00dpi] and [200X200dpi]. If [TIFF-S] is selected after [200X400dpi],
[400X400dpi] or [600X600dpi] is selected, the resolution automatically changes to [200X200dpi].
• Send size: Always 8-1/2" x 1 1 "R (A4R). If [TIFF-S] is selected after the send size is changed, the send size is
automatically changed to 8-1/2" x 1 1"R (A4R). If a size larger than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) is scanned, the size
will automatically be reduced to 8-1/2" x 1 1"R (A4R). When this format is included in a broadcast
transmission, the image will be transmitted to all destinations at 8-1/2" x 1 1"R (A4R).
• Special modes: When a ratio setting is selected and the original size is entered, Dual Page Scan, Card Shot, 2in1, and
Mixed Size Original cannot be used.
System Settings (Administrator): Compression Setting
This is used to set the default compression mode for Internet fax transmission.
Contents
5-67
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHANGING THE COLOR MODE
This procedure is used to change the color mode used to scan the original when the [START] key is pressed.
This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
Mode
Scanning method
Full Color
The original is scanned in full color. This mode is best for full color originals such as catalogues.
Grayscale
The colors in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of gray (grayscale).
Mono2
Colors in the original are scanned as black or white. This mode is best for text-only originals.
I Select the mode and display the color mode settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Color Mode] key.
隊 IMAGE SETTINGS (page 5-53)
Image will be sent in [Mono 2 ]
if Fax or I-Fax destination is included.
Read the displayed message and touch
the [OK] key.
A message does not appear in USB memory mode. Go to the
next step.
When a broadcast transmission is performed using mixed send modes, the image is sent in Mono2.
Select the color mode.
(1) Touch the key of the desired color mode.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
System Settings (Administrator): Default Color Mode Settings
The default color mode can be changed.
Contents
5-68
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE
TRANSMITTED (Preview)
If you touch the [Preview] key before scanning the original, you can check the scanned image in the touch panel before
sending the image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.
Depending on the size of the transmission data, part of the preview image may not appear in the preview screen in the touch
panel.
Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass as appropriate for the functions stored in the program.
Touch the [Preview] key to highlight it.
Select transmission settings and touch the [START] key.
"Originals are being read" appears while the originals are being scanned, and when scanning is finished, the preview screen
appears on the touch panel. Transmission will not take place until you touch the [Start Sending] key in the preview screen.
Preview
B/W
[Function R
s — 4 ― y —— i
[©DCS
Display Rotation
P 响 ]
Check the preview image and then touch
the [Start Sending] key.
Transmission begins.
For information on the preview screen, see "PREVIEW CHECK
SCREEN11 (page 5-70).
System settings (administrator): Default Preview
You can specify whether or not the [Preview] key function will be enabled in the base screens of the image send modes and
in the address book.
Contents
5-69
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
PREVIEW CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the preview check screen.
(1) Preview image
A preview of the scanned original appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and slide
it to scroll. (You can also touch the ▼ ▲ keys to scroll.)
(2) Change page keys
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
• JlJ LWj keys: Go to the first or the last page.
• T) LEJ keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display:
This shows the total number of pages
and the current page number. You can
touch the current page number key and
enter a number with the numeric keys
to go to that page number.
(3) [Function Rev.] key
Touch to check special mode settings or scan settings for
two-sided originals.
(4) Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
■■4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.
(5) "Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
(6) [Start Sending] key
Touch to begin transmission.
•A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.
• The preview image reflects certain scanning and special mode settings.
Settings reflected in the preview image are as follows:
Scanning settings: Original
Special modes: Erase, Dual Page Scan, Card Shot, 2in1, Suppress Background, Mixed Size Original
5-70
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(r
(2>
(4 卜 雜 ](5r Bs= j(6f:
{7b
(1 % °?otr f1 P — f1
a
a
SPECIAL MODES
This section explains special modes that can be used in scan send mode.
SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is touched in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. The special
modes menu consists of two screens. Touch the [±] 令 I key to switch between the two screens. When the [OK] key is
touched in the special modes screen, the selected settings are entered and the base screen reappears.
瞭 Internet fax mode (page 5-72)
Scan mode, USB memory mode， Data entry mode
1st screen 2nd screen
Scan/ Special Modes
Scan/Special Modes
(1) [Program] key*1,2
隊 STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) (page 5-73)
(2) [Erase] key
^ ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase) (page 5-75)
(3) [Dual Page Scan] key
^ SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE
PAGES (Dual Page Scan) (page 5-77)
(4) [Timer] key*1
隊 SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer Transmission) (page 5-79)
(5) [Suppress Background] key
^ WHITENING FAINT COLORS IN THE IMAGE
(Suppress Background) (page 5-81)
(6) [Card Shot] key
^ SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO A
SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) (page 5-83)
(7) [Job Build] key
瞭 SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job
Build) (page 5-86)
*1 Does not appear in USB memory mode.
*2 Does not appear in data entry mode.
*3 Does not appear when the stamp unit is not installed.
In USB memory mode, this appears in the 1st screen.
(8) [Mixed Size Original] key
^ SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
(Mixed Size Original) (page 5-88)
(9) [Slow Scan Mode] key
隊 SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)
(page 5-90)
(10) [Original Count] key*1
瞭 CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count) (page 5-92)
(11) [File] key*1
Touch this to use the File function of document filing mode.
(12) [Quick File] key*1
Touch this to use the Quick File function of document
filing mode.
(13) [Verif. Stamp] key*3 4 5 6 7
瞭 STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (Verif. Stamp)
(page 5-94)
Contents
2 2 0 0
t
o
5-71
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Scan/Special Modes
Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a message will appear in the touch panel.
[OK] key and [Cancel] key
In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:
Internet Fax/Special Modes
Dual Page
— Scan
(1fe~
Job
Build
画
Mixed Size
Original
[D
Slow Scan
Mode
|fe~| Original
| し 國 Count
Edge Center Edge+Center
Erase _ _ Erase
Erase
國
圍
| (o-i)
aa
(A) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the base screen.
(B) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the special mode menu screen. Touch this key when you wish
to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special mode menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special mode menu
screen.
5-72
Contents
Internet fax mode
The keys explained below can only be used in Internet fax mode. The other keys are the same as those explained in
"Scan mode, USB memory mode, Data entry mode" (page 5-71).
1st screen
2nd screen
(1) [2in1] key
隊 SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (2in1)
(page 5-96)
[Transaction Report] key
隊 CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report)
(page 5-99)
g 1 一 2 m 二-- 令 一
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs)
A destination, original settings, and functions can be stored in a program. When you wish to use those settings to send
an image, they can be retrieved with ease.
For example, suppose 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size documents are scanned into a file and sent to each branch office once a month.
(1) The same documents are sent to each branch office
(2) Each page of a bound document is successively transmitted
(3) Smudges on the edges of the documents are erased before transmission
When a job program is not stored
When a job program is stored
Enter the address of each branch office.
Touch a stored program key.
Select Dual Page Scan.
♦
Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.
Select Erase settings.
Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.
Considerable time is required to send the documents each
month because the above settings must be selected.
In addition, mistakes may occasionally be made when
selecting the settings, so incorrect transmissions may occur.
When a program is used, settings are selected with ease by
simply pressing the stored key.
In addition, transmission takes place based on the stored
settings so there are no chances for mistakes.
• Programs are stored, edited, and deleted using "Address Control" in the system settings. See "Program" (page
④ 7-19) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
• Programs can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Job Programs] and then [Image Send] in the Web page menu.
• The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can
be used repeatedly for transmission.
• The following settings can be stored in programs.
Image send mode: Scan, Internet fax
Destinations
Image settings: Original scan size, Image orientation, duplex scanning, exposure, resolution
Special modes: Erase, Dual Page Scan, Suppress Background, Job Build, Mixed Size Original, Slow Scan Mode, Original
Count, Verif. Stamp, 2in1
Preview
• Up to 48 programs can be stored.
• Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program.
• This function cannot be used in USB memory mode or data entry mode.
Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass as appropriate for the functions stored in the program.
5-73
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Program] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
(1
1) (2)
1
Program
^Program 2
[program 3
S] \ Program 4
Q| 丄
("program 5
设 J [Program 6
_ V)
[Program 7
q] [ Program 8
_ 0
[Program 9
qJ [program 10
— ^ rn
[program 11
f Program 12
Retrieve the stored program.
(1) Touch the desired program key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
圉 Program: Prog]
xxx@xx.xxx. cc
"am 1
)m
[ Original ] Scan： Send:
f Exposure ]
Send Settings
[ Resolution ] 200X200dpi
Address Review
f File Format ) ^ PDF
File
\ Color Mode 丨 Mono2
Quick File |
[ Special Modes j | [Tj|J
_
Preview
Select additional settings.
When a program is used, the following settings can be
additionally specified:
• Image Settings: Original scan size*, send size, file format,
color mode
• Send settings
• Special modes: Timer Transmission, Card Shot, File, Quick
File, Transaction Report
• When stored in the program, this cannot be additionally
specified.
• The screen that appears will vary depending on the destination stored in the program.
• The mode cannot be changed here.
• Functions stored in the program cannot be canceled here.
Press the [START] Key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
Contents
5-74
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase)
The erase function is used to erase shadows on images produced when scanning thick originals or books. (This function erases
the parts of the image where shadows tend to form. The function does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows.)
Scanning a thick book
Erase modes
Not using the erase
function
Using the erase
function
三 □
Shadows appear in the
image.
No shadows appear.
Edge Erase Center Erase Edge + Center Erase Side Erase
i=n| 「三 □
• Shadows at the edges of the original can also be erased when the automatic document feeder is used.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Specify the destination.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Erase] key,
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
5-75
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(i)
(2) (3)
Scan/Special Modes
1
OK |
Edge Center Edge+Center
Erase Erase Erase
圍 ra
(o~i)
f Side Erase
a s h
Select the erase settings.
(1) Touch the desired erase mode.
Select one of the 4 erase modes.
Touch the [Side Erase] key to open the following screen.
Erase
Side Erase
_
Cancel |( OK j
□ U!
)
Erase position
for Original Side 2
i
LeftQ
j~j Right
□Dc
>wn
[Different Side
1 from Side 1
Touch the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase
and make sure that a checkmark ([vj) appears.
When performing two-sided scanning, set the erase edge
on the reverse side.
• If you touch the [Same Side as Side 1] key, the edge in
the same position as on the front side will be erased.
• If you touch the [Different Side from Side 1], the edge in
the position opposite to the erased edge on the front
side will be erased.
When you have completed the settings, touch the [OK] key.
(2) Set the erasure width with the 00 keys,
0" to 1 11 (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next page and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then press the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®) to cancel the operation.
When the erase function is used, erase takes place at the edges of the original image. If you also use a reduction or an
enlargement setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. For example, if the erase width setting is 1
(20 mm) and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 1/2" (10 mm).
@To cancel the erase setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment
The default erase width setting is linked to the copy mode system setting, and can be set from 0" to 1 " (0 mm to 20 mm). The
factory default setting is 1/2" (10 mm).
Contents
5-76
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO
SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan)
The left and right sides of an original can be scanned as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to
successively scan each page of a book or other bound document.
Example: Scanning the left and right pages of a book
Example:
Original scan size
Transmitted image
11nx17" (A3) x 1 page
8-1/2Mx11M (A4) x 2 pages
• When using dual page scan, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• The send size cannot be changed.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
Align the center of the original with the appropriate size
mark ▼ .
Size mark
r
Centerline of
A3 original
圔
Centerline of
11" x 17" original
1^1
r
11"x 17"
(A3)
V.
The page on this
side is scanned first.
Centerline of original
Specify the destination.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
Contents
5-77
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(i)
Scan/Special Modes
Program j
Erase
i
Timer
Suppress
| Background
(
Job
Build
固
Mixed Size
Original
ffWl Original
I Upa] Count
] I
{G
Slow Scan
Mode
Select Dual Page Scan.
(1) Press the [Dual Page Scan] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
©
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®) to cancel the operation.
©
• To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function. (Note, however, that
"Center Erase" and "Edge + Center Erase" cannot be used.)
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.
To cancel the dual page scan setting...
Touch the [Dual Page Scan] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is no longer highlighted, and touch the [OK] key.
Contents
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
a a
5-78
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer Transmission)
This function lets you specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place.
Transmission begins automatically at the specified time.
take place at 20:00 begins automatically
• When a timer transmission is stored, keep the main power switch in the "on" position. If the main power switch is in the "off"
position at the specified time, transmission will not take place.
• When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. It is not
possible to leave the document in the auto document feeder or on the document glass and have it scanned at the specified
time of transmission.
• Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, special modes, etc.) are automatically cleared after the
transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function is used, the scanned original and settings are stored
on the built-in hard drive.)
• This function cannot be used in USB memory mode.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Specify the destination.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Timer] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
Contents
5-79
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1) (2) (3)
.Scan/Special Modes
®
[ ^ ま]
ITimer
Cancel j f OK
Day of the Week
■
as
Time
IlfflL 鼠
as as
Set the time with the y \j±] keys.
(1) Specify the day.
If you do not wish to specify a day, select [---]. In this
case, transmission will begin when the time specified in
(2) arrives.
(2) Specify the time (hour, minute)
Select the time in 24-hour format.
You can also directly touch a numeric display key to
change the setting with the numeric keys.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
When this screen is opened, the setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CLEAR ALL] key
(© ) to cancel the operation. Correct the time in the system settings and then perform the timer transmission procedure.
隊 CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME (page 5-5)
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
The original is scanned into memory. The original cannot be scanned at a specified time.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
• The time can be specified up to a week in advance.
• Up to 94 timer transmissions can be stored at once.
•If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer transmission will begin after that
transmission is finished.
• Other transmissions can be performed as usual after a timer transmission is stored.
•A timer transmission can be deleted in the job status screen.
• If a timer transmission is given priority in the job status screen, the time specification is canceled. The transmission will
begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.
隊 GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN TRANSMISSION JOB (page 5-108)
@To cancel timer transmission...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
Contents
5-80
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
WHITENING FAINT COLORS IN THE IMAGE
(Suppress Background)
This feature is used to suppress light background areas.
Level [+]
The lightness level at which
suppression takes place
can be adjusted.
Level [-]
• This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
Specify the destination.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Suppress Background] key.
Read the message that appears and then touch the [OK] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
5-81
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1) (2)
Select the suppress background setting.
(1) Adjust the background suppression level.
Touch the [+] key to suppress only faint background.
Touch the [-] key to suppress faint to dark background.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
When the original is scanned in [Mono2], the suppress background function will not operate.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®) to cancel the operation.
@To cancel the background suppression setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
5-82
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO
A SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot)
This function lets you send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side
separately.
Originals
Front
Back
Transmission
Scanned image
Example of an 8-1/2" x 1 1 ■■ (A4) size landscape scan transmission
size portrait scan transmission
• When using card shot, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
Specify the destination.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Card Shot] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
Contents
5-83
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1) (A) (B) (2)
Scan/Special Modes
1
Card Shot
Cancel
OK |
S3
SI 3
OE
Q
% (1 〜 8 1/2)
^1(1-8
3
Fit to
Send Size
Size Reset
1
Y
X
Specify the original size.
(1) Enter the original size.
• Touch the [X] key and enter the horizontal dimension
(X) of the original with the 3 Q keys.
• Touch the [Y] key and enter the vertical dimension (Y)
of the original with the Q Q keys.
(A) To return the original size to the default size, touch the
[Size Reset] key.
(B) To automatically enlarge or reduce the image to fit the
send size, touch the [Fit to Send Size] key. If you wish
to scan the original at the entered original size, there
is no need to touch this key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• The send size will be selected automatically based on the entered original size.
• After selecting Card Shot, you can touch the [Original] key in the base screen to change the original scan size or the
send size. In this case, the screen of this step appears when you touch the scan size key. For the procedure for
setting the send size, see "Specifying the send size of the image" (page 5-59).
Press the [START] key to scan the front side of the card.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
Turn the card over and Press the [START] key to scan the reverse side of the
card.
Before scanning the back of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key in the touch panel to change the exposure.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
Contents
5-84
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Place next original . (Pg.N'
Press [Start] .
When finished, press [Read-End] .
Contiaure ^
等
Touch the [Read-End] key.
If you will continue by scanning the front of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key to change the exposure,
resolution, scan size, and send size.
The ratio cannot be specified and "Rotation Sending Setting" cannot be selected.
@To cancel Card Shot-
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
5-85
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE
(Job Build)
This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic
document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. Use this function when the number of originals that
you wish to scan exceeds the maximum number of sheets that can be inserted in the automatic document feeder at
once.
When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The settings that you
select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.
Originals Originals are
• Up to 999 pages can be scanned. Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs, fewer pages can be scanned.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
Specify the destination.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
5-86
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Select job build mode.
(1) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Press the [START] key to scan the first set of originals.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
Insert the next set of originals and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®) to cancel the operation. All scanned data will be cleared.
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Place next original . (Pg.N>
Press [Start] .
When finished, press [Read-End] .
Conticrure \
等
If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when Job Build is used in combination with M2in1M in the special modes, only the exposure
can be changed when scanning each even-numbered page of the original pages.
If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the transmission will be canceled.
©
To cancel the job build function....
Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.
Contents
一 M a
5-87
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original)
This feature lets you scan originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) size originals
mixed together with 11" x 17" (A3) size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the
size of each original.
Originals
(8-1/2" x 14" (B4) original mixed
in with 11"x 17" (A3) originals)
Files created
1st page
8-1/2" x14M
Scanned in at
8-1/2" x 14" (B4)
size
2nd to 4th pages
irxi7"
Scanned in at
11nx 17" (A3)
size
This feature can only be used with the following combinations of original sizes:
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14" •11" x17" and 8-1/2" x 13" • 11" x 17" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
•A3 and B4 • A3 and B5 • B4 and A4 • A4 and B5
• A4R and B5 • B4 and A4R • B4 and A5 • B5 and A5
When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
Place the originals with
the corners aligned
together in the far left
corner. _
11Mx17M (A3) ―
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals with the corners aligned together in the far
left corner of the document feeder tray.
Specify the destination.
瞭 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
5-88
Contents
(1)
Scan/Special Modes
m
Program j
Erase
Timer
[ Suppress
| Background
£
Job
Build
Slow Scan
Mode
\m Original ]
(L-S Count |
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Select the mixed size original setting.
(1) Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key so that
it is highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
If an original scan size has been specified, a message will appear when the [Mixed Size Original] key is touched. To
enable the Mixed Size Original setting, change the scan size setting to auto and then touch the [Mixed Size Original]
key again.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
(g) :
Once mixed size originals has been selected, an original scan size cannot be specified.
When mixed size originals are set, automatic duplex scanning cannot be used. (When using the MX-M283N.)
Rotate cannot be used when Mixed Size Original is enabled.
©
To cancel the Mixed Size Original setting...
Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
The original feeding mode can be set to always scan mixed size originals.
Contents
13 a
5-89
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS
(Slow Scan Mode)
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.
When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Adjust the original guides slowly.
If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.
Specify the destination.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
5-90
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Select slow scan mode.
(1) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®) to cancel the operation.
• When this function is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.
• Rotate cannot be used when Mixed Size Original is enabled.
©
To cancel slow scan mode...
Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
This is used to have scanning always take place in slow scan mode.
Contents
5-91
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(i)
Scan/Special Modes
a
] 匾
Dual Page |
Scan I
Suppress
Background
Job
Build
Mixed Size |
REf1 Original 141 ^
つ Slow Scan
Mode
i、n zi i
Select the original count function.
(1) Touch the [Original Count] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
Contents
CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED
ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION
(Original Count)
The number of scanned original sheets can be counted and displayed before transmission. Checking the number of
scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes.
® :
This function cannot be used in USB memory mode.
The setting can be enabled separately for each mode.
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
Specify the destination.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
B a
5-92
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
/^\ To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation. All scanned data will be cleared.
(A) (B)
I I
When scanning ends, check the number
of original sheets scanned and touch the
[OK] key.
Transmission will begin.
• When Job Build mode is used, the confirmation message will
appear after the [Read-End] key is touched.
r i r%
1 XX J ages of original have been scanned. 1 (P.x)l
oeiid. the scanned data?
1 Cancel | f OK |
• The message on the screen shows the number of sheets
scanned in (A), and the number of pages (sheet sides)
scanned in (B). For example, if both sides of one original
sheet are scanned, "1" will appear in (A) and "2" will appear
in (B).
©
If this step is not performed for one minute while the above confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and
settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the
image will not be reserved for transmission.
If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets...
Touch the [Cancel] key and then touch the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings
and destination settings will not be cleared. Insert the original sheets in the automatic document feeder again and
press the [START] key to re-scan.
When a broadcast transmission is performed, if the original count function is selected in any of the modes, the function will
operate for all destinations.
@To cancel the Original Sheet Count function...
Touch the [Original Count] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Original Count Setting
This can be enabled to have the number of original sheets always counted. The setting can be enabled separately for each
mode.
Contents
5-93
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (Verif. Stamp)
This function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder， allowing you to verify that all
originals were correctly scanned.
Position of stamp
An "O" mark is
stamped
in fluorescent
pink.
• To use this function, the optional stamp unit must be installed.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Specify the destination.
隊 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 3.
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
暖 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
5-94
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Select "Verif. Stamp".
(1) Touch the [±}±\ keys to switch through the
screens.
(2) Touch the [Verif. Stamp] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®) to cancel the operation.
• When two-sided originals are used, the front of each original is stamped twice. (MX-M283N only)
• If an error occurs during scanning, an original that was not scanned may be stamped.
• When the ■■〇 ■■ mark that is stamped on originals starts to become faint, replace the stamp cartridge. For the procedure for
replacing the stamp cartridge, see "REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE11 (page 1-68) in M1. BEFORE USING THE
MACHINE11.
@To cancel the stamp function...
Touch the [Verif. Stamp] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Verification Stamp
This setting is used to always have originals stamped.
Contents
5-95
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE
(2in1)
Two original pages can be reduced to half their original size and sent together as a single page.
Portrait-oriented originals
Transmission _
Landscape-oriented originals
Transmission
This function cannot be used in scan mode, USB memory mode, or data entry mode.
Place the original.
When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.
©
Originals
Document feeder tray
Place the originals face up.
Document glass
Place the originals face down.
Portrait orientation
T^T
] 議:。
Specify the destination.
暖 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
5-96
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Select 2in1.
(1) Touch the [2in1] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key,
Scan
Internet Fax Fax f USB Mem. Scan 丨 PC Scan
1 ►Address Book
f Original J Scan: Send:
\ Address Entry
f Send Settings
「 Resolution ] 200Xl00dpi
^Address Review
f File Format j TIFF-F
Fill：
f Special Modes j | Q
Quick File
Preview
I I ェ -Fax Manual 1
| W l [ Reception J
Touch the [Original] key.
Internet Fax/Original
(2)
^3
Scan_Size _ 100% Send Size _
I Auto 8^x11 ^ 岭 I Auto
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
(1) Touch the "Image Orientation" key with the
same orientation as the original image.
If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be
transmitted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Contents
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
11 l> .l a
5-97
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
The [Configure] key can be touched in the scan-end confirmation screen to change the exposure, resolution, scan
size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure can be
changed.)
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
• Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size.
• The 2in1 function cannot be used when the original is other than 8-1/2" x 1 1" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A4, B5, or A5) size.
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.
@To cancel 2in1...
Touch the [2in1] key in the screen of step 4 so that it is not highlighted.
5-98
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT
(Transaction Report)
A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when an Internet fax transmission fails or when a broadcast
transmission is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of
other party, time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
隊 INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN (page 5-109)
This function cannot be used in scan mode, USB memory mode, or data entry mode.
Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the system settings; however, you can temporarily select
different conditions for a transmission. To change the transaction report print conditions at the time of transmission,
follow the steps below.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
B Specify the destination.
暖 ENTERING DESTINATIONS (page 5-18)
B Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [£) S keys to switch through the screens.
(4) Touch the [Transaction Report] key.
隊 SPECIAL MODES (page 5-71)
(1) (2)
1 _
Internet Fax/Special Modes
I - OK — )
Transaction Report
Cancel ][ OK
Print at Error | Do not Print
Print Original Image
Select print conditions.
(1) Select the print conditions.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows:
"Always Print": A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails.
"Print at Error": A transaction report is printed when transmission fails.
"Do not Print": Do not print a transaction report.
• When the [Print Original Image] checkbox is selected ^}, part of the transmitted original is included on the
transaction report.
Contents
5-99
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)) to cancel the operation.
For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations.
广、 To cancel the transaction report setting...
\3 / Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
/^\ • System Settings (Administi
This is used to set the conditi
The factory default setting is
Single Sending: Print Out A
Broadcastina： | Print Out/
Receiving: Print Out A
• System Settings (Administi
This is used to have part of th
^ator): Tr
ons for pi
ansaction Report Print Select Setting
rinting transaction reports.
1.
1 I
II Report/I Print Out Error Report Only |/No Printed Report
VII Report /Print Out Error Report Only/No Printed Report
II ReDort/Print Out Error Report Onlv/lNo Printed Report |
^ator): Original Print on Transaction Report
le transmitted original printed on the transaction report.
5-100
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
j 益 Print Job J Scan to 1 Fax Job | 扮
Address Set Time Pages : Status
JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Reserved transmissions and received Internet faxes are referred to as jobs here.
Example: Pressing the tab in scan mode
JOB STATUS
The job status display is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the job
status screen.
j
(
1
I
Scan
Internet Fax | Fax I USB Mem. Scan j PC Scan
►Address Book
[ Original j Scan： Send：
Address Entry
[ Exposure | ■
Send Settings
f Resolution | 200X200dpi
1
i
!
1
Address Review
[ File Format j J PDF
File
f Color Mode j j-P Mono2
Quick File
[ Special Modes ]
Preview
Contents
CHECKING THE STATUS OF
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS
This section explains how to check the status of reserved transmission jobs and received Internet faxes.
T
_
Detai
1 1
lP]
1 Sto
riori
p/De
Lty |
lete|
S IT I
5-101
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1) Mode switch tabs
Use these tabs to change the job status screen mode.
(2) Job status screen selector key
Touch this key to switch between the job queue screen
and the completed jobs screen.
(3) Job queue screen [Detail] key
This shows detailed information on broadcast
transmission jobs and the status of jobs. Select the key of
the desired job in the job queue screen (6) and then
touch the [Detail] key.
(4) [Priority] key
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.
^ GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN TRANSMISSION
JOB (page 5-108)
(5) [Stop/Delete] key
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.
^ STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED
OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-107)
(7；
(8：
5-102
JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of two screens: the job queue screen that shows reserved jobs and the job currently in
progress, and the completed jobs screen. To switch between the two screens, touch the job status screen selector key
((2) below).
Job queue screen
Complete screen
(1)
(1)
-I
^ Print Job I ^ Scan to Fax Job 丨皮 Internet Fax ■
I Job queue screen
Jobs are shown as keys in the order they were reserved.
Each key shows information on the job and its current
status.
隊 Job key display (page 5-103)
I Completed jobs screen [Detail] key
This shows detailed information on the results of
completed broadcast transmissions and jobs that used
the document filing function. Select the key of the desired
job in the completed jobs screen (9) and then touch the
[Detail] key.
隊 CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS (page 5-106)
| [Call] key
Touch this key to call up and use a transmission or
reception job stored with the document filing function.
) Completed jobs screen
This shows up to 99 completed transmission or reception
jobs in each mode. A description of the job and the result
(status) are shown.
Jobs that used document filing function, broadcast
transmission jobs, and received Internet fax forwarding
jobs are indicated as keys.
Contents
3 4 5
/V
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Job key display
The following information is shown in the job queue keys and completed job keys that appear in the job status screen.
Direct SMTP information is also included in Internet fax transmission/reception information.
1^1^：
(1) (2)
AAA
10:22 04/01
000/004
Waiting
T I
⑶ W
1
(5)
T
(6)
(1) Displays the number (position) of the job in the job queue.
When the job currently being transmitted is finished, the
job moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.
(2) Mode icon
This indicates the type of job. In the completed jobs
screen, a color bar appears next to the icon to indicate
whether the job was executed in color or black & white.
(However, the color bar icon does not appear in the key
of a job that used document filing or in the key of a
transmission/reception job that was canceled.)
Icon
Job type
eT
Scan to E-mail
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network Folder
■P
Scan to Desktop
&
Internet fax transmission
6
Internet fax reception
PC-l-Fax transmission
Broadcast transmission or Inbound
routing
,1
Metadata transmission
(3) Name of communicating party (address)
For a transmission, the name or address of the destination.
For a reception, the address of the sending party.
In the case of a broadcast transmission, "Broadcast"
appears together with a broadcast control number
(4-digits).
(4) Time reserved/Time started
In the job queue screen, the date and time the job was
reserved. In the completed jobs screen, the date and
time the job was started.
(5) Number of pages
Shows the number of pages transmitted/total number of
original pages.
(6) Status
Shows the job status.
• Job in progress
Display
Status
"Connecting"
Connecting to the destination.
"Sending"
Sending data.
■■Receiving"
Receiving an Internet fax.
"Stopped"
The job has been stopped.
■■Error"
An error occurred while the job was
being executed.
• Job waiting to be executed
Display
Status
"Waiting11
The job is waiting to be executed.
"Retry Mode11
The job is being re-attempted due
to a communication error or other
problem.
"Report Wait11
An Internet fax has been sent for
which a receive report was
requested, and the machine is
waiting for the receive report.
A day and
time is
displayed
Timer transmission job (the
specified time is displayed)
5-103
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
• Completed job
Display
Status
"Send OK11
Transmission was completed.
"In Memory"
An Internet fax has been received
but has not yet been printed.
"Received11
Printed received fax data.
"Forward OK"
A received Internet fax has been
forwarded.
"Stopped"
The job was stopped.
"Delete"
Deleted received data in the image
check screen.
"Number of
successful
transmission
destinations/
Total
destinations
OK11
Completion of a broadcast
transmission or inbound routing
operation.
If transmission to 3 destinations
was successful out of a total of 5，
■■003/005 OK11 will appear.
"No
Response"
An error occurred because there
was no response from the
destination.
■■OK Report11
A receive report was requested for
a transmission, the transmission
was completed normally, and the
receive report was received from
the destination.
MNG Report11
A receive report was requested for
a transmission, however, the
transmission did not take place
correctly and a transmission failed
report was received.
__No Report"
An e-mail was received without an
attached file and thus printing was
not possible.
"Received11
An e-mail was received, however,
the attached file was not a TIFF-F
file or there was no attached file,
and thus printing was not possible.
"Rejected"
An Internet fax was sent from a
party that is blocked.
"NGxxxxxx"
Transmission/reception was not
successful because a
communication error occurred (a
6-digit error code appears in
xxxxxx.)
■■Error"
An error occurred while the job was
being executed.
5-104
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB QUEUE IS
COMPLETED
When a normal transmission job is completed, it moves to the completed jobs screen and "Send OK" appears in the
status column.
Received Internet faxes, timer transmission jobs, and forwarding jobs are handled in the job status screen as explained
below.
Internet fax reception jobs
While an Internet fax is being received, "Receiving" appears.
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears.
When printing ends, the status changes to "Printed" and the job is completed.
Timer transmission jobs
A timer transmission job appears at the bottom of the job queue until the specified time arrives.
When the specified time arrives, the job is executed. If another job is in progress, the timer job is started when the other
job is completed.
Internet fax transmission jobs that request a receive report
After completion of an Internet fax transmission job (excluding Direct SMTP transmission jobs) that requests a receive
report, the job is placed on standby at the bottom of the job queue screen. "Report Wait" appears in the status column.
When the receive report is received from the destination, or if the report is not received within the timeout time, the job
moves to the completed jobs screen.
Reception jobs when "Inbound Routing Settings" are enabled
When "Inbound Routing Settings" are enabled, reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print setting.
隊 FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings) (page 5-115)
• Received Internet fax is not printed
"Receiving" appears while the Internet fax is being received. When reception is completed, the job moves to the job
queue of the job status screen of scan mode.
• Received Internet fax is printed
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears. When printing
ends, the status changes to "Printed" and the job is completed. In addition, the job is added to the job queue of the job
status screen of scan mode. When forwarding received Internet faxes is finished, "Forward OK" appears.
5-105
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS
You can check a list of the destinations, the destinations for which transmission failed, and other detailed information on
completed jobs that used document filing function, broadcast transmission jobs, and received Internet fax forwarding
jobs. Touch the key of the job for which you wish to display information in the completed jobs screen and touch the
[Detail] key. The job detail screen (see below) will appear.
Detail
1 0K 1
^ BroadcastOOOl
Address
Start Time Status 丨 Retry ]
002 eT EEE EEE
10:01 04/01 NG000000 1
010 FFF FFF
1
10:10 04/01 NG000000
— 1 丄 1
E
Pile
Failed f All Destinations j
The job name appears at the top of the job detail screen.
To view details on the job, touch one of the tabs. The following information appears on each tab.
Tab name
Information displayed
File
Shows information on a transmission/reception that used document filing function.
To call up the file and use it, touch the [Call] key.
Failed
Shows information on addresses for which communication failed.
Address: Address name or number
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Description of failure (error)
The [Retry] key can be touched to re-attempt transmission to that address.*
All Destinations
Shows all addresses specified in the job.
Address: Address name or number
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Communication result
The [Retry] key can be touched to transmit to all addresses again.*
Recalling is not possible for a broadcast transmission that includes a Scan to FTP address, Scan to Network Folder
address, or Scan to Desktop address.
5-106
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING
TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE
TRANSMITTED
Follow the steps below to stop a job that is being transmitted or is waiting to be transmitted.
JOB STATUS
/ \
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
(i)
(i)
| 蟲 Print Job j Scan to | Fax Job [ ^ Internet Fax]
Address Time Parrp.Q :
1 •，想 Broadcast 10:00 04/01 020/003 : Connecting ]
1
1 丄
1 1
im
Complete
:2 ゴ AAA AAA 10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting
3 ^ BBB BBB 10:22 04/01 1000/004 Waiting
a
)p/Delete|
-I-
Select the job that you wish to stop.
(1) Touch the mode tab of the job to be
stopped.
(2) Touch the key of the job to be stopped.
(3) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
A Delete the job?
eT ccc CCC 10:31 04/01
No
If you do not want to stop the selected job...
Touch the [No] key.
Touch the [Yes] key.
Printing of a received Internet fax cannot be stopped.
Contents
5-107
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN
TRANSMISSION JOB
When multiple jobs are waiting to be transmitted, the jobs are normally transmitted in the order they were reserved. If
you need to give priority to a job and send it ahead of the other jobs, follow the steps below.
JOB STATUS
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
(i)
(i)
1 蟲 Print Job 1 由
Scan to | tP Fax Job j ^ Interne
;t Fax]
Address
Set Time Pages : Status
[ 1 •激 Broadcast
10:00 04/01 1020/003 : Connecting )
1
2 ゴ AAA AAA
10:05 04/01 000/001 Waiting
1 丄
令
Complete
[3 ゴ BBB BBB
10:22 04/01 1000/004 Waiting
1 1
IS
S'
[ Detail ]
| Priority j
f Stop/Delete]
(2) ⑶
Select the job to which you wish to give
priority.
(1) Touch the mode tab of the job to be given
priority.
(2) Touch the key of the job to be given priority.
(3) Touch the [Priority] key.
The selected job moves up to the position immediately
following the job in progress. The job will be executed
when the job in progress is completed.
5-108
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY
LOG (Image Sending Activity Report)
IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORT
You can have the machine print a log of recent image sending activity (date, name of other party, time required, result,
etc.). The Image Sending Activity Report contains useful information such as the types of errors that occurred.
The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report.
You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 201,
or at a specified time (once a day only).
The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted.
System Settings (Administrator): Activity Report Print Select Setting
This is used to set the conditions for printing activity reports. The factory default setting is not to print.
The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 201 , or at a specified
time (once a day only).
INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN
Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction
report or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.
Examples of messages that are printed in the result column
Message
Explanation
OK
The transaction was completed normally.
OK REPORT
A receive report was requested for a transmission, the transmission was completed normally, and
the receive report was received from the destination.
CANCEL
A transmission was stopped while in progress, or a reserved transmission job was canceled.
MEM. FULL
The memory became full during reception.
REJECTED
An Internet fax was sent from a party that is blocked.
NG REPORT
A receive report was requested for a transmission, however, the transmission did not take place
correctly and a transmission failed report was received.
NO REPORT
A receive report was requested for a transmission, however, a report was not received within the
timeout time.
NG LIMIT
Transmission was not possible because the file size exceeded the machine's file size limit setting.
RECEIVED
An e-mail was received, however, the attached file was not a TIFF-F file or there was no attached
file, and thus printing was not possible.
FAIL xx (xxxx)
The transaction failed due to a communication error.
First 2 digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 99.
Last 4 digits of communication error number: Code for use by service technicians.
5-109
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS
This section explains the basic procedures for receiving Internet faxes.
RECEIVING AN INTERNET FAX
The Internet fax function periodically* connects to the mail server (POP3 server) and checks whether or not Internet
faxes have been received. When faxes have been received, the faxes are automatically retrieved and printed.
* The default setting is once every 5 minutes.
If faxes will be received at night, keep the main power switch in the "on" position.
Internet faxes are received automatically.
A beep sounds when reception ends.
The faxes are printed automatically.
If the machine is out of paper or there is no paper that matches the size of the received fax, a message will appear in the
touch panel. Follow the instructions in the message to load an appropriate size of paper.
• System Settings: Fax Data Receive/Forward (page 7-20)
When printing is not possible because the machine has run out of paper or toner, received Internet faxes can be forwarded
to and printed by another previously stored Internet fax machine.
• System Settings (Administrator): 1-Fax Default Settings
These settings are used to select how received faxes are handled when the [POWER] key (@ ) is "off" (the main power switch
is "on"), the volume of the beep that sounds when reception ends, and whether or not received e-mail messages are printed.
• System Settings (Administrator): 1-Fax Receive Settings
Settings related to Internet fax reception can be configured such as the interval for checking for received faxes, duplex
reception, output settings, auto reduction printing, and storing allow/reject reception addresses.
• System Settings (Administrator): Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting
This setting is used to allow/refuse reception from stored addresses and domains.
• System Settings (Administrator): Receiving Date & Time Print
Use this to select whether or not the date and time of reception is added when a received image is printed.
Contents
5-110
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES
If the interval for checking for received faxes is somewhat long and you wish to check immediately, you can manually
initiate reception.
Touch the [1-Fax Manual Reception] key to connect to the mail server and retrieve received faxes.
5-111
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print)
"Hold Setting for Received Data Print" in the system settings (administrator) can be enabled to have faxes received to
memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a password must be entered. When this function is enabled, a
password entry screen appears in the touch panel when received Internet faxes are retrieved.
Received data is stored.
Enter password via the 10 -key.
When the previously programmed 4-digit password is entered with the numeric keys, printing begins.
The [Cancel] key can be touched to close the password entry screen; however, the data in memory key (回） will blink
in the touch panel. The password entry screen will reappear when you touch the blinking key (L®J) or change modes.
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), a password can be
entered to display the received data list screen. If you wish to check an image before printing it, continue from step 1 on
the next page.
• The received faxes will be retained in memory regardless of whether they were received automatically or manually.
•If "Fax Data Receive/Forward" is enabled in the system settings so that received faxes are forwarded to another machine,
faxes retained in memory are also forwarded. At that time, the same password entry screen will appear as for printing.
Forwarding will not take place unless the password is entered.
System Settings (Administrator): Hold Setting for Received Data Print
Enable this setting to have faxes received to memory without being printed. This setting is also used to program the
password that must be entered to print the faxes.
5-112
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING
When "Received Data Image Check Setting" is enabled* in the system settings (administrator), you can check a received
image in the touch panel before printing it out. When this function is enabled, follow the steps below to print a received image.
* The factory default setting is disabled.
Depending on the size of the received data, part of the image in the image check screen on the touch panel may not appear.
The memory has received data.
Check the data?
No
) i 汽 )
When an image is received, a confirmation
prompt will appear. Touch the [Yes] key.
If this message appears while you are configuring settings of
any type and you touch the [Yes] key, the settings that you are
configuring will be canceled. If this message appears in another
mode, you will return to the base screen of image send mode
after checking the image.
(1)
Image Check
Delete
Print
(2)
Select the received image
(1) Touch the key of the received image that
you want to check.
Multiple received images can be checked.
(2) Touch the [Image Check] key.
• To show thumbnails of the received images, touch the
[Thumbnail] key.
• To delete an image that has been selected, touch the
[Delete] key. To print an image that has been selected,
touch the [Print] key.
When the [Select All] key is touched, it will change into the [Cancel All] key. When all received data has been selected
using the [Select All] key, the selection can be canceled by touching the [Cancel All] key.
Check the received image and then
touch the [Print] key.
Printing begins.
For information on the image check screen, see "IMAGE
CHECK SCREEN11 (page 5-114).
If the screen of step 1 appears when you are configuring settings in the setting screens of any of the modes, the configured
settings will be canceled if you view the image. After viewing the image, you will return to the base screen of image send
mode, regardless of which mode you were in previously.
System Settings (Administrator): Received Data Image Check Setting
Use this to specify whether or not a received Internet fax can be viewed before it is printed.
Contents
5-113
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
IMAGE CHECK SCREEN
This section explains the image check screen.
(1) Information display
This shows information on the displayed image.
(2) Preview image
An image of the selected received image appears.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the ▼ ▲ keys to
scroll.)
(3) Change page keys
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
• N] keys: Go to the first or the last page,
•aa keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display: This shows the total number of
pages and the current page
number. You can touch the
current page number key and
enter a number with the
numeric keys to go to that page
number.
(4) "Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
(5) [Print] key
Touch to start printing.
(6) Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
"4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.
(7) Image select key
When multiple images are selected for preview display,
use this to change the displayed images.
A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.
Contents
5-114
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET
FAXES TO A NETWORK ADDRESS
(Inbound Routing Settings)
Received Internet faxes can be automatically forwarded to an e-mail address, file server address, desktop address, or
network folder address. When this function is enabled, you can also have received Internet faxes forwarded without
printing them.
When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot be
printed on the faxes. ("Receiving Date & Time Print" is disabled.)
CONFIGURING INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS
All inbound routing settings are configured in the Web pages. For the procedure for accessing the Web pages, see the
Quick Start Guide.
The following explanation assumes that the Web pages have been accessed with administrator rights.
To configure inbound routing settings, follow the steps below.
Administration Settings
1 Subnwl(Uj || VfOttMR) \
1_，1
Inboiind Pouting Sttdngt
Inbound Routing
□ Ottaibl# R*9»str«tion of Forward Tabte
□ of Forward TaWt
□ Dttabi« Chan9»or Forward Appcovil
Print Scyf* Sfding
II |
OPinmOiiiAlR#po(t
©Pinm ac Enoi
& »ck to tNf Top on Tbr$ P»gt 4
Enabling the inbound routing function.
(1) In the Web page menu, click [Application
Settings], [Inbound Routing Settings], and
then [Administration Settings].
(2) Select [Enable] in "Inbound Routing" and
click the [Submit] button.
Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen,
and from specifying which table is used. To do so, select the checkboxes below 0.
• Disable Registration of Forward Table • Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table • Disable Change of Forward Approval
When inbound routing is enabled, you can also specify whether or not you wish the machine to print the forwarded faxes.
To have all received faxes printed before being forwarded, select "Print Out All Report" in "Print Style Setting". To
have received faxes printed only when an error prevents forwarding, select "Print at Error".
After configuring the settings, be sure to click the [Submit] button.
5-115
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Sender Number/Address Registration
I Submit(U) ][ Update(R) I
Address to be Entered:
012345678
abc@aaa.bbb.ccc
Delete(O) I
I Help(l) |
Fax Number:
コ (Up to 1500
characters)
( Global Address Search(C) j
[ Add to L_ 1
Internet Fax Address: 丨 丨 (Up to 1500
characters)
l Global Address Search(N) )
[ Add to List(M) |
Back to the Top on This Page 4
I Submit fU) |[Update(R) I
Storing sender addresses.
If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses
forwarded, store the desired sender addresses. Send
addresses stored here can be selected from a list when you
store a forwarding table.
(1) Click [Sender Number/Address
Registration] in the [Inbound Routing
Settings] menu in the Web page.
(2) Enter the sender address in "Internet Fax
Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate,
and click the [Add to List] button.
The entered address will be added to the "Address to be
Entered" list.
• Specify whether the address will be directly entered
(maximum of 1500 characters) or selected from a
global address book by clicking the [Global Address
Search] button.
• To store multiple addresses, repeat this step.
(3) When you have finished adding addresses,
click the [Submit] button.
•A maximum of 500 sender numbers/addresses can be stored.
•To delete an entered address, select the address in "Address to be Entered" and click the [Delete] button.
5-116
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
⑶ (4)
Table Registration
[ Submit(U) | [ Cancel(C) I
Table Name:
Receive Line Select:
Sender Number/Address Setting::
□ Internet Fax
□ Fax
[ Help(l) |
©Forward All Received Data
O forward Received Data from Below Sender
O forward Received Data from Senders except Below
Sender Number/Address: Sender Number/Address to be
used in this table.:
011112222
011113333
011112222
011113333
022223333
022223333
022224444
022224444
033334444
033335555
033334444
033335555
044445555
044446666
044445555
044446666
ifax@sssss.co.jp
ifax@sssss.co.jp
ifaxaddress@aaaaa.cp.jp v
ifaxaddress^aaaaa. cp.jp v j
[Add(Y)J
[Delete(D) I
] De：
Switch to Single Screen Mode
[Forward Destination 1
Forward Condition:
D Set Forwarding Time
Start Time:
Completing Time:
Format for Forwarding：
Forwarding Destination Settings:
Index:
Display Items:
Forward Destination
©Not Forward
O Always Forward
O Forward on Selected Day &Time
□ Monday DTuesday □ Wednesday
□ Thursday □ Friday □ Saturday
□ Sunday
Select AII(S) ] [_ Clear Checked®
00 v Hour 1 00 v Minute
00 v Hour f CO v Minute
【 TIFF(Multi) v j
All Destina
1 10 v
〇 〇 ftddress Name A T
□
□
□ User A
匚
□
□ User B
匚
□
□ User C
门
门
1 leer fl
Total Address:4
[ Previous(M) い/ 2 [ Next(N) ]
厂 Subj^t
jt(U) II Cancel(C) I
in v
pe A W Address AT
No. AT
ョ met Fax tanaka@aaa.bbl
: cc.ddd 2
nail suzuki@aaa.bbl
'cc.ddd 3
twork Folder \\aaaaa\bbbbb
4
P 10.20 .30.40
5
Back to the Top on This Page ^
⑻
⑺ (6)
Store a forwarding table.
Follow the steps below to store a forwarding table that
combines a specified sender and forwarding address.
(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web
page menu and click the [Add] button.
(2) Enter a "Table Name".
(3) Select the line used for reception.
(4) Select the sender whose faxes will be
forwarded.
• To forward all received faxes, select [Forward All
Received Data].
• To forward only data received from specific senders,
select [Forward Received Data from Below Sender]. To
forward all data except data from specific senders,
select [Forward Received Data from Senders except
Below]. Select the appropriate senders from the list and
click the [Add] button.
(5) Select the forwarding conditions.
• To always forward received data, select [Always
Forward].
• To specify a day and time on which received data will
be forwarded, select [Forward on Selected Day & Time]
and select the checkbox (0) of the desired day of the
week. To specify a time, select the [Set Forwarding
Time] checkbox (□) and specify the time.
(6) Select the file format.
The format can be set separately for each forwarding
address (for each of forwarding addresses 1, 2, and 3 in
the table).
(7) Select the forwarding address.
Forwarding addresses can be selected from the
machine's address book. (Multiple addresses can be
selected.) A maximum of 1000 forwarding addresses can
be stored (a combined maximum of 100 file server,
desktop, and network folder addresses can be stored).
(8) Click [Submit].
• When selecting senders from the "Sender Number/Address Setting" list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key
on your keyboard to select multiple senders.
•A maximum of 50 forwarding tables can be stored.
• Images sent in TIFF format may not display correctly in some recipient environments. In this event, change the file
format to PDF.
• Up to three forwarding day and time settings can be set for one forwarding table, and a forwarding destination can
be set for each set time. To configure these settings, use the forwarding list tabs to access each setting.
• When the forwarding destination is a file server, desktop, or shared folder, the computer of that destination must be
powered on.
5-117
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
Inbound Routing Settings
1 Login(P) |
fH^ipFI
| Submit(U) || Update(R) |
Inbound Routing Settings: Enable
Display Items: 1 10 v
Forward Destination 1
©Not Forward
O Always Forward
O Forward on Sele
cted Day &Time
□ Table 1 - . n .. .. «
Forward Destination 2
® Not Forward
O Always Forward
Forward Destination 3
® Not Forward
O Always Forward
Forward Destination 1
□ Table 2
©Not Forward
O Always Forward
O Forward on Selected Day &Time
Forward Destination 2
©Not Forward
O Always Forward
Forward Destination 1
©Not Forward
O Always Forward
O Forward on Selected Day &Time
□ Table 3 c J n ^
Forward Destination 2
©Not Forward
O Always Forward
Forward Destination 3
©Not Forward
〇 Always Forward
Total Table:3
| Previous(M) ] y^\ [ Next(N) ]
| Select AII(S) 1 1 Clear Checked(Z) |
Delete(0) | [Add(Y) |
Back to the Top on This Page ▲
| Subi^(U)
]] Update(R) |
Specifying forwarding tables to be used.
To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding
tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.
(1) Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web
page menu.
(2) Select [Always Forward] or [Forward on
Selected Day & Time] from the forwarding
table.
The forwarding permission settings that appear here are
linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 3. If you
wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set
in step 3, set the forwarding permission settings.
(3) Click [Submit].
To delete a forwarding table, click the checkbox next to the table name so that it is selected ] and click [Delete].
5-118
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER
(PC Scan Mode)
BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE
You can install the scanner driver on your computer from the CD-ROM that accompanies the machine, and use a
TWAIN* compliant application to scan an image using your computer.
Scanning from your computer is most useful for scanning a single original such as a photo, particularly when you want to
adjust scan settings as you scan. By contrast, scanning at the machine is most useful for continuous scanning of
multiple originals.
* An interface standard used for scanners and other image input devices. When the scanner driver is installed on your
computer, you can use any TWAIN-compliant application to scan an image.
• Scanning in PC scan mode is only possible when the scanner driver has been installed from the "Software CD-ROM"
using the integrated installer. For the procedures for installing the scanner driver and configuring settings, see the
Software Setup Guide.
• This function cannot be used when it has been disabled using "Disable Scan Function" in the system settings (administrator).
• The procedures for selecting the scanner driver and starting scanning vary depending on the TWAIN-compliant
application. For more information, see the manual for the application or Help.
• When a large image is scanned at high resolution, the amount of data will be very large and scanning will take a long time.
Be sure to select appropriate scan settings for the original (text, photo, etc.).
As an example, the procedure for scanning from the "Sharpdesk" application that accompanies the machine is
explained below.
[At the machine]
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
USB Mem. Scan I
PC Scan
&
This machine is in the PC scan mode.
Do not remove the original .
Scanner IP address： 250.160 .102. 106
Touch the [PC Scan] tab to switch to PC
Scan mode.
If the [PC Scan] tab does not appear, touch the j 4 1 tab
to move the screen.
When PC scan mode is selected, only the [Exit] key displayed in the touch panel can be used on the machine; no
other keys can be used.
5-119
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
[At your computer]
後 Sharpdesk
File | Edit View Took Internet Output Zone Help
New Folder
Open...
Rename
Delete
Sharp desk Folders...
Print...
Acauire Imacie...
Select Scanner...
From Scanner or Camera...
Send A& ►
Properties...
Exit Alt+F4
Ctrl+N
Ctrl+O Split
Ctrl+P
Start the TWAIN-compliant application
on your computer and select [Select
Scanner] from the [File] menu.
(i)
(2)
Select the scanner driver of the
machine.
(1) Select [SHARP MFP TWAIN K].
(2) Click the [Select] button.
綫 Sharpdesk
File | Edit View Tools Internet Output Zone Help
New Folder
Ctrl+N
Open...
Ctrl+0
Rename
Delete
Sharp desk Folders...
Print...
Ctrl+P
Acquire Image …
delect scanner...
From Scanner or Camera …
Send As
►
Properties...
Exit
Alt+F4
Select [Acquire Image] from the [File]
menu.
The scanner driver opens.
5-120
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
(1) (2)
⑶
Preview the image.
(1) Select the location where the original is
placed.
"Scanning Position" menu:
• If the original is a one-sided original and is placed in the
document feeder tray, select [SPF(Simplex)].
• If the original is a 2-sided original and is placed in the
document feeder tray, select [SPF(Duplex - Book)] or
[SPF(Duplex - Tablet)] depending on whether the
original is a book-style or tablet-style original. In
addition, select [Left edge is fed first] or [Top edge is
fed first] depending on the orientation of the original.
(2) Select scan settings.
"Scanning Mode" menu:
Switch between the "Preset" screen and the "Custom
Settings" screen. In the "Preset" screen, select "Web
Pages11, "Photo", "FAX" or "OCR" depending on the
original type and your scanning purpose.
If you wish to change the initial settings of any of the four
buttons or select the resolution or other advanced
settings, change to the "Custom Settings" screen.
"Image Area" menu:
Select the scan area. If "Auto" is selected, the original size
detected by the machine will be scanned. You can also
set the scanning area in the preview window with your
mouse.
(3) Click the [Preview] button.
The preview image will appear in the scanner driver.
If you are not satisfied with the preview image, repeat (2)
and (3).
If the [Zoom Preview] checkbox is selected before the
[Preview] button is clicked, the selected area will be
enlarged in the preview window. If the checkmark is
removed, the preview image will return to normal. Note
that if SPF is selected in the "Scanning Position" menu,
the [Zoom Preview] function cannot be used.
• For further information on the scan settings, click the f | button in the preview image screen of step 7 to
open scanner driver Help.
•If the [Preview] button is clicked when scanning from the document feeder tray, only one original page will be
scanned for the preview image. If you wish to include that original in the scan, return it to the document feeder tray.
Contents
5-121
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
[wl ^ 1
B 球*
|A| JLI
知
Rfxkim
Invg^Air み
:
: Omtm
: 抑 MR
Select scanning settings while viewing
the image.
[Rotate] button:
Each time this button is clicked, the preview image rotates 90
degrees. This lets you change the orientation of the image
without picking up and placing the original again. The image file
will be created using the orientation that appears in the preview
window.
[Image Size] button:
Click this button to specify the scan area by entering numerical
values. Pixels, mm, or inches can be selected for the units of
the numerical values. If a scanning area has already been
specified, the entered numbers will change the area relative to
the top left corner of the specified area.
X| button:
When a preview image is displayed and a scanning area is not
specified, you can click the Xj button to automatically set the
scanning area to the entire preview image.
• For further information on the scan settings, click the _fj button to open scanner driver Help.
•If the originals are placed in the document feeder tray, only the top page will be previewed. The top page will be
delivered to the original exit tray. Be sure to return the previewed page to the document feeder tray before
previewing again or scanning.
Click the [Scan] button.
Scanning begins. The image appears in your application.
Assign a file name to the scanned image and save it as
appropriate in the software application you are using.
Contents
5-122
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
[At the machine]
This machine is in the PC scan mode.
Do not remove the original .
Scanner IP address : 250 . 160 . 102 . 106
f Exit j
Touch the [Exit] key in the touch panel.
Touch the [Yes] key.
Contents
5-123
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
METADATA DELIVERY
This section explains metadata delivery, which can be used when the application integration module kit is installed.
METADATA DELIVERY (Data Entry)
When the application integration module kit is installed and an image file is generated for a scan send transmission,
metadata (data indicating the attributes of the image file and how it is to be processed) can be generated based on
pre-stored information and transmitted as a separate file. The metadata file is created in XML format. By linking the
metadata with applications such as document management software, a workflow application, or an encryption server, a
sophisticated document solution environment can be built.
Metadata
(XML file)
1
Image file
Scan to
Desktop
Client PC that uses Network
Scanner Tool
Fax server, document
management software,
workflow application,
encryption server, etc.
Scan to E-mail
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network Folder
Using the application integration module kit, information on a generated image file can be entered at the touch panel and
transmitted along with the image as an XML file.
5-124
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA
TRANSMISSION
SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES
All settings related to metadata are configured in the Web pages. (Administrator rights are required.)
To configure metadata settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Metadata Settings] in the Web page menu.
When configuring settings, be sure to enable metadata transmission.
Storing Metadata Sets
Store the items (the metadata set) that are written to the XML file that is generated during scanning. Up to 10 metadata
items can be configured in a metadata set. A stored metadata set can be selected at the time of transmission.
Addresses specified in "Address Type Allowing Metadata Entry" when a metadata set is stored can be selected as
transmission destinations at the time of transmission using one-touch keys, manual entry, and/or a global address book
search. (Addresses for which metadata entry is not allowed cannot be specified as transmission destinations.)
METADATA TRANSMISSION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP
When Network Scanner Tool is used in its factory default configuration, a file will be generated with a new file name on
the computer. When Network Scanner Tool is used as a means of sending a metadata file to a third party software
application, this setting must be disabled to allow cross referencing between the image file and XML file by means of the
file name generated by the computer. (When setting the file name in [Send Settings], to ensure that a previously existing
file on a computer is not overwritten by a transmitted file of the same name, be sure to configure the file name so that
name duplication cannot occur; for example, by including a unique extension (the date, etc.) in the generated file name.
If the file name setting is left blank, the machine will automatically generate a file name that is unique.)
• It is recommended that you use Network Scanner Tool to receive metadata. For more information, see the Network
Scanner Tool User's Guide (PDF format) on the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM.
• For information on the license agreement and how to use the CD-ROM that accompanies the application integration
module, see the separate "Sharpdesk license kit" manual.
• Using third party software applications
Various types of third party software applications exist. Some applications can start automatically from Network Scanner
Tool and some cannot. When the auto-run function of an application is enabled, Network Scanner Tool will start the
application with the M.exeM command using the file name as a parameter. Normally an application is started twice, once for
the image file and once for the XML file. For example, when Network Scanner Tool is set to start the application
"APP.EXE", the following commands are applied when the two files "IMG.TIF" and "IMG.XML" are received.
APP.EXE IMG.TIF
APP.EXE IMG.XML
5-125
Contents
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
The keys of the items stored in the
metadata set will appear. Touch the key
of the item that you want to enter.
If you accidentally selected the wrong metadata set or wish to use a different metadata set when a default metadata
set has been set, touch the [Metadata Set] key. Touch the [OK] key in the message screen that appears. You will
return to the screen of step 1 ■ Metadata items entered to that point will be canceled.
Contents
TRANSMITTING METADATA
Follow the steps below to select a metadata set, enter each item, and perform metadata transmission.
(1)
Scan
Internet Fax I Fax | Data Entry ||
1
(
(
►Address Book
[ Original j Scan： Send:
Address Entry
f Exposure | ■
Send Settings |
f Resolution ] 2 00X2 00dpi
(
(
1
Address Review j
f File Format 丨 J PDF
File
[ Color Mode J J Mono2
Quick File j
f Special Modes j
Preview
[ 曲^^ [Metadata Entry
Switch to data entry mode and display
the metadata set screen.
(1) Touch the [Data Entry] tab.
(2) Touch the [Metadata Entry] key.
If no metadata sets have been stored, the [Data Entry] tab cannot be selected. Store a metadata set in the Web
pages and then perform the transmission procedure.
If a specific metadata set has been specified as the default set, go to step 3.
Metadata Set
Set Name： Metadata ]
卜 etacU
卜 et;
(1)
MMetadata \
J Metadata ^
1 | Metadata (
J | Metadata \
J | [Metadata ■
Select a metadata set.
Touch the key of the metadata set that you
wish to use.
(1)
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
s ■
i
5-126
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
When you have finished entering all
items, touch the [OK] key.
Scan
^Internet Fax | Fax j Data Entry j
1:
(
(
►Address Book
[ Original _ Scan: Send:
Address Entry
f Exposure 丨 ■
Send Settings |
f Resolution j 2 00X2 00dpi
(
(
1.
Address Review
[ File Format ] J PDF
File
[ Color Mode J |~P Mono2
Quick File
f Special Modes ]
Preview j
|jl^
Select image settings and any other
settings, and perform the scan send
procedure.
• The procedures for selecting settings and performing
transmission are the same as in the other modes.
• To make changes to entered values, touch the [Metadata
Entry] key once again. The entry screen of the selected
metadata set will appear.
Transmission cannot be performed if the [Data Entry] tab is displayed and no metadata settings have been configured. To
perform transmission without sending metadata, switch to a different mode by touching the tab of that mode and then
perform transmission.
Before configuring metadata settings, you can specify addresses in all modes to be used. After metadata settings have
been configured, only addresses in modes that are allowed in the selected metadata set can be specified.
When metadata settings have been configured or an address is specified in the [Data Entry] tab, it will not be possible to
switch to another mode.
Metadata delivery is possible using the document filing function. The [Data Entry] tab appears in the transmission settings
screen of document filing mode to allow metadata delivery. In addition, metadata delivery using document filing can be
performed in [Document Operations] in the Web pages.
Contents
Enter the selected metadata item.
(1) Touch the key of the value that you wish to
enter.
• When the entry values of the metadata item are in the
form of selections, the selections are shown as keys.
When a value is editable, you can touch the [Direct
Entry] key to manually enter the value.
•If the metadata item requires the entry of text, a text
entry screen will appear. Enter the required information.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• To change the number of keys displayed in the screen, touch the number of displayed items selector key. Select 6,
12, or 18 keys.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "ENTERING TEXT11 (page 1-70) in M1. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE".
⑴
I
I —
Data Entry
|
User ID
Cancel ][ 0
K — ^ )
6 ► EB ► 18 J
Direct Entry
Value 1
Value 2
1
Value 3
| Value 4
2
Value 5
f Value 6
0
Value 7
f Value 8
a
Value 9
[ Value 10
Value 11
[ Value 12
s ■
5-127
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX
METADATA FIELDS
The following three types of metadata are included in the XML file that is transmitted.
• Data automatically generated by the machine: These data are always included in the XML file and are automatically
stored on your computer.
• Previously defined fields: These fields are automatically recognized by the machine and
assigned to appropriate XML tags. These fields are selectable, and
can only be included in the XML file if enabled in the Web pages.
• User defined fields: Custom fields can be added to the XML file. These fields are selectable
and can be defined in the Web pages.
If a defined metadata field is one of the following fields, a message will appear informing you that the field cannot be
entered. Enter appropriate information in the related items of the send settings.
Name entered in
metadata field
Description
Where entered
fromName
Name of the user who sent the job. If the
name is not entered as metadata, the sender
name determined by the usual rules for
determining the sender name will be applied
as metadata.
[Reply-To]
(Sender name of selected sender)
replyTo
E-mail address to which the transmission
result will be sent.
[Reply-To]
(E-mail address of selected sender)
documentSubject
Job name appearing in the e-mail "Subject"
line, or job name on the fax cover sheet.
When the user enters a [Subject] in the send
settings screen in the touch panel, the
entered value is applied as metadata.
[Subject]
(Blank until a value is set in the send settings
screen.)
fileName
Enter the file name of the image to be sent.
[File Name]
(Only when the [Allow Custom Filenames]
checkbox is selected 0 in the metadata
settings screen in the Web pages.)
(Blank until a value is set in the send settings
screen.)
5-128
Contents
CHAPTER 6
DOCUMENT FILING
This chapter provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing function. The document filing
function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job, or the data of a print job, as a file on the machine's
hard drive. The file can be called up as needed.
This chapter assumes that you are already familiar with copy mode, scanner mode, and the other modes of the
machine.
For information on procedures of copy， scanner and other modes that remain the same when those modes are used in
conjunction with the document filing function, see the chapters for those modes.
DOCUMENT FILING
OVERVIEW . 6-2
• TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING . 6-2
• USES OF DOCUMENT FILING . 6-3
• BEFORE USING DOCUMENT FILING . 6-4
• IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING
DOCUMENT FILING . 6-7
• USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH
MODE . 6-8
BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING
MODE . 6-10
SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING
SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File" . 6-11
SAVING A FILE WITH "File" . 6-13
•FILE INFORMATION . 6-15
SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to
HDD) . 6-18
•"Scan to HDD" SCREEN . 6-18
• PERFORMING "Scan to HDD" . 6-23
USING STORED FILES
SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE . 6-24
FOLDER AND FILE SELECTION SCREENS _ 6-26
• FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN . 6-26
• FILE SELECTION SCREEN . 6-27
SELECTING A FILE . 6-29
• JOB SETTINGS SCREEN . 6-30
PRINTING A STORED FILE . 6-31
• PRINT SETTINGS SCREEN . 6-32
•MULTI-FILE PRINTING . 6-33
SENDING A STORED FILE . 6-37
• SEND SETTINGS SCREEN . 6-38
PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES . 6-39
• FILE PROPERTIES . 6-39
• CHANGING THE PROPERTY . 6-39
MOVING A STORED FILE . 6-41
DELETING A STORED FILE . 6-43
CHECKING AN IMAGE OF A STORED FILE _ 6-44
•IMAGE CHECK SCREEN . 6-45
RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE
JOB STATUS SCREEN . 6-46
SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE . 6-47
6-1
DOCUMENT FILING
DOCUMENT FILING
This section provides information that you should know before using the document filing function, including an overview
of document filing, the features and functions of document filing, and points to keep in mind when using document filing.
OVERVIEW
The document filing function allows you to save the document image of a copy or image send job, or the data of a print
job, as a file on the machine's hard drive.
The stored file can be retrieved and printed or transmitted as needed.
TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING
There are three ways to save a file using document filing: "Quick File", "File", and "Scan to HDD".
Quick File
As a copy, scan send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard
drive. Use this function when you want to quickly and easily store document data without specifying a
file name or other information.
The stored file can also be used by other people. Do not use this method to save files that you do not
want others to use, such as files containing sensitive or confidential information.
File
As a copy, scan send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard
drive. Unlike Quick File, various types of information can be appended to the file when the file is saved
to enable efficient file management.
A password can also be established to prevent the file from being retrieved up by others.
Scan to HDD
This function scans a document and stores it as a file. Like File, various types of information can be
appended to the file when it is stored.
6-2
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
USES OF DOCUMENT FILING
Quickly using a file
Example: You prepared handouts consisting of numerous pages for a meeting, however, another handout is
needed for a newly added participant.
The handout was not saved using document filing
The handout was saved using document filing
门
The numerous original pages must all be
rescanned.
The stored file is simply retrieved and
printed.
Not likely to be completed in time for the meeting...
Printing is accomplished quickly and the handout is ready in
time for the meeting!
Copy settings must be reselected and the original must be
rescanned.
As indicated above, to obtain another set of output, the
settings must be selected all over again. If you don't remember
the settings, much effort may be expended to get the same
output result as the previous time.
By retrieving a job stored using document filing, there is no
need to reselect copy settings or rescan the original.
The job can be retrieved and printed using the same settings
quickly and easily.
As shown in the example, storing a job with the document filing function frees you of the need to rescan the original and
select settings, saving considerable time.
Convenient for managing frequently used documents
Example: Managing a large number of business forms
Not using document filing
It takes time to find the form you need.
Using document filing
The required form can be easily retrieved from the
document filing list,
and document management is much more efficient.
Application forms, report forms, and other business forms can be stored on the hard drive for easy retrieval, letting you
print the number of copies you need when you need them.
6-3
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
BEFORE USING DOCUMENT FILING
This section provides information that you should know before using the document filing function.
Folders
Three types of folders are used to store files by document filing.
Documents scanned using the [Quick File] key are stored in this folder. A user name and file name are automatically
assigned to each job.
Main Folder
Documents scanned using the [File] key are stored in this folder.
When you store a job in the Main folder, you can specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name.
A password can also be set when storing a file ([Confidential] save).
Custom Folder
Folders with custom names can be created inside this folder.
When a document is scanned using the [File] key and a folder is selected, the document is stored in the specified folder.
Like the Main folder, a custom folder allows you to specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name when storing a job.
Passwords can be established for custom folders and for files saved in custom folders.
A maximum of 1000 custom folders can be created on the hard drive.
Items convenient to store
When storing a job using "File" or "Scan to HDD", it is convenient to store the items below. These settings are not
needed when storing a job using "Quick File".
User Name
This is necessary if you will be assigning a user name to stored files. User names are stored in "User List" in
the system settings (administrator). A user name is also used as a search condition when searching fora file.
Custom Folder
The Main folder is initially available as a location for storing files by "File" and "Scan to HDD". When
custom folders have been created using "Document Filing Control" in the system settings, a custom
folder can be specified as a location for storing files. A password can also be established for a custom
folder to restrict access to the folder.
My Folder
"My Folder" is specified using "User List" in the system settings (administrator). The main folder or a
previously created custom folder can be selected as "My Folder", or a new folder can be created as
"My Folder". When user authentication is used, "My Folder" is always created and is selected as the
destination of "File" and "Scan to HDD".
• System Settings: Document Filing Control (page 7-24)
This is used to create custom folders for document filing. A password can also be established for a custom folder.
• System Settings (Administrator): User List
This is used to store a user name and specify a folder as "My Folder".
6-4
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Maximum number of pages and files that can be stored by document filing
Combined total number of pages and total number of files that can be stored in custom
folders and in the Main folder
Maximum number of pages
Maximum number of files
20000
3000
Number of pages and number of files that can be stored in the Quick File folder
Maximum number of pages
Maximum number of files
10000
1000
Copying in sort mode uses the same memory area as the Quick File folder. For this reason, when too much data has
been stored in the Quick File folder, it may not be possible to perform a large copy job using sort mode. Delete
unneeded files.
The actual number of pages and number of files that can be stored may be lower depending on the contents of the
original images and the settings selected when the files were stored.
6-5
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Automatic deletion of files
You can have document filing data in specified folders automatically deleted at regular intervals by specifying the folders
and the time. Periodic deletion of files stored in the machine helps to prevent the leaking of sensitive information and
frees space on the hard drive.
Every day, every week, or every month can be selected for the deletion cycle, and a time can be set for each selection.
For example, you can set file deletion to take place every week on Friday at 6:00 PM.
Automatic file deletion settings are configured in "Automatic Deletion of File Settings" in the system settings
(administrator).
To check the settings, print the following list in the system settings.
To check information on the deletion cycle: Print the "Administrator Settings List" in the system settings (administrator).
To check information on the folders selected for file deletion: Print the "Document Filing Folder List" in the system settings.
When "Automatic Deletion of File Settings" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), all files in the specified folders
will be deleted when the set time arrives. Take care not to store files that you wish to keep in folders specified for file deletion.
• System Settings: Document Filing Control (page 7-24)
This shows a list of the folder names for document filing.
• System Settings (Administrator): Automatic Deletion of File Settings
Configure settings for automatic deletion at regular intervals of files stored using the document filing function.
• System Settings (Administrator): Administrator Settings List
Use this to print a list of the administrator settings, including document filing settings.
6-6
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Files
When a file is saved using "File"， the following information can be appended.
Saving a file with this information allows you to distinguish it from other files.
User name: Use this to specify the owner of the file. The user name must first be stored in "User List" in the system
settings.
File Name: A file name can be entered.
Folder: Select which folder the file will be saved in.
Confidential: A password (5 to 8 digits) can be established to prevent others from using the file.
The above information cannot be specified when a file is saved with Quick File.
System Settings (Administrator): User List
This is used to store user names.
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILING
Note the following when using document filing:
• Files saved using "Quick File" are assigned the "Sharing" property. "Sharing" files can be retrieved and printed or
transmitted by anyone， and thus Quick File should not be used to save sensitive or confidential documents that you do
not wish others to use.
• When saving a file with "File", use the "Confidential" property. A password can be set for a "Confidential" file to
prevent the file from being used by other people. Take care to keep the password of a stored "Confidential" file secret.
• The property of a stored "Confidential" file can be changed to "Sharing" by "Property Change" when the file is used.
Do not store sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be used by others.
• Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result from the
leaking of sensitive information due to manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick File function or
File function, or incorrect operation of the Quick File function or File function by the operator that saves the data.
6-7
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE
In copy or image send mode, the original can be saved as a file on the hard drive at the same time it is copied or
transmitted. In addition, Scan to HDD can be used to save the scanned data of an original to the hard drive without
copying or transmitting the data.
Copy mode
The original is saved as an image file at the same time it is copied.
(1) Touch the [COPY] key.
(2) Touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
key-
image Send mode
Example: Base screen of scan mode
The original is saved as an image file at the same time it is scanned and transmitted.
(1)
㊄ COPY j 慮:1 IMAGE SEND T @1^
eady to send.
Resend
Scan
PC Scan
Special Modes
□F 瓣
区
(1) Touch the [IMAGE SEND] key.
(2) Touch the [Scan] tab.
(3) Touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
key.
6-8
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Scan to HDD mode
The scanned original is saved as an image file. Neither printing nor transmission are performed when Scan to HDD is
used.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the [Scan to HDD] tab.
[File] key and [Quick File] key
The "File" key and/or "Quick File" key will not appear in the base screen of copy mode or image send mode if one or both of
the keys has been changed to a different function using "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu. In this case, touch
the [Special Modes] key in the base screen of either mode. Document filing can be performed by touching the [Quick File]
key or [File] key in the special modes menu.
Using document filing in print mode
To use document filing in print mode, select document filing in the printer driver. For more information on using document
filing in print mode, see "CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS11 (page 3-54) in "3. PRINTER".
Using document filing in PC-Fax/PC-l-Fax mode
To use document filing in PC-Fax or PC-l-Fax mode, select document filing settings in the PC-Fax driver. For more
information, see Help in the PC-Fax driver.
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.
6-9
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
⑺
(1) Mode switch keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
To switch to document filing mode, touch the
[DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) [File Retrieve] tab
Touch this tab to retrieve a file stored by document filing.
The folder selection screen will appear.
^ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-26)
(3) [Scan to HDD] tab
Touch this key to select Scan to HDD. Neither printing
nor transmission are performed.
The file will be stored in the Main folder or a custom
folder.
暖 SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to HDD)
(page 6-18)
(4) [HDD Status] tab
Touch this key to check how much of the machine's hard
drive is being used.
The amount used is shown as a percentage.
(5) [External Data Access] tab
This can be selected when an FTP server is stored or a
USB memory device is connected to the machine.
隊 "DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE"
(page 3-57) in "3. PRINTER11
(6) [Search] key
Touch this key to search for a file stored in a folder.
You can search using the user name, file name, or folder
name.
暖 SEARCHING FORA STORED FILE (page 6-47)
(7) When retrieving a stored file, use this to select the
folder where the file is stored.
^ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-26)
Contents
BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING
MODE
Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key in the touch panel to open the base screen of document filing mode.
Files stored on the hard drive in the machine can be retrieved from this screen.
When user authentication is used and My Folder is configured, the file selection screen of My Folder will appear.
If the user that logged in does not have My Folder configured, the folder selection screen will appear.
隊 FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-26)
隊 FILE SELECTION SCREEN (page 6-27)
1¢! i
)CUMENT
[LING
j File Retrieve |
Scan to HDD | HDD Status | Ex Data Access
| Folder Select
■1 c
Search #
ii
| Main Folder
[ Quick File Folder
n
f User 1
\ User 2
― 1 ~r
f User 3
[ User 4
丨 n
f User 5
[ User 6
一
f User 7
f User 8
)g
f User 9
( User 10
— i
All Folders 1
ABCD J EPGHI J JKLMN | OPQRST | UWXYZ |
1国1 Main Folder： 10%
111 Custom Folder ： 40%
Free Space： 50%
l^ll Quick File Folder ： 20%
100%
Free Space： 80%
\J )/ \7
4 5 6
/V /V
6-10
DOCUMENT FILING
SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT
FILING
This chapter explains how to save an original as an image file using the Quick File, File, and Scan to HDD functions of
document filing mode.
SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"
When copying, printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, print mode, or image send mode (excluding USB
memory scan mode), "Quick File" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Quick File folder.
The image can retrieved at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate the
original.
As an example, the procedure for storing a document in the Quick File folder while copying is explained below.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
也
Scanned data is automatically stored
in the quick rue folder. Do not store
confidential data to the folder.
ok 1
る—
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the [Quick
File] key will be highlighted.
@To cancel Quick File-
Touch the [Quick File] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted after you touch the [OK] key.
6-11
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
■ Select copy settings and then press the [START] key.
• Copying begins and the scanned document image is saved to the hard drive.
The selected copy settings are also saved.
• To prevent accidental saving of the document, the message "The scanned data is stored in the quick file folder." appears
for 6 seconds (default setting) after the [START] key is pressed.
The message display time can be changed using "Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
•If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next page and press the [START] key.
Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then press the [Read-End] key.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ((§)).
When a file is stored using Quick File, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Month-Day-Year— Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: Copy_ 0404201 0_1 1 2030AM)
Stored to: Quick File Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.
Only the file name and location of a file stored in the Quick File Folder can be changed.
@To cancel Quick File...
Touch the [Quick File] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is no longer highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Delete All Quick Files
With the exception of protected files, all files in the quick file folder can be deleted at once.
Settings can be configured to delete all files by key operation and to have all files automatically deleted when the power is
turned on.
6-12
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
SAVING A FILE WITH "File"
When copying， printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, print mode, or image send mode (excluding USB
memory scan mode), "File" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Main folder or a previously created
custom folder. The image can retrieved at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to
locate the original.
As an example, the procedure for using "File" while copying is explained below.
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
Select the "File" settings.
(1) Select file information settings.
To select the user name, file name, folder, and
confidential setting, see "FILE INFORMATION11 (page
6-15).
• Specifying a user name: (page 6-15)
• Assigning a file name: (page 6-16)
• Specifying the folder: (page 6-16)
• Storing a file as a confidential file: (page 6-17)
After configuring the above settings, you will return to this
screen. Go to the next step.
If you do not wish to assign a user name or other
information to the file, go to the next step.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the
[File] key will be highlighted.
6-13
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Select copy settings and then press the [START] key.
• Copying begins and the scanned document image is saved to the hard drive.
The selected copy settings are also saved.
• For the procedure for placing the original, see step 4 of "SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"11 (page 6-11).
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®).
When a file is stored using File without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically
assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Month-Day-Year— Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: Copy_ 0404201 0_1 1 2030AM)
Stored to: Main Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.
@To cancel the File operation...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
6-14
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
FILE INFORMATION
This section explains the settings that are configured in step 3 of "SAVING A FILE WITH "File1111 (page 6-13). Specifying
a user name, file name, folder, and confidential setting makes it easier to manage and search for a file. In addition, when
confidential is selected and a password is established, other people will not be able to view the file without permission.
Specifying a user name
Touch the [User Name] key.
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used
for login is automatically selected. In this case, this step is not
needed.
The user name must be previously stored in "User List" in the system settings (administrator).
(B)
(A)
f 6 ► EB ► 18 )
•2V，
国 「Name 2
(Name 3 ] [Name 4 j 1
2
[Name 5 | f Name 6
[Name 7 | (Name 8
[Name 9 | [Name 10 ) 1 4, j
(Name 11 | [Name 12
▲
User
All I ABCD || EFGH 1 IJKL || MNOP | QRSTU || VWXYZ | etc.
Touch the desired user name in the list
of user names that is displayed.
(1) Select the user name.
There are two ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
The touched user name is highlighted.
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch
the key of the correct name.
(B) Touch the key.
An area for entering the "Registration No."
appears in the message display. Enter the
"Registration No." set during user registration. This
will allow you to select the user name.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
The user name that you touched is selected and you
return to the screen of step 1 ■ The selected user name
appears.
6-15
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Assigning a file name
A file name can be assigned to the file.
Touch the [File Name] key.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter the file name and touch
the [OK] key.
A maximum of 30 characters can be entered.
Specifying the folder
Touch the [Stored to:] key.
If a user name with a "My Folder" setting is selected, "My Folder" of that user will automatically be selected.
(1) (2)
1
Stored to：
1 ~ ok ~ !
[Main Folder
]
f User 2 J 1
f User 3
j [ User 4 ) 2
[ User 5
J 1 User 6 ] ^ ]
f User 7
] ( User 8 1 ( ,
f User 9
- 1 | User 10 | IjJ
All Folders |
ABCD | EFGHI ] JKLMN | OPQRST | UVWXYZ J
Select the folder in which you want to
store the file.
(1) Touch the key of the folder where you want
to store the file.
If a password has been set for the folder, a password
entry screen appears. Enter the password of the touched
folder with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and touch the
[OK] key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
6-16
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Storing a file as a confidential file
A password can be set for the file to prevent others from viewing it. Set a password (5 to 8 digits) with the numeric keys.
(1) (2)
User Name D Name 1
[ File Name 1 file-01
f Stored to jj User 1
Enable the confidential property.
(1) Select the [Confidential] checkbox so that a
checkmark 0 appears.
Confidential mode is enabled and a password can be
entered.
(2) Touch the [Password] key,
Enter a password (5 to 8 digits) with the
numeric keys and touch the [OK] key.
As each digit is entered， changes to
6-17
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to
HDD)
Scan to HDD is used to store a scanned document in the Main folder or a custom folder. Neither printing nor
transmission are performed.
"Scan to HDD" SCREEN
The following screen appears when the [Scan to HDD] tab is touched in document filing mode. Touch the keys below to
select Scan to HDD settings.
The current setting of each key appears to the right of the key.
(1) [File Information] key
Information can be appended to a file stored by Scan to
HDD. The settings are configured in the same way as file
information for Tile".
隊 FILE INFORMATION (page 6-15)
(2) [Special Modes] key
Use this key to select special modes for Scan to HDD.
隊 Special modes screen for Scan to HDD (page 6-21)
(3) [Preview] key
Touch to check the image to be stored before performing
Scan to HDD.
^ Checking the image before storing it (Preview) (page
6-22)
(4) [Original] key
Touch this key to set the scanning size, storing size and
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning settings.
隊 [Original] key (page 6-19)
(5) [Exposure] key
Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.
(6) [Resolution] key
Use this to select the resolution that will be used when
(7) [Color Mode] key
Use this key to select the color mode when storing a
document.
瞭 [Color Mode] key (page 6-20)
⑻圍 key
This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided
scanning is selected. Touch the key to display the
selected special modes.
the file is transmitted.
When "Long Size" is specified, only resolution settings of
300 X 300 dpi and under can be selected.
6-18
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
[Original] key
When the [Original] key is touched, the following screen appears. This screen is used to change the original size and
select scanning settings for 2-sided originals.
(1) (2) (4)
⑶
(1) Touch the [Scan Size] key.
If the original is a non-standard size that cannot be detected by auto original size detection, touch the [Scan Size] key and specify the original size.
(2) Touch the [Store Size] key.
If you wish to store the file at a different size than the original size, touch the [Store Size] key and change the store size.
(3) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the [QQ I key. If the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the [^10 1 key.
If the original is a 2-sided original, touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the [2-Sided Tablet] key as appropriate for the original type.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
The settings are stored and you return to the Scan to HDD screen.
[Exposure] key
To adjust the exposure, touch the [Exposure] key.
Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original and touch the [ G 1 or [ I 1 key to adjust the exposure level.
When finished, touch the [OK] key.
(2) (A) (1)
(1) Select the appropriate original type for the original to be scanned.
(2) Select [Auto] or [Manual].
If you selected [Manual], touch the I G 1 or 1,. I 1 key to adjust the exposure. (For a darker image, touch the , 1 key. For a
lighter image, touch the i 0 i key.)
When the exposure is set to [Auto], the i CJ ) | I J keys cannot be used.
(A): Moire Reduction
To reduce the moire effect when scanning printed matter, touch the [Moire Reduction] checkbox so that a checkmark .^) appears.
(3) Touch the [OK] key,
The settings are stored and you return to the Scan to HDD screen.
6-19
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
[Color Mode] key
Touch the [Color Mode] key to open the color mode setting screen for Scan to HDD.
The following settings can be selected for the scanning color when the [START] key is pressed.
Mode
Scanning method
Full Color
The original is scanned in full color. This mode is best for full color originals such as catalogues.
Even when the original is black and white, it is scanned as a full color original.
Grayscale
The colors in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of gray (grayscale).
Mono 2
Colors in the original are scanned as black or white. This mode is best for text-only originals.
[High Capacity Mode] or [Send Allowed Mode] can be selected as the storage format for Mono2.
High Capacity Mode:
When this mode is selected, the stored file cannot be transmitted.
Send Allowed Mode:
When this mode is selected, the stored file can be transmitted.
When you have finished selecting the mode, touch the [OK] key.
6-20
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Special modes screen for Scan to HDD
When the [Special Modes] key is touched, the following screen appears. For more information on each setting， see
"SPECIAL MODES" (page 5-71) in "5. SCANNER / INTERNET FAX".
(1) (2) (3)
Scan to HDD/Spe
.al Modes
f OK 1
Er;
- B°ue
il Page
Scan | Card
Shot
Job I |(^n Mixed Size [ Slow Scan
Build 1 1 替 Original \h^ Mode
°c
<
iginal
Hount
(4) (5) (6) ⑺
(1) [Erase] key
The erase function is used to erase shadow lines on
images produced when scanning thick originals or books
on the document glass.
(2) [Dual Page Scan] key
The left and right sides of an original can be scanned as
two separate pages. This function is useful when you
wish to successively scan each page of a book or other
bound document.
(3) [Card Shot] key
This function lets you store the front and reverse sides of
a card as a single page.
⑷ [Job Build] key
This function lets you separate a many-page original into
sets, scan each set using the automatic document
feeder, and store all pages as a single file. Use this
function when there are more original pages than can be
placed at once in the auto document feeder.
(5) [Original Count] key
When using the automatic document feeder to scan an
original, you can check whether or not the correct
number of pages were scanned before storing the
document.
(6) [Mixed Size Original] key
This feature lets you scan originals of different sizes at
the same time; for example, 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) size
originals mixed together with 1 1" x 1 7" (A3) size
originals. When scanning the originals, the machine
automatically detects the size of each original.
Originals of mixed widths and sizes can be scanned
(1 1" x 1 7n and 8-1/211 x 1 4", 11nx 17M and 8-1/2" x 13",
11" x 17n and 5-1/211 x 8-1/211 (A3 and B4, A3 and B5, A4
and B4, A4 and B5, B4 and A4R, B4 and A5, B5 and
A4R, B5 and A5)).
(7) [Slow Scan Mode] key
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals
using the automatic document feeder. This function helps
prevent thin originals from misfeeding.
6-21
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
Checking the image before storing it (Preview)
If you touch the [Preview] key and then start Scan to HDD, the screen below appears.
Before the scanned data is stored, you can check a preview of the scanned image in this screen and return to the Scan
to HDD settings screen to change settings
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(1) Preview image
This shows an image of the selected file.
If the image is cut off, use the scroll bars at the right and
bottom of the screen to scroll the image. Touch a bar and
slide it to scroll. (You can also touch the ▼ ▲ keys to
scroll.)
(2) Change page keys
When there are multiple pages, use these keys to
change pages.
• flVl N) keys: Go to the first or the last page.
•as keys: Go to the previous page or the next
page.
• Page number display:This shows the total number of
pages and the current page number.
You can touch the current page
number key and enter a number with
the numeric keys to go to that page
number.
(3) "Display Rotation" key
This rotates the image right or left by 90 degrees. The
rotation applies to all pages in the file, not just the
displayed page.
(4) [Start Storing] key
This starts Scan to HDD.
(5) Display zoom key
Use this to set the zoom ratio of the displayed image.
Changes from the left in the order "Full Page", "Twice",
■■4 Times", "8 Times". The setting applies to all pages in
the file, not just the displayed page.
(6) [Function Rev.] key
Use this to check special mode settings and original
settings.
(7) [Reset] key
Use this key if you need to change settings after
checking an image or settings. You will return to the
setting screen.
•A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. Differs from the actual storage result.
• Depending on the size of the image, part of the image may be clipped off in the preview screen on the touch panel.
6-22
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
PERFORMING "Scan to HDD"
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
(4) (2) (1) ⑶
Switch to document filing mode and
select Scan to HDD settings.
Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
Touch the [Scan to HDD] tab.
If you do not wish to select settings, go to the step 3.
Select the original size, exposure,
resolution, compression ratio, color mode,
and special modes.
See l,MScan to HDD11 SCREEN" (page 6-18).
Touch the [File Information] key,
The settings are the same as for "File". See "FILE
INFORMATION11 (page 6-15).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
If the original is 2-sided, be sure to touch the [Original] key and then touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the [2-Sided
Tablet] key as appropriate for the original.
Press the [START] key.
Scanning begins.
For the procedure for placing the original, see step 4 of "SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"11 (page 6-11).
When Preview is enabled, the preview screen appears.
隊 Checking the image before storing it (Preview) (page 6-22)
A beep will sound to indicate that Scan to HDD is completed.
@To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key (®).
When Scan to HDD is performed without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically
assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Month-Day-Year_Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: HDD_ 0404201 0_1 1 2030AM)
Stored to: Main Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.
6-23
Contents
DOCUMENT FILING
USING STORED FILES
This section explains how to retrieve a file stored by document filing and print or transmit the file.
SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE
This section explains the basic procedure for retrieving and using a stored file. The screens and procedures differ
depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled.
See the sequence that applies to your situation.
For information on user authentication procedures, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" (page 1-17) in "1. BEFORE USING
THE MACHINE". For information on enabling user authentication and storing user names, see "User Control" (page
7-45) in "7. SYSTEM SETTINGS".
Files stored by document filing can also be retrieved and used from the Web pages. Click [Document Operation] and then
[Document Filing] in the Web page menu, and select the folder that contains the file you wish to use.
You can also show a preview of a stored file in the